http://sheekh-3arb.org/library/books/christian/en/AgrammarofNewTestamentGreek-James-Hope-Moulton

Page 1





GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK A



A GRAMMAR OF

NEW TESTAMENT GREEK BY

JAMES HOPE MOULTON •J'

M.A. (Cantab.), D.Lit. (Lond.) LATE FELLOW OF KING'S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE IN GREEK TESTAMENT IN THE VICTORIA UNIVERSITY OF MANCHESTER

GREENWOOD LECTUKEK TUTOR

IN

NEW TESTAMENT LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE WESLEVAN COLLEGE, DIDSBUKY

VOL.

I

PROLEGOMENA

SECOND EDITION WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS

Edinburgh

:

T.

&

T.

CLARK, I

906

38

George Street


HI N

\

PRINTED BV

MORRISON AND OIBB LIMITED, FOR T.

LONDON

:

&

T.

CLARK, EDINBURGH.

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT,

MEW YORK: CHARLES

AND

SCRIBNER's SONS.

CO. LIMITER,


IN

PIAM MEMORIAM

PATRIS LABORVM HERES DEDICO



PREFACE. The

work within six or seven a welcome opportunity appearance gives of making a good many corrections and additions, without Of the scope of these new altering in any way its general plan. features I shall have something to say later at this point I have to explain the title-page, from which certain words have The disappeared, not without great reluctance on my part. statement in the first edition that the book was " based on call for

months

a second edition of

tliis

mc

of its first

;

W. for

F. Moulton's edition of G. B. Winer's it

Grammar," claimed years had Testament students in this

connexion with a work which for

been in constant use among

New

tliirty-five

I should hardly have yielded this country and elsewhere. statement for excision, had not the suggestion come from one whose motives for retaining it are only less strong than my

own.

John Clark, whose kindness throughout the progress work it is a special pleasure to acknowledge on such

Sir

of this

me

that misapprehension was frewhose knowledge of tliis book quently occurring with those the Since to the title. was limited present volume is entirely follow the lines of its great in not and does new, any way the history of the confine to better it seems predecessor, I sole and take to the Preface, responsibility. undertaking have unhappily no means of divining what judgement either Winer or his editor would have passed on my doctrines and it is therefore, perhaps, due to Pietdt that I should drop what

an opportunity, advised

;

Pietdt mainly prompted. It is this

now

book

is

to translate

forty years since my father, to whose memory dedicated, was invited by Messrs T. & T. Clark

and

edit G. B. Winer's

with Bishop

Ellicott, afterwards

epoch-making Grammatik

The proposal originated Chairman of the New Testa-

des neidcstamcntlicJien SpracMdioms.


PREFACE.

viii

ment Eevision Company, and

the last survivor of a band of

workers who, while the following pages were in the press, became united once more. Dr Ellicott had been in correspondence on biblical matters with the young Assistant Tutor

and his Wesleyau Theological College, Eichmond estimate of his powers was shown first by the proposal as to Winer, and not long after by the Bishop's large use of my at the

;

selecting new members of the Eevision Mr Moulton took his place in the Jerusalem Company. Chamber in 1870, the youngest member of the Company; and in the same year his edition of Winer appeared. My brother's Life of our father (Isbister, 1899) gives an account It would not be seemly for me to enlarge of its reception. on its merits, and it would be as superfluous as unbecoming. father's advice in

will only allow myself the satisfaction of quoting a few words from one who may well be called the greatest New

I

Testament scholar

this

country has seen for generations.

giving his Cambridge students a short

list of

Dr Hort

p.

said

Winer's

{Romans and Ephcsians,

Grammar

New

of the

71):

In

reference books,

—

Testament, as translated

and enlarged by Dr Moulton, stands far above every other for this purpose. It does not need many minutes to

learn

the ready use of

admirable indices, of

the

passages and of subjects and when the book is consulted in this manner, its extremely useful contents :

become in most cases readily accessible. Dr Moulton's references to the notes of the best recent English commentaries are a helpful addition. In

1875

Dr Moulton was

his

transferred

Church with the heavy task

charged by from the foundation a great Public School.

to

Cambridge,

of building

up

What time a was for many years

Head Master could spare to scholarship almost entirely pledged to the New Testament and Apocrypha Eevision. Naturally it was not possible to do much to his

Grammar when The

the second edition was called for in 1877.

third edition, five years later,

the incorporation of

was even

in all essential points, just as it first

pen.

less

delayed for

new matter; and

the book stands now, came from its author's

Meanwhile the conviction was growing that the next


PREFACE. edition

must be a new book.

IX

Winer's own lust edition,

from

though antiquated, was growing decidedly old its jubilee is in fact celebrated by its English descendant of to-day. The very thoroughness of Winer's work had made useless for the modern student many a disquisition against grammatical heresies which no one would now wish to drag The literature to which Winer from the lumber-room. in inaccessible foreign periodicals. buried was appealed largely far

And

;

men

as the reputation of his editor grew,

asked for a

more compact, better arranged, more up-to-date volume, in which the ripest and most modern work should no longer be stowed away in compressed notes at the foot of the page. time and strength permitted, Dr Moulton would have consulted his most cherished wish by returning to the work of his youth and rewriting his Grammar as an independent

Had

book.

But

league, to

"

He

wisest Fate said No."

whom

he had given, at

chose his junior col-

first

as

his

pupil,

and

afterwards during years of University training and colleague-

and principles, ship in teaching, an insight into his methods and at least an eager enthusiasm for the subject to which ho But not a page of the new book had devoted his own life. was written when, in February 1898, "God's finger touched him, and he slept." Since heredity does not suffice to make a grammarian, and there are many roads by which a student of New Testa-

ment language may come

to his

task, I

must add

a word

to explain in what special directions this book may perhaps contribute to the understanding of the inexhaustible subject

with which

it

deals.

Till four

years ago,

my own

work scarcely touched the Greek Testament,

teaching

and comBut time.

classics

of my parative philology claiming the major part I have not felt that this time was ill spent as a prepara-

tion for the teaching of the

New

Testament.

The study

of

the Science of Language in general, and especially in the field of the languages which are nearest of kin to Greek, is well

view from which new light may adapted to provide points of Theologians, adepts in l)e shed on the words of Scripture. to a task criticism, experts in early Christian literature, bring an equipment to which I can make no pretence.

like this

But there are other

studies, never

more

active than now,


PREFACE.

X

which may help the biblical student in unexpected ways. The life-history of the Greek language has been investigated with minutest care, not only in the age of its glory, but also throughout the centuries of its supposed senility and decay. Its syntax has been illuminated by the com-

method

parative

;

and scholars have arisen who have been

willing to desert the masterpieces of literature and trace the humble development of the Hellenistic vernacular down to

descendant in the vulgar tongue of the present day.

its lineal

Biblical scholars cannot study everything, and there are some of them who liave never heard of Brugmann and Thumb. It may be some service to introduce them to the side-lights which comparative philology can provide. But I hope this book may bring to the exegete material more yet important for his purpose, whicli might not otherwise come his way. The immense stores of illustration which have been opened to us by the discoveries of Egyptian papyri, accessible to all on their lexical side in the brilliant Bible Studies of Deissmann, have not hitherto been systematically treated in their bearing on the grammar of New Testament Greek. The main purpose of these Prolegomena has accordingly been to provide a sketch of the language of the New Testament as it appears to those who have followed Deissmann into a new field of research. There are many matters of principle needdetailed and much new illustrative material discussion, ing from papyri and inscriptions, the presentation of which will, I In the present volume, hope, be found helpful and suggestive. therefore, I make no attempt at exhaustiveness, and often omit important subjects on which I have nothing new to say. By dint of much labour on the indices, I have tried to provide a partial remedy for the manifold inconveniences of form which the plan of these pages entails. My reviewers en-

courage me to hope that I have succeeded in one cherished ambition, that of writing a Grammar which can be read. The fascination of the Science of Language has possessed me

boyhood I read Max Miiller's incomparable have made it my aim to communicate what I could of this fascination before going on to dry statistics and formulae. In the second volume I shall try to present ever

since

Lectures

;

in

and

I

as concisely as I can the systematic facts of Hellenistic acci-


PREFACE. clence of

xi

and syntax, not

classical

in the form of an appendix to a cjrammar Greek, but giving the later language the inde-

pendent dignity which

it

deserves.

Both Winer

liimself

and

whom

a reviewer thinks I have unduly will bulk more largely than they can do neglected, naturally in chapters mainly intended to describe the most modern the other older scholars,

work.

But the mere

citation of authorities, in

a handlÂťook

designed for practical utility, must naturally be subordinated There will, I hope, to the succinct presentation of results. be small danger of my readers' overlooking my indebtedness to earlier workers, and least of all that to my primary teacher, whose labours it is my supreme object to preserve for the benefit of a

new

generation.

remains to perform the pleasant duty of acknowledging varied help which has contributed a large proportion of anyTt would be thing that may be true or useful in this book. It

endless were I to

Cambridge,

to

name

whom

teachers, colleagues, and friends in through twenty years' residence I con-

tracted debts of those manifold and intangible kinds which no can only be summarised in the most inadequate way :

Cantab who has lived as long within that home of exact science and sincere research, will fail to understand what I

Next to the Cambridge iniluences are those express. which come from teachers and friends whom I have never seen, and especially those great German scholars whose labours, too little assisted by those of other countries, have estal)lished

fail to

the Science of Language on the firm basis

In

fields

where British scholarship

is

it

occupies to-day.

more on a

level with

that of Germany, especially those of biblical exegesis and of Greek classical lore, I have also done my best to learn what

fellow-workers east of the Ehine contribute to the conmion It is to a German professor, working upon the stock. material of

which our own Drs Grenfell and Hunt have I owe the impulse whicli large a proportion, that

provided so My appreciation has produced the chief novelty of my worlc. of the memorable achievement of Dr Deissmann is expressed of the book; and I must only add here my in the grateful

body acknowledgement

has given me in my he has made his own.

of

tlie

many encouragements

He

lie

him in the field has now crowned them with the

eClbrts to glean after


PREFACE.

xii

all too

generous appreciations of

tributed

to

the

Theolofjische

my work

which he has con-

Literaturzeitung and the

Theo-

Another great name figures on most of logische Bundscliau. The services that Professor Blass the pages of this book. has rendered to

New

Testament study are already almost equal I have to classical scholarship.

he has rendered

to those

frequently obliged to record a difference of opinion, " though never without the inward voice whispering imiyar But the freshness of view which this congressus Achilli."

been

great Hellenist brings to the subject makes him almost as and helpful when he fails to convince as when he succeeds ;

have learned more and more from him, the more earnestly The name of another brilliant I have studied for myself. writer on New Testament grammar will figure more constantly in my second volume than my plan allows it to do in this. Professor Schmiedel has unfortunately been called I

away from grammar by the h'ne Jcrahmcel, to perform a postThe unmortem examination upon the Gospel history. But rivalled ability of his dissection is beyond question. as there

is

reason to believe that the Gospels

may

still

be

studied for some time to come, we will venture to express an earnest hope that the learned and painstaking grammarian

may

among the interpreters, and conmonumental work which keeps Winer's memory

soon resume his place

clude the

green in the country of his birth. The mention of the books which have been most fre-

quently used, recalls the need of one or two explanations before closing this

Preface.

The text which

is

assumed

The throughout is naturally that of Westcott and Hort. principles on whicli it is based, and the minute accuracy with which they are followed out, seem to allow no alternative to a grammatical worker, even if the B type of text were held But in to be only the result of second century revision. frequently quoting other readings, and especially those which belong to what

Dr Kenyon

conveniently calls the S-text, I need not

follow very readily the precedent of Blass. say that Mr Geden's Concordance has been I

use. I have not felt " of higher criticism."

the assumption of the

"

l)Ound to enter

much

in

continual

into questions

In the case of the Synoptic Gospels, " has suggested two-source hypothesis


PREFACE, a

number

xiii

Grammar helps grammatical points of interest. which bind together the writint'.s of Luke, and those of Paul (though the Pastorals often need while the Johanniue Gospel and Epistles separate treatment) Whether the similarly form a single grammatical entity. to

of

rivet closer the links

;

remaining Books add seven or nine to the tale of separate for the Apocalypse, 1 Peter authors, does not concern us here and 2 Peter must be treated individually as much as Hebrews, ;

whether the traditional authorship be accepted or rejected. Last come the specific acknowledgements of most generous and welcome help received directly in the preparation of this volume.

count

myself fortunate indeed in that three rank in different lines of study have read my proofs through, and helped me with invaluable It is only due to them that I encouragement and advice. I

scholars of the

first

should claim the sole responsibility for errors whicli I may have failed to escape, in spite of their watchfulness on my behalf.

Two

of

taken counsel for

them are

old friends with

whom

I

have

Dr

G. G. Findlay has gone over my work with minute care, and has saved me from many a loose and ambiguous statement, besides giving me the

many

years.

profound and accurate exegesis, which students works on St Paul's Epistles know well. Dr Eendel Harris has brought me fresh lights from other points of view and I have been particularly glad of criticism from a fruit of his of his

;

specialist in

Syriac,

who speaks with

which take a prominent place in

name

is

that of Professor Albert

my

authority on matters

argument.

Thumb,

of

The

Marburg.

third

The

kindness of this great scholar, in examining so carefully the work of one who is still ayvoovfiâ‚Źpo<; tu> nrpoaajTru), cannot be adequately acknowledged here. Nearly every page of my book owes its debt either to his writings or to the criticisms At least with which he has favoured me. and suQ-crestions CO twice he has called my attention to important articles in and in my illustrations English which I had overlooked from Modern Greek I have felt myself able to venture often into fields which might have been full of pitfalls, had I not ;

been secure in his expert guidance. Einally, in the necessary had welcome aid at home. have I of index-making drudgery of index the quotations, my mother Scripture drawing up

By


PREFACE.

XIV

me

has done for

My

ago.

wliat she did for

brother, the Rev.

W.

my father nearly forty years Fiddiau Moiilton, M.A., lias

life to make me the Greek who have helped me so freely, and

spared time from a busy pastor's index.

To

to

others whose encouragement and counsel has been

many

all

these

—

I would mention especially my Manchester colleagues, Dr E. W. Moss and Professor A. S. Peake I tender my heartfelt thanks.

a constant stimulus

The new features

—

of

this edition are necessarily confined

The Additional Notes are suggested

within narrow range.

by my own reading or by suggestions from various reviewers and correspondents, whose kindness I gratefully acknowledge. A new lecture by Professor Thumb, and reviews by such scholars as Dr Marcus Dods, Dr H. A. A. Kennedy, and Dr Souter, have naturally provided more material than I can at 'present use. My special thanks are due to Mr H. Scott, of Oxton, Birkenhead, who went over the index of texts and two or three complicated numerical computations in the body of the book, and sent me unsolicited some corrections and additions, for which the reader will add his gratitude to mine. As far as was possible, the numerous additions to the Indices have been worked in at their place but some pages of Addenda have been necessary, which will not, I hope, ;

seriously inconvenience the reader.

my

reviewers makes

it

The unbroken kindness

me

needless for

of

to reply to criticisms

I am tempted to enlarge upon one or two remarks in the learned and helpful Athenaeum review, but will confine myself " to a comment on the " awkward results which the writer

here.

anticipates from the evidence of the papyri as set forth in my " work. Prolegomena, he says, really prove that there can

My

be no grammar of New Testament Greek, and that the grammar of the Greek in the New Testament is one and the same with the grammar of the common Greek of the I agree papyri." with everything except the " awkwardness " of this result for me. To call this book a Grammar of the Common '

'

'

'

Greek, and enlarge it by including phenomena which do not happen to be represented in the New Testament, would But the practical advantages of certainly be more scientific. attention to what concerns the grammatical interconfining pretation uf a

Book

of

unique importance, written in a language


XV

rilEFACE.

which has ahsoUitoly no otlier literature worthy of the name, need hardly be laboured here, and this furevvurd is already lono;

enough.

of this

I

am

as conscious as ever of the shortcomings

book when placed

in the

succession of one which has

many associations of learning and industry, of caution But I hope that its many deficiencies flawless accuracy.

so

and

may

from leading its readers nearer to the meaning Tiie of the great literature which it strives to interpret. new tool is certain not to be all its maker fondly wished it but from a vein so rich in treasure even the poorest to be

not prevent

it

;

instrument can hardly

fail to

bring out nuggets of pure gold. J.

DiDSBURY College, Aug.

13, 1906.

H. M.


COI^TEN^TS.

FA OK I.

II.

General Characteristics

1

History of the "Common" Greek

.... .... ....

III.

Notes on the Accidence

IV.

Syntax

:

The Noun

.

V. Adjectives, Pronouns, Prepositions VI.

The Verb

VII.

The Verb

VIII.

The Verb

IX.

The

III.

57 77

108

:

Voice

152

:

The Moods

Infinitive and Participle

.

Additional Notes to the Second Edition

II.

42

Tenses and Modes of Action

:

Additional Notes

I.

22

Index to Quotations

.

164

202

233 242

250

Index op Greek Words and Forms

266

Index of Subjects

270

Addenda

282

to Indices

xvi


ABBREVIATIONS.

names of Books of Scripture will explain themand Apocrypha the names of the Books follow the English RV (except Ca for Song of Songs), as also do the numbers for chapter and verse the LXX numbering, where it differs, is added widiiu Abbreviations In the

selves.

for tlie

OT :

brackets.

Centuries are denoted iii/B.c, is given. Where the date may

date

is ii/i B.C., it

except when an exact within wider limits, the notation

ii/A.D., etc., fall

Where papyri

iv/v a.d., etc.

or inscriptions are not dated,

generally be taken that no date is given by the editor. The abbreviations for papyri and inscriptions are given in Index

may

and

I (c)

below, with the full titles of the collections quoted. The ordinary abbreviations for MSS, Versions, and patristic writers are used in textual notes. (d),

pp. 251

ft",

hoped, need no explanation perhaps It should be oliserved that references are to pages, unless otherwise stated papyri and inscripIn all these documents the usual tions are generally cited by number. notation is followed, and the original spelling preserved.

Other abbreviations

MGr

for

will, it is

:

Modern Greek should be mentioned.

:

—see Index

Abbott .4

I (e)

iii.

JP=American Journal

1880 fF. Archiv see Index I (c). Audollent see Index I

BGH—see Index

I

of Philology, ed. B. L. Gildersleeve, Baltimore

(c).

(c).

Blass = Grammar of

NT Greek, by F. Blass. Second English edition, (This diff^ers from ed.^ only Thackeray, London 1905. by the addition of pp. 306-333. Occasional reference is made to the second German edition, GiJttingen 1902.) Sometimes the reference the context is to notes in Blass's Acta AiMstolorum ((iuttingen 1895) tr.

H. St

J.

:

make it clear. Burton ilfr=New Testament Moods and will

Tenses, by E. D. Barton. Second edition, Edinburgh 1894. Buttmann = Grammar of New Testament Greek, by A. Buttmann. Andover 1876. English edition by J. H. Thayer, 1892 ff. 7?Z=Byzantinische Zeitschrift, ed. K. Krumbacher, Leipzig

Gauer

— see Index

C'(Tjr=

h

I (t).

Cambridge Greek Testament

for Schools xvu

and

Colleges.


ABBREVIATIONS.

xviii CJ2 = Classical

Review (London 1887

Especially reference

ft'.).

made

is

forms and syntactical examples from the papyri, in CR xv. 31-38 and 434-442 (Feb. and Dec. 1901), and xviii. 106-112 and 151-1.55 (March and April 1904— to be continued). to the writer's collection of

Dalman tr.

Worils = T\\Q

Words

of Jesus,

by G. Dalmau.

English edition,

D. M. Kay, Edinburgh 1902.

Dalman

(rra?7i?ji.

= Grammatik

des jiidisch-palastinischen Aramiiisch,

G. Dalman, Leipzig 1894. 2)5= Dictionary of the Bible, edited by J. Hastings. 1898-1904.

5 vols.,

by

Edinburgh

Deissmann £6'= Bible Studies, hj G. A. Deissmann. English edition, mc\\x(}i\\\g Bihelstiulien and Neue Biheldudien, tr. A. Grieve, Edinburgh 1901.

Deissmann In

Chrisfo

= T>ie neutestamentliche

Formel " in Christo

.Jesu,"

*

by G. A. Deissmann, Marbui'g 1892. Delbrilck Grundr. = Grundvisis der vergleichenden

Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen, by K. Brugmann and B. Delbriick Dritter Band, Vergleichende Syntax, by Delbriick, Strassburg 18931900. (References to Brugmann's part, on phonology and morphology, are given to his own abridgement, Kiirze vergleichende Orauunutik, 1904, which has also an abridged Comparative Syntax.) :

Dieterich

= Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der griechischen von der hellenistischen Zeit bis zum 10. Jahrh. n. Chr., by

[/"HicTs.

Sjjrache,

K. Dieterich, Leipzig 1898.

DLZ= Deutsche

Literaturzeitung, Leipzig.

£J5 = Encyclopaedia Biblica, edited by T. K. Cheyne and J. S. Black. 4 vols., London 1899-1903. £(tT= Expositor's Greek Testament, edited by W. Robertson Nicoll. 4 vols. (vol. iv. not jet published), London 1897-1903. 49 vols., London Exj) i?= Expositor's Bible, edited by W. R. Nicoll. 1887-1898.

Expos = The Expositor, edited by W. R. and page. London 1875 ff.

Nicoll.

Cited by series, volume,

T= The Expository Times, edited by J. Hastings. Edinburgh 1889 = Studies in Honor of Professor Gildersleeve, Baltimore. Gildersleeve *%?(i. = Syntax of Classical Greek, by B. L. Gildersleeve and

Exp

ff.

Gildersleeve iSiwdies

C.

W.

Part i. New York 1900. Short Manual of Comparative Philology for classical

E. Miller.

Giles ilffmMaZ-

=A

Second edition, London 1901. Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb, by W. W. Goodwin. Third edition, London 1889. Goodwin Greek Gram. = A Greek Grammar, by W. W. Goodwin. London students,

Goodwin

by

P. Giles.

MT= Syntax

of the

1894.

Grimm-Thayer = Grimm's

AYilke's Glavis

" enlarged by J. H. Thayer, as Testament." Edinburgh 1886.

A

Hatzidakis = Einleitung in die Hatzidakis. Leipzig 1892.

Novi Tesfamenti, translated and

Greek-English Lexicon of the

New

neugriechische Grammatik, by G. N,


ABBREVIATIONS. Hawkins HS^Hovtc

HR = A Concordance

xix

Oxford 1890. Synoplica', hy J. C. Hawkins. to the Septuagint, by E. JIalcIi and II. A. Itcditatli,

Oxford 1897.

IMA— see Index Imlo<j.

i'^orsc/i,.

I

(c).

= Indogermani.sclie

Forschungen, edited by K. I'riigmanii Strassburg 1892 ff. Historical Greek Grammar, l)y A. N. Jannari.s. London

and W. Streitberg. Jannaris

HG=A

1897.

JBL = J onrnul of Biblical JHS— see Index I (r). J'TS= Journal

Literature.

of Theological Studies. Introduction to tlie

=

Boston 1881

ff.

London 1900 ff.

New

Testament, by A. Jiilicher. Ward, London 1904. Kiilker = Qua3stiones de elocutione Polybiana, by F. Kaelker. In Leipziger

Jiilicher

JHi)-0(:Z.

English edition,

Studien

tr.

by

J. P.

1880.

III. ii.,

Kiihner-Gerth = Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sjirache, by R. Kiihner. Third edition, FAiiiiiuDlar- und Formenlehre, by F. Blass. 2 vols., Hannover 1890-2. Hatzhhre, by

Kiihner''', or Kiihner-Blass,

B. Gerth.

2 vols., 1898, 1904.

iirZ=Kuhn's Zeitschrift Giitersloh 1852

fiir

vergleichende Sprachforschung.

Berlin and

ff.

LS = A Greek-English

Lexicon, by

II.

G. Liddell and R. Scott.

Eighth

Oxford 1901.

edition,

= Grammatik der attischen Inschriften, by K. Meisterhaus. Third edition by E. Schwyzer (see p. 29 n.), Berlin 1900. = Concordance to the Greek Testament, by W. F. Moulton and A. S. Geden. Edinburgh 1897. = Commentary on the Gospel of St John, by W. Milligau Milligan-]\Ioulton and W. F. Moulton. Edinburgh 1898. see Index I {d). Mithraslit. Second edition, Monro 170 = Homeric Grammar, b}- D. B. Monro. Meisterhans

^5

MG

Oxfor.1 1891.

Nachmanson = Laute und Formen der Magnetischen

Inschriften,

b_v

E.

Nachmanson, LTppsala 1903.

Ramsay Paul^Vawl the Traveller and Roman Third edition, London 1897. ^J53=Herzog-Hauck

Realencydo'ptkUe.

Citizen,

(In progress.)

REG'r = 'R.evne des Etudes grecques. Paris 1888 tf. Reinhold = De Grtccitate Patrum, by H. Reinhold. i2fcikf=Rheini&ches

Museum.

Bonn 1»27

Leipzig.

Halle 1898.

ff.

Riddell = A Digest of Platonic Idioms, by the Ajiology, Oxford 18C7).

Rutherford

by W. M. Ramsay.

J.

Riddell (in his edition of

NP = The New Ph rynichus, by W. G. Rutherford, London

Schanz£e^<r.

= Beitragezurhistorischen

1

881

.

Syntax der griechischen Sprache,

edited by M. Schanz. Wiirtzburg 1882 Schmid Attic. = 1)61' Atticismus in seinen Hauptvertretern von Dionysius von Halikarnass bis auf den zweiten Philostratus, by W\ Schmid. 4 vols, and Register, Stuttgart 1887-1897. fl".


XX

ABBEEVIATIONS.

Schmidt

= De Flavii Joseplii elocutione, by W. Schmidt, Leipzig 1893. = Gr0eca Latina, by W. Schulze, Gottingen 1901. = Graminatik der pergamenischeu Iiischrif'ten, Ijy E. Pe?-^.

J'os.

Schulze Gr.

Schwyzer

Zrt<.

Schweizer

SH = The

(see p.

29

n.),

Berlin 1898.

Eomans, by W. Sanday and A. C. Headlam. Fifth edition, Edinburgh 1902. T/iI(Z= Theologische Literaturzeitung, edited by A. Harnack and E. Epistle to the

Schiirer, Leipzig 1876 ff. Die griechische Hellen.

=

Thumb

Sprache im Zeitalter des Hellenismus,

hy A. Thnmb, Strassburg 1901.

i7««c?6. = Handbuch der neugriechischen Volkssprache, by A. Thumb, Strassburg 1895.

Thumb

Ti = Novum Testamentum Greece, b_v C. Tischendorf. Editio octava critica maior. 2 vols., Leipzig 1869-72. Also vol. iii, Ijy R.

C

Gregory, containing Prolegomena, 1894. Viereck SG see Index I (c).

le grec du Nouveau Testament, by J. Viteau. Vol. i, vol. ii, Sujet, Syntaxe des Propositions, Paris 1893

Viteau=: Etude sur

Le Verbe

:

;

ComiDlement et Attribut, 1896. Volker= Syntax der griechischen Papyri. Miinster

i.

W.

Votaw = The Use

L Der

by F. Vdlker,

Artikel,

1903. of the Infinitive in Bil)lical Greek,

Chicago 1896. Wellh. = Einleitung in die drei ersteu Evangelien, by

C.

by J.

W. Votaw.

Wellhausen.

Berlin 1905.

WH = The New Testament F. J. A. Hort.

WH

WM

Vol.

i.

in the Original Greek,

Text

(also ed.

minor)

by B. F. Westcott and ;

vol.

ii,

Introduction.

Cambridge and London 1881. ^y^. = Appendix to WH, in vol. ii, containing Notes on Select Readings and on Orthography, etc. = A Treatise on the Grammar of New Testament Greek, regarded as a sure basis for New Testament Exegesis, by G. B. Winer. Trans lated from the German, with large additions and full indices, by W. F. Moulton. Third edition, Edinburgh 1882.

WS = G.

B. Winer's

Grammatik des neutestamentlichen

Eighth edition, newly edited by P.

W.

Sjirachidioms.

Schmiedel, Gottmgen 1894

ff.

(In progress.)

^iVT?F= Zeitschrift E. Preuscheu.

fiir

die neutestamentliche Wissenschaft, edited by

Giessen

1900f;'.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

PROLEGOMENA. CHAPTER

I.

General Characteristics.

New

Lights.

As

recently as 1895, in the opening chapter

of

a

beginner's

manual

of

New

Testament

Greek, the present writer defined the language as "Hebraic In this definition Greek, colloquial Greek, and late Greek." of the were expressed features dialect the characteristic formula which was not a to questioned then by according It was entirely any of the leading writers on the subject. would who W. F. Dr Moulton, undoubtedly at approved by that time have followed these familiar lines, had he been able

to achieve his long cherished purpose of rewriting his English Winer as an independent work. It is not without imperative reason that, in this first instalment of a work in which father's collaborator, I have been comto be I

hoped

my

the position he took, in view of pelled seriously to modify fresh evidence which came too late for him to examine. " coinmon In the second edition of the manual referred to,^ " is substituted for the first element in the definition. Greek The disappearance of that word "Hebraic" from its prominent place in our delineation of NT language marks a less than rechange in our conceptions of the subject nothing It in This is not a revolution theory alone. volutionary.

1

Introduction to the Study of Neic Testament Greek, witli a First Reader.

Second Edition, 1904 I

(0.

H. Kelly).


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

2

It demands large touches exegesis at inuumerable points. modifications in our very latest grammars, and an overhauling To write a new of our best and most trusted commentaries.

so soon after the appearance of fresh light which transforms in very important respects our whole point of But it must not view, may seem a premature undertaking.

Grammar,

that

be supposed

we

are

concerned with a revolutionary

our science to theory which needs time for readjusting The development of the Greek language, in conditions. Plato and Demosthenes from our period which separates has been patiently studied for a generation, and days,

new the

own the

have been thoroughly estabWhat has happened to our own particular study is lished. the larger science which only the discovery of its unity with

main

lines of a scientific history

has been maturing steadily

was long supposed

all

to lie in a

"

the time.

backwater

;

Biblical

it

Greek

"

now been

has

full stream of progress. fresh material for illustrating our subject, and certain methodology for the use of material which

It follows that

brought out into the

we have now a more

we had

already at hand.

The in

"(SSk^"^

isolated position of the

the LXX and the NT has

Greek found

been the problem

dividing grammatical students of

this

liter-

That the Greek Scriptures, and ature for generations past. of the small body writings which in language go with them, were written in the Koivr], the

"

common "

or

"

Hellen-

"

Greek ^ that superseded the dialects of the classical But it was most obviously period, was well enough known. It could not different from the literary Kotvr) of the period. be adequately paralleled from Plutarch or Arrian, and the Jewish writers Philo and Josephus ^ were no more helpful

istic

than their

"

"

profane

contemporaries.

Naturally the pecu-

Greek came to be explained from its own conditions. The LXX was in " translation Greek," its syntax determined perpetually by that of the original Hebrew. Much the same was true of large parts of the NT, where liarities of Biblical

^

I shall

use the terms Hellenistic, Hellenist, and Hellenism throughout for

the Greek of the later period, which had become coexteusive with Western civilisation. 2

See below,

p.

233.


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.

3

translation had taken place from an But original Aramaic. even where this was not the case, it was argued, tlie writers used Greek as foreigners, Aramaic thought underlying Greek Moreover, they were so familiar with tlie LXX expression.

that

its

idiosyncrasies

passed

largely into their

own

style,

which accordingly was charged with Semitisms from two

Hence

tinct sources.

this

"

Judaic

"

^ language of the Holy Ghost," and never profaned by common

against which the science objection. classical

The Greek

of

"

"

or

Biblical

dis-

"

Greek, this found in the sacred writings It

use.

was a phenomenon

language could raise no a priori

Purist, who insisted on finding parallels in literature for everything in the Greek NT,

found his task impossible without straining language to the His antagonist the Hebraist went absurdly breaking-point. Semitic influence where none was really But when a grammarian of balanced judgement Winer came to sum up the bygone controversy, he

far in recognising

operative. like G. B.

was found admitting enough Semitisms to make the Biblical Greek essentially an isolated language still. It is just this isolation which the new ^"^^'i速^^^ comes in to destroy." The Greek Deissmzmn '

papyri of Egypt are in themselves nothing but their importance for the historical study of the language did not begin to be realised until, within the last novel

;

so, the explorers began to enrich us with an output treasure which has been perpetually fruitful in surprises.

decade or of

The attention

of the classical

world has been busy with the

and the new poets Bacchylides and while Herodas, theologians everywhere have eagerly dis" But even these last must cussed new Sayings of Jesus." in the to spoil which has been gathered importance yield from the wills, official reports, private letters, petitions, accounts, and other trivial survivals from the rubbish-heaps of antiquity.^ They were studied by a young investigator of lost treatise of Aristotle

genius, at that time known only by one small treatise on the Pauline formula ev Xpiarw, which to those who read it now shows abundantly the powers that were to achieve such

1

So Crenier, Bihlico-Theological Lexicon of

ing Rothe.

(Cited by

Thumb,

NT

Hellenisvius 181.)

Greek, p. iv (E.T.), follow["''See p. 242.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

4

Deisssplendid pioneer work within three or four years. mann's Bihelstiulien appeared in 1895, his Neuc Bihelstudien ^ in 1 8 9 7.

It is needless to describe

how

these lexical researches

and the later inscriptions proved that hundreds " technical words, of words, hitherto assumed to be Biblical," as it were, called into existence or minted afresh by the were in reality normal firstlanguage of Jewish religion, excluded from literature by the nice Greek, century spoken Professor Deissmann dealt but canons of Atticising taste. in the papyri

—

—

with the grammatical features of this newly-discovered but no one charged with the duty of editing a Grammar of NT Greek could read his work without seeing that a briefly

Greek

;

systematic grammatical study in this field was the indisIn that conviction the pensable equipment for such a task. present writer set himself to the study of the collections which have poured with bewildering rapidity from the busy

workshops

of

Oxford

and

Berlin,

and

others,

only,

less

The lexical gleanings after Deissmann which conspicuous. these researches have produced, almost entirely in documents published since his books were written, have enabled me to confirm his conclusions from independent investigation.^ large part of my grammatical material is collected in a

A

series of papers in the Classical Bevietv (see p. xviii.), to which I shall frequently have to make reference in the ensuing

pages as supplying in detail the evidence for the results here to be described.

The new linguistic facts now in evidence show with startling clearness that we have Greek at last before us the language in which the The papyri exhibit in their apostles and evangelists wrote. writers a variety of literary education even wider than that observable in the NT, and we can match each sacred author

with documents that in respect of Greek stand on about the same plane. The conclusion is that " Biblical " Greek, except where it is translation Greek, was simply the vernacular of daily ^

2

life.^

Men who

aspired to literary fame wrote in an

See p. xviii. above.

See Expositor for April 1901 and February anrl December 1903. ^ Cf Wellhausen (Einl. 9): "In the Gospels, spoken Greek, and indeed Greek spoken among the lower classes, makes its entrance into literature."


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.

a would-be revival of the langungc of Athens

artificial dialect,

in her prime, mucli

profess

5

as educated

NT

The

to do.

writers

Greeks of tlie present day had little idea tliat they

were writing

literature. The Holy Ghost spoke absolutely the language of the people, as we might surely have He would. The of Him were expected writings inspired those

in

AVhich he

may

read that binds the sheaf, house, or digs the grave,

Or builds tho

And

those wikl eyes that watch

In roarings round the coral

tlie

wave

reef.

The very grammar and dictionary cry out against men who would allow the Scriptures to appear in any other form than that .

"

uuderstauded

__

of the people."

There

.

one very striking fact brought out of papyri and inscriptions which

is

^

It

Language.

^^ ^^® study

was

preserve for us the Hellenistic vernacular. without serious dialectic differences,

a

language

The history of tliis pronunciation. Here it lingua franca must be traced in a later chapter. suffices to point out that in the first centuries of our era

except presumably in

Greek covered a

far larger proportion of the civilised world

than even English does to-day." Juvenal (iii. 60 f.)

Non possum Graecam Urbem joined with the Greek and the Greek Epistle that a

"

The well-knuwn heroics

of

ferre, Quirites,

,

Ek

to the

man need have known

'Eavrov

"

of tlie

Eoman Emperor

Romans, serve as obvious evidence little

Latin to live in

Eome

itself.^

was not Italy but Africa that first called for a Latin Bible.^ That the Greek then current in almost every part of the Empire was virtually imiform is at first a startling fact, and to no one so startling as to a student of the science of language. It

Dialectic differentiation

is

the root principle of that science

^ ;

Cf A. S. Wilkins, Roman Edvcalion 19 SIX Hi fF. So at least most critics believe. Dr Sauday, however, j)refer.s Antiocli, which suits our point equally well. Rome is less likely. See Dr Kennedy in »

;

^

Hastings'

BD

iii.

54.

See, for instance, the writer's I'wo Lectures on the Science of Langna'je, [» See p. 242. pp. 21-23. •*


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

6

and when wc know how actively it works within the narrow limits of Great Britain, it seems strange that it should apparently be suspended in the vast area covered by Hellenistic shall return to this difficulty later (pp. 19-39): Greek. for the present we must be content with the fact that any

We

exist is mostly beyond the range Inscriptions, distributed knowledge to detect. over the whole area, and dated with precision enough to trace the slow development of the vernacular as it advanced towards Mediieval and Modern Greek, present us with a grammar which only lacks homogeneity according As we have seen, the as their authors varied in culture. papyri of Upper Egypt tally in their grammar with the language seen in the NT, as well as with inscriptions like No one can fail to those of Pergamum and Magnesia. see how immeasurably important these conditions were for The historian marks the fact the growth of Christianity. dialect variation that did of our present

that the Gospel began its career of conquest at the one period in the world's annals when civilisation was concen-

under a single ruler. The grammarian adds that was the only period when a single language was understood throughout the countries which counted for the history The historian and the grammarian must of of that Empire. " course refrain from talking about Providence." They would " " an apologetic bias or " an edifying tone," be suspected of and that is necessarily fatal to any reputation for scientific attainment. We will only remark that some old-fashioned trated this

people are disposed to see in these facts a way as instructive as the Gift of Tongues.

cyi/fxelov

in

its

It is needless to observe that except in the Greek world, properly so called, Greek did not hold a monopoly. Egypt throughout the long of the Greek is period very strongly bilingual, the papyri mixture of Greek and native names in the same family, and

the prevalence of double nomenclature, often making it diffian individual.^ bilingual country

cult to tell the race of ^

A

It should lie noted tliat in the papyri we have not to do only witli In Par P 48 (158 B.C.) tlierc is a letter addressed to an Egyptians and Greeks. Aral) by two of liis hrothers. The editor, M. Brunet de Presle, remarks as follows on this :^" It is worth our while to notice the rapid diffusion of Greek,


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.

7

is vividly presented to us in the narrative of Ac 1 4, where the apostles preach in (Ireek and are imahlc to understand the excited populace when they relapse into Lycaonian. What the local Greek was like, we may gauge from such specimens as the touching Christian epitapli published by Mr Cronin in

Exp T

" httle 430), and dated if at all later than We need not the evidence develop iii/A.D." for other countries it is more to the point if we look at the

JHS, 1902,

p.

369

(see

x\y.

:

conditions of a

modern

bilingual country, such as we have in the country of Wales. Any popular English politician or preacher, visiting a place in the heart of the Princi-

home

at

pality, could be sure of an audience, even if it he would speak in English. If he did, they

were assumed that would understand

But should he unexpectedly address them in Welsh, we " " be and a may very sure they would be the more quiet speaker anxious to conciliate a hostile meeting would gain a him.

;

great initial advantage if he could surprise them with the sound of their native tongue.^ Now this is exactly what

happened when Paul addressed the Jerusalem mob from the stairs of Antonia. They took for granted he would speak " in a great Greek, and yet they made Xp " silence when he faced them with the gesture which indicated a wish to address them. Schiirer nods, for in when he calls Paxil's Aramaic once, speech as a witness of .

1

It does not prove even the he which knowledge gives as the alternative " the lower classes, if by inadequate know-

the people's ignorance of Greek." "

"

inadequate for

possibility

after Alexander's conquest, anions a mass of people who in all other respects The jealously preserved their national characteristics under foi'cign masters. here Arabs, who do not appear papyri show us Egyptians, Persians, Jews, and We must not be too to the upper classes, using the Greek lan'j;uagc. to

belong Nevertheless tlie letter wjiich exacting towards them iu the matter of style. follows is almost irreproachable in syntax and orthography, wliieh does not in always happen even with men of Greek birth." If these remarks, published had been followed up as they deserved, Deissmann wouhl have come 1865, too late.

how little attention was aroused by tlie great collections and London, until the recent flood of discovery set in. 1 These words were written before I had read Dr T. K. Abbott's able, but On ]i. 164 he gives an not always conclusive, article in his volume of Essays. incident from bilingual Ireland exactly piirallcl witli thai iuingined aliovo. Prof. T. H. Williams tells me he has often heard Welsh teachers illustrating the (On Lystra, see p. 233.) narrative of Ac 21'*" 22^ in the same way. It

is

strange

of papyri at I'aris

2

Jexoish Peoi^le,

ii.

i.

48 (^Âť

ii.

63).


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

8

" would have been unable to ledge is implied that the crowd follow a Greek speech. They thought and spoke among themselves, like the Welsh, exclusively in their native tongue but we may well doubt if there were many of them who could ;

not understand the world-language, or even speak in it when We have in fact a state of things essentially the necessary.^ But the imperfect knowledge of Greek same as in Lystra.

which may be assumed

for

the masses in Jerusalem

and

Lystra is decidedly less probable for Galilee and Hellenist Jews, ignorant of Aramaic, would be found there as and the proportion of foreigners would be in Jerusalem much larger. That Jesus Himself and the Apostles regularly Peraea.

;

beyond question, but that Greek was also There is not the at command is almost equally certain. slightest presumption against the use of Greek in writings purporting to emanate from the circle of the first believers.^ They would write as men who had used the language from used Aramaic

is

boyhood, not as foreigners painfully expressing themselves Their Greek would differ in an imperfectly known idiom. in

according to their education, like that of the But it does among the Egyptian papyri.

quality

private

letters

not appear that any of them used Greek as we may sometimes find cultured foreigners using English, obviously transEven lating out of their own language as they go along. the ^

Greek

of the

The evidence

Apocalypse

itself

does not seem to owe any

Greek in Palestine is very fully stated by Zahn Of also Jiilicher in EB ii. 2007 ff. I am glad " Hellenism in to find my view corroborated by Mahaffy, in his lectures on Alexander's Empire" see pp. 130 f., where he says, " Though we may believe that in Galilee and among his intimates our Lord spoke Aramaic, and though we know that some of his last words upon the cross were in that language, yet his public teaching, his discussions with the Pharisees, his talk with Pontius Pilate, were certainly carried on in Greek." Professor Mahaffy is no specialist on Gospel criticism any more, I might add, than on Buildliism, and it would be hard to persuade modern scholars that Christ's ^*?<&//c (p. 100), But though he goes too far, he takes the teaching was mainly in Greek. direction in which every student of Hellenism is driven. I wish he had developed his thesis we could have spared for this purpose many space-filling allusions to modern politics, on which the Professor is no wiser than the rest of us. Dr T. K. Abbott {Essays 170) jtoints out that Justin Martyr, brought up near Sichem early in ii/A.D., depends entirely on the LXX a circumstance which is ignored by Mgr Barnes in his attempt to make a different use of for the use of

in his Einl. in das

NT,

ch.

ii.

:

:

Justin

{jrS

vi.

369).

(See further below, p. 233.)


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS. .

9

of its blunders to " ircbiaisin."

„,

Apocalypse.

,

uncertain use ot cases

is

The author's .

.,

obvious to the most

casual reader.

In any other writer we might be tempted to time over ra? Xv^fia^ in V^, where twv \v)(vio)v is spend needed for him it is enough to say that the clearly :

neighbouring

01/9

may have produced

him perpetually

find

indifferent to

the aberration.

educated papyri give us plentiful jiarallels Semitism cannot be suspected.^ After all,

Shakspere

of ^

We

But the less from a field where

concord.

we do not suspect " because he between foreign upbringing says Neither he nor his unconscious imitators in

you and I." modern times would say " between I and you," any more than the author of the Apocalypse would have said airh /MapTVi 6 TTio-To? (1^): it is only that his grammatical sense is satisfied when the governing word has afTected the case of

one

object.^

We

shall find

that other peculiarities of the

Greek are on the same

footing. Apart from places where he may be definitely translating a Semitic document, there is no reason to believe that his grammar would have been materially different had he been a native of Oxyrliynchus, Close to assuming the extent of Greek education the same.'*

writer's

^

my

See

exx. of jiom. in apposition to noun in another case, and of f^encliT Cf also below, p. 60. ('AttA 6 wv, V, is of course Note the same thing in the 5-text of 2 Th 1®, )

neglected, in CH xviii. 151. an intentional tour de force. 'Irjaov

.

.

.

didovs

(D*FG and

^

sonic Latin authorities).

Antonio's letter). Mercliant of Venice, in. ii. (end ^ "Drive far away the There are parallels to this in liorrect English. " disastrous Keres, they who destroy (Harrison, Prolegomena to the Study of p. 168) would not be mended by substituting Ihcm. The grammatical peculiarities of the book are conveidently summarised for a full account sec the inin a few lines by Jiilicher, Introd. to NT, p. 273 It may be well to troduction to Bousset's Commentary, in the Meyer series. observe, a propos of the curious Greek of Eev, that grammar here nnist play a It will not do to appeal to grammar to prove that part in literary criticism. the author is a Jew as far as that goes, he might just as well liave been a farmer of the Fayiim. Thought and material must exclusively determine that But as that point is hardly doubtful, we pass on to a more iuii)ortant question.

Greek Religion, *

:

:

from the imperfect Greek culture of this book. If its date was 95 A.D, the author cannot have written the fourth Gospel only a short time after. Either, therefore, we must take the earlier date foi' Rev, which would allow the Apostle to improve his Greek by constant use in a city lilvc Eiihesus where his Aramaic would be useless ; or we must suppose that someone (say, the author of Jn 21--') mended his grammar for him throughout the Gospel. inference


A GRAMxAIAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

10

the other end of the scale comes the learned Eabbi of Tarsus. " Hebrew, the son of Hebrews," he calls

A

himself (Phil 3^), and Zahn is no doubt right in inferring that he always claimed Aramaic

^Hebrews^'

mother tongue. But he had probably used G-reek from childhood with entire freedom, and during the main part of

as his

his life all.

may have had few

opportunities of using Aramaic at

It is highly precarious to "

Father

(Rom

8^^,

Paul's prayers. belonging to the first

of

argue with Zahn from "Abba,

4^), that Aramaic was the language The peculiar sacredness of association

Gal

word

of the Lord's Prayer in its original

of its liturgitongue supplies a far more probable account cal use among Gentile Christians.^ Finally, we have the

Luke^ and the audor ad Hcbra:os, both of whom known no Aramaic at all to the former we may Between these extremes the NT must return presently. and of them all we may assert with some conwriters lie fidence that, where translation is not involved, we shall find hardly any Greek expression used which would sound strangely Gentile

well have

:

;

to speakers of the Koivrj in Gentile lands.

To what extent then should we expect .^^ ^^ Jewish Greek writers ^^ Semitisms. ^ ^ „ ^.^ coloured by the influence of Aramaic or Hebrew ? Here our Welsh analogy helps us. Captain Fluellen is marked in Shakspere not only by his Welsh pronunciation of

Genume

^^

.

,

.

"

look you." English, but also by his fondness for the phrase Now " look you " is English I am told it is common in the :

it from Shakspere's Welshshould probably not be struck by it as a bizarre But why does Fluellen use it so often ? Because expression.

Dales, and

if

we could

dissociate

man we

Here we ouly state the Otherwise, we must join the ranks of the Xwpijo^'res. contribution f;rammar must make to this great problem : other considerations must decide the answer. Dr Bartlet (in Ex}^ T for Feb. 1905, p. 206) puts Rev and assigns it to the author of Jn he thinks that Prof. under Vespasian

:

Ramsay's account {Seven Churches, p. 89) does not leave sufficient time for the development of Greek style. ^ Cf Bp Chase, in Texts and Studies, i. iii. 23. This is not very different from but Paul will not allow the devout Roman Catholic's "saying Paternoster" even one word of prayer in a foreign tongue without adding an instant translaNote that Padcr is the Welsh name for the Lord's Prayer. (See p. 233.) tion. 2 Cf Dalman, Words, 40 f. ;


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.

11

two or three Welsh phrases of nearly identical which would be very much on his tongue when meaning, For the same reason the talking with his own countrymen. modern Welshman overdoes the word " indeed." In exactly the it

translates

same way the good Attic interjection tSov is used by some writers, with a frequency quite un-Attic, simply because they were accustomed to the constant use of an inter-

NT

jection in their

own

equivalent is the furthest

Probably this

tongue.^

extent to which Semitisms went in the ordinary Greek speech or writing of men whose native language was Semitic. It

brought into prominence locutions, correct enough as Greek, but which would have remained in comparatively rare use but for the accident of their answering to Hebrew or Aramaic jihrases. Occasionally, moreover, a word with some special metaphorical

meaning might be translated into the literally corresponding Greek and used with the same connotation, as when the verb pn, in the ethical sense, was represented not l)y the exactly But these answering avacnpe<^ecr6ai, but by Trepnrareiv? cases are very few, and may be transferred any day to the other category, illustrated above in the case of Ihov, by the It must not be forgotten discovery of new papyrus texts. ^

Note that James uses lSo6 6 times in his short Epistle, Paul only 9 times In Ac 1-12 it appears 16 times, (including one quotation) in all his writings. in 13-28 only 7 its rarity in the Gentile atmosphere is characteristic. It is :

instructive to note the figures for narrative as against speeches

Mt Ac

has 33 in narrative, 4 in quotations, 24 in speeches Add that .In 0/1/3. (1-12) 4/0 12, Ac (13-28) 1/0/6 ;

Mk

;

and

OT quotations.

0/1/6;

Hob has

4

Lk

16/1/40;

OT quotations

and no other occurrence, and Rev has no less than 26 occurrences. It is obvious that it was natural to Hebrews in speech, and to some of them (not Mk or Jn) in narrative. Luke in the Palestinian atmosphere (Lk, Ac 1-12) employs it freely, whether reproducing his sources or bringing in a trait of Hort {Ecdesia, p. 179) says l5ov local character like Shakspere with Fluellen. is "a phrase which when writing in his own person and sometimes even in speeches [Luke] reserves for sudden and as it were providential interpositions." He does not appear to include the Gospel, to which the remark is evidently inAc 1-12. But applicable, and this fact somewhat weakens its application to with this reservation we may accept the independent testimony of Horfs instinct to our conclusion that Luke when writing without external influences upon him would use l5o<> as a Greek would use it. The same is true of Paul. Let

me

quote in conclusion a curiously close parallel, unfortunately late (iv/v a.d.) 13'" BU 948 (a letter) yiviiiuKeiv iOiXwori direvo Kpayfj-aTevrrji on i) fjL-qrrip

toLk

:

cov aaOcvZ,

ei5ou,

Aramaism (Wellh. ^

Deissmann,

d^Ka rpls

firjves.

(See p.

70.)

It

weakens the case

29).

BS

194.

IIo/)et/oynot is

thus used in

1

Pet

4^ al.

for


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

12

that the instrumental eV in ev fxaxaipr] (Lk 22^^) and ev pdjBSw the class of "Hebraisms" (1 Co 4^1) was only rescued from

Tchtunis Pajj^jri (1902), which citations for it.^ presented us with half-a-dozen Ptolemaic very important distinction must be

the

of

by the publication

A

between Semitisms concerning vocabulary and those which affect The former have occupied us mainly so far, and syntax. Gramthey are the principal subject of Deissmann's work. We matter. matical Semitisms are a much more serious native might indeed range under this head all sins against Greek style and idiom, such as most NT books will show. ^^^"^'^ at this point

andLexicaf

Co-ordination of clauses with the simple /cai,^ instead of the use of participles or subordinate clauses, is a good example. It is quite true that a Hebrew would find this style come natural to him, and that an Egyptian might be more likely, in equal absence of Greek culture, to pile up a series of geni-

But in itself the phenomenon proves nothing " more than would a string of " ands in an English rustic's elementary culture, and not the hampering presence story tive absolutes.

—

of a foreign

most

its

idiom that

literal

is

being perpetually translated into

A

equivalent.

Semitism which definitely to watch for.

what we have

contravenes Greek syntax have seen that airb 'Irjaov Xpiarov o jxapTVi o iria-TO'i But Rev 2^^ iv rat? does not come into this category. 6 ... 09 direKTavOt] would be a 'AvTLTra^ fjuuprvi is

We

rjfiepat^

glaring example, for as an indeclinable.

it is

impossible to conceive of 'AvTL7ra<i

The Hebraist might be supposed to is unchanged because it would be unthat the nom. argue But no one would seriously changed (stat. ahs.) in Hebrew. imagine the text sound it matters little whether we mend it with Lachmann's conjecture 'Avriira or with that of the :

who repeat ah after rj/xepat^ and drop 6'?. of iyevero rfkOe will be discussed below case typical

later copyists,

The ^

"

;

Expos. VI.

vii.

112

HS

;

cf

OR

xviii. 153.

on the frtquency of Kal in Mk. Tluinili observes that /cat in place of hypotaxis is found in MGr— and in Aristotle {Hdlenismus So rjpOe Kaipbs kC dppioa-TT]aei' (Abbott 70). here even Viteau gives way. 129) The simple parataxis of Mk 15^^, Jn 4^^ uss^ js illustrated by the uneducated document Par P 18, ^ri 5i;o -q/iipas ixott-^v xai cpdaaofMev eis IiT]\ov<n.

Cf Hawkins

:

120

f.,


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.

13

enquiry we shall dispose of others, TO dvjdrptov avTrj'i (Mk 1-^), which we now find occurring in Greek that is beyond suspicion of Semitic influences. There remain Semitisms due to translation, from the

and

in the course of our

like

'^9

Hebrew

"

"

the OT, or from Aramaic sources underlyingof and the Acts. The former case covers Synoptists parts all the usages which have been supposed Translation e ^x. ^ i arise from over-literal rendering in the Greek LXX, the constant reading of which by Helof

•

,

lenist

Jews has unconsciously affected their Greek. Here we have abnormal Greek produced by the effort of

of course

Greek-speaking men to translate the already obsolete and When the Hebrew puzzled imperfectly understood Hebrew. them, they would take refuge in a barbarous literalness, like It was ignorance of riN, not which was responsible for Aquila's iv ^eo? avv rov ovpavov Kal avv ttjv yrjv.

a schoolboy translating Vergil. of

ignorance

avv,

6 KecjitiXaiM eKTcaev

It

is

not

Greek"

antecedently

would influence

probable free

such

that

Greek except

"

translation

by supplying

these phrases phrases for conscious or unconscious quotation to be followed by men who wrote :

would not become models

How

such foreign idioms by examining our own. may have been literally which We have a few foreign phrases their place maintained and have translated into English, the language as their own. may get into a language, we

"

that goes without of their origin to think," will serve as gives furiously

without consciousness saying," or

"

this

far

see

:

Many more are retained as conscious "quotations, examples. To return to assimilate them to English idiom. no effort with " but barbarisms kind of these one illustrates muttons our to there are Biblical phrases taken over in a similar way without form. We must notice, however, sacrificing their unidiomatic ;

that such phrases are sterile: we have only to imagine another verb put for sai/ing in our version of Cela va sans dire to see how entirely such an importation fails to influence

the syntax of our language. ^"

The general discussion

may

of this important be clinclied with an enquiry into

subject the diction of Luke, whose varieties of style in the different parts of his work form a particularly interesting

^^^l\T


A GKAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

14

I restrict myself to grammatical and important problem.^ Hebraisms mainly, but it will be useful to recall Dalman's list (Words 20 ff.) to see how far Luke is concerned in it. He gives as pure Aramaisms (a) the supertluous a(/)et? or KaTaXtircov and rjp^aro, as more Aramaic than Hebrew the

use

iXOoiv,

Either with participle as a narrative tense. will account for (b) the superfluous

elvaL

of

Aramaic

Hebrew

or

Kadiaa'i,

Hebraisms are eV

of

infinitive,

historians, in Polybius fairly be reckoned,

iXdXrjaev

-

—but

and

Pure

eyepdei'i.

XuXmv and

this

is

found

in

classical

and therefore cannot uKovaere and ^Xe7rovT€<;

in papyri,

the types aKofj

and the formulae In class aTroKfjideU eiTrev.^

below, pp. 75

IBXeylrere (see

or

dvaard<i

the periphrases with Trpoawitov, the use

(c)

with

Tft)

and

eo-T&)9,

f.),

/cat

eyevero,

(a),

we

find

In a-ssumhig the unity of the two books ad Theophihim, I am quite To be a great "philologist" is content to shield myself beliiud Blass. as to be an "apologist," to apparently as sure a guarantee of incompetence But common sense suggests that on the judge from Jalicher's lofty scorn. narrow training of the professional NT integrity of a Greek book the somewhat critic cannot compare with the equipment of a master in criticism over the 1

whole range of Greek 2

literature.

See Kiilker 253, and below, p. 215.

Add Par P

63 (ii/B.c.)

n's

yap ourm

iarlv d.vd\yT]T(i}i ev rqi Xoyl^eadai Kal Trpd.y,uaTos oiatpopav (vpciv, Ss ouS' avrb tovto dw-naeraL (jvvvoelv ; It is of course the frequency of this locution that is due to

what is said of t'Soi^, above, p. 11. To class (c) I may append a note on which in Mt 27^- (5-text) and 1 Th 4" takes a genitive. This very literal translation of n.s'-ipb, which is given by HE as its Semitic thought ^ See Wellh.

:

cf

16.

e/s is

a-rravT-qaiv ,

of course a

original in 29

with dative. (Variants avvav., viravr., and others are I count all places where one of the primary authorities has often occurring In addition there are a few places eh air. with gen. or dat. representing '''?. where the phrase answers to a different original also 1 ex. with gen. and places, as against 16 :

;

Luke (Ac 28*') uses it with dat., and in 3 with dat. from the Apocrypha.) Now this last may Mt 25*^ it appears absolutely, as once in (1 Sa 13'^).

LXX

be directly paralleled in a Ptolemaic papyrus which certainly has no Semitism

—Tb P 43

(ii/B.c.) irapey€vf}drifj.ev els airduTriaiv (a

newly arriving magistrate).

BU

362 (215 A.D.) Trpbs [oyiravrrjl^aLv Tov]i]y€/x6pos has the very gen. we want. One of Strack's Ptolemaic inscriptions (Archiv iii. 129) has iV elSiji fjv ^axv^^v It seems tliat the special idea of the TTpbs avTou T) wtiXi's evxdpicTTov aTrdurrjaiv. In

word was the

official

in place in the

NT

welcome of a newly arrived dignitary

idiom, the gen. as in by the verb. If in the

seemed so

literal

— an

idea singularly

The case after it is entirely consistent with Greek our "to his inauguration," the dat. as the case governed

exx.

LXX

the use has been extended, it is only because it Note that in 1 Th I.e. the

a translation of the Hebrew.

authorities of the o-text read the dat., which is I suspect better Greek. (What has been said applies also to eis viravT-rjcriv avrQ, as in Mt S^'*, Jn 12^^ the two :

words seem synonymous).

See also

p.

242.


GENERAL CHAEACTERISTICS.

15

Luke unconcerned with the first case. The third we must return to (see pp. 225 If.): suffice to say n^vv that it has its roots in classical Greek, and is at most only a more lil)eral use of what is correct enough, if less common, pjut rjp^aro laises an interesting question. In Lk Z^ we find koI ap^ijade fj,i]

Dalman (p. 27) shows that in narrative XeyeLv iv eavTot<;. " the Palestinian-Jewish literature uses the meaninirless he " a conventional locution which was evidently parallel began,' '

with our Middle-English auxiliary gan.

It is very

common

the Synoptists, and occurs twice as often in Luke as in Dalman thinks that if this Aramaic ''']f with Mattliew.

in

participle find the

happens

had become practically meaningless, we might well same use in direct speech, though no example to be known. Now in the otherwise verbally

identical verse

Mt

3^

we

which

find

S6^i]Te

for ap^Tjade,

"

do not

thoroughly idiomatic Greek, and manifestly a deliberate improvement of an original preserved more exactly by Luke.^ It seems to follow that this original to

presume

say,"

was a Greek translation

is

of the

Aramaic %m-document, used

common by

both Evangelists, but with greater freedom by If Luke was ignorant of Aramaic,- he would be the first. led by his keen desire for accuracy to incorporate with a minimum of change translations he was able to secure, even

in

when they were idiomatic.

general

execvited

by men whose Greek was not very

This conclusion, which

impressions

of

his

is

in

harmony with our

methods

of

using

his

sources,

seems to me much more probable than to suppose that it was he who misread Aramaic words in the manner illustrated (Exjy T xv. 528): we may just as by Nestle on Lk 11*^ well accuse the (oral or written) translation he employed. *•

Passing on to Dalman's (l) class, in which Luke is concerned equally with the other Synoptists, we may observe that In only a very free translation would drop these pleonasms. " " a sense they are meaningless," just as the first verb is in He " went and did it all the same," or He got tip and went out," " So he or (purposely to take a parallel from the vernacular)

^ But see E. Norden, Antil-e Kvnstjjrosa ii. 4S7. -Luke "probably did not understand Aramaic," says 359. That Dalman ( JVcn-ds 38-41) holds this view, is almost

Jiilicher,

decisive.

Introd.


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

16

But however

ups and says." they may add

—and

little

for us at least

not a supertluous touch

—they add

additional

the

"

information

stand praying

" is

a distinct nuance to the

whole phrase, which Luke was not likely to sacrifice when he it in his translation or heard it from the avToirrai whose The same may be said of the story he was jotting down. which begin and end Dalman's list of pleonastic phrases In this class (c) therefore there remains Hebraisms." "pure

met

only the construction with Kal iyevero, answering to the narrative ^7^5, which is (strangely enough) almost peculiar to Luke in the NT. There are three constructions (a) eyevero :

rjXde, (b) eyevero Kal rfkde, (c) iyevero (avrov) eXOelv} occurrences of these respectively are for Lk

The

22/11/5, for

Ac 0/0/17.^

It

may

be added that the construction occurs

almost always with a time clause (generally with iv) in Lk The phrase was clearly there is only one exception, 16^-. " therefore temporal originally, like our It was in the days :

." (This is (c), but we could use the or even (b), without transgressing our form, paratactic (a) Driver idiom.) (Tenses, § 78) describes the ""ni!! construction

of

.

.

.

that

as occurring

.

.

when

there

is

inserted

"

a clause specifying the

circumstances under which an action takes place," a description which will suit the Lucan usage everywhere, except

sometimes in the (c) class (as 16"), the only one of the three which has no Hebrew parallel. We must infer that the

LXX which

translators used this locution as a just tolerable Greek literally represented the original f and that Lk (and

a minute extent Mt and Mk) deliberately recalled the Greek OT by using the phrase. The (a) form is used elsewhere in the NT twice in Mk and five times in Mt, only in the phrase eyevero ore ireXeaev ktX. Mt 9^** has (b) and Mk 223 has (c). There are (a) forms with eVrat Ac 2i7-2i 323^ Rom 92^ (all OT citations) and (c) forms with ylveTai Mk 2^^, to

;

^

Once (Ac

-

Blass cites

may

10-^),

Ac

iy^veTo toO elaeXde?!' rhv Ilirpov. D for (a), aud linds {b) in H''. Certainly the latter sentence

4^

be thus construed (see below, p. 70); nor is it a fatal objection that the is otherwise isolated in Ac. See p. 233.

construction "

W.

forms

:

F. Moulton (\VM 760 n.) gives a number of LXX exx. for the («) aud the only approach to the (c) form is 2 Mac 3^^, ^v optjvra .

TirptocTKecrdai.

.

.

.

(b) .

.


GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.

1

eav jev')]Tac Mt 18^^, and otto)? /a); yei^tjTat Ac 20^^ what sense is any of this to be called " Hebraism " ?

Now

in

It is

a literal translation of the Hebrew, while at least grammatical as Greek, however unidiomatic.

obvious that it

V

is

(b) is

retention to a limited extent in Lk (with a single doubtful case in Ac), and absence elsewhere in NT (except for Mt 9^°, which is affected by the author's love for koI Its

l8ov), are

was

it

best

rather

preferred even

LXX

interpreted as meaning that in free Greek an experiment, other constructions being by a writer who set himself to copy the

At

style.

first

sight (a)

but we must note that Pallis's version €(})vye

sion "

.

of

.

of

We

etc.

.,

I

is

would seem worse Greek

apparently

known

was

at

still,

MGr

in

cf

:

11^, Kal avve^7]Ke, aav TeKiwae ., cannot suppose that this is an inva.

.

Greek, any more than our

Biblical

It

Mt

it

home

that day."

own

What

^

idiomatic

then of

(c), happened which is characteristic of Luke, and adopted by him in Ac as It starts from an exclusive substitute for the other two ? The normal Greek awe^r) Greek vernacular, beyond doubt.

still

takes what represents the

ace.

ct

inf.

:

on

avve^ri

rjpde

modern Athenian speech, against hv)(e va eXOrj which, I am told, is commoner in the country districts. But eav ryevrjrai with inf. was good contemporary vernacular: all see AP 135, BM 970, and Paj). Catt. (in ArcUv iii. 60) Par P 49 cf Mk So was jiveTai 2^^) jiverat (as (ii/B.c.) ii/A.D. is

idiomatic in

:

jap

ivTpaiTrfvaL.

Luke alone ex. in

^

ejevero is but a step, which the isolated writers seems to have taken

From

Mk

of

NT

:

perhaps a primitive assimilation to

2^^ is

as

Greek

" :

Lk 6^^

criterion of genuineness in vernacular appears Hebraism or Aramaism in the Bible shows itself as a natural development in the MGr

Cf Thumb's remarks on

suspected of Hebraism

must count

this to

this

What

if it

vernacular" {Hellcnismus 123).

An interesting suggestion is made by Prof. B. W. Bacon in Expos., April over from the 1905, p. 174 n., who thinks that the "Semitism" may be taken "Gospel according to the Hebrews." The secondary character of this Gospel, 2

has been sufficiently proved liy Dr this does not prevent our positing but 139 ff.); pp. Adeuey Bacon's quotation for this earlier and purer form as one of Luke's sources. is after the (a) form : ^'Factum est autem, cum ascendisset • . ., dcscendil ..." The [a] form occurs in (No. 4 in Preuschen's collection, Antilcgomcna, p. 4). as

judged from the extant fragments, [Hihbert

m

frag.

Jounud,

iii.

2 of the "Ebionite Gospel

*

Uapairopevea-dai

2

(XALA

al)

"

(Preuschen, p. 9). be a relic of Mk's original text.

may


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

18

By

째" .

.

proper

places

we have perhaps dealt sufwith the principles involved, and may

this time

ticiently

leave details of alleged Semitisras to their have seen that the the grammar.

We

in

elseonly complicated in the Lucan writings problem where we have either pure vernacular or vernacular tempered is

with

"

:

Greek ideas of from Aramaic

In Luke, the only

Greek."

translation

except the author of

Heb

style,

NT

writer

show any conscious attention to we find (1) rough Greek translations to

mainly as they reached him, perhaps because their very roughness seemed too characteristic to be and (2) a very limited imitation of the LXX refined away left

;

idiom, as specially appropriate while the story The conscious adaptation of his Jewish world.

moves

own

in the

style to

that of sacred writings long current among his readers reminds us of the rule which restricted our nineteenth century Biblical Revisers to the English of the Elizabethan age.

On the whole question. Thumb (p. 122) quotes with " Semitisms which are in approval Deissmann's dictum that common use belong mostly to the technical language of reliSuch gion," like that of our sermons and Sunday magazines. " alter the scientific description of the language Semitisms as little as did a

march

victorious

too

NT

^

In summing up thus the issue of the long strife Hebraisms, we fully apprehend the danger of going

terranean."

over

few Latinisms, or other booty from the Greek over the world around the Medi-

of

far.

necessarily

Semitic thought, whose native literary dress was foreign to the Hellenic genius, was bound to

fall sometimes into un-Hellenic language as well as style. Moreover, if Deissmann has brought us a long way, we must not forget the complementary researches of Dalman, which

have opened up a new world of

possibilities in the scientific

reconstruction of Aramaic originals, and have warned us of the importance of distinguishing very carefully between

What we Semitisms from two widely different sources. can assert with assurance is that the papyri have finally destroyed the figment of a NT Greek which in any material

respect *

differed

from

that

Art. Hcllenistisches Griechisch, in

spoken EE^

vii. p.

by 638.

ordinary


GENERAL CIIARACTERiyTICS. people in daily life tliroughout the natural objection is raised that there

Eoman niu.st

19 world.

have

If

the

lieen dialectic

variation where people of very different races, scattered over an immense area, were learning the world language, and that " " Jewish-Greek is thus made an a iwiori certainty, we can

meet the difficulty with a curiously complete modern parallel. Our own language is to-day spoken over a far vaster area and we have only to ask to what extent dialect difference affects the modern Weltsiirache. We find that pronunciation and vocabulary exhaust between them nearly all the ;

phenomena we could catalogue. Englishman, Scotchman, American, Colonial, granted a tolerable primary education, can interchange familiar letters without betraying except in trifles

the dialect of their daily speech."

help us to realise to to

local peculiarities can be expected themselves at such an interval in a language known

show us

This fact should

how few

We

from writing.

solely

may add

that a

highly

educated speaker of standard English, recognisable by his intonation as hailing from London, Edinburgh, or New York, can no longer thus be recognised when his words are written

The comparison

down.

made by

will help us to realise the impression

the traveller Paul.

There

is

["

must detain us a

diction'

See

p.

243.

one general consideration which little

this introductory chapter.

at

the

close

of

Those who have

studied some recent work upon Hellenistic Greek, such as Blass's brilliant Grammar of Greek, will probably be led

NT

to feel that

modern methods

of distinctions,

grammatical and

of the past has laid

fore

result in a considerable levelling

at the outset

on which the exegesis seems necessary thereplea for caution, lest an

lexical,

great stress. to put in a

It

exaggerated view should be taken of the extent to which our new lights alter our conceptions of the NT language and its interpretation. We have been showing that the NT But that does not the writers used language of their time.

mean

that they had not in a very real sense a language of assert Specific examples in which we feel bound to

their own. this for

them

will

come up from time

to

time in our inquiry.

MGr we

are compelled to

give up some grammatical scruples which

figure largely in

Tn the light of the papyri and

of


20

A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

great commentators like Westcott, and colour many passages But it does not follow that we must promptly of the EV. obliterate every grammatical distinction that proves to have

been unfamiliar

to the daily conversation of the first

century no now of reviving danger Egyptian Hatch's idea that phrases which could translate the same Hebrew must be equivalent to one another. The papyri have slain this very Euclid-like axiom, but they must not enslave ua farmer.

We

are

in

The NT must still be studied largely by light drawn from itself. Books written on the same subject and within the same circle must always gather some amount to others as dangerous.

of identical style or idiom, a

kind of technical terminology,

which may often preserve a usage of earlier language, obsolescent because not needed in more slovenly colloquial speech The various conservatisms of our own of the same time. religious dialect, even on the lips of uneducated people, may The comparative serve as a parallel up to a certain point. correctness and dignity of speech to which an unlettered man will rise in prayer, is a very familiar phenomenon, lending strong support to the expectation that even a<ypdfiixaTot would instinctively rise above their usual level of exactness in

expression, when dealing with such high themes as those are justified by these considerations which fill the NT.

We

examining each NT writer's language first by itself, and then in connexion with that of his fellow-contributors to the and we may allow ourselves to retain the sacred volume original force of distinctions which were dying or dead in in

;

every-day parlance, when there

Of course we argument when the whole evidence.

is

a sufficient body of internal tempted to use this

shall not be

our evidence denies a particular in such a case we could survival to Hellenistic vernacular of

:

only find the locution as a definite literary revival, rarely possible in Luke and the writer to the Hebrews, and just conceivable in Paul. It

Latinisms

seems hardly worth while

to

discuss

way the supposition that Latin In the has influenced the Koivr] of the NT.

^" ^ general

borrowing of Latin words of course we can see activity enough, and there are even phrases literally translated, like Xa^elv TO Uavov Ac 17^; irotetv to i Mk 15^^ (as early as


GENERAL CHARACTEEISTICS. Polybius);

/ierA

TroWaf ravTa^i

7)/iepa<i

Ac

21

1^,

But

etc.

grammar we must

regard as anotlier matter, in spite of such collections as Buttmann's (see his Index, s.v. Latinisms) or

DB

iii. It will suffice to refer to 40). Tliayer's (Hastings' Romans writProf. Thumb's judgement {Hellenismns 152 f!'.).

ing Greek might be expected to have difficulties for example as I have noticed in the English ef'lbrts with the article ^

—

of

Japanese boys at school in

this

country

;

but even of this

And though the there seems to be no very decisive proof. bulk of the NT comes to us from authors with Roman names, no one will care to assert that Latin was the native language ^ or Luke or Mark. of Paul Apart from lexical matters, we " Of any efl'ective a general negative. may be content with there can be no Greek influence [of Latin] upon grammatical could be I know which rate at any nothing question So effect with this instanced to says Dr any probability." :

Thumb, and the

justification

of his decision in

each alleged

It should example may be safely left till the cases arise. more is rather Blass Prof. noted that be course of (p. 4) and Latin Greek in syntax. Latinisms admit to disposed

were so constantly in contact throughout the history of the Latinisms in Greek or Graecisms Kotvr'], that the question of lie outside the range of really decisive our decision will turn largely on general impressions of the genius of each language, and for this point the specialist in KoLU7] Greek seems better qualified than the specialist in

in Latin

answer

must always

^

:

the classical language. 1

witness the a .stainlJing-block Foreigners sometimes did find the article OGlii 383 (i/is.c.)— see Ditteni of Commageue,

long inscription of Antiochus berger's notes on p. 596 (vol. "

:

i.).

see the This does not involve denying that Paul could speak Latin additional note to p. 7 (p. 233 below). 3 How inextricably bound together were the fortunes of Greek and Latin in :

the centuries following our era, is well shown in W. Schulze's pamphlet, Gmcca He does not, I think, jirove any real action of Latiu on Greek early Latina. lor some mere trifles. enough to affect the NT, except


CHAPTER History of the

"

II.

Common

"

Greek.

We

proceed to examine the nature and This history of the vernacular Greek itself. is

a

which has almost come into existence in the scholars have studied the Classical generation.

study

present Hellenistic literature for the sake of

its

matter

:

its

language

was seldom considered worth noticing, except to chronicle " In so good Greek." contemptuously its deviations from perhaps the authors only received the treatment for to write Attic was the object of them all, deserved they with varying degrees of zeal, but in all doubtless pursued cases removing them far from the language they used in suffering,

;

The pure study of the vernacular was hardly Biblical Greek was interpreted on lines of

life.

daily

possible, for the

own, and the papyri were mostly reposing in their Egyptian tombs, the collections that were published receiving but little attention. Equally unknown was the (Cf above, p. 7 n.)

its

scientific

To

study of modern Greek.

this day,

even great

philologists like Hatzidakis decry as a mere patois, utterly unfit for literary use, the living language upon whose history The translation of the Gospels they have spent their lives.

Greek which descends directly from their original treated as sacrilege by the devotees of a "literary" It is dialect which, in point of fact, no one ever spoke

into the

idiom,

is

!

foreigners to recognise the value of Pallis's version Greek in the light for students who seek to understand left

to

NT

of the continuous of

development

of the language

Alexander to our own time. As has been

study of

See

NT

p.

from the age

243.

in the preceding for our present-day the materials paragraph, Greek are threefold: the (1) prose literature

hinted

—


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" GREEK. of the post-classical

ing the

LXX

;

period,

from Polybius down, and includ-

(2) the Koip/] inscriptions, and

non-literary papyri; especial reference to

(3)

23

tlie

Plgyptian

modern vernacular Greek, with

its dialectic variations, so far as these are at present registered. Before we discuss the part which each of these must play in our investigations, it will be necessary to ask what was the Koivi] and how it arose. should premise that we use the name here as a convenient

We

term for the spoken dialect of the period under review, using " and similar terms when the dialect of literary Kolvi] Whether this Polybius, Josephus, and the rest, is referred to. "

is

the ancient use of the

the

curious

will

name we need a

find

not stay to examine f paper on the subject by Prof. which may perhaps prove that he

Jannaris in CE xvii. 93 ff., and we have misused the ancient grammarians' phraseology.

Ou

["Seep. 243.

(ppovrh 'iTTTTOKXeiSr].

Greek and Dialects

^^ÂŽ its

^^

history,

Hellas

are

geography, jointly

and etlinology

responsible

for

the

phenomena which even the The very schoolliterature of the classical period presents. or his first two three at Greek has to realise in years boy " " He has not thumbed that Greek is anything but a unity. the Anabasis long before the merciful pedagogue takes him on to Homer, and his painfully acquired irregular verbs demand a great extension of their limits. When he develops into a Tripos candidate, he knows well that Homer, Pindar, Sappho, Herodotus and Aristotle are all of them in their several ways defiant of the Attic grammar to which his own remarkable

And if his studies ultimately composition must conform. invade the dialect inscriptions,^ he finds in Ehs and Heraclea, Lacedaemon and Thebes, Crete ^ and Cyprus, forms of Greek which his literature has almost entirely failed to prepare Yet the Theban who said Fltto) Aev<; and the Athenian with his laro) Zem lived in towns exactly as far apart as Liverpool and Manchester The bewildering variety of dialects within that little country arises partly from racial for

him.

!

1

An

extremely convenient

available in the

Teubner

series

:

little selection

of dialect inscriptions

is

now

—Inscriptiones Graecae ad inlustrandas Dialectoa

by Felix Solmsen. The book has less than 100 might be relied on to perplex very tolerable scholars

seledae,

!

pp., ^

but

See

its

contents

p. 233.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

24

differences.

Upon

the

indigenous population, represented

(it would seem) by the Athenians of history, swept first from Northern Europe ^ the hordes of Homer's Acha^ans, and Dialectic then, in post-Homeric days, the Dorian invaders. conditions were as inevitably complex as they became in our own country a thousand years ago, when successive waves of Germanic invaders, of different tribes and dialects, had settled in the several parts of an island in which a Keltic

best

population still maintained itself to greater or less extent. Had the Norman Conquest come before the Saxon, which

determined the language of the country, the parallel would have been singularly complete. The conditions which in were England largely supplied by distance, were supplied in Greece by the mountain barriers which so effectively cut off each little State from regular communication with its an effect and a cause at once of the passion for neighbours which made of Hellas a heptarchy of heptarchies. autonomy

Meanwhile, a steady process was going u^ a a u ^^ whicfi determined finally the character Fittest of literary Greek. Sparta might win the of Greece at hegemony Aegospotami, and Thebes wrest it from her at Leuktra. But Sparta could not produce a man of letters, Alkman (who was not a Spartan !) will and Pindar, serve as the exception that proves the rule " the lonely Theban eagle," knew better than to try poetic ,

.

if

,

Survival of the

°^

^

-i

;

in Boeotian. The intellectual supremacy of Athens was beyond challenge long before the political unification of Greece was accomplished and Attic was firmly established as the only possible dialect for prose composition. The flights

;

writers wrote Attic according to their lights, tempered generally with a plentiful admixture of grammatical and lexical elements drawn from the vernacular, for which tliey had too hearty a contempt even to give it a name. Strenuous efforts were made by precisians to post- classical

improve the Attic quality of this artificial literary dialect and we still possess the works of Atticists who cry out

;

^

am assuming

as proved tlio thesis of Prof. Ridgeway's Early Age which seems to me a key that will imlock many problems of Greek history, religion, and language. Of course adhue sub iudice lis est ; and with Prof. Thumb on the other side I sliould be sorry to dogmatise. I

of Greece,


HISTORY OF THE "

against the

COMMON" GREEK.

"

bad Greek

aiul

"

solecisms

25

"

of their contemporaries, thus incidentally providing us with information concerning a Greek which interests us more than the artificial Attic they prized so highly. All their scrupulousness did

not however prevent their deviating from Attic in matters more important than vocabulary. The optative in Lucian is perpetually misused, and no Atticist successfully attempts to reproduce the ancient use of ov and fii] with the participle.

Those writers who are less particular in their purism write in a literary Koivr'] which admits without difliculty many features

No

various

of

doubt

the

origin,

influence

while generally recalling Attic. of

Thucydides

encouraged

this

The true Attic, as spoken by educated people in ^ was Athens, hardly used in literature before iv/B.c. while the Ionic dialect had largely influenced the somewhat artificial idiom which the older writers at Athens used. It was not strange therefore that the standard for most of the post-classical writers should go back, for freedom.

;

to

instance, TrpaTTQ}

of

the Trpdaaai of Thucydides Plato and Demosthenes.

Such, then, was the

,

of

literature,

lexicon

show how

will

"

from which

derive our illustrations for the

Any

rather

NT

than

the

Common Greek we have

still

"

to

to a

very large extent. for our purpose is important

the Koim] writers, from Polybius down. even the most rigid Atticists found themselves unable to avoid words and usages which Plato would not have the

vocabulary of

And

But side by side with this was a fondness for recognised. Take vav^;, for obsolete words with literary associations. Aelian, Josephus, and does not appear in the indices of eight volumes of Grenfell and Hunt's papyri except where literary fragments come in, nor in those to vol. iii

example, which

other

Koivi]

is

freely

writers.

found in

It

—

—

and the small volume from Chicago. I happen to have by the NT and find it once, and that is

of the Berlin collection (I

am naming

me.)

^

We

all

the collections that

turn to

15 n., cites as the earliest Scliwyzer, Die Weltsprachcn des AUerhims, p. monument of genuine Attic in literature, tlie pseudo-Xenophoii's

extant prose

De

413 c.c. repuhlica Atheniensi, which dates from before


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GEEEK.

26

shipwreck narrative, in a plirase which Blass {Philology 186) suspects to be a rcmiuiscence of Homer. In style and syntax the literary Common Greek diverges Luke's

in

more widely from the colloquial. The bearing of all this on the subject of our study will come out frequently in the Here it will suffice to refer course of our investigations. to Blass, p. 5, for an interesting summary of phenomena which are practically restricted to the author of Heb, and to parts of Luke and Paul,^ where sundry lexical and grammatical elements from the literary dialect invade the colloquial style which is elsewhere universal in the NT.

The "Attic"

were not the guage on the Essentially

"The

who

writers

Schmid's well-known artificial

same thing

the

purists

"are like the

last

to

resuscitation is

figure

book,

being

to-day," says old Atticists to a

Dr

W.

found a literary lanthe

of

tried

Thumb

of

in

Dcr Atticismus,

hair."

ancient Attic. in

our

time.

(Hellenismns 180), Their " mummy-

language," as Krumbacher calls it, will not stand the test of use in poetry but in prose literature, in newspapers, and in Biblical translation, it has the dominion, which is ;

vindicated

need

if

by

be.-

Athenian undergraduates with bloodshed have nothing to do with this curious

We

warn students that before citing MGr NT, tliey must make sure whether their source is Kadapevovaa or ofitXovfxevT}, book Greek or The former may of course have borrowed spoken Greek. for it is a medley far from ancient or modern sources more mixed than we should get by compounding together the particular feature for which it Cynewulf and Kipling But it obviously cannot stand in any line of hisis cited. torical development, and it is just as valuable as Volaptik to phenomenon, except

in

illustration

of

to

the

—

—

^

In quoting Blass here, we do not accept unreservedly his opinion that The Kolvt) passages cited 20-") misused the literary word d(pL^is.

Luke (Ac

Grinim-Thayer are at any rate ambiguous, and the misunderstanding of the may have been no peculiarity of Luke's. There is also the suggestion that Paul meant "after my arrival, home-coming." For literary elements in NT writers, see especially E. Norden, Antike Kunsiprosa ii. 482 ff. See Krumbacher's vigorous polemic, Das Problem d. li.eugr. Schri/tsprache, summarised by the present writer in Exp T xiv. 550 ff. Hatzidakis replies witli equal energy in REGr, 1903, pp. 210 ff., and further in an 'ATrdcTTjcrij (1905). in

d7r6


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" OREEK.

27

the student of linguistic evolution. The popular patois, on the other hand, is a living language, and we shall soon see that it takes a very important part in the discussions on

which we are entering.

We Koii/ii

:

Sources.

°^

^^ÂŽ

and

its

pass on then to the spoken dialect ^^"^^

century Hellenists,

peculiarities.

its

Our sources

history are, in

order of importance, (1) non-literary papyri, (2) inscriptions, The literary sources are (3) modern vernacular Greek. almost confined to the Biblical Greek. few general words

A

may

be said on these sources, before

we examine

the origin of

the Greek which they embody. -

p

The papyri have one very obvious

.

dis-

advantage, in that, with the not very important exception of Herculaneum,^ their provenance is limited shall see, however, that the to one country, Egypt.

We

disadvantage does not practically count.

They date from The monuments of the earliest period vii/A.D. iii/B.c. are fairly abundant, and they give us specimens of the spoken KoLvrj from a time when the dialect was still a novelty. The papyri, to be sure, are not to be treated as a unity. Those which alone concern us come from the tombs and waste paper heaps of Ptolemaic and Eoman Egypt and their style has the same degree of unity as we should see in the contents to

;

the sacks of waste paper sent to an English paper-mill solicitor's office, a farm, a school, a shop, a manse, and Each contribution has to be a house in Downing Street. of

from a

considered separately. Wills, law-reports, contracts, censusreturns, marriage settlements, receipts and ofiicial orders as formulse tend largely ran along stereotyped lines; and, to be permanent,

we have

a degree of conservatism in the not seen in documents free from these

language which is Petitions contain this element in greater or less trammels. extent, but naturally show more freedom in the recitation of grievances for which redress is claimed. Private letters are our most valuable sources; and they are all the better for the immense differences that betniy the

1

particular

On

these see the

monumental work of W. Cronei t, Memoria Graeca Her-

culanensis (Teubner, 1903).


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

28

themselves in the education of their writers.

The well-worn

epistolary formuhe show variety mostly in their spelling and their value for the student lies primarily in their rouiarkable ;

resemblances to the conventional phraseology which even the NT letter-writers were content to use.^ That part of the letter

which

when

its

is

from formuhe

free

is

grammar

is

weakest, for

perhaps most instructive it shows which way the

Few papyri are more suggestive than lower-school-boy to his father, OP 119

language was tending. the letter of the

It would have surprised Theon pere, when he (ii/iii A.D.). applied the well-merited cane, to learn that seventeen centuries afterwards there might be scholars who would count his boy's

new fragment of It must not be inferred by the way. from our laudation of the ungrammatical papyri that the NT writers are at all comparable to these scribes in lack of The indifference to concord, which we noted education. in Eev, is almost isolated in this connexion. But the illiterates show us by their exaggerations the tendencies which the better schooled writers keep in restraint. AVith writings from farmers and from emperors, and everj^ class " " between, we can form a kind of grammatometer by which audacious missive greater treasure than a

Sappho

But

!

to estimate

this

how

is

the language stands in the development of

any particular use we may wish

to investigate.

Inscriptions ^

come second

,„,

^

(2)

Inscriptions.

.

^. ^,

.

this

.

.

connexion, mainly

.

to papyri, in

because

K their •

very

Their Greek material shows that they were meant to last. be as it not of the we see such is, in its best it, may purest but ;

The special clothes, while that of the papyri is in corduroys. value of the Common Greek inscriptions lies in their corroborating the papyri, for they practically show that there was but between the Greek of Egypt and that of

little dialectic difference

Asia Minor, Italy, and Syria. There would probably be varieties of pronunciation, and we have evidence that districts differed but in their preferences among sundry equivalent locutions ;

a speaker of Greek would be understood without the slightest difficulty wherever he went throughout the immense area

^

Ifil

On ir.

;

this point see Deissmann, BS 21 G. G. Findlay, Thess. {CUT), Ixi.

J. R. Harris, in Expos, v. Robinson, Eph. 275-284.

ff'.

;

;

viii.


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" GREEK.

29

over which the Greek world-speech reigned. With the caveat that contain already implied, inscription-Greek may literary elements which are absent from an nnstudied private letter,

we may use without misgiving collections

made

of

later

them

of

is

the immense and ever-growing Greek epigraphy. How much may be

well

seen in

the

Frcisschri/t

of

Dr

E.

Schwyzer,^ GrammatiJc dcr rergamenischcn Inschriftcn, an invaluable guide to the accidence of the Koivrj. (It has been followed up by E. Nachmanson in his Laute tmd Formen der Magnetischen Inschriftcn (1903), which does the same work, section by section, for the corpus from Magnesia.) Next to the papyrus collections, there is no tool the student of the NT Koivrj will find so useful as a book of late inscriptions,

such

as

Dittenberger's

new

Oricntis

Graeci

Insci'iptiones

selectac? ^

Greek

The Finally we have MGr to bring in. discovery that the vernacular of to-day goes back historically to the Koivi] was made in

1834 by Heilmaier, "

in

a

book

on

the

origin

of

the

This discovery once established, it became clear could work back from MGr to reconstruct the

Eoraaic."

that

we

known oral Greek of the Hellenistic however age.^ only in the last generation that the has been adequately recognised. of this method importance We had not indeed till recently acquired trustworthy materials. Mullach's grammar, upon which the editor of Winer had to depend for one of the most fruitful innovations of his work,* started from wrong premisses as to the relation between the We have now, in such books old language and the new.^ otherwise imperfectly It

is

He was

Schweizer in 1898, when this book was published, but lias changed He has edited Meisteihantj' Grammalik der attischcn Inschriftcn^, and written the interesting lecture on Die IFcltsprache named 1

since, to

our confusion.

above. ^

The appearance

of vol.

ii.

the provision of a word-index, peculiarities. ^ I cite from

has made it many times more valuable by and an excellent conspectus of grammatical

Kretschmer, Die Entstchunrj der YLoivii, p. 4. Cf index s.v. "Greek (modern)," p. 821. ^ Cf Krumbacher in A'^^' xxvii. 488. Krumbacher uses the epithet "dilettante" about Mullach, ib. p. 497, but rather (I fancy) for his theories than his facts. After all, Mullach came too earl}' to be blameworthy for his unscientific *

WM

position.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

30

Thumb's Handhuch der neugriechischcn Volkssjirache and Hatzidakis's Einleitung in die neugricchische Grammatik, the which were means of checking not a few statements about

as

MGr

really based

on the

Greek

artificial

The

of the schools.

per-

petual references to the NT in the latter work will indicate forcibly how many of the developments of modern vernacular had their roots in that of two thousand years ago. The gulf between the ancient and the modern is bridged by the material collected and arranged by Jannaris in his Historical

The study

Greek Grammar.

of a

Gospel in the vernacular

version of Pallis^ will at first produce the impression that but the strong points of conthe gulf is very wide indeed ;

become very evident

in time. Hatzidakis indeed " the language generally even goes so far as to assert that spoken to-day in the towns differs less from the common tact will

language of Polyljius than this last of

Homer."

We

are

now ready

Common Greek

'

the K

differs

from the language

2

of the

to

NT

enquire how this rose out of the

classical language. Some features of its are and undoubted, development may be noted first. The which it impulse produced lay, beyond question, in the work

Alexander the Great.

of

first

necessary

The

step in the

was a dream of

unification of Hellas

accomplishment

of

his

Hellenising the world which he had marked out for conquest. To achieve unity of speech throughout the little country

and military triumphs had a task too serious for was him, virtually conquered Alexander himself to face. But unconsciously he effected and the this, as a by-product of his colossal achievement next generation found that not only had a common language emerged from the chaos of Hellenic dialects, but a new and which his

father's

diplomatic for

;

^"H (Pallis

Ne'a

AiaOi^Ky],

iJi€Ta<ppa<r/j.€Prj

awb rbv 'AXef.

IIciXXtj

(Liverpool,

has now translated the Hind, and even some of Kant

— with

1902).

striking

Thumb's opinion, DLZ, 1905, pp. '2084-6.) Unfortunately the B.F.B.S. version contains so much of the artificial Greek that it is beyond the comprehension of the common people the bitter prejudice of the educated classes at present has closed the door even to this, much more to success, in

:

Pallis's version. 2

REGr,

1903, p. 220.

(See a further note below, pp. 233f.)


HISTORY OF THE

"

COMMON

"

GREEK.

3

1

nearly homogeneous world-speech had been created, in which Persian and Egyptian miglit do business together, and

Koman

proconsuls issue their commands to the subjects of a His army was in mightier empire than Alexander's own. itself a powerful agent in the levelling process which ultiThe mately destroyed nearly all the Greek dialects.

Anabasis of the Ten Thousand Greeks, seventy years before, had doubtless produced results of tlie same kind on a small Clearchus the Lacedaemonian, Menon the Thessalian, Socrates the Arcadian, Proxenus the Boeotian, and the rest, would find it difficult to preserve their native brogue very long free from the solvent influences of perpetual association

scale.

and when Cheirisophus of Sparta and had Athens safely brought the host home, it is Xenophon not strange that the historian himself had suffered in the purity of his Attic, which has some peculiarities distinctly The assimilating process would foreshadowing the Koiv^}

during their march

;

of

go

much

further in the

camp

of

men from

Alexander, where, during parts of Greece were

all

prolonged campaigns, tent-fellows and messmates, with no choice but to accom-

modate

mode

their

of speech in its

more individual character-

which was gradually being average In this process naturally evolved among their comrades. those features which were peculiar to a single dialect would have the smallest chance of surviving, and those which most of many dialects successfully combined the characteristics

istics

Greek

the

to

would be surest

The army by

of a place in the resultant

itself

"

common

speech."

only furnished a nucleus for the new growth. victoriously into Asia, and established, shores of the eastern Mediterranean, the'

As Hellenism swept

on all the mixture of nationalities in the new-rising commimities de-y

itself

manded

a

common

language as the

medium

of intercourse,

1 Cf Rutherford, A^P 160-174. The same may be said of tlie Liiiguage of thehiwerclassesin Athens herself in v/b.c, consisting as they did of immigrants from all parts. So [Xenophon] Constitution of Athens 11. 3 :— "The Greeks and manner of life and fashion of th.eir own hut an individual

have dialect, the Athenians have what is compounded from all the Greeks and barbarians." The vase-inscriptions abundantly evidence this. (Kretschmer, Entstehimg d. The importance of Xenophon as a forerunner of Hellenism \a 'KoivT), p. 34.) well lirought out by Mahaffy, Progress of Hellenism in Alexanders Eminrt, ;

Lecture

i.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

32

and the Greek

of

was

the victorious armies of Alexander

In

the

the country purpose. ready motherland, the old dialects lived on for generations but by this time Greece herself was only one factor in the great Hellenisinn; movement to which the world was to owe so for

the

districts

of

;

which strikingly differed from were spoken by races that mostly lay outside the movement. History gives an almost pathetic interest to end of an inscription like that from Larissa (Michel 41 citizens record a rescript from King where the iii/B.c), Philip V, and tlieir own consequent resolutions TayeuovTovv 'jivayKLTnroL HerOakeioc k.t.X., ^CKnnroi toZ f3acri\eio<; iTrcaroXav airvareWavro'i ttot to? 7070? Kal rav much. the

new

Besides, the dialects Kolvi]

:

TToXiv rav viro'ye'ypa/jifjbepav

Baai\ev<i ^tXiTTTro? AapLcratcov Tot9 Tayol'i kui -^aipeiv

rf]c

TroXet

(and so on in normal Koivrj).

The old and the new survived thus

side

by side into the imperial age; but Christianity Dialects had only a brief opportunity of speaking in In one corner of Hellas alone did the old dialects of Greece. the dialect live on. To-day scholars recognise a single modern idiom, the Zaconian, which does not directly descend from

As we might expect, this is nothing but the the Koivj]. ancient Laconian, whose broad d holds its ground still in the speech of a race impervious to literature and proudly conservative of a language that

was always abnormal

to

an

extreme. Apart from this the dialects died out entirely.* They contributed their share to the resultant Common Greek but it is an assured result of MGr philology that there are ;

no elements

of

ancient dialects, of of

speech whatever now existing, due to the which did not find their way into the stream

development through the channel of the vernacular Koivij more than two thousand years ago. [» See p. 243. So far we may go without difference

Relative ContriThe only serious dispute arises ^^ opinion. ^ butions to the ^ ^u ^ *-• what were the relative magniask when we Resultant tudes of the contributions of the several ,

^

.

That the literary to the new resultant speech. has been Attic stated, and was already Koiv^ predominantly But was Attic more than one is of course beyond doubt. dialects


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" GREEK.

33

assimilated in the new vernacular ? has always been taken for granted that the intellectual queen of Greece was the predominant partner in the business of establishing a new dialect based on a combination of This conclusion has recently been challenged the old ones.

among many elements It

by Dr Paul Kretschmer, a

brilliant

previously distinguished for his

comparative philologist,

studies on the language of on the dialects of the Greeks'

the Greek vase-inscriptions and In his tractate entitled Lie Entstchung nearest neighbours.^ der Kotv7], published in the Transactions of the Vienna

1900, he undertook to show that the oral elements from Boeotian, Ionic, and even Koivrj North-west Greek, to a larger extent than from Attic. His affects That Boeotian pronunciation mainly. argument

Academy

for

contained

monophthongising of the diphthongs, Doric softening of /3, h and 7, and Ionic de-aspiration of words beginning with A, affected the spoken language more than any Attic influence

might perhaps be allowed. But when we turn which had to be represented in writing, as contrasted

of this nature, to features

with mere variant pronunciations of the same written word, Boeotians may have supplied the case becomes less striking. 3 plur. forms in -aav for imperfect and optative, but these do the not appear to any considerable extent outside the

LXX

NT

:

and they are surprisingly rare in North-west Greek has the accusative plural in the papyri.2 in -69, found freely in papyri and (for the word Teaaape^) and of the MSS of the NT also the middle conjugation elfii, Doric contriconfusion of forms from -dco and -eco verbs. butes some guttural forms from verbs in -^<w, and a few lexical Ionic supplies a fair number of isolated forms, and items. exx.

are precarious,

;

be responsible for many -co or -w flexions from -/xi oaTewv or verbs, and some uncontracted noun-forms like

may

But the one peculiarly Attic feature of tlie Kocvv does allow, its treatment of original d, in Kretschmer which contrast with Ionic phonology on one side and that of the in its effects remaining dialects on the other, is so far-reaching

Xpvo-im.

1 Die griccli. Faseninsehriften, 1894 Einleiiung in die Gatchiehte der griech. Sprache, 1896. 2 See CE xv. 36, and the addenda in xviii. 110. ;

3


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

34

we cannot but

that

feature.

And

give it more weight than to any other while the accidence of Attic has bequeathed

the vernacular

to

much matter which

it

shared with other

may question whether the accidence of any would dialect present anything like the same similarity single We can hardly resist to that of the Kotv^ as the Attic does. the conclusion of the experts that Kretschmer has failed to At the same time we may allow that the prove his point. influence of the other dialects on pronunciation has been commonly underestimated. Kretschmer necessarily recognises dialects, one

that Attic supplied the orthography of the Koivrj, except for those uneducated persons to whom we owe so much for their instructive mis-spellings. Consequently, he says, when the

Hellenist wrote ^ai'pet and pronounced it cMri, his language It is obvious that the really Boeotian and not Attic.^

was

question does not seriously concern us, since we are dealing with a language which, despite its vernacular character, comes to us in a written and therefore largely Atticised form." For 'our purpose we may assume that we have before us a Greek which includes important contributions from various dialects,

but with Attic as the basis, although the exclusive peculiarities make but a small show in it. We shall see later on

of Attic

(pp. 213ff.) that syntax tells a clearer story in at least matter of importance, the articular infinitive.

At rronuncmtion Tradition.

one

this point it should be observed that

pi^-onunciation matter of no

not to be passed over as a practical importance by the

is

modern student

The undeni-

of Hellenistic.

—

able fact tliat phonetic spelling which during the reign of the old dialects was a blessing common to all was entirely abandoned by educated people generations before the Christian

—

has some very obvious results for both

era,

textual criticism.

That ai and

identities for the scribes of our

made

his choice according to

e,

ei (rj)

and

t,

grammar and ot

and v were

MSS, is certain.^ The the grammar and the

^

Against this emphasising of Bceotian,

^

On

see

Thumb, Hellenismus

scribe sense,

228.

the date of the levelling of quantity, so notable a feature in MGr, see Hatzidakis in 'A6i]vd for 1901 (xiii. 247). He decides that it began outside Greece,

nearly

and established so,

itself ver}' gradually.

before the scribes of N

and B wrote.

It

must have been complete, ["

or

Seep. 243.


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" GREEK.

35

as we choose between hings, Icing's, and kings', or between how and hough. He wrote av nominative and aol \vaaa6ai infinitive and Xvaaade imperative (^tXet?, dative ecSofiev indicative, and ^iX?}?, 'iSwfiev subjunctive ^ovkec verb,

just

;

;

but ^ovXfi noun if

difference,

however

to

—

;

here of course there was the accentual

he wrote prevent

dcfyetprjfxevo'?, etc., if

to

dictation.

There was

him from writing

i^6(pvr)<i,

his antiquarian his choice

nothing e^i^t'Sto?,

knowledge failed while between (for example) infinitive and imperative, as in Lk 19^^, was determined only It will be seen by his own or perhaps a traditional exegesis. therefore that we cannot regard our best MSS as decisive on such questions, except as far as we may see reason to there were

;

when

times

trust their general accuracy in grammatical tradition. be justified in printing liva eTriaKidaei in Ac

may

.

B and some

.

.

WH

5^'\

but the passage is wholly useless for any argument as to the use of Iva with a future. Or let us take the constructions of ov fir] as exhibited for text

after

cursives

;

WH

(MG). There are 71 occurrences with aor, 2 in and more which the -aco might theoretically be subj., these we find 8 cases of the future, and 15 future. Against in which the parsing depends on our choice between ei and i^. It is evident that editors cannot hope to decide here what was the autograph spelling. Even supposing they had the autograph before them, it would be no evidence as to the To this we may author's grammar if he dictated the text. add that by the time N and B were written o and co were no longer distinct in pronunciation, which transfers two more in the concordance

cases to the

list of

the indeterminates.

It

is

not therefore

simply the overwhelming manuscript authority which decides "Without the help of the versions us for exoifiev in Eom 5^ and patristic citations, it would be diflicult to prove that the

orthography of the

MSS

is

really based on a very ancient

indeed quite possible that not distinguish o and co did pronunciation without his making a clear Tertius to lead, give sufficiently In all these matters we may fairly recognise a traditional interpretation.

the Apostle's

It

is

own

inquiry.^

and w were confused in various quarters before this date cf Schwyzer, Pergam. 95 Nachmanson, Magnet. 64 Thumb. Re^lenismus 143. We have '

:

;

;


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

36

case nearly parallel with the editor's choice between such alternatives as TtVe9 and rive<i in Heb 3^", where the tradition

The modern expositor feels himself entirely decide according to his view of the context. to liberty in Eom, I.e., see below, (p. 110). choice our varies.

we make

Before Contributions f

NW Greek

n

'^

leave dialectology, it may be ^ a lew more remarks on 4--u the

i

i.

j?

nature of the contributions which

Some

at

On

we have

the importance of surprise may the elements alleged to have been brought into the language noted.

"

be

felt

at

^

which lies altogether outside The group embraces as its main constithe literary limits. tuents the dialects of Epirus, Aetolia, Locris and Phokis, and Achaia, and is known to us only from inscriptions, amongst by the

North-west Greek,"

which those

of

but

plur.

in

its

The

has been very marked.

very

last

to influence the resultant language,

soon observed that

it is

It is the

Delphi are conspicuous.

we should have expected

part (on Kretschmer's theory)

Achaian

characteristic

accus.

successfully established itself in the common presence in the vernacular of to-day sufficiently

-69

Greek, as its Its prominence in the papyri^ indicates that it was shows. a making good fight, which in the case of Tâ‚Źaaape<; had

already become a fairly assured victory. In the NT Teacrapa<; never occurs without some excellent authority for reaaape^i ^ :

WH A2yp 150.'^

cf

—

Moreover we

find that A, in

Eev

1^^,

has

aarepe^ -with omission of ex'^v, it is true, but this may well be an effort to mend the grammar. It is of course

but taking into account impossible to build on this example the obvious fact that the author of Eev was still decidedly ;

dypdfi/jbaTO'i

omena exhibit

in

Greek, and remembering the similar phen-

the

of

papyri, accusatives in

The

re'crcra/je?.

we might expect

middle

-e?,

and in

conjugation

his

autograph to

other

instances

of

is

el/j.t

beside

given

by

confusion of this very word in BIT 607 (ii/A.D.). Par P 40 (ii/s.c), vnth. &vtos, MaKedihvos, etc., shows us how early this begins with illiterates. See also p. 244. 1 Brugmann, Ghr. Gramm.^ 17. [" See jDp. 243 f. ^ See on XV. 34, 435, xviii. 109. I must acknowledge a curious mistake I

made

there in citing

Dr Thumb

for,

instead of against, Kretschmer's argument

on this point. 2

Jn 11"

.N

A Ac ;

2723

and Rev 9" n

;

Eev

4* n

A

(AVHmj?), 7'

A

bis

P

seviel.


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" GREEK.

NW

37

Kretscbmer as a Greek feature but the Dclpliiiiu i}Tat and eoivTUi are balanced by Messenian rjVTai. and Lesbian ea-ao, which looks as if some middle forms had existed in the earliest Greek. But the confusion of the -day and -eco verbs, which is frequent in the papyri ^ and NT, and is complete in MGr, may well have come from the Greek, though ;

NW

We cannot attempt here to discuss the encouraged by Ionic. question between Thumb and Kretscbmer; but an a 2'>'riori argument might be found for the latter in the well-known between

fact that

iii/

and

i/B.c.

the political importance of

Aetolia and Achaia produced an Achaian-Dorian Koivq, which yielded to the wider Koivrj about a hundred years before Paul it seems antecedently probable that this began to write would leave some traces on that which superseded it. Possibly the extension of the 3rd plur. -aav, and even :

dialect

the perfect -av, is

may

also Boeotian.

common

be due to the same source

The

^ :

the former

peculiarities just mentioned have in

their sporadic acceptance in the Hellenistic of i/A.D.,

which is just what we should expect where a dialect like this contended for survival with one that had already spread over a The elements we have tentatively set down very large area. Greek secured their ultimate victory through to the The fusion of -dw and -e'tu verbs their practical convenience. two grammatical categories which served no amalgamated The acous. in -e? useful purpose by their distinctness.

NW

reduced the number of case-forms to be remembered, at the cost of a confusion which English bears without difficulty,

and even Attic bore the

other

novelties

in TroXet?, /SacrtXet?, TrXe/'ouv, etc. while both reduced the tale of equivalent ;

and (in the case of -aav) provided a useful means of distinction between 1st sing, and 3rd plur We come to securer ground when we and of Ionic, gg^-^^^^^g ^^^ p^^.^ taken by Ionic in the formation of the Koivi], for here Thumb and Kretscbmer suffixes

The former shows that we cannot safely trace of some any feature of Common Greek to the influence are at one.

1

-Tjffo,

'

CR xv. 36, 435, xviii. 110. Thumb suggests that the common aor. in started the process of fusion. The -ffixv suffix is found in Delphian (Valaori, Ddj^h. Dial. 60) rather proThe case for -av (ibid.) is weaker. both in indie, and See

minently,

opt.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

38

particular dialect, unless it appears in that dialect as a distinct new type, and not a mere survival. The nouns in -a9 -aBo^;

and

-0U9 -ovSo'i are

MGr

debt of

to

recognised as a clear elements in the Koivrj. Like the

this principle

by

Ionic

which came from a single ancient dialect, had to We find them in the they struggle for existence. Greek but in NT the makes -a9 Egyptian gen. -a, as often even in Asia Minor, where naturally -aho'i was at home.^ Kretschmer gives as Ionic factors in the Koivri the forms KiOoiv ( = ')(iToiiv) and the like,^ psilosis (which the lonians shared with their Aeolic neighbours), the uncontracted noun and verb forms already alluded to, and the invasion of the other elements

;

verbs by thematic forms (contract or ordinary).^ He explains the declension (nrelpa <77relp'r]<; (normal in the Koivrj from i/B.C.) as due not to lonism, but to the analogy of <y\wacra -fiL

To his argument on this point we might add the consideration that the declension -pd -pr)<i is both earlier and more stable than -via -VLr]<i, a difference which I would connect

<y\(i)aar]<;.

with the fact that the combination

when

irj

continued to be barred

(from pFd) was no longer objected to (contrast vyta and Kopr]) if Ionic forms had been simply taken over, elSvcr]<i would have come in as early as cyrrelprj'i.

in Attic at a time

pr]

:

Did

But such discussion may be

dialectic

What

pj^Hoiogical journals.

differences

left to

the

concerns the

NT

,

student

is the question of dialectic varieties within the Kolvi] itself rather than in its

persist?

previous history. features in Asia

1 But -d8os is Nachmanson 120.

Ai-e

Minor

;

rare both at

we

to

and

will the

expect

Pergamum and

persistence

Greek

at

of

of

Ionic

Egypt, Syria,

Magnesia: Schwyzer 139

f.,

"

and it is rather Kt^cii', Kvdpa and ivBavTa occur not seldom in papyri MSS. I can only find in Ti curious that they are practically absent from XeLdQiva-i D* (Mt 10") and wrwi^as B* (Mk 1463_"ut alibi .v," says the editor). ;

NT

'Kvdpa

occurs in Clem.

found in 160 f.

MGr

(as

Roin.

Abbott 56)

17 I

fin.

(see

Lightfoot).

cannot trace, nor

which is Cf Hatzidakis

Bci^/jaKos,

iradv-i].

^ The perfect 'iuKa from tiqixi (NT dcpiuvrai.) is noted as Ionic rather than Since this was a prehistoric form (cf Doric by Thumb, ThLZ xxviii. 421 n. Gothic saisu from sam, "sow"), we cannot determine the question certainly. But note that the imperative dcpewcrdo} occurs in an Arcadian inscription (Michel

585'^

—

iii/?B.c.).

really existed in

more easily understood, if it classical period. [" Sec p. 244.

Its survival in Hellenistic is the

two or three dialects of the


COMMON" GREEK.

HISTORY OF THE

39

Macedonia, and Italy differ to an extent which we can detect after two thousand years ? Speaking generally, we may Dialectic differences there must have reply in the negative.

But they been in a language spoken over so large an area. need not theoretically be greater than those between British and American English, to refer again to the helpful parallel we examined above (p. 19). We saw there that in the modern Weltsprachc the educated colloquial closely approximates everywhere when written down, differing locally to some extent, but in vocabulary and orthography rather than The uneducated vernacular differs more, but in grammar. show least in the grammar. The study still its differences the and of the papyri Koivrj inscriptions of Asia Minor disThere closes essentially the same phenomena in Hellenistic. NT in which the differs of few are language grammar points from that which we see in other specimens of Common Greek vernacular, from whatever province derived. We have already mentioned instances in which what may liave been quite overworked because it happens possible Hellenistic is heavily to coincide with a Semitic idiom. Apart from these, we have a few small matters in which the NT differs from the The weakening of ov ixr] is the most usage of the papyri. for of these, certainly the papyri lend no coun•important tenance whatever to any theory that ov fi^ was a normal

unemphatic negative in Hellenistic. at a later stage (see pp. ou fi/] that in the

NT

—

Greek" can be suspected show "translation

which

is

common

to

We

shall return to this

but meanwhile we may note seems nearly always connected with the places where no Semitic original

187

it

ff.)

;

only in the very emphatic sense

and Hellenistic

classical

use.

Among

smaller points are the NT of penalty, and the prevailing

construction of evoxo^ with gen. use of a-jreKpid'nv for aireKpL-

vdfirjv

with

in both of these the papyri wholly or mainly agree but that in the latter case the the classical :

usage; has good Hellenistic warrant, is shown by Phrynichus 186 ff.), by the witness of Polybius, and (see Eutherford, iVP by the MGr airoKpiOrjKa.

NT

The Thumb's Verdict.

summed up

whole question

^^^^^^ ^.^^^.^

by our

^^^^

of

dialectic differ-

^p^^.^^ j^^^^^

greatest living

authority,

-^

judicially

Dr Albert


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

40

in chap. v. of his book on Grcch in the HelHe thinks that such Age, ah^eady often quoted.^ differences must have existed largely, in Asia Minor especially

Thumb, lenistic

;

but that writings like the Greek Bible, intended for general circulation, employed a DurchseJinittsprache which avoided local

though intended for single localities. (The letters Paul are no exception to this rule, for he could not be familiar with the peculiarities of Galatian or Achaian, still peculiarities,

of

less of

Eoman,

Kotvr}.)

To the question whether our autho-

speaking of a special Alexandrian Greek, For nearly all the practically returns a negative. /purposes of our own special study, Hellenistic Greek may be rities are right in

Thumb

Y^

f /

13

I

*

regarded as a unity, hardly varying except with the education of the writer, his tendency to use or ignore specialities of

and the degree of his dependence upon which foreign originals might be either freely or slavishly literary language,

rendered into the current Greek.

however to be noted that the minute dialectic which can be detected in NT Greek are sometimes significant to the literary critic. In an article in It

is

differences

ThLZ, 1903,

p.

421,

Thumb

calls attention

to

the promin-

He tells us iixo^ in Jn, as against fiov elsewhere.^ that ijjio'i and its like survive in modern Pontic-Cappadocian ence of

Greek, while the gen. of the personal pronoun has replaced it in other parts of the Greek-speaking area. This circumstance contributes something to the evidence that the Fourth

We might add that on the Gospel came from Asia Minor. same showing Luke should come from Macedonia, or some other country outside Asia Minor, for he hardly uses e/A09 while Eev, in which out of the four possessive pronouns e/409 alone occurs, and that but once, seems to be from the pen of ;

a recent immigrant. Valeat quantum ! Thumb shows that the infinitive still

1

Cf Blass 4

in

Pontic,

n.

"

'E/x6s occui's

the rest of the

In the same paper survives

36 times in Jn, once eacli in 3 Jn and Rev, and 34 times in It must be admitted that the other possessives do not tell

NT.

the same story the three together appear 11 times in Jn (Ev and Epp), 12 in Blass (p. 168) notes how vixQiv in Paul (in the Lk, and 21 in the rest of NT. :

position of the attribute) ousts the emphatic 170-01; oi;o-ta, Mitliraslit. p. 17 and note.)

v/j-erepos.

(For that position cf


HISTORY OF THE "COMMON" GREEK.

41

while in Greece proper

it yields entirely to the periphrasis. conditions under which the infinitive is found syntactical in Pontic answer very well to those which appear in the NT: in

The

such uses Western Greek tended to enlarge the sphere of tW. This test, applied to Jn, rather neutralises that from eVo<f see below, p. 205, 211. Probably the careful study of local

:

MGr

patois will reveal

more

of these minutiae.

Another

field

by the orthographical peculiarities of the NT uncials, which, in comparison with the papyri and of the MS8, and inscriptions, will help to fix the provenance

for research is presented

thus supply criteria for that localising of textual types which an indispensable step towards the ultimate goal of criticism.^

is

this direction are given by Thumb, Hcllenismus K. Lake's remarks on the problems awaiting us iu textual See also p. 244. criticism, in his inaugural lectui-e at Leiden (Oxford, 1904). 1

One

179.

Of

or

two hints in

Prof.


CHAPTER

III.

Notes on the Accidence. Before we begin

examine the conditions i Hellenistic syntax, we must devote a the Pauvri short chapter to the accidence. To treat the forms in any detail would be obviously out of place in these Prolegomena. The humble but necessary work of The Uncials and

^

rr

^^

^-

to

i.

i.

i.

gathering into small compass the accidence of the NT writers I have done in my little Introduction (see above, p. 1 n.) and ;

have to be done again more minutely in the second of this Grammar. In the present chapter we shall try part

it

will

to prepare ourselves for

answering a preliminary question

of

great importance, viz., what NT writers between the literary and illiterate Greek of their

was the position occupied by the

purpose the forms give us a more easily than the syntax. But before we can use them we must make sure that we have them substantially as they

For

time.

this

applied test

stood in the autographs.

and

D

still

more

—have

—

May not such MSS as N and B conformed their orthography to the

" the " Syrian revision conformed it in some respects to the literary standards ? cannot give a universal answer to this question, for we have seen already that an artificial orthography left the door open

popular

style, just

as

those

of

We

few uncertainties. But there are some suggestive that the signs great uncials, in this respect as in others, are not far away from the autographs. very instructive phenomenon is the curious substitution of idv for av for not a

A

WH

which have faithfully reproduced numberless places from the MSS. This was so little recognised as a genuine feature of vernacular Greek, that the after 09, ottov, etc., in

volumes of papyri began by gravely subscribing wherever the abnormal edv showed itself. They

editors of the " 1.

dv

"


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE.

43

were soon compelled to save themselves the trouble. Deissmann, BS 204, gave a considerable list from the papyri, which abundantly proved the genuineness of this edv; and four

years

that

it

later

was

(1901) the material had grown to

possible

determine

peculiarity with fair certainty.

If

the

so

time-limits

count

my

B.C.

:

76:9

for

9:3

ii/,

for

4:8

iii/,

for

the

right,^ the

is

proportion of edv to dv is 13 29 in papyri dated proportion was soon reversed, the figures being i/A.D.,

much of

25:7

The for

This edv

iv/.

occurs last in a vi/ papyrus. It will be seen that the above construction was specially common in and when edv i/

ii/,

greatly predominated, and that the fashion had almost died It seems away before the great uncials were written.

that in this originals

small

the

point

under

written

uncials

conditions

faithfully reproduce obsolete.^ This

long

but we particular example aflbrds us a very fair test reinforce it with a of cases where the MSS may variety ;

accurately reproduce the spelling of i/A.D. the order of the material in App 141

WH

We ff.

will follow

("Notes on

Orthography ") it is unnecessary to give detailed references papyrus evidence, which will be found fully stated We must bear in the papers from CR, already cited. :

for the

mind throughout Hort's caution

in

MSS

have to a greater or

CR

1

XV. 32, XV. 434

subsequently read. further on p. 234. 2 The case of av,

I

:

foi"

am

less

the exx. B.C.

sorry I caiuiot

(p.

141) that "all our

extent suffered from the

I

have added

now complete

from papyri the statistics. See figures

In the NT this is confined apparently to Jn, In the papyri it is decidedly a symptom of illiteracy. With this agrees what Meisterhaiis^ 255 f. says: "Only six times is cfc found The form av is entirely foreign to the Attic inscripfrom v/ to iii/B.C. tions, though it is often found in the lonicising literary i)rose of v/ Since 6.v is the modern form, we may of the Tragedians)." (Thucydides

where

it

if, is

separate.

occurs six times.

:

perhaps regard it as a dialectic variant which ultimately ousted the Attic i&v. It is not clear to what dialect it is to be assigned. Against Meisterhans' suggestion of Ionic stands the opinion of H. W. Smyth (Ionic Dialect, p. 609) that

its

occasional appearances in Ionic are due to Atticising Certainly S.v may have been Ionic as well, though rarer. !

the normal Ionic form, but

r)v is

(So gives iav as the only form from Magnesia. Some peculiar local distribution is needed to explain why 6.v (if) is absent Both from the incorrectly written Rev, and reserved for the correct Jn. av and idv are found promiscuously in the Herculaneum rolls (Crbnert

Mr

P. Giles.)

130).

Nachmanson

(p. 68)


A GRAMMAR OF NEAV TESTAMENT GREEK.

44

Note also his show the reverse common life, which to a

effacement of unclassical forms of words."

statement

that

the

"

Western

"

MSS

"The orthography of tendency. certain extent was used by all the writers of the

NT, though

degrees, would naturally be introduced more freely in texts affected by an instinct of popular adaptation." He would be a bold man who should claim that even Hort iu

unequal

has said the last word on the problem of the S-text; and with our new knowledge of the essentially popular character

NT

of Greek as a whole, we shall naturally pay special attention to documents which desert the classical spelling for that which we find prevailing in those papyri that were

written by men of education approximately parallel with that of the apostolic writers. «

,

,

.

Orthography.

We forms

»

"

unusual aspirated begin with the . i^ox 'jl' '^ /O' 's^' (p. 143), e^ eXTnoc etc., kuU ibiav, /

's:

For all these there is a large etc., and ov-^^ 6X1709.* There are a body of evidence from papyri and inscriptions. good many other words affected thus, the commonest of which, eVo?, shows no trace of the aspiration in NT uncials. Sins of commission as well as omission seem to be inevitable when initial h has become as weak as in later Greek or in cicptBe

modern English. Hence in a period when de-aspiration was the prevailing tendency, analogy produced some cases of

Kad' eVo? due to kuO^ rjixepav, acpiBe and the two types struggled for survival. shows that the aspirated form did not always

reaction, etc.

^

;

to

acpopav,

MGr

icjiiro

yield.

The

MS

uncertainty of the spelling thus naturally follows from the history of the aspirate. It is here impossible to determine the spelling of the autographs, but the wisdom of following the

The reverse great uncials becomes clearer as we go on. phenomenon, psilosis, exx. of which figure on p. 144, is part of the general tendency which started from the Ionic and Aeolic of Asia Minor and became universal, as MGr shov/s. The mention of Ta/meiov (p. 146 add Trelv from '

^ The curious coincidence that many, but by no means all, of these Avords once began with F, led to the fancy (repeated by Hort) that the lost consonant had to do with the aspiration. I need not stay to explain why this cannot be accepted. The explanation by analogy within the Koivi^ is that

favoured by

Thumb.

(See additional note, p. 234.)

["

See p. 244.


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE. p.

45

170) brings up a universal law of Hellenistic phonology, the coalescence of two successive i sounds the inf. Scacrelv

viz.

for -aeUiv

avaal

(L2g

Lk 23^

in

:

Tafielov, irelv

t^.^

will serve as a good

i/B.c.)

and

v'^eia

cf example are overwhelm-

ingly attested by the papyri, where there are exx. of the curious reversion seen in Mt 20^-,

(Mk V^

we have

al)

Under the head to

dissimilation

MSS

common movable

at 1

Cf

natural.

Co

-'^vvvco

p.

may be worth while even in a verse citation, as in accord with an exceedingly

pronunciation makes this Among the spellings recorded on

nasal in

a(f)vpL<i,

yevrj/na

(vegetable product), and while the wavering of

as well attested in the papyri

usage between pp and istic

akeel<;

of this

15^^, is

49 below.

148 we note ^

In

contraction.

The presence or absence of practice in inscriptions. v (pp. 146 f.) cannot be reduced to any visible rule:

the evanescence of the

p.

of

of Elision (p. 146), it

mention that the neglect

in the

instead

only rare

The case

MGr.^

to

pa- is traceable

;

down through Hellen-

the spelling apa^cov

of

("only

Deissmann (^>S^ 183) gives but one ex. of the pp form, and nine of the single consonant, His natural questioning of Hort's from three documents. is curiously discounted by the more recently orthography " " published papyri, which make the totals 1 1 for the Western and 15 for pp^ The word will serve as a reminder that

Western")

is

instructive.

only the unanimity of the papyri can make us really sure The of our autographs' spelling: cf Deissmann, BS 181.

wavering

of

inscriptional testimony as to Zfxupva

{ib.

185)

impossible to be decisive but the coincidence of Smyrntean coins makes it seem " difficult to reject the witness " Western taint. In words with aa the of i«, on suspicion of

makes

it

;

papyri show the Attic tt in about the same small proportion the NT uncials, and with much the same absence of

as

13^* SD, also banned as Western ") has some papyrus warrant, and survives in the It started (Cappadocian) opvLX- cf Thumb, ffellen. 90. Teaa-aand on note to the in Doric Greek. reaa-ape<; Coming inteUigible

"Opvc^ (Lk

principle.

"

MGr

1

Correct Ti in

2

So

2

loc.

MGr (Cyprus), Thumb I.e. 422.

I

owe the

says

ref.

Thumb *

in

to Buresch

EhM xlvi.

ThLZ xxviii.

213

n.

423.

C'R xv. 33, since supplemented.


A GRAMMAK OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

46

paKovra

we meet our first dissonance between NT The e forms are in the latter relatively

150),

(p.

uncials and papyri.

and distinctly

few,

illiterate, in

the

first

centuries a.d.

Indeed

the evidence for reaaepa or riaaepa'i is virtually nil before the Byzantine age,^ and there does not seem to be the smallest probability that the Apostles wrote anything but For reaaepuKovra the case is a little better, the Attic form.

but it is hopelessly outnumbered by the -ap- form in documents antedating the NT uncials the modern aepdvra, side by side with aapavra, shows that the strife continued. No doubt before iv/A.D. Teaaepe'i -a (not Teaaepwv) had begun to ;

establish themselves in the place they hold to-day.

from

certain

is

onward

i/A.D.

;2

'Epavudco

and Deissmann (ÂŁS 182)

gives a iv/A.D. papyrus parallel for i^yapevo) (X his, B semel). Spellings like Kpi/xa (p. 150) are supported by a great multiplication

in

Kotvr]

penultimate. 'EXk'r]vLKOi<i

Even

how

;

documents

Cf Moeris

of -/xa

nouns with shortened

28), dvadrjixa ^Attlko)'^, avdde/xa 2 d(jiâ‚Źupefjba his in Par P 6

and note

(p.

(ii/B.c).

(Tvcnep,a is found (not "^crvaTa/jia), Gen late and mechanical this process was.

1^^,

which shows

The convenient

^ meaning between dvdOrjfxa and dvade/ia preserved the former intact, though xADX are quotable for The complete estabthe levelling in its one NT occurrence. lishment of el jjirjv by the papyri is an interesting confirmation of the best uncials. Despite Hort (p. 151), we must make " the difference between el jirjv and rj fjbrjv strictly orthograph" after all, if the alternative is to suppose any connexion ical

differentiation of

with tion

^

"

also

Numerous

el, if.

early citations

On

impossible*

and

ei

l

(p.

make

assump153) the papyri are

Tiacrapes ace. is another matter : see above, p. 36. Whether it was general in the Koipr) is doubtful.

Par P 60-

note also

(ii/B.c.

Thumb,

?),

Tb P

Hcllcn. 176

38

f.,

MGr

has ^pevva

:

cf

BhM

See Buresch, xlvi. 213 f.; but disposes of the notion that it was an

{ib.).

who

this last

Kretschmer, BLZ, 1901, p. 1049, brings j^arallels from Thera See papyrus citations in CR xv. 34, xviii. 107. (ai)- in compounds of eC). ^ Deissmann has recently shown that dvaOe/xa, curse, is not an innovation of

Alexandrinism.

"Biblical Greek"

(ZNTJF ii.

342).

have 8 exx. from papyri between ii/u.c. and i/A.D. Still more decisive is the syntax of el fudv in a well-known Messenian inscription, dated 91 B.C. (Michel 694) opKt^ovTU) rbv yvvaLKOvSfioV el jxav e^etv eiritxiXeiav, kt\. (The same inscription has the form etrev for eTra, found in Mk 4^^. ) *

I

:


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE.

47

ei even for l is an entirely indecisive everyday occurrence. rate they give no encouragement to our :

At any

introducing

WH

and yeivcoaKco, as would mere impressions, yivofiai is at

yeivofiai

from

like

to do

least as

to judge as

:

common

This matter of the notorious equivalence of

jeLvo/xai.

et

adduced by Thumb (reviewing Blass^, ThLZ, 1903, 421) as a specimen of philological facts which are not always he cites present to the minds of theological text-critics Brooke and M'Lean (JTS, 1902, 601 ff.), who seriously treat

and

t

is

:

LXX

various readings deserving a place in the Ti did the same in Eev, where even (see App 162) marked iSov, etc., as alternative. In this matter no reader iSev, cSov, as

WH

text.

much store by some of the which so conscientiously gather from the great It would probably be safer in general to uncials. spell for even admit that their paraaccording to tradition of

the papyri would care to set

WH

minutiffi

WH

;

mount

"

authority on behalf of ei as be mentioned a notable matter against Finally might of pronunciation to which Hort does not refer. The less educated papyrus writers very frequently use a for av, before witness, B,

has

little

i."

Its frequent appearance in consonants, from i/B.c. onwards.^ Attic inscriptions after 74 B.C. is noted by Meisterhans^

In Lk 2^ (Ayovarov) this pronunciation shows itself, but we do not seem to find dro^, earov, according to XC* J An excellent etc., in the MSS, as we should have expected.^ 154.

;

suggestion

is

made by Dr

up one

following

of

J. B.

Hort's

—

Mayor

that

{Expos,

vi. x.

d.Kara'Trdarov';

in

289) 2

—

Pet

AB may

be thus explained: he compares d-^firjpoj V^ A. In arguing his case, he fails to see that the dropping of a u but (or rather F) between vowels is altogether another thing his remaining exx. (to which add those cited from papyri in 2^'*

;

CR XV. 33, 434, xviii. 107) are enough to prove his point. Laurent remarks (BCff, 1903, p. 356) that this phenomenon was common in the latter half of I/b.c. We need not assume its

existence in the

NT

autographs.

1 The same tendency appeared in late vulgar Latin, and perpetuated itself Romance see Lindsay, Latin Language 41 f. 2 In MGr (see Thumb, Handhuch, p. 59) we find airbs (pronounced aft6s) side by side with dros (obsolete except in Pontus), whence the sliort form t6,

in

etc.

:

There was therefore a grammatical difference in the

Ko^v-f] itself.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

48

Inflexion

:

We

pass on to the noun flexion (p. 156). " i li -vta JNouns in -pa and participles the form and dative in papyri regularly genitive

-vt

Nonns

m

m •

.-i

except that -via?, -via are still found in the Ptolemaic Here again the oldest uncials alone and even they period. are not without lapses support the unmistakable verdict of -7)<;

-7],

We

saw reason the contemporary documents of the Koivi]. as the assimilation of this to analogical regard (above, p. 38)

somewhat later and less -pa nouns (and other -a flexions of the to the participles) rather than as an Ionic survival.

markedly first

via

declension,

We may add that as /jid-^acpa

on the model of So^a

S6^r]<;, so, by a produced fu,axci^pv^ reverse analogy process, the gen. Nv/jb(pr]<; as a proper name produced what may be read as Nv/jucpa Nv/jb(f)av in nom. and

the best reading of Col 4^^ {avTi)<=; B) may thus stand, without postulating a Doric Nv/jbcf)dv, the improbability of

ace.

:

The heteroclite which decides Lightfoot for the alternative.^ and 3rd decl., are between 1st fluctuate which names, proper Critics, like paralleled by Egyptian place-names in papyri. documents has differentiated scent whose keen Clemen, by the

evidence of Avarpav and AvaTpoi,<; in Ac 14^-^ (see Knowling, UGT in loc), might be invited to track down the " redactor "

who presumably in

uov^wv

had

Mvpa

perhaps

Mt

GH

ace.

feel

perpetrated either KepKecrovxj}

46

(ii/A.D.).

-av and gen.

encouraged

or

Kep'^e-

Eamsay {Paul 129) shows that

thus

Uncritical people that Mt 2^

-cov.

to

believe

despite the heteroclisis, are from the same hand.*

2^,

variations between 1st

and 2nd

decl, in

words

may and The

like eKarovrap-

%09 (-779) are found passim in papyri for conscientious labour wasted thereon see Schmiedel's amusing note in his Preface :

WS.

to

nouns and adjectives we have like ocrrecdv, XP^<^^^^> 9,nd for forms for parallels of The good attestaapyvpdu). analogy (formed by In

contracted

abundant

Xpvadv

the type vo6<i vol, after the analogy of /3oi)9, The fact that we do not observed in passing.

tion of

be

short

forms

of

nouns in

-to9

-lov

(e.g.

Kvpt<;,

rrabhiv)

may find is

a

See the writer's paper in Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. Oct. 1893, p. 12, where Cf AoGXa as a is suggested as the connecting link. proper name (Dieterich, Unters. 172), and Wiprivix in a Christian inscr. (Ramsay, 1

the archaic vocative in -a C. tfc£.

ii.

497n.).

[«6Seep. 244.


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE. noteworthy

test

for the papyri

of

-10

the educational standard of the writers, as early as and always iii/]5.C.,

show them even

company with other indications of comparative illiteracy. These forms, the origin of which seems to me as perplexed as ever, despite the various efforts of such scholars as Thumb, in

Hatzidakis, and

Brugmann

unravel

to

won

ultimately

it,

a

We must not omit monopoly, as MGr shows everywhere. " Mixed Declension," which arose from mention of the analogies in the -d- and -o- nouns, and spread rapidly because The stem especially for foreign names. vowel or diphthong, which receives -9 for nom. and -V for ace, remaining unchanged in voc, gen. and dat. It sing. 'It]crov^ is the most conspicuous of many NT exx. in MGr.^ over the exact a Passing lightly large part plays correspondence between uncials and papyri in the accusatives of its convenience,

ends in a long

and

of /cXetV

157),

%a/ct9 (p.

we may pause on %etpay

in

The great frequency of this formation in uneducated papyri, which adequately foreshadows its victory in MGr," naturally produced sporadic examples in our MSS, but it is not at all likely that the autographs showed it (unless

Jn

20^^ x'^AB.

Gregory (in Ti, vol. iii. 1 1 8 f.) registers possibly in Eev). forms like acr^akrjv and 7roSi]pr]v, which also have papyrus from the analogy parallels, but could be explained more easily of 1st decl. nouns.

Mei^wv

ace.

5^"^

(Jn

ABEGMJ)

is

a good

have example been added after long vowels almost as freely as the equally One further noun calls for comment, viz., unpronounced i.^ The noun iXaicov = olivetum 'EXai,covo<i in Ac l^MP- 158). occurs nearly thirty times in papyri between i/ and iii/A.D., of

the irrational addition of

v,

which seems

to

which prompts surprise at Blass's continued scepticism. 'EXiKcov (salicetum) is an ancient example of the turning of a similar word into a proper name.^

1

See

-

It

CR

xviii. 109,

Kiihner-Blass ยง 136.

seems most probable that the See

started witli this accusative.

the pronunciation of =*

Thus aXwt

is

modem

levelling of 1st

Thumb, ffandbuch

CE

and 3rd also p.

decl.

IS for

-v final.

ace. sing.

,

while

tjv

{

=

r))

is

sometimes subjunctive.

So lia-a iav 9ji> in Gen 6"E. *See Deissmami, BS 208 ff., and the addenda in See also p. 214. 429 ; also below, pp. 69 and 235.

exx. see

28, 35;

For

xviii. 108.

Exjjos. vi. vii. Ill, viii.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

50

Two

curious indeclinables meet us periodamong the adjectives. UXrjprj'i should

ica-^lj

Adiect-ves

Mk

be read in

(ÂŤAC*^DEHP Cf 2 Jns

(L),

al.),

and

Mk

8^^^

is

Ac

(C^% Hort) and

42s

6^

probably to be recognised in Jn 1^*. al), Ac 6^ al.) ID^s

(AFGM NT

(AEHP

occurrence of an oblique case (AEL 13). Thus in every of this word we meet with the indeclinable form in good

The papyrus

citations for this^ scarcely begin, howand we cannot well credit educated ii/A.D. writers with such a form. We may probably assume that in Jn 1^* an original ifKrjpr] was corrupted to the vulgar B. Weiss and others would make irXijpi]'; in an early copy. the adj. depend in sense upon aurov, but So^av seems more appropriate, from the whole trend of the sentence it is the uncials.

before

ever,

;

:

"

"

glory

or

"

self-revelation

"

of the

Word

that

"

is

full

of

grace and truth." One might fairly doubt whether expositors would have thought of making Kal eOeaad^eOa irarpo^ a parenthesis, had it not been for the supposed necessity of .

construing

TrX^jprj^;

as a nominative.

We may

.

.

regard

D

as

having either preserved or successfully restored the original

The other indeclinables in question are TrXelco reading here.^ and the other forms in -to from the old comparative base in Cronert (in Philologus Ixi. 161 ff.) has shown how -yos. frequently in papyri and even in literature these forms are used, like irki^prj'i and ij/xLav, without modification for case. In Mt 26-^^ we have a good example preserved in nBD, the

MSS

later

duly mending the grammar with TrXetbu?.

possible that the false reading in original /xei^o) of this kind

Many more noun

Jn

Is it

10^^ started from an

?

forms might be cited in which

the

MSS

prove to have retained the genuine Hellenistic, as evidenced by the papyri but these typical examples will serve. ;

XV. 35, 435, xviii. 109. See also C. H. Turner in JTS i. 120 iT. and Radermaclier in FihUflvil 151 Eeinliold 53. LPc (ii/n.c.) is the onlyknow, eai'lier than ii/A.D. It may very well be original in Mk.

GE

1

561

f.

ex. I

;

;

^

"Winer, p. 705, compares the "grammatically independent" ir'Krfprjs clanse with the nom. seen in Phil 3", Mk 12'*''. W. F. Moulton makes no remark there, l)ut in the note on Jn 1^* (Milligan-MoTilton in loc.) he accepts the construction found in the RV, or permits his colleague to do so. At that date the case for the indeclinable ttXij/jtjs was before him only in the LXX (as Job 21^^

nBAC).

See also p. 244.


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE.

51

Verbs naturally supply yet more abundant material, but we need not cite it fully here. Pursuing the order of A]')}'', ^® pause a moment on the dropped augments, xr

WH

h

etc.,

in pp.

161

f.,

which are well

in papyri.

"^

^ Common

Augments.

/^,

-rx-

i

,

,,

,

show the tendency it is not Drs Grenfell and Hunt would now,

likely, for

:

of direKaTeaTadi] in papyri trifle

under

on.

and

t.

NT may

The double be noted as

augments before satisfactory confirmation

this

Very

'

head

example, that

the editio princeps call olKoSofjL7)fj.evr] a

the Oxyrhynchus Logia (1897, p. 7), " serious error than ai for e or ei for

a suggestive

,

as in

more

augment

,,

Diphthongs are naturally the

tTreek.

first to

of "

illustrated

This phenomenon goes back to Herodotus, and may well be a contribution of Ionic to the

of

we of

pass our

is supplied by the personThe functionally useless difference endings. and the weak aorist began to between the strong ending

uncial tradition

,.

of

disappear in our period.

Tlie strong aorist act. or mid. is

in only found in some thirty -w verbs (and their compounds) the NT and while the great frequency of their occurrence of protected the root-form, the overwhelming predominance the sigmatic aorist tended to drive off the field its rival's ;

The limits of this usage in the NT text are person-endings. Thus we with the better-written papyri. in accord entirely

encouragement for ^evdixevo^^ for which any number But when we notice 'yeva papyrus citations may be made. in BU 1033 (ii/A.D.) corrected to ^evo ... by a second .]

find little of [.

.

hand,2

we

rebelled against this developwith the Attic etTra? centuries before.

see that education

ment, which had begun

still

The tendency, in fairly cultured speech, mainly concerned the For the details see the careful act., and the indie, middle. Whether the same intrusion should note in WS p. 111. there is no furtlier uncial B, and Mk G^s and \b^- A in a total of 40 occurthroughout Mt, Mk, and Lk, The ptc. does not occur in Jii. I have not looked further. rences. 2 D„) is perhaps due to the frequency EupdMefos in Heb Q^- (all uncials except The ptc. itself appears in an inscr. of the Roman age, of 1st aor. in -pa. I?JJ iii. 1119. P. Buttmann cites Yei'd^fos from Archimedes (iii/i;.c.), though 2i3 ft'.) Wilamowitz-Mollendorf in his extracts from the Psammites {Lcsehich But in a Doric author the question concerns us seven times. edits 1

So Lk

22-*-'

support, if Ti

N,

Lk 24-

:

is reliable,

yevSfievos

little.

MGr

shows that

yevdp.euos

came

to stay.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

52

be allowed in the imperf.,

e.g.

Mk

el^av

doubtful, in

8^, is

It is for the view of the scanty warrant from the papyri. same reason more than doubtful whether we can accept TrapeXd^oaav 2 Th 3*^ n*AD''^ I have only 4 imperf. and :

2 aor. exx. from Ptolemaic

times,

and the forms iXafx^dB.C. cited by

veaav and dcplXeaav (BM 18, 41, 161 91 n.^) show that the innovation had

—

WM

not attained great

The ocular confusion suggested by Hort would be furthered by the later currency of this

fixity before I/a.d.

in 2

Th

I.e.

convenient ending. writer

kBL

Paul's

of

etc.)

and

;

What we

culture

is

iSoXiova-av

a

Kom

find

it

little

3^^

hard to allow in a easier

Jn

in

(IS^^-^*

(LXX) might have been

—

by Paul himself, apart from quotation we can hardly any other 3 pi. imperf. from -ow verbs. As as we find r/^tovcrav in Marjn. 47 see Nachearly ii/B.c. The -e? of 2 sg. perf., read manson's parallels, pp. 148 f. in 1st aor. Kev 2^ may 2^-^ and in Eev 11^'^, by as a of imperfect Greek in Eev mark be allowed perhaps The it has no warrant from educated writing outside.^ 3 pi. perf. in -av is well attested in Ac 16^*^ and Ko 16'^ written

cite

:

WH

:

kAB, Lk

936

BLX, Col

s*ABCD*P,

2^

as well as in Jn, Jas

It certainly makes and Eev, where it raises less difficulty. a fair show in the papyri, even as early as the Ptolemaic period, but not in documents which would encourage us to As the only difference between receive it for Luke or Paul. -acri was foredoomed to yield to 1 the and aor.-endings, perf. the assimilating tendency but possible occurrences of -av are relatively so few, and the witness of the papyri so dubious, ;

it a vulgarism If it were an early scribe.^ as Sextus Empiricus says, we could really Alexandrian, but understand its comparative frequency in the papyri Thumb decisively rejects this (Hellenismus 170), on the

that

it

is

safer,

except in Eev, to suppose

due to the occasional lapse

of

;

ground

of its frequent

appearance elsewhere.^

The termina-

Even B sliows it, in Ac 21". Yeyovav formed the starting-point of a valuable paper Idj K. Burescli in EhM, 1891, pp. 193 ff., which should not be missed by the student of Hellenistic, though it needs some modification in the light of newer knowledge. Thus he '

-

accepts the Alexandrian provenance of this and the ^

At Delphi,

for

example, with imperf. and

-otra!'

type.

aor. -offav (see p. 37).


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE.

53

what is formally, though uot in meaning, a of rjKaa-i, which is a genuine vernacular case in the present, WII {AjJ}} 169) reject form (cf ijKUfiev in Par P 48 tion -aac invades

"

(ii/B.c.)).

"

Western

in

Mk

8^ regarding it as a paraphrase of elaiv (BLJ); but it must be observed tliat the Lewis Syriac is now to be added to xADN, with the Latin and It is after all a form other versions, which support it. which we might expect in Mk, and equally expect to find removed by revisers, whether Alexandrian or Syrian. By as

it

way

completing the person-endings, we

of

may

observe that

pluperf. act. has exclusively the later -eiv form, with ^ and that the 3 pi. imper. in -Tcoaav and -ei- even in 3 pi.

the

;

-aOodcrav are unchallenged.

Taking up the contract verbs, we note how the confusions between -dw and -eco forms (p. 166) are supported by our Our first serious revolt from external evidence, and by MGr. concerns the infinitive in -olv (and by analogy -av). The

WH

—

cf "small, but of good quality" (p. 166 in B*D to Mt B* in fact confined Introd. I 410): it is 13^^^ in 432, s* in 1 Pet 2^^ BD* in Heb 7^ (where see Ti), This evidence may pass if our and a lectionary in Lk 9^^

evidence for

it is

Mk

merely to reproduce the spelling of the age of B but absolutely no corroboration seems discoverable, earlier than the date of B itself, except an inscription cited in object

is

;

193),^ and a newly published papyrus, also Blass (p. 48) does not regard the form fromii/A.D., can quote against it from as established for the NT. a dozen examples of -ovv in papyri. (That -ovv and

Hatzidakis

(p.

PFi 24.

We

i-iv/A.D.

-av (not av) are the correct Attic forms, may be seen from Meisterhans^ 175 f., which Hort's hesitation as to -av

me

prompts

to

quote

:

for

the

reason

of

the apparent

Gramm:^ 61, or WS 42.) Brugmann, irregularity Next may be named, for -dw verbs, the 2nd sing. pres. mid. in Gr.

see

-daaL (Kavxdcrat,, ohvvdaai), which has been formed afresh Kolv^ with the help of the -aai that answers to 3rd

in the ^

Tliere are isolated exceptions in the papyri.

Two other inscriptions are cited by Hatzidakis, but So AVS 116 n. Vitelli (on PFi I.e.) refers to Ciunert 220 n., who corrects without dates. the form is of course a simple product of analogy— Schniiedel's pliilology 2

:

Xvei.

:

Xveiv

:

:

orjXol

:

OrjXo'ii'.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

54

sing. -Tat in the perfect.^

It

is

well paralleled by the early

Ptolemaic future )(apieiaai, for which

OP 292

^djeaai and

(i/A.D.).

irieaai,

'^apiecraL

appears in

which naturally went

together, give us the only exx. outside -dw verbs, to which the quotations in G. Meyer Gr. Gram?' 549 suggest that

The later extensions the innovation was mainly confined. in Hatzidakis be noted 188. Note the converse change may Unfortunately we do not seem to have exx. of the

in hvvrj.

parsing of Xva ^rfKovre and Blass (Kuhner^ i. 2. 587, and Gr. 48) (p. 167). view the subj. of these verbs became Hort's that accepts identical with the indie, just as it always was in the -atu of

subj.

-0(0

verbs, to help the

the like

verbs.

W.

(See

F.

Moulton's note,

WM

363.

Ex

l^e ^Vai/

a very good example.) oxtl, fiacovaOe But Blass rightly, I think, rejects the supposition that euoScoTat (1 Co 16^) can be anything but a pres. subj. To read evoBcorai, as perf. indie, is possible, though the editors .

.

kuI

.

there cited,

is

seem

by their printing to have favoured that That it is a perf. subj. is extremely unlikely. The parallels on which Hort (p. 172) relies set forth with do important additions in Blass's Kiihner i. 2. 100 f. it had to make that the Koivrj nothing likely any perf. subj. It is hard, apart from the ordinary periphrastic form.^ do

not

alternative.

—

moreover, to see

Dr

see

why

the pres. subj.

Findlay's note in

loc.

is

{EGT

—

not satisfactory here vol.

ii.).

:

Finally we

the disappearance of the -rjoi verbs from the Koivrj, with the exception of ^i-joi and ^pjyo/iat ^ (as we ought to call

note

them) iSeero

;

also

Lk

8^^

the sporadic appearance of the uncontracted (B and a few others -ecTo, which looks like a

It is supported by Esth 14=^ A, BU 926 correction). (H/a.d.) and the Mithras Liturgy (p. 12): it is probably, as Blass suggests, a mere analogy-product from Seofiat conjugated ^ To suppose this (or (pdyeffai, similarly formed from (pdyeraL) a genuine survival of the pre-Greek -esai, is characteristic of the antediluvian philology which still frequently does duty for science in this country. Krumbacher, xxvii. 497, scoffs at E. Curtius for talking of an "uralte" -(xai.

KZ

would demand a very technical discussion. It is enough and fiefivw/xai. are not derivative verbs, and that the three derivative verbs which can be quoted, from Doric, Cretan and 2

To argue

this

to say that the Attic KeKrQfiai

Ionic respectively, supply slender justification for the sui^jjosed Koij'^ parallel. ^ XpS.a6aL was the Hellenistic infin., but there is no example of it in NT,


NOTES ON THE ACCIDENCE.

55

It affordg no Xvoixat^ and owes uothiiig to Ionic. warrant for suspecting uucontracted forms elsewliere Kare'^eev Mk 14^ is an aor., as in Attic. like

:

The verbs the

in

of

process

continued in Hellenistic to suffer from

-/^t

gradual

Homeric Greek, and

extinction

which

MGr

eliminated

in

has

even

began

in

every form outside the verb "be." The papyri agree with the NT uncials in showing „ , » forms like Bvvouat and Verbs in -/xi. ,^ /?. x -ed€To well as -edoTo), and various (as flexions after contract verb types. New verbs like la-rdvo) ^ .

^

and new tenses like eaTuKa (transitive). The most important novelty apart from these is the aor. subj. Sol and fyvoi,^ as to which W. F. Moulton's view (WM 360 n.) are formed,

is

finally established SiSol,

subj.

pres.

the

That in much

work.

need not trouble

opt.

attestation from papyri. The verbs, set the analogy at

by good

after

-6co

later us.

documents such forms may be The form Smt] is more difficult.

Schwyzer (p. 191) quotes Moeris Greek, and calls in the analogy of to

Smt]

that

(also

8oL7]

attested

monosyllabic: 'see necessity in uncials in Eph 3^^

in

Common

the further step eased by the fact :

by Moeris) was dll, and would consequently become 45. Jm-jj (subj.) seems a syntact-

p.

Eph

(B

1^''

and Jn

Sm),

2

Tim

2-^

this form, well

15^*"):

(cf

later

known

in

survives in Boeotian and Delphian inscriptions, as

Michel 1411 ligible

7roia)r]

drew towards

ical

Homer,

for

rc/xMr]

that

(ii/B.c, Delphi),

NW

thus contributed

1409 (doy

It is quite intel-

36 f.) should have (cf above, p. the Koivrj an item which (like other

Greek to

contributions from a single quarter, e.g. rea-aape^; ace.) kept only a precarious existence by the side of other forms.

We

return to this later (pp.

193

f.).

From

olSa

we have

in papyri, pluperf. for

perfect indie, flexion,^ and occasional with yheiv, literary revival of the older irregular in the forms. conjugation of el^ll, the middle forms Finally, as in

1

NT, ordinary

See below, p. 234.

D

is interesting in that it exactly The form -crTavu in n and (p. 168) 53 (iii/A.c), in Wilcken's reading. So anticipates the MGr. • So in 2nd person also, airoSois Lk 12''' (as papyri). * See G. Meyer Gr. Gramm." 656. ^ Probably Ionic so Herodotus, and even our texts of Homer {Od. i. 337). '•'

NP

D

:


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

56

are well established

a

elixai is

m

MGr.

see above, p.

37), as to

MGr

Even the

present"

found already in a Phrygian inscription ap. Eamsay

and B.

G.

i^fieOa

{rnjirjv,

further extent

still

ii.

565

569) regarded

G.

(early Iv/a.d.).

eo-rat as the

3rd

Meyer

{Gr.

Gramm.^

sing, of this, transferred to

but this view seems questionable. future meaning It may be noted that the old 1st sing, ^v reappears in at Ac 20^^: elsewhere ijfjLTiv stands alone. The rarer tjtq) alternates with ;

D

€a-T(o,

and

in papyri

late inscriptions, as in It

,_.

Miscellaneous.

is

^

NT.

needless to add

,,

any

details as to •

-,

forms

.

the

,

noteworthy principal among of verbs. parts Papyrus parallels may be cited for ^volyqv, for the double formation of dpird^co and ^aard^w (rjpTrdjTjv and ijpirdadrjv, ijBdaTaaa and i^dara^a^), for the alternative perf. of Tvy^^dvca (see Ti on Heb 8*^), for the 1 aor. of ci>y(o, etc. Note especially the intrusion of the from the present "

yu,

of \a/jb^dvco into various parts of the verb, and into derivative nouns (p. 142). This is normal in the papyri after the is still some lingering of The same phenomenon occurred partially but the Ionic f ut. Xd/juylro/xai,, by taking over the d in Ionic as well as the nasal of the present, shows that it was an

Ptolemaic period, in which there the older forms. ;

independent development in the

Koivrj.

This will serve as

a final example to show that the late uncials and cursives, in restoring classical forms which the best MSS set aside, were deserting the Greek of the artificial

^

Rev:

So P

NT

period in the interests of an

grammar. 1

38 in

Rev

cf Suo-^da-raKros

2".

Lk

It is

11*^.

MGr, and may quite probably be read

in


CHAPTER

IV.

Syntax: The Noun.

We

address ourselves to the syntax, beginning with that of There are grammatical categories liere that Noun. scarcely ask for more than bare mention.

the

Number

On

obvious thing to

the

say

subject of Numher the dual has gone.

dialects, Ionic conspicuously,

„,

had discarded

long before the

.

_^

there

is

one

Many Greek

this

hoary luxury born;

Common Greek was

^^*^ theory of the relation of the Koivrj to the dialects would allow Attic to force on the resultant speech a set of forms so useless as these. The

^"^^

Neuter Plurals.

dual

may

weljl

have arisen in prehistoric days when men could and it is evidently suffering from

not count beyond two

;

senile decay in the very earliest monuments we possess of Indo-Germanic language. It had somewhat revived in Attic

witness the inscriptions, and folk-songs like the Harmodius " but it never invaded Hellenistic, not even when a Hebrew "

;

dual might have been exactly rendered by its aid. We shall see when we come to the adjectives that the disappearance

between duality and plurality had wider mere banishment of the dual number from declensions and conjugations. The significant new flexion of of the distinction

results than the

hvo should be noted here

:

there

is

a pluralised dative hval,

but in other respects hvo is indeclinable. "AfK^w has disappeared in favour of the normally declined aix(^6repo<i. Apart from this matter the only noteworthy point under

Number

is

the

marked weakening

of the old princiijle that

neuter plurals (in their origin identical with collectives in -a ^) took a singular verb. In the NT we have a large ManuaP, 264 ff. (I might add here that Mr Giles thinks the may have been originally a specialised form of the plural, used (as in Homer always) to describe natural or artificial pairs. That this is its earliest ^

See Giles,

dual

57


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

58

extension of what in classical Greek was a comparatively rare the plural verb being allowed when the individual

licence,

items in the subject are separately in view, while the singular The liberty of using treats the subject as a collective unity.^ the plural freely makes the use of the singular distinctly

more

significant than it could be in classical Greek. It may be added that the „ .

Pindaric Construction ' '

pl^enomenon, known

as

found in the

NT

pLKov, is

the :

see

converse

^xvi^^ IltvSa4*\ Mt 5^^

Mk

It is really only a special case of 6'^, 1 Co 15^*^, Eev 9^^. anacoluthon, no more peculiar to Pindar than to Shakspere. An interesting communication by Prof. Skeat to tlie Cam-

bridge Philological Society {Proceedings, Ixvii. p. 2) describes " a rule in English, from Alfred downwards, that when a verb occurs in the 3rd person in an introductory manner ., .

.

often used in the singular number, though the subject be in the plural." Thus " what cares these roarers for

it is

may

"

"

and now dbideth faith, hope, [love], the last being as true to English idiom That the construction is also posas to its original Greek. " sible with order inverted, is shown by another citation, For

name

the

of

these three,"

—king

etc.

?

;

thy three thousand ducats here

is six." (See also p. 234.) idiomatic use of the plural appears ^^ passages like Mt 2-° redvyKaaiv, Lk 12^0

An

Plural

where there is such a suppression bringing emphasis on the action, that of a passive, or of French on, German

acTovcnv,

the

of

we

subject in get the effect

man.

Our

"

"

is like it. Lightfoot compares the "rhetorical plural" in Euripides IT 1359, Kke'movTe<i e'/c Add Livy ix. 1, 7?}9 ^oava koI 6v7)7r6\ov<i (i.e. Iphigenia).

"

auctores

they say

belli

[one

man] dedidimus."

Winer

gives

other

but rightly refuses to put Mt 98 27*^ 1 Co 1529 16^ into this category. If Heb 10^ has not a primitive

parallels,

error (as

Hort suspected), the plural subject

of irpoaj^epovaiv

is certain, but its origin may very well have been as suggested above. There are savages still who cannot count beyond two see Tylor, Primitive The Indo-Gernians had numerals up to 100 before their Culture, i. 242 f. separation but the superfluous dual, I suggest, had been already utilised for a

extant use

:

;

new purpose. ^

This

is

conspicuous in

D

(Wellh. 12).


SYNTAX: THE NOUN.

59

and ZvvavTaL might

for the fairly be described in this way are not in the writer's certainly prominent priests thought, and a passive construction would liave given the meaning

So Westcott

exactly.

Eev

;

Mt

12", ,

_, Gender

:

(for irpoacf).) who quotes Jn 15" 20-, See also p. 163, n.\ lO^^ Lk 17^^. On Gender likewise there is not much to

Mk

7^^

„,

,

,

.

„„

m

ihere are sundry differences the gender of particular words but even MGr is nearly as much under the domination of this outworn excrescence on language as was its classical ancestor. That English should still be almost say.

;

the only European language to discard gender, indicating only distinction of sex, is exceedingly strange. As in the case of

Number, we have

to refer to ordinary grammars for some Greek shares with the classical. uses of gender which One or two cases of slavish translation should be mentioned.

NT

In

Eom

LXX

11* the

tw BdaX

occurs however three times in

cited as

is

LXX, and

rfj

B.,

which

in Ascensio Isaiae 12.

(OB xiv. 458), in commenting on this last the explanation that the gender is deterpassage, accepts mined by the Q'rt nt:'3, translated ala^vi'V- In Mk 12^^ Prof. E. C. Burkitt

and

Mt

^g

21*2

hsiYe the

LXX

= niiv.

avrrj

the translators

may perhaps have interpreted their own Greek by recalling Ke^aXrjv <y(ovia<;. Breach of concord in Gender been already alluded to in a note on the has ^^ ,

Greek

of

Eev

(p. 9)."

The very

difficult

el'

Ti?

comes in here, involving (TTrXdyxva koL olKTcpfxoi of Phil 2^ as it does both number and gender. might quote in illus-

We

tration

BU

Par

326

P 15

(ii/A.D.)

(ii/fi.C.)

el

iirl

re fiiav

rwv

.

Se rt TrepLaaa ypd/x/jiaTa

.

.

.

.

.

oIklcov,

and

KaroKiTrw.

read throughout, is a great improvement: the sense required, as Lightfoot practically quid H. A. A. Kennedy {EGT in loc.) shows by his translation. makes independently the same suggestion. Note that the Codex

But

si

Blass's

valet

et

rt,

is

["''See p. 244. Amiatinus (and others) read si quid viscera. A significant remark may be quoted from the great of these breaches of Byzantinist, K. Krumbacher, a propos In his ProUem d. ncugr. Schriftsioraclie (p. 50) he concord. " If one finds in Greek literature, between the early observes :

mistakes Byzantine age and the present day, <jv<yxwpovvT(iiv,

j>v\al

KaTa\a^6vre<;, ttuvtcov

like Xeaivcov

firj

tmv jvvatKMU,


A GRAM]\[AR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK

CO

etc., it shows that we have to do with a half-dead form, in which mistakes slip in as soon as grammatical vigilance nods."

When we remember we can

some reason

see

MGr

that the

present participle,

own equivalent

our

8evovTa<;, is as indeclinable as

for the frequency of

e.g.

"

binding,"

non-agreement

in this part of the verb. What became common in the early Byzantine literature would naturally be incipient in the

vernacular of imperfectly educated persons centuries before, like the author of Kev.^ A few nouns waverina; in o;ender

may be named, ^t/w.09 is masculine in Par P 22 (ii/B.c.) and feminine in 26, which is written by the same hand; further parallels need not be sought for the inconsistency between Lk

and Ac

42^

Lk

ll^^,

variation between

^eo?

rj

rj

6ed in

Some masculine

inscriptions.^

nouns

-09

like

eXeo?,

passed into the neuter declension in

'jrXovTO'i,

and remain there Qg^gg

^'/^o?,

Hellenistic,

MGr:

in

see Hatzidakis, pp. 356 ff. are free now to examine the phenoof Case, To estimate the position of

We

. .

mena

Disappearance of the

Hellenistic cases alono- the line of develop-

ment, we

two ends

at the

The apparently purposeless Ac 19 is explained by

IS^'*,

and

may sum up

MGr

of this line.

we

what may be seen

briefly

has only the three cases

ourselves possess nominative, accusative, and genitive. (The survival of a few vocative forms, in which MGr and Hellenistic are on practically the same footing, does not affect this point, for the vocative is not really a case.) At the

very dawn of Greek language history, as we know it, there is only one more, the dative, though we can detect a few moribund traces of instrumental, locative, and ablative. For all practical purposes, we may say that Greek lost in pre1

Of Reiuhold 57

cord from fxT]

So

tlie

eidihs yp{a.fj.fj.aTa)

and

f.,

papyri. :

BU

p.

234 below.

— KP

We may cite typical

breaches of con-

37 (ii/A.D.)"Hpw;' iypa\pa vwep avrov Firstly, case this is quite true as it stands, but Heron meant et'Soros :

!

BU

31 {eid6sl). 1002 149 (ii/A.D.) Tov a.5e\(pou .

{ij B.C.)

'AvTt(pl\ov"'EX\7iv

.

.

.

iTnrdpxvs.

Letr.

6 Siaroxoi ( = 5ta5.). OP 527 (ii-iii/A.D.) wepi Tou yvacpews 6 avvepya^Sfievos.'^^ Tlien gender: 997 (ii/s.C.) ttjv vwdpxov avrQi oUiav. lb. 577 (iii/A.D.) e/c tt]s fierriWax^TOS yvvaiKav. lb. 1013 .

.

— BU

Hieprivov

(i/A.D.) OeGiv -

Cf Blass on

Ephesia .

.

.

lb.

ofioXoyiov.

7]

dvaaaov aKovaavra.

.

.

.

ry

19"^

:

LP«

1036 (ii/A.n.) crT6\i)v Xeivovf. 113 (ii/A.D.) 6 TereXeyxryKws

AP

" Usitate dicitur

ij

0e6s (ut v.^^)

fieyia-Trj deq,'E(p€iii(}'ApT€/j.L8L,

cnm

alibi

;

.

.

(ii/B.c.) ttjv tCiv

aiirrjs fi-qryip.

verum etiam iiiscriptio ^ ^eds eadem dicatm-. ,

Itaqueformulamsollemneni^/xe7aXi; ^ed"A. raira diligentia L. conservavit." «

»

See p. 244.

*


SYNTAX: THE NOUN.

61

historic times three out of the primitive seven cases (or ei^'ht,

we

include the vocative),

viz., the from case (ablative), the (instrumental ^), and the at or in case (locative), all of which survived in Sanskrit, and a})preciably in Latin, though obscured in the latter by the formal syncretism of if

xvith case

and (except in singular of -a- and In other words, the purely local cases, nouns) locative. in which the meaning could be brought out by a placeadverb (for this purpose called a preposition), sacrificed their distinct forms and usages.^ Greek is accordingly marked, ablative, instrumental, -0-

-^^^^

+

1,

English, by the very free use of preposi-

of Prepositions

is most obviously where we are per-

characteristic

^^^^^

'^^o^^-

intensified in Hellenistic,

petually finding prepositional phrases used to express relations

which

in

classical

given by a case alone.

Greek would have been adequately It is needless to illustrate

this

fact,

except with one typical example which will fitly introduce We have already (pp. 1 1 f.) the next point to be discussed. referred to the instrumental

eV,

Hebrew

lation of the familiar

3,

formerly regarded as a transbut now well established as

The examples " " armed with adduced all happen to be from the category but it seems fair to argue that an instrumental sense for iv vernacular Greek of Ptolemaic and later times.

;

is

generally available

if

the context strongly pleads for

it,

without regarding this restriction or assuming Hebraism.^ "

Nor

is

Par

P 63

"

Biblical the intrusion of iv exclusively a feature of Greek, in the places where the prep, seems to be superfluous. Thus in Gal 5^ the simple dative appears with eve-^ofiat,: (ii/B.C.

—

a royal letter) gives us

toi)?

eVecrp^T^yaeVoi;?

' The instruiiiental proper all but coincided with the dative in form so that the still surviving throughout the sing, of the 1st and 2iid decl., dative of instrument may in these declensions be regarded as the ancient case " a preposition, except the comitative ^\ith," however, was always expressed by :

in the idiom 2

ire

avToh

Note that the

Romam.

The

dvdpda-L,

and the "military

dative.'

case also disappeared, the "terminal accusative" seen in surviving Greek cases thus represent purely grammatical

to

remoter object, relations, those of subject, object, possession, Âť I should not wish to exclude the possibility that this iv,

and instrument. although correct

came to be used rather excessively by translators from was Aramaic. The use would be Hebrew, or by men whose mother tongue as that of iSov on p. 11. explained on the same lines

vernacular Greek,


A GRAMMAU OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

62

hiaXv6r)vaL, Tft>

Xt/Ao5.

P 22

lu Par

ev Tiacv dyvo/jfjiaa-Lv.

we have rw

(ii/B.c.)

Xifjua.

while the contemporary 28 has htaXvoixevai ev What gave birth to this extension of the uses

imply a growing lack of clearness in the simple dative, resulting in an unwillingness to trust it to express the required meaning without eV

of

It

?

seems

to

certainly

We may

see in the multiplied use of prepositions an incipient symptom of that simplification of cases which culminates in the abbreviated case system of to-day.

further definition.

NT

The Dative

^^^^

•

the

easily overlook the

may

already entered I take

has

dative

leads to extinction.

that

Mk

random from

a page at

^^ÂŽ

^^^^

way

student

in

WH,

and count 21 datives

A

random page against 23 genitives and 25 accusatives. from the Teubner Herodotus gives me only 10, against 23 and 29 respectively; one from Plato 11, against 12 and 25.

Such

nothing cona clusive until they were continued over large area, but is not dead dative they may be taken as evidence that the figures could obviously prove

yet.

.

^"^^^^^

Prenositions

and

17

NT

as a whole, the dative prepositions falls behind the accusative genitive in the proportion 15 to 19 and

Taking the

This makes the dative considerably more

respectively.

and post-classical historians.^ due is, however, solely to eV, the commonest of all the prepositions, outnumbering et? by about three to two were both these omitted, the dative would come down to 2 1 in the above proportion, while the accusative would still prominent than

in

classical

The preponderance :

be 10.

And

influence

^

although ev has greatly enlarged its sphere of NT as compared with literary Kolv^j, we

in the

^

Helbing, in Schanz's Beitrdgc, No. 16 (1904), p. 11, gives a table for the respective frequency of dat,, gen., and accus. with prepositions, wliich works out 1 "2 for 3 for Herodotus, Thucydides, and Xenophon, taken together, at 1 :

:

;

twelve post-classical historians, from Polybius to Zosimus, at 1 1'5 2'4. ^ This is well seen by coniiiaring the statistics of Helbing, pp. 8 f. He gives the figures for the three favourite prepositions of the historians. 'Ei* is one of the three in every author except Polybius, Diodorus, and Joseplins ; e/s falls out :

of the

list in

historians

Eusebius only.

amount

The

writers

and

ds

Mk

is

total occurrences of

to 6,531, those of iv to 6,031

et'y conies to 31,651, preferred to iv only in

1,743 and 2,698 respectively.

ev to

;

only 17,130. list in p.

in the three classical

while in the twelve Hellenistic

and Heb, and the

See the

et's

:

Contrast the

total occurrences

98 below

:

NT, where amount to

note there also the


SYNTAX: THE NOUN.

63

find very clear examples of et9 encroachinp; on its domain." There are many NT passages where a real distinction between et? and iv is impossible to draw without excessive subtlety, for which all the motive is gone when we find in MGr <tt6 with accusative ( = et<? t6v) the substitute for the now obsolete

while the language in its intermediate stages steadily tends towards this ultimate goal.^ By the side of this we may put the disappearance of vtto with the dative, the dative

;

accusative serving to express both motion and rest classical historians the dative is

accusative,

and some

Herodian, made

it

of

the

in

:

nearly as frequent as the

their successors, notably

greatly outnumber

rival

— Appian

and

see Helbing, in op. cit., p. 22. Similarly tt/oo? with dative stands in the ratio of less than '01 to 7rp6<; with accusative in the three its

NT

:

classical historians it averages nearly '12 in the later twelve, '01 again. 'Eirl and Trapd are the only prepositions in which ;

is really alive and even iirL rather than contradicts it see p. 107. tendency We pass on to other symptoms of senOtner cases ^. ^. t ^i ^i escence the dative. In the papyri there

the use with three cases

;

illustrates our

m .

substituted

are

expressing point of

,

some

clear examples of an accusative time instead of duration (see CE xviii.

152); and in Ac 20^*^ and Jn 4^^, Eev 3^ we may recognise the " same thing.^ Of course the dative of " time when was still There were not wanting, indeed, very much more common. instances where a classical use of the accusative, such as that of specification (Goodwin Greek Gram. § 1058), has yielded to a dative of reference (instrumental).^ survival in Jn 6^'' cil 288 f.)

(WM

its

We ;

have examples

of

but, as in the papyri, The evidence of the

the dative is very much commoner. decay of the dative was examined with great minuteness by F.

Krebs

in his three pamphlets,

marked drop comes not 1

far

in the total for

behind

iirl,

Zur Rection

cler

Casus in dcr

He

deals only

which in the twelve writers of

literary Koivri

spdteren historischen Grdcitdt

(1887-1890).

ev (14,093).

See below, p. 234.

-Thus OP 477 (ii/A.D.) rb TreixirTov iTO% "in the fiftli year"— a recurrent formula. Add Gen 43"^ (Dieterich, Untcrs. lol). With ihpav, liowovor, the See also p. 245. use began in classical times see Blass 94. 2 Cf OR XV. 438, xviii. 153, and the useful Frogmm by Compernass, Dc Sermone Gr. Volg. Pisidiae PJirygiaeque vicridionalis, ]ip. 20 f. ["See p. 245. :


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

64

with the literary Kolvtj but we may profitably take up his points in order and show from the NT how these tendencies ;

from the vernacular.

of the artificial dialect are really derived

with verbs which are beginning to take the accusative, having been confined to the dative in the earlier

Krebs

starts

The distinction in meaning between transitive language. verbs and verbs whose complement was properly instrumental

—

which itself takes an abnormal accus. in (as with 'x^pdadac 1 Co 7^^)," or the dative of person interested, inevitably faded

away with

and the grammatical distinction became

time,

Of Krebs' exx., rroXefieiv accordingly a useless survival. takes accus. also in vernacular, ivehpeveiv and euBoKelu in the NT but ^evl^eadai, airavTciv and viravTav retain the dative ;

movement

The

there.^

was

accompanied

with

various

TIpoaKvvelv in the NT takes the The phrase dative about twice as often as the accusative.^

symptoms

of

reaction.

Trj "^v^y (Polybius) is matched in respect of dative its innovating by irapa^oXevea-Oat in Phil 2^''. will dismiss the decay of the dative with the remark that

irapa^aXkeaOai

We

the more illiterate papyri and inscriptions decidedly show it had acquired any antiquity. The schoolboy before the

NT

OP

of

ypdcfico

;

119, referred to already (p. 28), uses ere for croi after while later samples (see CB as above) include such

monstrosities as rivt

Dittenberger

OGLS 17 But

at

\6jov,

a-vv

tcov

vicov,

x^pL^ere

e/xov.^^

would actually recognise the same thing in

^A6i]vat Ilcoreipa the beginning of

unthinkable, and there

iii/B.c.

koI /Saa-iXifa UrokeixaLov. this

confusion

is

a curious asyndeton left

is

the Kai be transposed?^

NUr]

Even OP 811

:

surely

should

(a.d. 1), ev-)(apiOT(ov

We may 'EpfiLTTTTou, seems much too early to be intentional. follow Krebs further as he shows the encroachments of the accusative upon the genitive, and upon the field of verbs which ^

Also,

(i/i!.c.),

as in

M'ere formerly intransitive.

we may add, weiOapxew, which takes a gen. (like 265 (i/A.D.), and the "Gadatas" inscr. (Michel

OP

NT,

cf

Magn. 114,

etc.

EvSoKely

-Contrast the inscriptions: see

c.

CH

the

It will be seen that

ace. is

in Tb P 104 For the dat.,

Akoiju})

32).

only in a quotation. But note Par P 51

xv. 436.

(ii/B.c.)

iva TTpoaKwrjcrrjs avTov. ^ •*

See other exx. in Dieterich, Unters. 150. D.'s further ex., No. 87 (iii/u.C.) vn^p paaCKiuis

Kal riroXe/iatwi Twt vlQi

.

.

.

seems merely a mason's carelessness.

Kal pacriXicrarj^

["^See

.

.

p. 245,


SYNTAX

THE NOUN.

:

65

NT

does not tally in details with the literary Kotvi], though In independently shows the same tendencies at work. his second part Krebs turns to the tjenitive. ° Accusative gams -'-"^ "^^^ ^^^'"^ ^^^ which we are interested is from genitive, the late compound airekirii^eLv, which geneThis it seems rally takes ace. instead of the natural gen. to do in Lk 6^^, if we read /irjBeva with s* etc. and the it

m

r.

-

,

,

.

.

,

^ so Ti Syriac EVnig. KpuTeiv (Krebs ii. 14) takes the gen. only 8 times in NT, out of 4G occurrences, but Sia(f)6peiv (" surpass ") has gen. always. 'Ev-

Lewis

WHmg

:

Tpeireadai (p. 15) takes only the acc.,^ and so does KXrjpom/xelv. Apdcrao/jbat (p. 17) has the ace. in the only place where it

occurs (1 Co

3^^,

to this list, if

cited from the

we may

follow

LXX).

BD

al.

'ETridvfxcb

in

Mt

5-^.

may be added Add likewise

the sporadic exx. of ace. with verbs of filling (Eev 17^ al; Blass 102): Thumb observes (ThLZ xxviii. 422) that

see

the

on

lives

usage .

.

from intransitive construction

of ,

MGr.^

in

intransitive

There follows a category which in Hellenistic

verbs

i-.i-^-^i

,-i

,

^^® begun to take a direct object in the

Of these we recognise as

ace.

NT

examples and Origen), and 'x^oprjyeiv. The third part of Krebs' work deals with Here compound verbs and their cases.

AB

ivepjelv (six times), a-vvepyeiv (in Rom 8-^ irXeoveKrelv (four times, and once in passive),

and from dat. and gen. after compounds

'-

.

c.

'n-poa^wveiv

ace.

may

has the dat. four times

;

i

claim

tt

Lk

u b^^ but pi"?

*.

-i.

it

vTroTpi'^eiv has ace.

in its only occurrence; eTrepx^o-dai has only dat. or prepositional phrase Kara^apelv occurs once, c. ace. KaraXaXelv takes gen. in ;

;

once passive, as is Karairovelv in its two occurrences while KaTLCT'xveiv shows no sign of the ace. construction.

NT, but

is

would

It

Limits of the blurring of old distinctions.

^^^^

^j^^

;

of course be easy to supplement gj-^mmar these illustrations of

-^rp

w

i v ^j^ general tendency, but exhaustive discussion must proceed to is not needed here. i

*.

We

note a few special characteristics of the individual cases as they appear in NT Greek, in uses deviating from earlier 1

2

MrjUv,

A

if

not to be read

ix-q5iv\ is

av6pu}iriv7\v ivrpairei'Tes vi/xecriv, '^

an internal accus., nil deapcrantes.

passage from Dionysius (Krebs

See further, p. 235.

5

16),

ovre delov

(po^Tid&Tes x^^o" o^^^

bears a curiously close resemblance to

Lk

18'.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

66

Before doing so, however, we must make some language. general observations, by way of applying to noun syntax the should not assume, from principles noted above, p. 20.

We

the evidence just presented as to variation of case with verbs, that the old distinctions of case-meaning have vanished, or that

we may

treat as

mere equivalents those constructions

The very which are found in common with the same word. fact that in Jn 4-^ irpoaKvveiv is found with dat. and then with ace.

is

enough

to

prove the existence of a difference,

subtle no doubt but real, between the two, unless the writer

The fact that guilty of a most improbable slovenliness. the maintenance of an old and well-known distinction between is

the ace. and the gen. with aKovco saves the author of Ac 9'' and 22^ from a patent self-contradiction, should by itself be

enough to make us recognise it for Luke, and for other writers So with the subtle and suggestive until it is proved wrong. variation in Heb G"*^- from gen. to ace. with yeveaOai}" Further, the argument that because et? often denotes rest in or at, and sometimes represents that motion toivards (as distinguished from motion to) which may perhaps have been the primitive differentia of the dat., therefore it is immaterial whether et? or iv or the simple dat. be used with any particular word,

upon the limited,

it

would be entirely unwarrantable.

character of the word

may

difference is

itself.

well happen that

made by

placing

it

If

of large content

and extensive

to find these alternative expressions

different ideas connected with the

It

depends

content be

hardly any appreciable

in one or another of cer-

tain nearly equivalent relations to a noun.

word

its

But

if

it

is

a

we naturally expect made use of to define the

use,

word they

qualify, so as to

up a series of phrases having a perfectly distinct meaning. In such a case we should expect to see the original force of set

these expressions, obsolete in contexts where there was no-

^

To

illustrate

with a lexical example, we need not think that the evidence

ipcordp in the vernacular no longer restricted to the meaning question (cX Expos. VI. viii. 431), compromises the antithesis between the verbs Our English ask is the complete equivalent in Ju 16-^, rightly given by RVmg.

which proves

and if we translated air-qariTe by some other word, say of the Hellenistic epwrdv See Westieg ov petition, we should naturally take ask to mean question there. cott or Milligan-Moulton in loc, or Loisy, Le Quatritme jEvangile, p. 789. ;

ÂŤ

See p. 245.


SYNTAX

THE NOUN.

:

67

thing to quicken it, brought out vividly where the need stimulated it into new life. critical

A

distinction is

afforded

by the construction

« . X^ Construction of

of iricrTeva), as to

cif

a

example which Blass

declares that (beside the prepositional -.i .1 „ ,. „ " construction, with the meaning believe in (P- 11*^) „ ,

,

.

,

)

takes the dat. "passim even in

it '

Ac

to believe in,' as in

with

alternates

el<i

5^* 1 8^."

ev

ivLar.

1

us examine

"

2o, Tnarevetv l^^) and Tnar. eiri, in

Again,

(Mk

addition to which the correct classical

Let

sense

tlio

p. 1

irta-T.

nvl appears."

In classical Greek, as LS observe, " the two notions [believe and believe in] run into each To be unable to distinguish ideas so vitally different other." this.

scheme of Christianity would certainly have been a serious matter for the writers. Blass allows that with in the

NT

the preposition the meaning ever found with the simple

is

believe

in.

Is

this

meaning

dat., or is Triareveiv rivo

priated entirely for the other idea

appro-

The answer must,

?

it

would seem, come from examination of the NT passages, rather than from outside. There are about forty occurrences of TTiaTevetv with dat., apart from those where the verb means It will be

entrust.

these passages the

admitted that in the great majority of is believe. There remain a few

meaning

^^ passages where tlie alternative is arguable, such as Jn 5-^(in which the XG709 just preceding shows that believe is more

appropriate), 8^^ (where the variation from the previous tt. et? cannot be merely accidental), Ac 5'^'^ (where the dat. may be

construed with irpoaeTidevTo, as in liV), 16^* and 18^ (where truth of God's word satisfies the connexion). It might be said that the influence of the (See p. 235.)

accepting the

LXX TT.

Tw

tends to weaken the normal distinction in the phrase But it is very clear that the LXX is not redeep.

sponsible for

the

NT

use of

irtarevetv.

The only pre-

LXX

is that witli positional phrase used in the in and occurs this is itself very rare, only one

iv,

NT

Mk

2

is

the

V^, where there in

right

"

translating

The second passage

-

Eph

first,

little

believe

doubt that in

(the

passage,^

Deissmann

sphere of)" the

is ch-opped in -, but not in the English edition. only an apparent exception, for the second ^v y is as.-iiinilated to and its sense is determined by ea<ppayic6r]T£.

1

3

can be

which

1^^ is

In Christo 46

f.

["^eu

p.

245.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

68

Gospel": he compares

The construction than

et?, is

1

found in

Is 28^°,

NT application of

3^, Eom 1^ 2 Co S^s iQi*, etc. which outside John is commoner where B omits eVt, and conformity

Th

ttlot. iiri,

the passage

may well have occasioned would seem therefore as if the substitution of et? or eVt for the simple dative may have obtained currency first in Christian circles, where the importance of the difference between mere belief (? PP!??!]) and personal The prepositional constructrust (3 "n) was keenly realised. no was tion doubt by its being a more literal suggested to the

insertion

its

in

It

ÂŤAQ.

Hebrew phrase with

3, But in itself it development of the Greek seen. There was, moreover, a fitness in it for the use for which it was specialised. To repose one's trust tqjon God or Christ was well expressed by iria-reveiv

translation of the

was entirely on the language, as we have

iiri,

lines

of

the dative suggesting more of the state, and the accusmore of the initial act of faith while el<; recalls at once

ative

;

the bringing of the soul into that mystical union which Paul loved to express by ev Xpicnu). But as between eVt and admit we that it is not safe to refine too 619, may freely

much

the difference may amount to little more than that between our own believe on and believe in} The really important matter is the recognition of a clear distinction between believe on or in and believe with the dative simply.:

^ For a closely allied equivalence, cf that of ev and eVi ry ovofxan, as demonstrated by Heitraiiller, Im Namen Jesu (1903), i. ch. i.

^

We may

not = entrust.

give a table of the constructions of

As elsewhere,

it

depends on

iriaTevio,

WH text,

when not

absolute,

ignoring passages in

[[

and ]].


SYNTAX

We

THE NOUN.

:

have

69

gather some noteworthy e i.i "se of the cases, particularly ^he Nominative, on which nothing has been

Special uses ^ of the Cases :— P°^"^^

still to

j.

Nominative,

^.v,

^^

,

^'^^

,

said hitherto. The case has a certain tendbe of case-relations not obviously ency residuary legatee We have its use as the nameappropriated by other cases. to

unaltered by the construction of the sentence, in Eev the fact that this has classical parallels (see Blass 85) is perhaps only accidental, for we have already seen that ungrammatical nominatives are prevalent in Eev (see p. 9), case,

9^^:

NT usage is certainly assimilation (Mt 1^^ The classical parallels may serve for a 3^^ Ac 27^). writer such as Luke, if we are to write eXaiwv in Lk 1929 21^7. In and the it is eXaiSyv, gen. pi., and so

and the general

Mk

WH

We noted

RV

above

49) the conclusive evidence which compels us to accept the noun iXamv, oliveticm, as a word current in the Kolvj]. {App 158) regard the presence of 'E\aLO)vo<i in Ac V^ as corroborating the argument drawn from the unambiguous to 6po<; tmv iXatcov. Tertullian's in Elaconem secedehat, the prevalence of olivetum in the Latin versions, and the new fact (unknown to WH) that ekaiwv is a word abundantly occurring in the vernacular, may together Blass.

(p.

WH

perhaps incline us rather to the other view, with Deissmann, W. F. Moulton's note in

Tischendorf, Tregelles, and Weiss (cf

WM

if we were forced to emend on in one of which 'EXacwva in Lk ll.cc. makes it would especially easy following

227).

Certainly,

conjecture, to substitute

places the initial d. cause much less disturbance than to

upon Acts and Josephus. "

The Nominativus , " head Pendens

«

,

a be

illustrated:

and as much

of

at

home

vi

i

*.

iXaioJv

the

at i-

i-

construction

is

phenomenon hardly needing

to

a

witliout

clause

one

is

Blass's

(See further on p. 235.) nominative which stands

familiar it

force

the

easiest

Enghsh

as

of

in

in

of

anacolutha, The Greek.

special case in wliich the participle is concerned will enTypical exx. are Lk 21^, gage our attention later (p. 225).

7*^

Mt

5**^

D

reading,

as

to,

OeXovn

Ac Eev

226,

(6

deXcov is

.

an

.

.

o^e? avTu>

easy correction),

a

plausible 1

Jn

2-*,

gtc

The parenthetic nominative

in expressions of time

is

well


}y

A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

seen in

Mt

1 5^-,

Mk

8^, also

Lk

In popular Attic the Viteau {Sujct 41) cites

O^s.

construction goes as far back as v/b.c.^

Eccles 2^^ (note emendation in A and x'^- ^) and '^'^^ ^^^' ^^^ ^^^*^ latter Nestle notes {Ex}-) T

.

Nominative

B

429) that

xvi.

Kat

(ert r^ixepai rpet?

Sia-

^aivere) gives the rationale/' Deissmann adds from the Acta Fauli et Theclae (in OP i. p. 9) t'^ixepai^ap i'jSrj rpet? Kal vvkt€<; T/3€t9

GeKXa ouK

tion whether

We

ij/jjeprai.'^

Ac

5"^

(see p.

must leave to

16) belongs

it

this

an open quescategory:

it

means an isolated return to the construction of iyevero which Luke used in his Gospel, but then abandoned. This may not The use of parenthetic nominathowever be quite decisive. ives appears in the papyri most abundantly in descriptions " with ov\r/ or iy€LTOve<;. Thus " 6LK6ve<i ^ will run, " to A., "

and a long-faced, straight-nosed, a scar on his right wrist " land of or a house is inventoried with piece belonging to on the its the south A., open street, on the west neighbours ;

the house of B."

all

nominatives without construction.

We

compare such examples as Jn 1*^. There is a very marked increase in the Articular ^^g^ ^^ ^j^^ articular nominative in address. in address

Nearly sixty examples of it are found in the There seems no sufficient reason for

NT.

assigning any influence to the coincident Hebrew use, for The rough classical Greek shows the idiom well established.

and peremptory tone which characterises most of the other Contrast the Aristoexamples seems to have disappeared. " " 6 there the lad, I mean iraU uKoXovOei, you phanic !

(Blass), with the tender

t]

^

Trat? eyecpe

in

Lk

8^*

:

we may

recognise a survival of the decisiveness of the older use. Descriptiveness, however, is rather the note of the articular still

nom.

of address in the

NT:

so in

Lk

12^^,

Jn

where we

19^,

"

"

by Fear not, you little flock may represent the miance " " In the latter passage we can easily Hail, you King feel the inappropriateness of the /SaaiXev found in K, which !

'

'

!

would admit the royal 1

Mcisterlians'' 203.

Ac

»

See p. 235.

26^.

Its

appearance

BM ii. 299 " "his diebus

See OP. xvii. 197, where Cronert reads in

417^iv/A.D.) eTTELSi] dcxoXiD eXOlv irpbs oiv avri a violent example if true. Of j). 11 n.^ ad Jin.

(no.

right, as in

(

= -ai) rjp-ipe,

["Sec p. 245.


SYNTAX: THE NOUN.

Mk

in

15^^

is

merely

a

note of

the

71 writer's

imperfect

more delicate shades of Greek idiom. sensibility Note that Lk, and perhaps Mt (xAL), correct Mk here. The anarthrous nom. should be as a mere substitute for the vocative, regarded probably the

to

which begins from the earliest times to be supplanted by In MGr the forms in -e are practically the the nominative. vocatives Hellenistic has little only separate surviving. more, retaining some in -a and -eO, with the isolated <yvvai, but the nom. is beginning to assert irdrep, and Ov^arep itself even here, for irari'ip^"' and Ovycnrjp are well attested ;

Blass 86

(see the evidence in

n.).

The vocative

itself

need

not detain us, the presence or absence of w being the only In the Lucan writings only is feature calling for comment. the interjection used in the classical manner without emphasis. Elsewhere it is mostly used as we use 0, except that this is with us appropriate in prayer, from which it is markedly

NT, though not entirely in the translation the OT. The progressive omission of w is not wholly

absent in

Greek

of

the

easy to explain, for the classical examples (see Gerth's Kiihner^ ยง 357. 4) show that the simple voc. has normally a touch of dignity or reserve. specially good ex. occurs in

A

Plato Crito 52a, ravTai^

where

Sij

"

jiafxev

Kal

<xe,

l!coKpaTe<;,

omitting w

rah

to alriaa ive^eadac, increase the impressiveness, since w l!(i)KpaTe<; is the regular mode of address in English we obtain the same effect by

the

effect

of

is

:

exactly the

opposite

means" (Adam).

NT

use has

thus

and may well have travelled upon approximated the same path without any outside interference, such as A. Buttmann would find in Latinism.^ Common to nominative and accusative is the use of et? with ace. to replace a predicate, in such phrases as ehai ek to our own,

and

iryeipecv

ek (Ac

8^3 1322).

There seems no adeiiuatc reason

2

J.

of w.

He shows

AJP

tliat

w

WH

to write Tarrjp, as [App 158). xxvi. 32-43, has a careful study of the classical use "with the vocative was familiar, and was not freely hecarae of dialectic, and the law courts

^

A. Scott, in

This cannot fairly be described

used until the familiar language comedy, the language of literature, when the vocative rarely appears without the interThe Attic scrmo vulgaris in this case did not determine the usage of jection." the Hellenistic vernacular.

["Seep. 215.


A GRAMMAR OF

72

NEW TESTAMENT

shows a similar extension

as a Hebraism, for the vernacular of the old use of

et<?

KP Freoicates

"

expressing destination

46

GREEK.

(ii/A.D.), ea'^ov

so for

:

example

vfMcov ei? 8d(veiov)

irap

It is obvious airep/xaTa, a recurrent formula. " " I as loan received it a and "for a that

The fact that this except in grammar. in translation falls into line with other found et? is mainly discussed the overdoing of a correct phenomena already based on a Semitic locution in passages original, simply loan

do not

differ

—

because

it ,

has the advantage of being a literal rendering. may pass over the accusative, as

We

little

remains to be said

of

except on

it

the genitive, readers of Winer will need reminding now-a-days that to call the perhaps hardly " " whence-case is an utterly obsolete the case unquestionably

points of detail.

As

to

The Greek genitive is syncretic (cf p. 61); and procedure. " case the ablative, the only case which answers to Winer's of proceeding from or out of" is responsible for a part of the

Most of the uses of the genitive in which it was merged. in extensive use. of the we find still divisions case ordinary The

objective gen. is

very prominent, and exegesis has often

to discuss the application of this or the subjective label to a It is as well to remember that in Greek particular phrase. is entirely one of exegesis, not of grammar. no approximation to the development by which we have restricted the inflexional genitive in our language almost

this

question

There

is

The

entirely to the subjective use.

replaced by the abl. with airo or

e'/c,**

jmr^tYtvc gen.

but

is

still

is

largely

used

freely,

In Mt 28^ (KV) we have sometimes in peculiar phrases. " " cf Tb P 230 sabbath late on the with this oy^re gen., (ii/B.c.) and and Par P 37 35, oyjrLTepov tj}? wpa?, (ii/B.c.) oyjre t^? copa<;, Philostratus (a^?. Blass^ 312) o'^e twv TpwiKwv, "at a late :

This last writer however has also stage in the Trojan war." " these after things," and Blass now (I.e.) adopts 6y\re tovtcop, This use of this meaning in Mt, giving other quotations. oyjre

= after

remains the

"

involves an ablative

vefipere sabbati of the Latt.

favoured by Weiss, Wright,

etc.

practically as an indeclinable

noun

a natural development,

late

gen.,

Since (see

but

the

"See

p. 245.

from!'

and the Lewis 11^^

question

Syr.,

could be used

oyjre

Mk

There

is

al), this

seems

not easy

to


SYNTAX: THE NOUN.

73

How freely the partitive gen. was used in the Koivi) be seen in passages like Ac 21i«, wliere it is subject of a See sentence. 253 for classical parallels: add OGIS 56^'-' decide.^

may 6

WM

7rpo(f))]rr)<;

was there

it

tmv

rj

.

.

lepewv

.

.

.

Council .

Par P

(as

15

Timrand

Place, g®"^*^^^^

X.,

(f)LXwv,

time

the south," erov<i

comes most naturally from the simplest "

find "

unnecessary be seen from

one of the Privy

show us abundantly the and 2Jicicc, like v6tov " on It /S "in the 2nd year."

papyri of

"

of possession,

may

(ii/B.c), etc.).

The

.

ri<;,

"

the standing phrase 6 Belva rwv "

How

oiaei.

.

for Dittenberger to insert

belonging to

"

;

the

but the

of all genitives, that abl. is possible, as

we

place idea expressed in Piev 21^^ by airo votov. " " or place vnthin which cf rov oVto? fMT]v6<; within

Time

FP 124

is the normal differentia which has thus perhaps its closest affinity with the partitive. For time, this genitive is common in

the current month," of

(ii/A.D.)

this genitive,

NT,

as in phrases like vvKro'i,

For

XobTTov.

like

])]irases

^eLfjLMvo<;,

opdpov ^aOew^, rov

we have mostly stereotyped words and Lk 5^^, and ancient words like avrov,

place, iroia';

strange that the commentators and grammarians have so much neglected the difficult gen. in Ac 19^^ Dr

irov.

It

is

Knowling merely declines Hackett's suggestion that 'E(^4gov and irdar]<i rrj^ 'A(Tia<; depend on oxXov, for which however

we might quote a good parallel in Sophocles OT 236 (see The gloss ew? (D), " within," may possibly express Jebb). the meaning but the vernacular supplies no parallel, except the stereotyped phrases for points of the compass, nor was it ever normal in classical Greek after the Epic period see the ;

:

exx., nearly

all

poetical, in Kiihner-Gerth

whole, one feels disposed to

The question of definition.

make o^Xov

Hebraism

of

Some

of

the

"

is

i.

384

On

f.

responsible after

the all.

raised again by the genitive "

long series of phrases

coming

1 See below, p. 101, for a construction which may be parallel. There is a note in Dalman's Gram. d. jM.-imI. Aram. p. 197, in which Lightfoot'.s 'p£D3 {Hor. Hchr. 500) is tentatively approved as the original of 6\pi. The phrase "means always the time immediately after the close of the Sabbath." In Mt 28', " at most a late hour of the night would be designated the term accordingly, A reckoning of the Sabbath from sunrise to sunrise is impossible for dawn. :

(Weiss iw

loc.) is

unheard

of."


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

74 under

says Blass

Hebraisms

diria-TLa'i

"

obviously take their origin from Hebrew,"

98).

The

Jebb's

note

(p.

Snitfon^ "

"

head

this

on

collected

examples

poetical

Sophocles,

Antig.

114

in (or

more fully in Kiihner-Gerth, p. 264), include some which are quite as remarkable as the Thus KapBia irovrjpa quotable from the NT.

(Heb

3^^)

will pair

off'

well with roaovSe toX/a?;?

That many of these phrases TrpoawTTov (Soph. OT 533). really are literal translations from the Hebrew need not be questioned

and

;

an existing usage was available for the

if

we can understand

Our being overstrained. where no Semitic passages original is admissible. In these it seems fair to assume that the poetical phraseology of the Attic period had come down purpose,

only concern

into

the

is

its

with

as

market-place, KaKOiv Jas

cnreipaaTO^;

1^^,

happened

example, in

for

also,

aKaTa7rdarov<i

(p.

47)

d/iapTia'i

2 Pet 2^^ which have plentiful illustration from papyri.^ The rapid extension of the genitive A if ^\ T^ Absolute.

absolute .

is

a very

.

Greek dwell on it

lenistic

''

obvious feature .

of

Hel-

,

so obvious, indeed, that

we

are not tempted to In the papyri it may here. often be seen forming a string of statements, without a finite verb for several lines. also find there a use frequently

We

seen in the ^T—e.g., in Mt l^^ 31 g^^, Mk 13\ Lk 12^, Ac the gen. abs. referring to a noun or pronoun already 22^'', etc.-

in the sentence, without

any

effort

to assimilate the cases.^

Rarely in NT, but frequently in papyri, we find a participle standing by itself in gen. abs. witliout a noun or pronoun in A violent use occurs in agreement: thus Mt 17^*, Ac 2P^.

Heb

8^

(LXX)

ev ri/xepa eirtXa^opLevov /xou

:

so Blass,

but

the construction was probably suggested innnediately by the

Hebrew. aov avrcp.

original

Westcott compares Barn

2^^ ev v/jiepa evreiX-

The

old accus. abs., belonging to impersonal " " verbs, has vanished except in the word Tvyov perhaps (1 Co a/jiivov

16*^):

how Luke avoids it in Ac 23^*^, where Greek would demand ixrjwOev c. ace. et inf. The papyri

Blass points out

classical

show

i^6vTo<;

passim

for the classical i^ov, it hcing allowed.

^

See

*

Cf exx. from I'olybius in Kalker 281

p. 235. ;

and bolow,

p.

236.


SYNTAX

THE NOUN.

:

75

One example of a noteworthy pure dative, the dalivva In liev 2-'incommodi, may Ije briefly refeii-ed to. ep^ofial croc is used rather markedly in place of e. a reason tt/do? ae '''

:

the

for

"^^^

]3eculiar

^^^-

'''

phraseology

offered

is

in

however be added

^^ should

Difadvlntage.

now that the very phrase occurs in a recently published papyrus, BU 1041 (ii/A.D.), an illiterate document, with context less clear than we should like. See p. 245. Side by side

Datives of

accompaniment

which

Thus

it.

which

Lk "

RV

in

in

alwvioi'i

common

locative

8^^

not always easy to distinguish from " " is oftentimes (loc.)

is

TroXXot? -x^povoi^ "

The latter, (instr.) in mg. found in Lk and 8^^, clearly XP^^^V i^i^d-vip ^9^^°^^ Eom 16'-^, is supported by the recurring formula in

text, is

with the

time (point of time), we have an '^'''^stricviental dative of extension of time, of

fiative

of

a long time

The private letters, eppwadal ere evxpiiai, iroWol'; p^powt?.^ field of accusative and instrumental is contiguous also in the "

dative of reference

(ii/A.l).) 7ei'et

Mk

Ac

7^6,

TP

similar construction.

4^6 al, as in

one of the few

6^° affords

1

BU 887 NT exx.

(ii/B.c.) irpo^e^r]-

ereaiv (class.), compared with Lk V- ^^ 2^^, the ubiquitous iv came in with datives that did

to69

i'jSr]

shows how not need it

A

Jn

^pvylav.

of the ace. in Korat;

^evei in

":

:

here

we may presume an Aramaic background. Eev 8*, Tat<; irpoaevxah (EV text " with

difficult dative in

the prayers," and so Milligan and Holtzmann), is probably 69 (ii/A.P.) to lie taken as the sociative instrumental: cf

BU

a9 Kal airohoicrw i^t.e.

"

aot, rai

at the time of)

my

evyidTa So6i]crofiev(p o-^covup, 'ivith next wages." Cf Abbott Joh. Gr. 519.

Finally, use, that of

,.

J.

will

we may speak which

aKofi

of one

more dative

uKovaeTe,

Mt

In giving a

serve as a type.

13^*,

list

of

"

the usage is an these phrases, Blass (p. 119) remarks that like imitation of the Hebrew infinite absolute nv:^ ni?3, and

consequently found already in the analogous classical phrases such as is

1

W.

LXX"; '^dfiat

also

'yafxelv

that "the ('in

true

would make Latin responsible for the first start But it must be allowed that the classical phrase ry x/^''V, For the antiquity of time," was capable of giving the impulse.

Scliulze {Gr. Lett. 14)

of this extension.

"by

lapse of

this instrumental, see Delbriick,

Gnmdr.

§ 109.

Cf

CR

xv. 438, xviii. 153.


A GRAMMAPt OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

76

wedlock

cf^vyfj

'),

(f)€vyeiv

{'

Hee with

to

all

speed

')

are only

There are two points here on accidentally similar to these." which we might venture to state the case rather differently. It

may

be freely allowed that this construction, and that

with the participle (^Xeirovre'; ^Xeyjrere) are examples of " But in what sense are they imitations of translation Greek." It seems to me that such a description implies the Hebrew ?

something much nearer and more literal, such as aKoveiv aKovaere} Is it then mere accident that we find the Hebrew locution represented by

7a/i« 'ya^elv and (^v^y known Aeschylean

Greek which (pevyetv

recalls respectively the

quoted by Blass, and the well-

ot TrpcoTa fiev ^Xeirovre'?

e^XeTrov

447

KXuovTe<; ovk t^kovov (P.V. or the (f>€vycov eK(f)evy€i of Herodotus

?

fjLarrjv,

f.),^

The Greek

translator,

endeavouring to be as literal as he could, nevertheless took care to use Greek that was possible, however unidiomatic.'* Those who have had to do much in the way of marking "

examination papers, know very well that possible, but unidiomatic," is a good general description of the kind classical

of language

used by translators who have attained the con-

scientious accuracy, but not the sure-footed freedom, of the matiu'e scholar.

^ As we actually tind in Jos 17^'^ e^oXeOpevaaL de aiTous ovk e^uXeOpevaav emends oXeOpevaet.. (I owe this to Votaw, p. 56.) ^ The idea of these words became provei'bial cf [Demosthenes] 797, ware, to Of com'se the resemTTJs irapoifiias, opwvras /mrj opav Kai aKovovras fir] aKoveiv. " blance to Mt I.e. is more superficial than real, for Aeschj'lus means tlioiigh they saw, they saw in vain." But there is enough nearness to suggest the NT form An exact parallel is quoted by Winer from Lucian (Dial. as possible Greek. the participle has vanished in the Teubner text, Marin, iv. 3) l5Cov eldov

:

A

:

:

whether with or without

made penal

MS

authority

I

cannot stop to examine.

It sliould be

to introduce emendations into classical texts without a footnote »

See p. 245.

!


CHAPTER

V.

Adjectives, Pronouns, Prepositions. ... «

There

^.

^^®'^*^

Duality,"

not

is

much

to

be said under the on the important

°^ Adjectives, except "

"

question raised by the phenomena question touches the use of dual class, as well as the relation between

Duality

The comparison. pronouns of the erepof of

The abolition of a discomparative and superlative. tinction between duality and plurality is almost inevitable sooner or later in language history. English affords us The simphcity and convenience of our have helped to preserve in common speech

instructive parallels. suffixes -er

and

-est

the old degrees of comparison.

Piut

how

often does the "

"

in the street say the better of the two ? like to say offhand how far in this matter

man

One would not modern litera-

impeccable on Lindley Murray rules but in converthe most correct of us may at times be caught tripping, and even when the comparative is used we are most of us conscious of a kind of pedantic accuracy. That " the ture

is

;

sation

best of the assertion.

when we

two

"

the English of the future is a fairly safe ^ Whether, adjectivally, is as archaic as irorepo'i is

:

translate

rlva

airo

tmv Bvo (Mt

27^^)

by the

" whether of the twain," we are only advertising the fact that the original was normal speech and our trans" lation artificial. have not yet arrived at either of the

archaism

We

three," but people say "either A. or B. or 0." without a Of course the first step was taken ages ago in the qualm. extinction of the dual, the survival of which in Germanic

^

I

have twelve papyrus collections by nie, with oiie oceurreiice of Tr&rtpos in is nearly illegible and (to me, at least) quite unintelligible

the indices, and that

(AP

135, ii/A.D.). 77


A GRAMMAE OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

78

evidenced, centuries

is

the

after

Other modern languages

NT, by

the same

tell

Wulfila's

Gothic.

NT

In the

tale.

the

obsolescence of the superlative, except in the elative sense, is _ most marked. It is mere chance that only in Comparison, . , ^i, i one example ot the -raro? superlative has

w

.

.

them

in the papyri. Of the the there are genuine superlative sense, however, examples rare we in that the vernacular very practically may say documents the superlative forms are used to express the survived,^ for there are scores of

;

sense

superlative

The very." well seen in

is

like

phrases

"

our

of

to

CR

439

XV.

papyrus

of the

we have

of

comparative and

illiterate

papyri, where occur. One or

'yvrjcnooTepQv of irregular comparatives

be cited

may

be found, witli other examples, in and xviii. 154. Specially instructive is the

references

the

some

/cat

i^k'^iarov

two typical examples

confusion

will

astronomer Eudoxus, written in

There

ii/B.c.

KaG' ov o 7]Xio^

(f)€po/ii€vo<i rrjv fiev rjfiepav /Spw^vThe context demands repav Troiel rrjv Be vvktu fiuKporipav. a superlative, and Blass no doubt rightly assumes that the author (iv/B.C.) wrote ^pa'^vTurrjv and fiaKpordnjv. In that

very significant. He has in the to p-ei^ovei in another place, and " rcov ^(oiBicov for in each of the

case the scribe's alteration

same way altered he

writes

iv

(twelve) signs,"

an

a^ioy/jbaTt,

is

/xeyLaTrj

eKurepwi In Tb

elative.^

P 33 It

:

may

iv

fiel^ovi

clear that /neyia-ro'i is its appearance in 2 Pet

practically obsolete in Hellenistic is as significant as its absence from

The

we have

(ii/B.c.)

in fact

is

the rest of

the

NT.

Eevisers' scrupulous margin in 1 Co 13^^ "and Mt 18^ be safely dispensed with, on the new evidence. KpeirTcov

and xelpcov are always strictly comparative in NT, but they BeXTicov^ have no superlatives:^ KpdTiaro<i is only a title. in 2 Tim does not occurs l^^but once, (in adv.) appear in any of Grenfell and Hunt's papyri, except in an official Ptolemaic document ^eXrca-TOf (not in NT) has a somewhat better claim (ter in ii/B.c). 'A/xeLvcuv and dpcaTO'i (not NT) appear Note especially OP 716 (ii/A.D.) ryi/ ajxeivova occasionally. :

^

Ac

26", in true superlative sense

style. *

See p. 236 below.

;

this speech

is

niucli affected

by

literary


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS. "

to the highest bidder."

Yet apLaro^ is ff)uud a vernaenlar document, but the sole witness (i/A.D.), the papyri named. 'EXdaacov is common, but i\d^i(TTo<i

a'ipeaiv 8iS6vtl,

in

79

OP 292

among

an official (a true superl. in 1 Co 15», as in Tb P 24 (ii/B.c.) document, but in veiy bad Greek) has not wholly disappeared. TlXelwv and TrXelaro'i are common, but the latter is generally elative in the

papyri

note however

eao/xevr)v irXeiarrjv rifirjv,

Tb P 105

(ii/n.c.)

rrjv

and other exx. which may support

1 Co 142". ^i^ lyio j-,,.^y gjjQ^ j-l^g elative "those very " numerous mighty works but tlie other rendering is as good. In Jn 1'^ TrpcoTo? jjlov, and 15^^ nrpuiTop vficov, we have the ;

Winer quotes Aelian comparative. 306), and we can add aov TrpcoToi; elfii from LPw A.!).— magic)." There seems no longer adequate reason

superlative ousting the

(WM (ii/iii

to question that irporepo^ has here been superseded for the great rarity of the comparative form in the papyri reinforces the natural inference from Jn ll.cc. In the Gren fell;

Hunt volumes

it

very

little

treatise.

absence

only occurs once, in a legal document. P, it must be allowed, proves

of tt/jwto? in Ac as to the author's

The mere use

Pamsay of

intention

himself

third

28) admits that the

{Paul, p. from the Lucan

Trporepo? certainty for the hypothesis. The case

write a

to

See further is

writings

precludes

236.

["Seep. 245,

p.

not quite so strong for the

There are plenty of places where pronouns. Pronouns €repo<i, e/carepo?, oTTorepoq, etc., are used of more than two, and a\Xo<; of two only; but also j>laces where the pronouns are used carefully according to classical precedent. It seems a fair assumption that these words held much the

was described just now for our own " the better (best) and comparative superlative in phrases like of two." Educated men would know the distinction and In these cases we must let observe it, unless off their guard. the context decide, paying due attention to the degree of

same

relative position as

grammatical precision usually attained by each several author. It is remarkable that in this respect we find Luke by no means particular. In Lk 8" ^ he actually substitutes eTepo<i for the correct aX'\o<i which appears in his presumed source, Mk 4^-8 (cf Mt IS'^-s) and in Lk 6^9 he does not alter ttjv ;

aW'rjt' (a-iayoi'a

!)

whicli appears also in

Mt

5'^^,

but

is

corrected


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

80

Clem. Horn. 15^.

in

when we examine

A

under

this

head

245 f.

raised

by The probability that afi<}>oTepoi ircivTe^ in BM 336 and two clear (ii/A.D.), in NP 67 and 69 with the undeniable (iv/A.D.),^ form a strong temptation where the relief would

-

,,

This will clearly need remembering

other "dual" words in Luke.^ See pp. difficulty

is

Ac 19^^

was used

for

examples of it Byzantine use,

be so great.^ I cannot but think that Ramsay is quite right " in saying {Paul, p. 272), The seven sons in v.^* change in an unintelligible way to two in v.^^ (except in the Bezan text)."

Luke must have been a very slovenly writer if he really meant this, and the Bezan reading of v.^'* does not help us to " understand how the more difficult " neutral text arose if it On the other hand, Luke is one of really was secondary.

NT

the last

whom we

writers

should expect to

fall

into a

that he colloquialism of which early examples are so rare shares the loose use of eVe/ao?, etc., current in his time, does If we are to defend nothing to mitigate this improbability. :

and in a purely Eamsay's criticisms grammatical discussion we cannot deal with them except on this side must we not assume that the original text of v.^* verses from

these

If

is lost ?"

this contained a fuller statement, the abruptness

to irovrjpov in v.^*, and of our a/jL(f)OT€po)v, might be removed without compromising the characteristic eTTTtt we might also have a clearer term to describe Sceva's office. The alternative is to suppose the verses an interpolation from a less educated source, which has been imperfectly ro

of

TTvevfia

:

adapted to Luke's style.^ We pass on to the Article, on which there is not very much to say, since in all essentials its use is in agreement ^ dWov in Lk 7^^^- B is most simply explained by The aberrant 'irepov supposing that the scribe has found a place for two variants. If we press the no longer reading, the messengers are represented as softening the message, "another kind of Messiah," but "another of the same kind": cf Gal l**^-. .

.

.

The meaning "different" naturally developed out of "the other class (of two)," See also p. 246. and it survived when the normal use of ^r epos had faded out. -

A much

(13 B.C.)

;

earlier ex.

but

I

itself in the just published BU 1057 can be otherwise referred than to the

seemed to present

think the

d/x(poTipti}v

three names immediately preceding. ^ See notes in Expos, vi. viii. 426 and *

The Sahidic and some

better supported,

CP>,

xv. 440.

later versions took dfKporepuv as

we should

find another ex. in

Ac

23**

"all."

Were

["See

this

p. 246.


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS. with Attic. this respect „,

.

.

,

81

might indeed be asserted that the NT is in " " correct when compared witli the remarkably It shows no trace of the use of the papyri. It

" Correctness " ^^^^'^'^ ^^ ^ relative, whicli is found in classical ^^^eek outside Attic, in the later of NT Greek, papyri,^ and to some extent in MGr. The

papyri

some examples

likewise exhibit

of the article as demonstra-

tive, apart from connexion with /lev or Se7 whereas the NT has no ex. beyond the poetical quotation in Ac 17-^. Further, we have nothing answering to the vernacular idiom by which the article may be omitted between preposition and infini-

In family or business accounts among the papyri we

tive.

find with significant frequency an item of so much et? Tretj/, with the dative of the persons for whom this thoughtful

provision

where

is

avri,

made. behaves

There are three passages in Herodotus thus: see vi. 32, uvtI ehai, with

Strachan's note, and Goodwin, 3IT § 803 (see further below, In these three points we may possibly recognise p. 216). Ionic influence showing itself in a limited part of the

vernacular

supply

;

it

is

at least noteworthy that Herodotus will them all. The Ionic elements in the

parallels for

KoLvrj were briefly alluded to above (pp.

37 f.), where other was noted for the sporadic character of these infusions, and their tendency to enlarge their borders in the later development of the Common Greek. We are not much troubled with HebraBlass (p. 151) ism under the article.^ evidence

.

regards

as

"

Hebraic

thoroughly

"

such

phrases

as

irpo

but

TrpoacoTTov Kupiov, ev 6<p6a\/jbOi<i '^/xcov, iv rjH'epa 0/57% KUT oIkov avTcbv " Is a regular phrase and perhaps

;

a

Where

Hebraism."

Semitic

originals

lie

not

behind

our

but the mere admisGreek, the dictum is unobjectionable that KUT oIkov avTcbv is Greek shows how slightly ;

sion

these phrases diverge from the spirit of the translator's Phrases like tou? iv oXkw, hia x^''P^^ ^^ oIkov, language. such as etc., are recurrent in the papyri, and the extension, The it is, lies in the addition of a dependent genitive.-"^ principle of 1

"

See Volker 5

6

correlation

f.

;

also

CR

"

in (on which see the note

xviii. 165.

2

gge

p. 236.

»

See pp. 99

WM, f.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

82

175) here supports the strong

p.

article

after

Y

papyri: cf

tendency to

drop

the

the This seen working a preposition. Without olker, Der Artikel pp. 15-17. laying down a law that the noun is naturally in

is

Anarthrous

when attached

to a preposition, .> ^ .i. that the ^^ "^^^ certainly say usage is so preof interpretano refinements that dominant

anarthrous

Prepositional

Phrases

,

.

,

"

tion are justifiable. Obviously iv oIkw (Mk 2^) is not in a house," nor iv dyopa (Lk 7^^) "in a market-place," nor "

We

in a street." iv dyvia, in the current papyrus formula, " " " " in from start to on bed," 'Change," say down town," finish."

^

If

to the end,"

we we

substitute are, it

"

in

my

seems, more

about the anarthrous noun there aspect

of

a

;

from the beginning

pictorial

There

were, to the objects in question.

qualitative

"

bed,"

;

we

point, as

it

is

nothing indefinite but for some reason the

noun, rather than

the deictic,

is

appropriate to a prepositional phrase, unless we have special reason to point to it the finger of emphatic particularisation.

To

this

Dr Findlay adds

the consideration that the phrases

in question are familiar ones, in which triteness has reduced their distinctiveness, and promoted a tendency to abbreviate. is on the same lines as Greek, use with prepositions makes the anarthrous which, however, us. it is with than more much Pursuing further predominant the classes of words in which we insert the we have the anarthrous use "Headines" ^^^ translation,

It

would seem that English here

(Hort, 1

"in sentences having the nature of headings" Hort assigns to this cause the Peter, p. 15&).

dropped articles before 6eov, 'Kvevixaro^; and a(^iaTo<i in 1 Pet 1^; Winer cites the opening words of Mt, Mk, and The lists of words which specially affect the dropped Eev. article will, of course, need careful examinaQualitative

Force in

Anarthrous Nouns. in

tion for the individual cases. Thus, when Winer includes irarrip in his list, and quotes j^ ju and Heb 12^, we must feel that

both passages the qualitative force

is

very apparent

—

^ According to Ramsay {Paul, p. 195), irapa Trora/jLov, Ac 16'^, shows familiTo accept this involves giving up ivonl^ofxev Trpoarevxvv arity witli the locality. (nABC), a step not to be lightly taken. (See further p. 236.)


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS. "

what son

there

is

"

chasten

(On

?

the note in

WM

whom

a father, does not passage see margin, and For exegesis, there are few of the his father, as

KV

the former

151.)

83

finer points of Greek which need more constant attention than this omission of the article when the writer would lay stress on the quality or character of the Even the object.

EV

misses this badly sometimes, as in Jn 6<^s. ^ Scholarship has not yet solved completely Proper Names. the problem of the article with proper names.

An illuminating little paper by Gildersleeve may be referred to {AJP xi. 483-7), in which he summarises some elaborate researches by K. Schmidt, and adds notes of his own. He shows that this use, which was equivalent to pointing at a man, was originally popular, and practically affects only prose The usage of different writers varies greatly and the style. familiar law that the article is used of a person already ;

named (anaphoric

use), or well

formly observed.

Deissmann has attempted

known

already, to

is

not uni-

define

the

papyrus usage in the Berlin Philol. Wochensclirift, 1902, He shows how the writers still follow the classical p. 1467. use in the repetition with article of a proper name which on its first introduction was anarthrous. When a man's father's or mother's

name

is appended in the genitive, it normally has There are very many cases where irregularities occur for which we have no explanation. See also Volker,

the article.

p. 9,

who

notes the curious fact that the names of slaves and

animals receive the article when mentioned the

first

time,

where personalities that counted are named without the article. The innumerable papyrus parallels to I!av\o<i 6 kuI TTayXo? (Ac 13^) may just be alluded to before we pass from this subject see Ueissmann BS 313 ff., and Eamsay, CB xix. 429. The position of the article is naturally :

.

.

Article

guous position cleared

much

affected by the colloquial character of

NT of

In written style the ambilanguage. top elq OdvaTov, Eom 6*, would have been

up by prefixing

rov,

if

the meaning was (as seems

^ The marginal reading stood in the text in the First Revision. It is one among very many places where a conservative minority damaged the work by

the operation of the two-thirds rule.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

84

"

In most cases, by this baptism into his death." probable) there is no doubt as to whether the prepositional phrase very curious misplacebelongs to the neighbouring noun.

A

^ ment of the article occurs in the o o%Xo9 ttoXu? of Jn 1 2^. As Sir K. C. Jebb notes on Sophocles, OT 1199 i., the noun and adjective may be fused into a composite idea but Jebb's exx. (like 1 Pet 1^^ and the cases cited in W. F. Moulton's ;

note,

WM

—

I/a.D.

—

illustrate only the addition of a second the group article-adjective-noun (cf OP 99 avro) fjb'r)TpiKt]<; olKia<i rpLaTe<yov)r vTrap'^ovarj'i

166)

adjective after ri]<i

cannot discuss here the problem of Tit 2^^ for we must, see 162, 156 n. as grammarians, leave the matter open

We

WM

:

what they are worth, the papyri which attest the BU 366, 367, 368, 371, 395 (all vii/A.D.), " " our great God and Saviour as current among translation eV ovo/xaTt rov Greek-speaking Christians. The formula runs

But we might

for

cite,

rov deov koI (ra)T7Jpo<; Kvpiov Kol heairoTOV 'Irjaov Xpicrrov KOI deoroKov, ktX. 8eo-7roti^j;? tt}? a<yi,a<; rjfjbMi> rr]<i 't]fi(av, curious echo is found in the Ptolemaic formula applied to the

A

GH

15 (u/b.c), rov fxerydXov deov evepthus The phrase here KOL [ein^avov^^ ev^apiarov. (7WTrjpo<i lyeTov

deified kings:

is,

of course, applied to

find

that P.

One is not surprised to one person. at the end of his suggestive paper

Wendland,

ZNTW

v. 335 ff., treats the rival rendering on Xwrrjp in in Tit I.e. summarily as "an exegetical mistake," like the severance of toO Qeov rj/juMv and (T(oTrjpo<; 'I. X. in 2 Pet 1\

flaunts itself Familiarity with the everlasting apotheosis that in the papyri and inscriptions of Ptolemaic and Imperial times, lends strong support to Wendland's contention that Christians,

from the latter part of i/A.D. onward, deliberately annexed for their Divine Master the phraseology that was impiously to themselves by some of the worst of men. arrogated

From

Personal

sonal

Pronouns: " Semitic

1

If it is

^

A

we turn very

to

short

the Per-

excursion

here brings us up against another evidence

Redundance."

7rX??pcjjudTwc

the Article

Pronouns.

^f

u

^^le

dependence

of

[NT] language on

merely careless Greek, one nray compare Par P 60" (ii/B.c. (On the whole subject, see further p. 236.) apxaiuv.

See note in

CH

xviii.

154a.

?)

dwb tQu


85

ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, TREPOSITIONS. "

Semitic

speech," in the extraordinaiy frequency of tlic " oblique cases of the personal pronouns used without emphasis

(Blass

be

to

Dependence on Semitic would surely need evidenced in other ways before we

164).

very

strongly

could readily accept such an account of elements affecting the whole fabric of everyday speech. Now a redundance personal pronouns is just what we should expect in the colloquial style, to judge from what we hear in our own vernacular. reader of the peti(Cf Thumb, Hcllcn. 108 f.). of

A

and private letters in a collection of papyri would not notice any particular difference in this respect from the Greek For example, in Par P 51 (ii/B.c.) we see an of the NT. redundant eminently pronoun in avv'^w ( = nvolya)) tov<; A specially good case is OP 299 (i/A.D.) 6cf)da\fjbov<i fiov. tions

Ad/MTTcovt

eSooKa

ixvodrjpevTrj

avrco

.

.

.

Spa'^fia<i

rj

:

the

Kalker (Quccst. 274) exactly that of Eev 2'^, etc. syntax Bia ravra from Polybius, Slo koX irakiv eTreppcocrOrjcrav quotes Such a line as this with other redundances of the kind. is

from a Klepht ballad (Abbott 42), ("

Kal arpi^eL to fiovaTaKL tov, KXcoOei Koi ra fiaWla rov his moustache and dresses his hair ") illus-

and he twirls

In trates the survival of the old vernacular usage in MGr. words like Ke^aXi], where the context generally makes the ownership obvious, NT Greek often follows classical Greek and is

But such a passage as Mt 6^^ the middle voice alone where Ke^aXijv, the language already that shows 236), p.

content with the

aXeiy^al

would

crov

suffice

rrjv

(cf

article.

The strength of this learning to prefer the fuller form. in Jn 8^ rov irarpof is that the enhances probability tendency

is

"the Father" and not

"

see Milligan-Moulton. perhaps rather too readily taken for Emphasis in „j.a^nted that the personal pronouns must always be emphatic when they appear H. L. Ebeling (GUdcrslcevc Studies, the nominative case. out that there is no necessary emphasis in p. 240) points It

yoiir father":

is

m

the

Platonic

rjv

S"

iya),

ecf^rjv

eyo),

Gildersleeve himself observes (Synt. the 1st and 2nd persons is not to in

poetry or in

iyfZSa,

iycZfiac"

familiar

Are

we

ft)?

av

<f)rj<;,

etc.;

and

"The emphasis of § 69): be insisted on too much

Notice the frequency of obliged then to sec a special

prose.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

86

pronoun whenever Pythagorean auTo<i e(pa ?

stress in the

the

it

denotes the Master, like

We may

perhaps

better

as fairly represented to the eye by the capital in " to the ear by the slower pronunciation which reverence He," likes to give when the pronoun refers to Christ. Generally

describe

it

is unmistakably emphatic in nom., from but occasionally the force of the emphasis

the pronoun

onwards

— ;

Mt

1^^

is

not

-cf Lk 19^. The question suggests itself whether are compelled to explain the difficult av etTra? and the like (Mt 26^^ I52, Lk 227o 23^, Jn IS^O by putting

obvious

we

27^Mk

Can we drop

a stress on the pronoun. "

You have

"

said

i.e.

it,"

That

however by Thayer (JBL

Mt

right

?

40-49)

xiii.

and

this

" is

translate,

pointed out that the ttXijv in It

is

by making the phrase a mere of mention equivalent only one of the passages We seem thrown back on Thayer's where difficulties arise. " You say it," " the word is yours." rendering There remains here the difficult question . . „ for Eyw ? . p mi Hfj,eis or the use 01 77/^6*9 tor eyoo. ihe grammarian's part in this problem is happily a small one, and K. Dick, in his elaborate study need detain us only briefly. of the question,^ gives a few apposite examples from late Greek literature and from papyrus letters, which prove beyond all possible doubt that / and we chased each otlier We throughout these documents without rhyme or reason. a taken at his exx. with few more references may supplement random. See for example Tb P 58 (ii/B.c), and AP 130 (I/a.d. a most illiterate document) add Tb P 26 (ii/B.c.) ovti /loi iv iireTreaev rj/xlv, JITS xix. 92 IlToXefjbaiSei (ii^A.D.) xcupe kol (^povri^ere -^ficov oaa ev veKpol^, and jjLOi, fi^jrep jXvKVTdTTj, BU 449 (ii/iii a.d.) oKovaa^ on vcoOpevr] d<y(ovtov/jiev. Dick 26*^*

not

satisfied " " Yes to

is

,

,

»

,

,

'

'

:

.

quotes as a interesting iii.

r

276.**

that

.

.

good ex. BU 27 (ii/iii a.d.), an reproduced with some notes in Expos, vi. succeeds in showing so Deissmann thinks

particularly

letter,

He

for

Paul's

use of

every theory suggested regularising It would seem that these pronouns breaks down entirely. the question must be passed on from the grammarian to

^ Der schriftstellerisclic Plural bei Paxdiis (1900), pp. Deissmann's summary of this book, Theol. Rundschau \. 65.

18

ff.

See also

["Seep. 246.


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, rREPOSITIONS.

87

for our grammatical material the exegete gives us not the evidence of any distinction hetween the two numbers in ordinary writing. It is futile to from ;

slightest

argue Latin to Greek, or we might expect help from Prof. Convi'ay's careful study of 7ios in Cicero's Letters;^ Init the tone of superiority, in various forms, which the nos carries, has no parallel in Greek. K6fl6XiV6

Pronoun

The reflexive pronouns have developed some unclassical uses, notably that in the plural

they are

fused

all

into

the

forms

The presence originally appropriated to the third person. or absence of this confusion in the singular is a nice test of the degree of culture in a writer of Common Greek, In the papyri there are a few examples of it in very illiterate documents,^ while for the plural the use is general, beginning to

appear even in classical times.^

This answers to what we where some NT, seventy cases of the plural occur without a single genuine example of the singular ;* late scribes, reflecting the developments of their own time, have introduced it into Jn 18=^* and Eom 13^ (Gal 5^*). As in the papyri, kavTov<; sometimes stands for aX\7]Xov<;,'* and somefind in the

times

itself

is

replaced

by

the

personal

In

pronoun.

translations from Semitic originals we may find, instead of eavTov, a periphrasis with "^/^f;^?; ;^ thus Lk 9^^, compared its presumed original Mk 8^*^. have to be most carefully restricted passages and even there it would be has been levelled up to t7]p >^v'^i]v has been emptied of meaning.

But

with

;

"Exhausted"

this

principle will

to definitely translated truer to say that eavrou

avTov, than that i/^f^^

In one class of phrases eavrov

is

used

emphasis, in a way that brings up the discussion of its fellow tS^o?.^ In sepulchral ^^j|3i^Q^^t;

I'Sios

inscriptions '

'

text

find

a

son

describing his

Transactions of Cambridge Philological Society, v. i., 1899. CR xv. 441, xviii. 154. I find it rather hard to believe that Lucian's

See is

sound where he

Dial. Marin, ^

we

is

recorded as using this eminently illiterate idiom

:

e.g.

iv. 3^

Polybius always uses avrwv (Kiilker, Quxstiones, 1 Co 1029 iavTod= "one's."

p. 277).

Mn '

See J. A. Robinson, Study of the Gospels,

reflexive.

p. 114,

on periphrases for the ["''See p. 246.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

88

father as o irar-qp, 6 t'Sto? Trarrjp, or 6 eavrov irarrip, and the difference between the three is not very easily discernible.

In a number of these inscriptions contained in vol. iii. of the I count 21 exx. with t'Sto?, 10 with eavrov, and 16

IMA

The papyrus formula used in all legal with neither. documents where a woman is the principal, viz. fxeTu Kvplov Tov €avT7]<; avBp6<; (aBeXcjiov, etc.), gives a parallel for this It starts the more rather faded use of the reflexive. serious question whether weakened in Hellenistic.

vouched

123

for

He

f.).

LXX

by no

as

calls

Job 24^^

This

{lScoi<; hecriTOTai'^),

often

is

affirmed,

and

is

an authority than Deissmann (BS special attention to such passages in the less

(ockcov

Ihiwv),

Prov

27-^^

{tov IBiov otKov),

tov ISlov jecopyiov), 22^ in which the pronoun has nothing what-

{tov eavTov afxiTekwvo^

9^^

be supposed similarly

to

is

t8io<;

.

.

.

He reminds us that ever answering to it in the original. " " occurs in writers of the literary exhausted iSto? the Koivrj, and that in Josephus even olKeio^ comes to share this weakening a few Attic inscriptions from I/b.c. (Meisterhans^ Our 235) show XBta with the like attenuated content. inference must be that in Ac 24^* Luke is not ironically suggesting the poverty of Felix's title, and that in Mt 22^ there is no stress on the disloyal guest's busying himself with his own farm instead of someone else's. (Cf p. 237 below.) :

doctrine

Perhaps, however, this in

some danger

440

f.

are put

of

down

the exhausted

of

being worked too hard. all

In

the occurrences of tSio? in

IfSto?

GB

BU

is

xv.

vols,

which contain nearly 700 documents of various It is certainly remarkable that in all these antiquity. is not one which goes to swell Deissmann's there passages Not even in the Byzantine papyri have we a single list. i.

and

ii.,

I'Sio? is not exactly represented by the English In a papyrus as early as the Ptolemaic period we 6Wa r)p.wv cBtov, which find the possessive pronoun added 2 Pet is just hke "our own." 3'% Tit l^^, Ac 2«.) (Cf This use became normal in the Byzantine age, in which cBia still had force enough to make such phrases as iSiav koI

case where oivn.

vofiijxriv

yvvoLKa.

we cannot venture still less

Now, to

in the face of the literary examples, ioto the weakening of tSto?,

deny in

the practical equivalence of

lhio<i

and eavTov, which


89

ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS.

evident from the sepulchral inscriptions above cited, as well as from such passages as Prov 9^^ ^nd 1 Co 7^. But the strong signs of life in the word the throughout papyri

is

have to be allowed In correlating bring in

the

for.

these

phenomena, we may (1) The fact that seems to show that the

perplexing

considerations:

following

—

Josephus similarly weakens olKeio<; question turns on thought ratlier than on words. (2) It is possible, as our own language shows, for a word to be simultaneously in possession of a full and an attenuated " It's an awful nuisance," will meaning.! People who say without any sense of incongruity say " How awful " when !

No they read of some great catastrophe in the newspaper. doubt the habitual light use of such words does tend in time to attenuate their content, but even this rule is not "

To annoy modern French ffe7icr. universal.

in thus speaking alive,

when

the

"

is in Hellenistic a-KvWetv,^ and in There was a time when the Greek

compared

Frenchman

his trouble to the pains of flaying recalled the thought of Gehenna ;

but the original full sense was unknown to the unlearned Sometimes, however, the full sense speaker of a later day.

and even succeeds in ousting the lighter sense, as word vast, the adverb of which is now rarely heard as a mere synonym of veri/. (3) The use of the English lives on,

in our

07on

will

assured

in

help

us

his

"

somewhat.

Let

own mind" (Eom

advantage of being the English

of

each 14'^)

our

man has

be

the

fully

double

daily speech

and

of representing literally the original ev tm tS/w vot "What It is not, as normally, an function has the adjective there ?

emphatic assertion assured in

someone

of property else's

:

I

mind.

am It

in no danger of being simply a method of

is

"

ev tm vot and in laying stress on the personal pronoun " his mind alike transfer the stress to the noun." This fact :

at once

shows the equivalence

of tSio^

and eavrov

in certain

"

Now, when we

look at the examples of exhausted find that we I'Sto?," they very largely are attached to words Husband and wife that imply some sort of hclonging.

locutions.

account for seven examples in the NT, and other relation^

Cf

p.

237 below.

^

See Ex^ms. vi.

iii.

273 L

[" iScc p. 2itJ.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

90

that of master and slave, for a good many large number come under the category of the House, mind, thoughts and passions, and parts of the body. and similar or estate, riding-animal, country very language, ships, including

A

more.

If occasionally possessions receive the epithet. sense of property is expressed where we should not express it, this need not compromise the assertion that

intimate this

iSto? itself was always as strong as our English word own. There are a host of places in the NT, as in the papyri, where its emphasis is undeniable e.g. Mt 9\ Lk 6^\ Jn 1*^ (note its position) 5^8 etc., Ac V\ 1 Co 3^, Gal 6^ Heb V\ ;

One feels therefore quite decisive. the argument of Westcott, Milliganadopting justified Moulton, etc., that the emphatic position of rov iBtov in Jn 1*^ was meant as a hint that the unnamed companion of Andrew, and many others equally in

presumably John, fetched his brother. cases as Ac 24-* and Mt 22^ is not easy and it insert own in the latter place ;

the word suggests

which

Lk

strength

of

to do in such

The Eevisers

is

the

fair to

argue that

counter-attraction,

more The

is

14^^.

enough

the

What to say.

to

fully expressed in the companion parable, It is hardly case of Drusilla is less easy. to the attached is that tSto? customarily plead

for (with the Eevisers) we instinctively feel relationship that oivn is appropriate in 1 Pet 3^ and similar passages, It is the only but inappropriate here. passage where ;

NT

there in

is

any

reading

strong.

real difficulty IBla,

and since

;

B

stands almost alone

the temptation for once to prefer N is very arisen simply from the common-

The error may have

ness of the combination

>]

which was here transwas not at home.

ISla yvvrj,

ferred to a context in which

it

Before leaving tSto? something should be said about the use of o t8io<i without a

,

This occurs in Jn 1^^ 13\ Ac 4^-^ 24^^ In the papyri we find the singular used thus as a term 6 Betva rw IhUp of endearment to near relations e.g.

noun expressed.

:

'Xaipeuv.

possilile

In Expos.

VI.

encouragement

iii.

to

277

those

would translate Ac 20^^ "the own."

Mt

authorities,

I

ventured to

cite

this as a

(including B. Weiss) blood of one who was

27^*, according to the text of sL for the will supply a parallel

and the

who his

later

grammatical


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PllEPOSITIONS.

91

ambiguity: there as here we have to decide whether the second genitive is an adjective quahfying the first or a noun The MGr use of o cSio^, as substitute for dependent on it. the old 6 avT6<;, has nothing foreshadowing it in the NT but in the papyrus of Eudoxus (ii/B.c.) we find a passage ;

where

Ihiai is followed

ttjl

so that

MGr

of

cipation

by

seems inevitable to

it

here.

rrji

avrrjt in the

trace,

the

Perhaps

same

sense,

with Blass, an antiuse

was

locally

restricted.

There

., X „„, Auro? o and .

'

f

V

ai^T09 o

6 auTos.

the

Dean Eobinson

m •

an

is

TT

11

weakening

apparent •

of

Hellenistic, which tends to blunt distinction between this and e'/cetvo? 6.

106) translates Lk lO^i "in that Kaipw), and so Lk 12^2 q^^-^ j 311 difficult to be satisfied with " John

(Gospels, p.

hour" (Mt 1125 iv eKelvM It is eKeivr)), and 1 01

tu>

"

in Mt 3* and in Luke particularly we feel that the pronoun means little more than "that." Outside Luke, and the one passage of Mt, avT6<i 6 has manifestly its full classical force. From the papyri we may quote OP 745

himself

;

(i/A.D.)

avTov Tov "Avrav," thQ said A.": note also

(ii/B.c.)

o avTo<i ''flpo'i,

"

the same Horus,"

GH

26

"

the aforesaid," the former use in i.e.

and so in BU 1052 (i/B.c). We find avrb to "this sin" MGr, e.[j. We Kpl(xa, (Abbott 184), etc. have already seen (p. 86) that the emphatic avro'^ standing alone can replace classical iKelvof. (See now Wellh. 26 f.)

_

.

Turning to the Eelatives, we note the l™iting of 6a-Ti<;, a conspicuous trait of the vernacular, where the nominative (with the

.

Use of

oa-Tis

neuter accusative) covers very nearly all the occurrences of the pronoun. The phrase eft)9 orov is the only exception in Greek. The obsolescence of the distinction between 09

NT

and

A

oo-Tf9

is

type like

asserted by Blass for Luke, but not for Paul. 2* et9 ttoXlv Aavelh yri^ KoXelrat BTjOXecfi,

Lk

be exactly paralleled from Herodotus (see Blass 173) so in an invitation formula avptov 7]Tt<i icTTlv Te, "to-morrow, which is the 15th" cf Mt 27^'^. Hort,

may

and from papyri on

:

{Comm. p. 133), allows that "there are some places in the NT in which oo-Tt9 cannot be distinguished from "In most places, however, of the NT," he proceeds, "oc-Tt9 09." 1

Pet

2^^

apparently retains

its

strict

classical

force,

either

generic,


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

92

'

which, as other like things,' or essential, which by its very in nature.'" large number of the exceptions, especially

'

A

by no means cases of equivalence whether agreeing or disagreeing with Some of them would have been expressed classical use. with oairep in Attic: thus in Ac 11^^ we seem to expect Others throw a subtle stress on the relative, iyevero.

Lucan

writings,

between

09

and

seem

to be

o(nL<i,

y^irep

which can be brought out by various paraphrases, as in Lk 1^^, Or oVrt? represents what in English which for all that." would be expressed by a demonstrative and a conjunction, as

"

In Mt we be taken away." find oarci used four times at the beginning of a parable, as where, though the principal figure is formally described

in

Lk

10*2, c^and it shall not

an individual, he appropriate. of

used for

09

number

of

may

not yet dead. further here, but

is

two

is

oo-rt?,

places in

to classical use,

relatives

blurred

really a tyj^e, and 6(ttl<; refer to Blass 173, for

is

We may

may

The

with indefinite reference.

which

therefore

examples large

obviously right, according the distinction fairly stand as proof that must not stay to trace the distinction o(TTt<i is

We

may

venture on

the

assertion

that

the

convertible, however

are never absolutely be the outlines of the classical distinction in

Luke, and possibly in sporadic passages outside his writings. Kalker (Qucvst. 245 f.) asserts that Polybius uses oaTi,^ for 09 before words beginning with a vowel, for no more serious reason than the avoidance of hiatus

;

and

it is

curious that

or less unclassical examples in the books fourteen do happen to achieve this result.

among twenty-three more Lucan

We

chronicle this fact as in duty bound, but without suggesting If inclination to regard it as a key to our problem.

any Kalker

and there certainly seems right for Polybius occurs just where weight in his remark that this substitution we may have to admit that the forms of 09 end in a vowel is

the distinction during the Koiv^] period had worn rather It would be like the distinction between our relatives thin. who and that, which in a considerable proportion of sentences are sufficiently convertible to be selected mostly according this, however, does not to our sense of rliythm or euphony :

imply that the distinction

The

attraction of

is

even blurred, much

the Ptelative

— which,

of

less lost.

course, does


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS. not involve A

and

;

a construction at least as popular in late It appears abundantly even in the most illiterate

the papyri,

in

legal documents we in formulae, such as

waiv

iav

oa-cov

is

in

further

stretched Tj

^^ ^^ classical Greek.

+

4.4.

them

of

oo-ri?

93

There are

ovao)v.

have the principle apovpfav BeKa Svo to

be

noted

some

exceptions to the general rule of attraction, on which see In several cases of alleged breach of rule we may Blass 173. more probably (with Blass) recognise the implied presence of the

"

"

internal accusative

Dr Plummer (CGT,

:

Co

2

Co 1*, Eph 1^ 4\ where would make the dative the

so in 2

I.e.)

original case for the relative.

Confusion of relative and indirect inter" is not uncommon. ''Oo-o9, olo<;,

Relatives and Interrogatives confused. of r)XLKo<;

rogative „

<

,

o7roio<i,

,

^jXt/co?

.

occur in the

NT

as indirect

with the exception interrogatives, and also as relatives," W. F. Moulton observes 210 n.);

(WM

and in the papyri even o? can be used in an indirect question. Good examples are found in Par P 60 (ii/B.c.) uTroarikop /xoi TToaov e^ei Tvapd aov 2. koI [ckJ)'] ov '^povov, and EL 29 (iii/B.C.) (jipd^ovTe'i [to Te] avrwv ovoiia kov iv rji km/xtjl oIkovctlv kuI So already in Sophocles, Antiy. 542, 7r[6arov Ti.jjLc!)v]Tai. OT 1068 (see Jebb's notes); and in Plato, Euth. 14e a fxev yap It is superfluous to say that this usage cannot possibly be extended to direct question, so as to justify 8i86a(Tiv, Travrl Sr]Xov.

the

AV

tions

Mt

in

show

ri<i

The more illiterate papyri and inscripfor relative oo-ri? not infrequently, as evpov

26^^*.

avra ekKvarj '^^'^ "^ kuko)^ rtfo? eav XP^^^ ^XV^ Jebb on Soph. OT 1 141 remarks that while " Ti9 in classical Greek can replace oVrt? only where there is Hellenistic Greek did not always an indirect question, There is no adequate reason observe this rule: Mk 14^^." for punctuating Jas 3^^ so as to bring in this misuse of tw. 'yeopjov Tt9

'7roi7]aeL,^ etc.

.

But

Mt

.

Lk 17^

10^^ and

.

are essentially similar ;2 nor does

there seem to be any decisive reason against so reading Ac 13^^ Dieterich (Unters. 200) gives several inscriptional exx., and observes that the use was specially strong in Asia

1

BU

^ I

BM

239 (Iv/a.d.), JffS xix. 299. (iii/A.D.), retract tlie denial I gave in CH xv 441.

822

nmst


A GRAMMAE OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

94 Minor.

It is interesting therefore to note

{ThLZ

xxviii.

Pontic

now

NT

oTi for t/ in a direct question

between the

confusion

further developed in our

^

two

a curious example of the categories, a confusion much

own

language.

is

MGr

developments are instructive when _ ,, ,. ^^ ^^^ exammmg the relatives and mterThe normal relative is ttoO, folrogatives.

,

Developments in

Thumb's statement

423), that the interrogative is similarly used in a clear case of local survival. The use of

.

MGr.

,

.

.

lowed by the proper case of the demonstrative, as rov

irov

"

GaTeika,

the

doctor

whom

I

sent,"

6

^larpo^

etc.

The

ingenious Abbe Viteau

discovers a construction very much like this, though he does not draw the parallel, in Jn 9" oVt

aov

"

thou whose eyes he hath Since 6 ti opened": he cites Mk 6^"- 8^* as further exx. and "1^^^. are passable equivalents, we have here a " pure Hebraism " a gem of the first water We might better Tjvew^ev

rov'i

6(f)daXfiov<i,

!

Viteau's instruction

MGr

the

avrrj<;)

1439, on

§

and the

the same fertile source

supporting our case with a reference to

idiom,

Jannaris ^6^

by tracing

to

like.^

Mk

MGr

7^5 (^9 . . . parallels to It will be wise however for us to sober

ourselves with

a glance at Thumb's remarks, Hellen. 130, which we may proceed to look for parallels nearer home than Hebrew. In Old English this was the regular con-

after

struction.

Thus, asend waes" (Gen

"

thurh God,

the ic

thurh his willan hider

45^); "namely oon That with a spere was thirled his brest-boon" (Chaucer, Knightes Tale 1851 f.). " Of the German " der du bist = who art.^ The idiom is " still which her among us and Mrs Gamp, remarking ;

name The

Mrs

Harris," will hardly be suspected of Hebraism affords an almost decisive presence of a usage in is

!

MGr

disproof of Semitism in the Kolvtj, only one small corner of whose domain came within range of Semitic influences and we ;

have merely idioms

may

to recognise afresh the ease with arise in totally independent

languages.

not however follow that Blass

^

which identical

is

It does

wrong when he claims

See below, p. 237 also Wellh. 22, who adds exx. from D. See Skeat's Chaucer, Frologue and Knightes Tale, p. xxxvi, ;

^

gestion to

my

frieud

Mr

E. E. Kellett.

I

owe the sug-


95

ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS.

Mk 72^ 1^ 13^", Lk 3i«, and passages in Eev, as "specially The phenomenon is frequent suggested by Semitic usage." in the (see 185), and the NT exx. are all from places where Aramaic sources are certain or suspected.

WM

LXX

A

may be stretched when convenient for

vernacular use

natural limits,

(cf pp.

10

beyond its But eariv} comes

f.)

literal translation.

own quotation, ov r) irvoij avrov iv t'l^lv a That this use did exist in the from piece of free Greek. from old vernacular, away any Semitic influence, is proved Blass's

The quotations in Kiihner-Gerth by the papyri (p. 85). in and Blass and Winer ll.cc, show that it had §561 n.^, As was natural in a its roots in the classical language. from started which anacoluthon, the relative and usage the pleonastic demonstrative were generally, in the earlier examples, separated by a good

many

intervening words.

The modern Interrogative is mostly Troio?, practically worn down to the indeclinable rt,

for

ri? has

just as our tuhat (historically identical with the Latin qtiod) has become The indifferent in gender. decidedly shows the early It will not do for us to of extension of this ttoIo^;. stages

NT

refine too

much on

The weakening

new pronoun

the distinction between the two pronouns.

of the special sense of irolo'i called into being a

to express the sense qualis,name\y,7roTa7r6<;,which

what country ? "), modified by popular and thus denuded of its associaetymology tion in meaning with dXX.oS-aTro'i, rjfA,e8-a'ir6<;, and vfjLeB-airo^} We take next the Numerals. The use Numera s .— " ^^ ^^ ordinal is ^^ ^^^ undoubtedly a was the old

TroSaTro? (" of

to suggest ttotc,

CIS 3'S OrCilll3;i

Our are

doubts,

y

,

Hebrew

idiom,

nevertheless, will

encouraged

by

the

query

-i

accordmg

not be repressed in

A A

Blass, p. 144.

to

Thumb's

;

and they To

review.

begin with, why did the Hebraism affect only the first If the use was vernacular numeral, and not its successors ? Greek, the reason of the restriction is obvious tt/jwto? is the only ordinal which altogether differs in form from the :

1

Clement ad

tliinks the writer

Cor. 21 Jin.

(Lightfoot, p. 78).

was of Semitic

Nestle

{ZNTW

i.

178

tf.)

birth.

2 The suffix is that of Latin joro^-Mig'wos, long-inquos, Skt. anv-anc, etc. ttoSand dWoS- are quod, xvhut, aliud, while i)ixto-, vfieS-, answer to ablative forma :

in Skt.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

96

When we

add that both German and English say "^ja^€ forty" (WM 311), we are prepared for the belief that the Greek vernacular also had this natural use. Now, although et? Koi elKoaTO'i, unus et vicesimus, one and hoenticth, are (as cardinal.^

Blass says) essentially different, since the ordinal element is present at the end of the phrase, this is not so with r^ fxia koI elKciht,^

BU

623

(ii/iii A.D.).

But the matter

is

really settled

by the fact that in MGr the cardinals beyond 4 have ousted the ordinals entirely (Thumb, Hanclbuch 56); and Dieterich (Unters. 187 f.) shows from inscriptions that the use is as old as Byzantine Greek. It would seem then that the encroach-

ment of the cardinal began in the one case where the ordinal was entirely distinct in form, spread thence over other numerals, and was finally repelled from the first four, in which constant use preserved alike the declension and the distinct ordinal form. Had Semitic influence been at work, there is no conceivable reason why we should not have had tj} irevre at the

Simultaneously with this process we note the firm establishment of simplified ordinals

same

time.

to 19th, which now (from iii/B.c. are onwards) exclusively of the form rptaicai8eKaTo<;, reaa-apeaKacBeKaTO'i, etc., with only isolated exceptions. " of the " teens

Similarly

we

^^'^^

13th

find SeVa rpet?, 8eKa e^, etc., almost invariably in

papyri, and SeKu Bvo more often than

mena

all started in

as Indefinite Article

€19

i-i.ii its

«

remark, article, like

our

own an

^

:

in

SooSeKa.^"'

These pheno-

the classical period: cf Meisterhans^ 160. There is a further use of eh which calls

MGr

^

-in-.

j.

development into an mdennite cin in German, un in French, or

the process

is

complete.

The

fact that

dvo, but popular etymology would naturally Curiously enough, Hebrew shares the peculiarity noted above, which somewhat weakens our argument: Aramaic, like Latin and English, uses

Aevrepoi

is

not derived from

connect them.

a word distinct from the cardinal for second as well as

Hebrew has lost Jirst. and Aramaic shows them only in the Jerus. Targ. See Dalman, Gramm. 99 f. For days of the month, the encroachment of cardinals has gone further still in both dialects. The fact that the ordinals up to 10 are all treated alike in Hebrew, reinforces our view. ^ EtVds, like Tpids, Sefcds, rpiiKas, etc., was originally either No. SO or a set Cf rpids in Vhilo = 3Td day of 20, though used only for the 20th of the month. (LS), and rerpas, the usual name for Wednesday, surviving in MGr see p. 237. * Wellhauseu notes that D has ouh Sh-a 8iJ0 and ip. [" See p. 246. all

ordinals beyond 10,

:


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS.

97

eh progressively ousted ri'? in popular speech, and that even Greek there was a use which only needed a little

in classical

diluting to make it essentially the same,^ is surely enough to prove that the development lay entirely within the Greek language, and only by accident agrees with .Semitic. (See

We

Wellh. 27.) 8^^),

of Tt9

it is

:

must not therefore follow Meyer (on Mt

is ever used in the NT in the sense dangerous to import exegetical subtleties into the

denying that eU

in

.

against the known history of the Common The use of 6 eh in 14^*^ is, as

NT,

,

Mk

Greek.

noted in Expos, vi. vii. Ill, paralleled in early papyri.^ In Blass's second edition (p. .330) we find a virtual surrender of the Hebraism in hvo hvo, (rvuiroaia ., _^. JJistributivss. /Ti»i ntnt \ //•«.

/

\

c>

(Mk

av/jLTToaia

O"*'''-),

cv

oea/jba<i oecr/xa?

(Mt

13^'^

a very probable reading, as accounting for the Epiphanius he remarks on fxiav /xiav in Sophocles (Frag. 201) variants):

in

"

Atticists had evidently complained of it as vulgar, and was not only Jewish-Greek." Winer compared Aeschylus PerscG 981, /Mvpia fxvpia TrefMiraaTav. Deissmann (ThLZ, cites from OP 121 (iii/A.D.) 1898, p. 631) Syja-rj rpia rpla and (as W. F. Moulton noted 312 n.) the usage is found in MGr.^ Thumb is undeniably right in calling the coincidence with Hebrew a mere accident. In the papyri

that

it

;

WM

Tb V 63^

(e.g.

an elative that in

the repetition of an adjective produces /xeydXov = fiejiarov. It should be added

ii/B.C.)

= fieydXou

Lk 10^ we have

a mixed distributive dva 8vo Svo

al): so in Ev. Petr. 35, as Blass notes,

(B 92

and Acta Philippi

(Tisch.).^

Two 1.J.I-

we

..

eigntn person.

^

«

,

Nm€

It is difficult to see

Av. 1292

single passages claim a

on from

pass /

€<j)v\a^€v in

any

7re'p5i^ /jAf

difference between

els

and

ris in

eh

*

We may

we may

5'

tji'

;

cite as exx.

xeXtSibi' roijuo/xa, k.t.X.

AP

BU

Thumb, ffcllen. 128, Handburh See W. Schulze, Graeca Latina 7

Aristophanes,

KdTri]\os wvofid^ero

Twv iyKoXovfievaiv 'Nexovdou. 3

"OyBooj>

Pet 2^ presents us with

30 (ii/B.c.) Kou8v\ov ivbs tQv aXieluv 1044 (iv/A.D.) eVos {sic = eh) Xeyb/xevov (=-o$) •t'a^tris. add good exx. from Par P 15 (ii/E.C.) tov eva avrwu^Qpov tov eroj

the papyri

(sc. irpo(TK\7)divTO$) ^

2

:— X0}\6s, MeulTTTrqi

From

«,

word before

numerals.

the

57. 13.

Add now

Wellh. 31.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

98

a classical idiom which can be shown to survive at any rate see exx. in in literary Common Greek 312, and Schtefer I have not noticed any occurrences in the papyri, and I.e.

WM

:

The AV of Pet we rather expect bookish phrases. for our illustration instructive is an inquiries passage " " Noah the eighth person is not English, as to Hebraisms. 2

in

this

for all its

appearing in a work which we are taught to regard

It is a piece of as the impeccable standard of classic purity. " translation English," and tolerably unintelligible too, one may well suppose, to its less educated readers. Now, if this

specimen of translators' "nodding" had made its way" into " we strain at a gnat lilce the misprint the language " " as hitherto Hebraism should have had a fair parallel for As it stands, a phrase which no one has ever understood.

thought of imitating, it serves to illustrate the over-literal translations which appear very frequently in the LXX and in

NT, where a Semitic original underlies the Greek text. (Compare what is said of Gallicisms in English on p. 13.) the

"

Last in this division comes a note on

Seventy times

j^^.

gj^gg janores entirely the

j^g22_

seven.

.

ren-

"

" (KVmargin), dering seventy-seven times in Gen 4^* is unmistakable this fact that the meaning despite Moulton W. F. that will be felt It (LXX). surely

314) was right in regarding that passage as

(WM A

decisive.

allusion to the Genesis story is highly probable: Jesus pointedly sets against the natural man's craving for seventy-sevenfold revenge the spiritual man's ambition to definite

For exercise the privilege of seventy-sevenfold forgiveness. a partial grammatical parallel see Iliad xxii. 349, heKUKt^ [re] " Kol FeUoai, tenfold and twenty-fold," if the text is sound. It will be

Prepositions

:

^^^

^.j^g

^^® ^^'

Freauency

worth while

to give statistics

relative frequency of Prepositions in answering to those cited from Helbing

(above, pp. 6 2

we

f.)

for

the classical and post-

represent iv by unity, the order of et? "64, i/c "34, eTrt "32, 7rpo<? precedence works out thus: •25, Std -24, ciTTo -24, Kara "17, //.era "17, irepl -12, vtto If

classical historians.

•08, -rrapd "07,

dvd -0045.

vTrep

We

compounded with

-054,

shall

aw

have

-048, irpo -018, civtc •008, to return later to prepositions

verbs, following our

present principle of


90

ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS.

them in connexion with the parts of speech which they are used. A few miscellaneous matters

dealing with witli

come

best at this point.

in

minence Prepositions

First

in

Adverbs.

'^"^^

'rrepvai

us

notice

of

combinations of

with adverbs.

prepositions

^^^

let

Hellenistic

^'^

'^^

'^^'^^'

(Deissmann

NT we

pro-

we

papyri

utto (ii/A.D.),

221), and even

^aS'

6tâ‚Ź tXovau/j,7]v, "since I last bathed,"

In

^^ 486

the

OP 528

acf)

In

(ii/A.D.).

have uTrb

totc, utto irepvai, air' apn, e/c irakai, e(j>' The roots of the usage may be seen in aira^, enrl rpk, etc.

the classical eV del

became

iixed, as

and the

Some

like.

vTroKuro),

virepdvo),

be set beside the abundance of

"

of these

combinations

Karevavrt.

This

may

prepositions.

All

"

Improper

Thumb

except i<y'yu<;, take the genitive only. comments ^ on the survival of such as eco?, eirdvo), of

these,

vTroKUTQ), in

MGr.

Hebraism

have been responsible

mann proved

in

for the

this

field

ottiVo),

was supposed

coining of eva>inov,

till

to

Deiss-

The compound preposition dva it has turned up abundantly fieaov was similarly aspersed in the papyri, not however in any use which would help 1 Co 6^, where it is almost impossible to believe the text it

vernacular.^

—

sound.

;

(An exact

but

parallel occurs in the

Athenmum

for Jan.

14, 1905, where a writer is properly censured for saying, " I have attempted to discriminate between those which are " well authenticated," i.e. (presumably) [and those which are Paul would have been so slovenly hard to believe It is not]." We have a further set of in writing, or even dictating.) " " Hebraisms in the compound prepositions which are freely made with irpoaooirov, ')(elp and aTo/xa (Blass 129 f.): see Even here the Semitism is still on the above, p. 81. familiar lines a phrase which is possible in native Greek :

extended widely beyond

is

idiomatic

its

common Hebrew

a

translates

because

limits

locution

and

it

the

exactly conscious use of Biblical turns of speech explains the application of such phrases on the lips of men whose minds are

saturated with the sacred writers' language. 1

2

TkLZ xxviii. 422. BS 213. Gi Expos,

vi.

iii.

in the formula of a libclhis.

gave notice in person,"

is

113

:

Tb P

As

;

early as iii/B.c,

OP 658 (iii/A.P.), where it appears 14 (114 B.C.) TrapriyyeXKdTes ivuinov, "I

add now

the earliest ex.

I

have seen.

F>ut see p. 246.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

100

in a Libyan's will, we meet with Kara irpoa-ui'Trov rtvo'i ;^ and in mercantile language we constantly find the formula Slu X^'-po'i,

hand

used absolutely,

it is

true

to hand," as contrasted with

We may

MP

25 (iii/B.c), "from through an intermediary."

e.g.

"

refer to Heitmilller's proof

^

that the kindred phrase

The strong tendency which we have been compound prepositional phrases, all the easier to develop would make it illustrating already,

eh TO

ovofid

Tivo<i is

good vernacular.

to use

these adaptations of familiar language.

„,;+ir«v,^ witn one «„„« case.

as

The eighteen classical prepositions we have iust seen, all represented in ,

are,

NT

.

/

Greek, except afx^i, which has disappeared as a separate word, like anibi in Latin, and like its correlative in English, the former existence of which in our own branch

shown by the survival of um in modern German. It was not sufficiently differentiated from irepl to assert itself in the competition and the decay of the idea of duality weakened further a preposition which still proclaimed its is

;

"

on both sides," by its resemblance to original meaning, ^Avci has ajji^orepoi. escaped the same fate by its distributive use,

which accounts for seven instances, the phrase ava fjueaov 'Avrl occurs 22 times, and dva fiipo^ for one.

for four,

but dvd'

oiv

reduces the

number

of free occurrences to 17.

Bare though it is, it retains its individuality. " In front with a normal adnominal genitive, passes naturally into

of,"

"

in

with the idea of equivalence or return or substituplace For the preposition in Jn l^*", an excellent tion, our for. of,"

parallel

48

from Philo

is

given in

WM

(p.

456

times, including 9 exx. of irpo tov

JJpo occurs

n.).^

which invades

c. inf.,

In Jn 12^ we have irpb e| ij/xepMV irpiv. which looks extremely like ante diem iertium The plausible Latinism forces itself on our

the province of TOV

irda-^a,

Kalendas.

attention all the

more when we compare

IMA

iii.

325

(ii/A.D.)

BS \iO.

1

Deissmami

2

Tm Namen Jem

*

Blass compares yiju

100

ff.

So

p. 63, for ^v ovd/j-aTi

on,

Mk

9^i.

wpb yrj? eXavveuOaL, "from one liind to another," cXirLaiv i^ eX-n-iduv, and the like (p. 124). The Philonic passage is from De Sib rets wpwras akl xctptras, irplv Kopeadei'Tas Poster. Caini § 145 (p. 254 M.) :

e^v^piaaL roi)s \ax6vTas, eVicrxwj' Kfxl Ta/juevadp-evos ehavOis erepas dur' eKelvuiv, KoX rpiras dvri tCov devrepwv /cat akl vcas dvri iraXaioripuv iiribibuai. .

.

.


ADJECTIVES PRONOUNS, PREPOSITtONS. KaXavhwv

le

TTjOo

Av<^ovar(i)v,

and

docunieuts to be seen in Viereck's

parallels

iu

101

translated

JScr/no Grc/'cns (see pp.

12, And yet it is soon found that the same 13, 21, etc.). construction occurs in phrases which have nothing in common with the peculiar formula of Latin days of the

In the Mysteries inscription from Andania (Michel 694, iJB.G.) we recognise it iu Doric Trpb afxepav BeKu twi/

month.

/jbvaTTjpLcov irpoi

Suo

;

and the

rjfiepov

illiterate

FP 118

(ii/A.D.),

eio^T?}? ("

buy the

vernacular of

dyopaaov ra opviddpia

Trj'i

fowls two days before the feast"), when combined with Jn I.e., makes the hypothesis of Latinism utterly improbable. The

second genitive in these three passages is best taken as an " It is found as ablative starting from the mysteries," etc.

early as Herodotus,

who has

(vi.

46) Sevrepo)

eVet Toyxtuj^,

"

in

the second yearfroin these events": cf also OP 492 (ii/A.D.) fier " a year after (starting from) ivcavTov eva Trj<i re\evTr]<; fiov, the note on See also There death." oi/re, stipr. p. 72. my

remains the idiomatic use of

irpo,

seen in 2 Co 12^ irpb iroiv

Blass (p. 127 n.) heKareaadpwv, "fourteen years before." cites irpo d/xepdv 8eKa from the will of Epicteta (Michel 1001), written in the Doric of Thera, "end of iii/B.c. or

beginning of

ii/B.C,

therefore

pre-Roman"

to cite Blass's

own

becomes clear that historically the resemtestimony.^ blance between the mite diem idiom and the Greek which translates it is sheer coincidence, and the supposed Latinism goes into the same class as the Hebraisms we have so often It

This enquiry, with the general condisposed of already.^ siderations as to Latinisms which were advanced above (pp.

20

f.),

1

will serve to encourage scepticism

Add FP

122

(i/ii

a.p.),

BU

592

(ii/A.D.),

NP

47

when we note

(iii/A.D), Cli

P

the

15 (iv/A.D.),

BU836{vi/A.D.). 2

W.

Schulze, Graec. Lat. 14-19, has a long

and striking

list

of passages

how common it became. His illustrating the usage in question, wliich shows earliest citation is irpb TpiQv Tj/xepuiv ttjs reXevT-qs from Hippocrates (v/b.c),

Wo have accordingly will go with that from Herodotus given above. both Ionic and Doric warrant for this Koivrj construction, dating from a period which makes Latin necessarily the borrower, were we bound to deny independent Our explanation of development. Schulze adds a parallel from Lithuanian which

!

the dependent gen. as an ablative in

OGIS

435

exactly as

it

(ii/B.c.)

supported by and Jos. Ant. xiv. 317 ^ is

does after comiJaratives.

:

Trpb /^las 7]fj.^pas

))

c.

ace. et inf.,

rei)laces the ablative genitive


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

102

resemblance of hus

diro a-rahiuiv SeKUTrevre

&)<?

passimm duobus (Blass

and the usage

(Jn

Blass cites

95).

11^*^) to

Jn

21^,

a milli'

Eev

14-*^,

Koivy writers like Diodorus and Plutarch. Mutatis mutandis, this idiom is identical in principle with that of

After noting the translation-Hebraism just quoted for irpo. = Lk 12*),^ we proceed to observe (^o^eladai diro in Mt 10^* (

which encroaches upon modern vernacular top '-4Xe^. UdWrj" reminds us

the enlargement of the sphere of eK,

and

vTTo,

irapd!^

The

citto,

title

"

of

the

Gospels, /jL6Ta(f)pacr/jiivr] diro that diTO has advanced further in the interval.

the

NT Lk

{e.g.

Already in sometimes expressed the agent after passive verbs where it is quite unnecessary to resort to 8'*^),

it

refinements unless the usage of a particular writer demands The alleged Hebraism in Ka9apb^ d-no is dispelled by them. The use of prepositions, Deissmanu's quotations, B& 196.

Greek would have been content with a simple in NT to outnumber d^rd still, though e'/c obsolete to-day,^ except in the Epirot d-^ or h-^?Thus dTrd is used to express the partitive sense, and to replace the where

earlier

enables

case,

Mt 27"^ 3*); e/c can even make a of partitive phrase capable becoming subject of a sentence, as in Jn 16^'^. For present purposes we need not pursue further

genitive of material (as

NT

uses of diro and

which may be sought in the but we may quote two illustrative inscriptional Letronne 190 and 198 have acoOeU eK, passages with eÂŤ. " " safe home from (a place), which has affinity with Heb 5'^ and virdp'^wv 6eo<i eK deov koX ded<;, from the Eosetta stone {OGIS 90 ii/B.c), will elucidate Phil 3^ if the reader of the Greek should, conceivably, fall into the misconceptions which so many English readers entertain. It gives us an unpleasant start to find the language of the Nicene Creed the

lexicon

eK,

;

;

—

used centuries earlier of Ptolemy Epiphanes ^ We have already (pp. 62 f.) sketched the developments of !

^ Were the active 4>o^elv still "do not be panic-stricken by."

Thus ox

^

Epiphanes = Avatar

tenable.

pates the

It is

" from the

^

TO ^ovvd,

extant (below, p. 162), this might be taken as

much

{i-TrKpaveia).

terms, above, p. 84.

(On

Lk

12^.

a modern song, Abbott 128 f. translation "illustrious" is no longer

: the common See Ditteuberger's note, OGIS

NT

like Trpoa^x^iv dird,

hill," occurs in

Cf what

i.

p. 144.

So this

title also

antici-

said on Christian adaptations of heathen cnrd see also below, p. 237.) ["^See p. 246, is


103

ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS. and need say no more

elf,

one very

with

„ ^^ Further q£.

uses

the single-case prepositions; The late Greek uses of large exception/* iv would take too much space if discussed in n

t^

,

^

it has

lull here,

^^

of

,

^

become

so

much

.

.

a maid-of-

all-work that we cannot wonder at its ultimate disappearance, as too indeterminate. Students of Pauline theology will not need to be reminded of Deissmann's masterly " monograph on The NT Formula iv Xpiar<p 'Ir]aov," with its careful investigation of LXX uses of iv, and proof of the But SH (on Eom 6^^) seem riglitly originality of Paul's use.

urge that the idea of the mystic indwelling originated witli

to

own teaching the actual phrase in Jn 1 5'' may be determined by Pauline language, but in the original Aramaic teaching the thought may have been essentially present. the Master's

:

NT

While there are a good many

uses of iv which

may

be

paralleled in vernacular documents, there are others beside this one which cannot in their case, however, analogy makes :

NT

writers were innovating.

it

highly improbable that the

If

papyri have irpo^e^rjKore'i t/Bt} Tot9 ereatv (TP 1 ii/B.c), need not assume Hebraism in Lk 1'^ merely because the

we

evangelist inserts iv

his faithful preservation of his source's In Ac V^'* another matter. See pp. 6 If. above.

is

'})/j.epaL<i

(LXX) we have

Mk 4^ by BU

his

970

1050

Lk

= " amounting

from which that

to,"

This

differ.

is

in

precisely paralleled

hpa'^jiah iwaKoaLai^, OP 724 Soaiv ev Bpa-y^fxal^ reacrapaKovra, ttjv irpdiTqv

(ii/A.D.) irpoolKa iv

").

akin to

2^9,

ev

.

(i/A.D.) i/jbaTia

the value of in," is

:

does not greatly

(ii/A.D.) ecr-^^e?

BU

.

.

iv

.

.

.

8pa^ixai<;

eKurov ("to

The use in Eph 2^^ ev 86y/xaai.v, " this. Por ev toZ<? — " in the house

we have EL 382

(iii/e.G.)

ev

consisting of," as in

toi'; 'A-rroXXcoviov,

Tb P 12

'Aixevvewf "in A.'s office/' OP 523 (ii/A.D.) (ii/B.c.) ev Toh KXavSlov: cf Par P 49 (ii/B.c.) eU to, npeoTdp-^ov We have in KaTaXvao), and even ev rwt, "Slpov in Tb P 27. ev Tot?

documents ev meaning " in the department of ": so Tb P 27 (ii/B.c.) TO iv avrcoc 6(f)6i'\.6fievov, 72 a? iv Map pel I do not recall an exact NT parallel, but To-KoypafxfjbaTei, al.

official

1

Co

6-, el ev v/xtv

have another use "

in

my

Kpiverat 6

K6a-fj,o<i,

is

not far away.

We

a personal dative in 1 Co 14^^ possibly Jude^ ev 0ea) is akin to this.

ev with

of "

judgement Such uses would answer :

to Trapd »

See p. 246.

c.

dat. in

classical

Greek


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

104

last might seem to be expressed more naturally by the "dative of person judging" (like Ac ^-'^ dareto^i rai Qew, or But the earliest 1 Co I.e. 'iaofiat tu) Xakovvri ^ap^apo'i).

The

and locative have some common ground, which indeed the leading cause of their syncretism. Thus we find loc. in Sanskrit used quite often for the dat. of indirect object How readily ev was added to the after verbs of speaking. uses of dative

is

dative, tion,

which

we

where

"

in older

more

the

more

.

.

is

"

(ii/iii a.d.),

This hy one aroura is expressed by eV. an instrumental the same case as our "

and is therefore parallel to that armed with a sword," which we have already

the merrier

of ev fia^acprj,

OP 488

"

.

particular dative "

Greek would have needed no preposi-

see well in such a passage as

,

mentioned (pp. 12,61). We may fairly claim that " Hebraistic" ev is by this time reduced within tolerably narrow limits. One further iv may be noted for its difficulty, and for its bearing on Synoptic questions, the o/xoXoyelv ev tlvl which is conmion to Mt 10^^ and Lk 12^: this is among the clearest evidences of essentially identical translations used in Mt and Lk. W. F. Moulton (WM 283 n.) cites, apparently with approval, Godet's

" the repose of faith in Him whom it confesses": explanation so Westcott, quoting Heracleon, who originated this view

{Canon^ 305

Deissmann {In Christo 60) quotes Delitzsch's ^3 ru\\ and puts it with Mt 3" 9^* 1 1^ 23-^ as an example of a literal translation "mit angstlicher, n.).

Hebrew rendering

die hermeneutische Pedanterie nahelegender Pietat." Dr Eendel Harris recalls the Grascised translation in Eev 3^, and On the whole, it seems best not gives me Syriac parallels. to look for justification of this usage in Greek.

The agreement

Mt and

Lk, in a point where accidental coincidence is out of the question, remains the most important element in the of

it does that Luke did not use any Aramaic so as to deal independently with the translated Logia that came to him.^ Of the prepositions with two cases, hid Prepositions ^^^^^ nerd show no signs of weakening their ^^^^ Kara c. gen. and irepi, ^^^^^ °^ ^°^^ Cases virep and vtto c. ace. distinctly fall behind.

whole matter, proving as of

knowledge

^

'

Cf the similar agreement as to

(po^eladai dird, above, p. 102.


105

ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS.

We may 279;

give

fierd

the statistics in proof.

gen.

291,

361,

100; Kara

ace.

Aid

382,

gen.

73, ace.

gen.

ace.

391;

ace.

38; virep gen. 12G, ace. 19; viro gen. Comparing this list with that in a classical Greek grammar, we see that /xerd, irepl and vtto ^ have been detached from connexion with the dative a fact in line with those noted above, pp. 62 ff. Turning to details, we find that Kard (like dvd, Eev 2V"^) is used as an adverb irepi geu.

ace. 50.

165,

—

distributively, as in to Kad^

eh or eh Kara eh

Mk

14^^ [Jn] 8^, KaOeva^, each," preserves this, which probably started from the stereotyping of to Kaff eva, ev Ka& ev, etc., declined by cf evStjfio^ from ev analogy

Kom

The

2^

1

MGr Ka6eh or

"

:

The enfeebling of Sj;/x&) (mv), or proconsul from pro consule. the distinction between irepl and virep c. gen. is a matter of some importance in the NT, where these prepositions are used in well-known passages to describe the relation of the man or man's sins. It is an evident fact that

Eedeeraer to

virep is often a colourless

for

"about," as in 2 Co 8^^ it is used, the sense of :

example, scores of times in accounts, witli

our commercial

"

definitions,

The

This seems to show that its original must not be presumed upon in theological

to."

fullness of content

although

distinction

it

may

between

avri,

not have been wholly forgotten. and the more colourless virep, in

applying the metaphor of purchase, (

= Mt

20"*^)

is

Mk

well seen in

1 0^^

XvTpov dvTi iroXkcov, and the quotation of this

logion in 1 Tim 2^ dvriXvrpov virep " retains its meaning for tlie sake of,"

irdvrcov.'^ "

because

Aid of,"

c.

ace.

distinct

from the meaning " through," " by the instrumentality of," which belongs to the genitive. As early as MP 16 and 20 (iii/B.c), we have iva Sia ae /dacriXev rod Zikulov rvyoa;

meant " through you," he would have addressed the king as a mere medium of favour referring to a sovereign power, the ordinary meaning " " because of you This applies exactly is more appropriate. to Jn 6^''. So Eom 8-^, where Winer's explanation is correct but

the

if

humble

petitioner

had

:

In much later Greek, as Hatzidakis shows

498).

(p.

'

and -

For

OP

Ii-kI) c. dat. can be quoted OGIS 54 (iii/u.c.) 708 (as late as ii/A.D.) ^k tov virb aol vo/xou.

Note

tliat

^vxr]v avTov

:

v(p'

eavrwL

(p.

213)

woirja-d/ji.ei'Oi,

oous iavrhv is substituted for the translation-Greek Sovvai Tj]f

on this see above,

p. 87.

See further on vw^p, p. 237.


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

106 Bed

ace.

c.

monopolised the

With

MGr.^

the

vTTo, etc., as

e/c,

Co

as 1

8ÂŤ,

Mt

holds in

still

it

often

is

with

contrasted

denoting mediate and not original authorship, In Heb 2^^ it is used of God, who is " the 122.

Cause and the efficient Cause There seems no adequate reason final

jectural emendation, 8c "

which

field, Su'i

genitive,

"

of

all

things

(Westcott).

for accepting Blass's con" because of an uadev6ia<i, in Gal 4^^ :

in loc),

an entirely satisfactory statement (see Lightfoot and the Vulgate per is not strong enough to justify

Blass's

confidence.^

illness

is

Merd

c.

Lk

has in

gen.

a

1^^

use

influenced by literal translation from Semitic."^ Its relations with avv are not what they were in Attic, but it remains

much

very

commoner way

the

points out {Hellen. 125) that in TToXe/juelv jxerd 7ivo<i, Eev 1 2'^

44 iroXefiTjae 3000 Turks." :

fie

,

three

we should

however,

it

Merd,

expect.

line into the two-case class

(Ac 27^\

Mk, Lk, Ju

in

TovpKOVi,

,.

has nearly gone a

gen. 1

Thus, for example, Abbott " he fought with

al!"

'^tXcdSe'i

,

as

have crossed the 7r/jo9

Thumb saying ivith. use disproves Hebraism

The category of prepositions used with . i ^ 4.three cases is hurrying towards extinction,

and with

c.

rpel<^

of

MGr

literary),

ter

occurs

step

and Eev),

104 times

6

ace.

(

="

TM

TTvXcovi, as late as

245

irepc and and in the its

G79.

vtto

NT

figures

are

to" or "at,"

close

With

LXX, and 23

in

the dative,

times

c.

gen.

Cf however PFi

the decay seems to have been rapid 7r/309

for

further,

dat.

;

:

5

For irapd the numbers Blass notes that c. dat. it

A.d.

c. gen. 78, dat. 50, ace. 60. only used of persons, as generally in classical Greek, except One phrase with rrapd calls for a note on its in Jn 19'"'''. 01 Trap* avrov is exceedingly common use in the papyri.

are, is

"

"

"

or It has his agents representatives." for find hitherto been less easy to 3'-i, where parallels " " in loc. see Swete and Field his family it must mean

there to denote

Mk

:

We ^

Slo.

can

now

Contrast

Ac

cite

GH

24- with

OP

36 41

01

(ii/B.C.)

(iii/iv

a.d.)

irap

irdvre'i,

7)/j,mv

ttoWQv dyaOui'

d.iTo\avofiâ‚Źi>

aai.

Ov 8vvd/jLepos 5i' acydeveiav -ir\evcrai maybe quoted from OP 726 and a like phrase from OP 261 (i/A.u.), but of course they prove

nothing.

["

See pp. 246

''

f.

;

(ii/A.D. little

),

or

see p. 247.


ADJECTIVES, PRONOUNS, PREPOSITIONS.

107

BU

998 (ii/B.c), and Par P ;5G {u/r..c.)} Finally we come tW, the only preposition which is still thoroughly at home with all the cases (gen. 21G, dat. 176, ace. 464). The weakening of case-distinctions is shown however by the very disproportion of these figures, and by the confusion of meaning to

which is frequently arising. In Heb 8^*^ 10^^ we construe Kap8la<i as ace. only because of eVi ttjv Suivoiau which follows it in the latter passage on the other hand, the original in Jer 31(38)^^ is singular, which favours taking it as genitive.:

Our

local tipon

dat.,

or ace,

can in fact be rendered by eV/ with with comparatively little difference of

gen., force.

Particular phrases are appropriated to the several cases, but is not always obvious, though it may often be

the reason traced

back to

rather clearer.

tVt TO avTo

classical

Among

language, where distinctions were the current phrases we may note "

"

together,"

statements: see

Ac

1^^

in all," often

2*'^.

Blass^

used in arithmetical

330 might be read

as

which recurs scores of times. The common i(f>' & c. fut. indie. " on condition that," does not appear in the NT. But with a 2 in in Co and an aor. Eom the 5^ 5^^, pres. meaning is the in fact same view of the that essentially (" "), allowing for the sense resulting from a jussive future. suggesting comparative rarity for

this phrase,

^

Expos. VI. vii. 118, viii. 436. See also Mk 6"^ eirl ri£ x°pTV> where Mt 14^* substitutes iirl tou x-, but witli eVi Tbv X- in D. In Ac 7*^ D substitutes gen. for ace, and in 8'" ace. for In Epli 1'" it seems diffieult to draw any valid distinction between the dat. To add one further example, there cases of iirl toIs ovpavoh and iirl ttjs 7^5. ^

seems no dilference between iir iaxa-rov in Heb (ii/B.c), &V Tj 5ioiK7](Tii iw iuxo-TO! TiraKTM.

1^

and the dative

in

Tb P

69


CHAPTER

VI.

The Verb: Tenses and Modes of Action.

Our

first

subject under the

Verb

will

be one which haa

For yet achieved an entrance into the grammars. the last few years the comparative philologists mostly in not

^ „

" Aktionsart." . ,

action

.

"

Germany

—

—have

been

busily

investigatino-

ai^ / ah/ ^ or^ Akhonsart, or ^i the problems the knid, oi The subject, denoted by different verbal formations.

complex in itself, has unfortunately been entangled not a but it must be studied by little by inconsistent terminology all who wish to understand the rationale of the use of the Tenses, and the extremely important part which Compound Verbs play in the Greek and other Indo-Germauic languages. ;

The English student may be referred to pp. 477 ff. of Mr P. Giles's admirable Manual of Comparative Philology, ed. 2. A fuller summary may be found in pp. 471 ff. of Karl Brugmann's Griech. Graiiim., ed. 3, where the great philologist sets forth the results of Delbrlick and other pioneers in comparative syntax, with an authority and lucidity all his own. The student of Hebrew will not need Conjugation and Tense

Stems

Celling that a Tense-system, dividing verbal action into the familiar categories of Past, Present and Future, is by no means so .

.

necessary to language as we once conceived it to be. may be more of a surprise to be told that in our

It

own

family of languages Tense is proved by scientific inquiry to be relatively a late invention, so much so that the elementary

and Present had only been developed when the various branches of the extent rudimentary ceased to be mutually intelso that they family separated As the language then possessed no Passive whatever, ligible. distinction between Past to a

and no

distinct Future,

it

will be realised that its resources 108


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

109

needed not a little supplementing. But if they were scanty in one direction, they were superabundant in another. Erugmann distinguishes no less than twenty-three conjugations, present-stem classes, of which traces remain in Greek others preserved in other languages. We

or

;

and there are must add the parallel.

aorists

most

In

and perfect as formations essentially these we are able to detect an

of

Aktionsart originally appropriate to the conjugation, though It is seen tliat the naturally blurred by later developments.

_

"

"

Aorist has a

action,^ th.-it is, it punctihar regards action as a point: it represents the " let fly," ^aaCkevaai point of entrance {Ingrcssive, as ^aXeiv " come to the throne "), or that of completion (Effective, as .

.

.

,

"

"), or it looks at a whole action simply as having without occurred, distinguishing any steps in its progress as ^aaiXevaai, "reign," or as when a sculptor (Constaiive,^ " X. made it "). of his On statue, eitoirjaev 6 Selva says

hit

/3a\€Lv

Persnective " linear," .

the same graph, the Constativc will be a reduced to a point by perspective. The Present has generally a durative action ^^^^

we may ,

;

keep up " in ^dXkeiv « ^ ^ / u to be on paaikeveiv

Perfect

action .

*

as

.-

mg,

The

is

a

variety

bsg^ii ^^ t^6 P^st

from

the

to

it,

illustration

.

Lmear Action

call

the

by ^^^ "

"

point

itself, ^^i^^

root

same graphic to

be throwi-u

^-i

throne.

tlie

denoting what continues: thus

wcido,

"

discover,

"

I discovered {elhov) descry," comes the primitive perfect olha, and still enjoy the results," i.e. " I know." The present stems which show an t-reduplication (to-TT^/tt, yiyuo/xat) are supposed to have started with an Iterative so that <yi'yvo^ai would originally action, Action present the succession of moments which are

And so throughout individually represented by iyevofirjv. Other conthe conjugations which are exchisively present. jugations are capable of making both present and aorist ^

the

I

venture to accept from a correspondent this new-coined word to represent

German jmiili.vcll, the English of wliich is preoccupied. " Unity of terminology demands our accepting this word from

the

German

and thus supplementing the stores of the New Etiglish Dictionary. Otherwise one would prefer the clearer word "summary." pioneers,


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

110

stems, as ecpijv compared with e/3r]v, ypcKfjetv with rpairetv, areueiv with ^yevicrdai. In these the pure verb-root is by

nature either (a)

"

punctiliar," (5) durative, or (c) capable of of evejKeiv, like our h^ing, ia " " " " Effective word, point being classed as

Thus the root

being both. essentially a

:

forms no present stem. That of (pepco, fcro. accordingly " linear ", hear, on the other hand, is essentially durative or and therefore forms no aorist stem.^ So with that of eo-rt, est, it

which has no aorist, while ijevofirjv, as we have seen, had no durative present. An example of the third class is e^o, " which (like our own have) is ambiguous in its action. I had

is,

"

"

"

your money may mean either I received it (point action) " " or I was in possession of it In Greek (linear action). the present stem is regularly durative, " to hold," while eay^ov "

"

a point word, I received ea^op jrapa aov is, for instance, the normal expression in a papyrus receipt.^ Misappre-

is

:

is responsible for most of ep^;&) the pother about e^co/xev in Eom 5\ The durative present " can only mean " let us enjoy the possession of peace (BiKam-

hension of the action-form of

:

the unexpressed antecedent premiss and Paul wishes to urge his readers to remember and make full use of a privilege which they ex hypothesi possess from 0evTe<;) e(T-)(oiiev elpijvTjv is

the

moment

;

See

of their justification.

p.

247.

It is evident that this study of the kind 째^

^Def째cti^

of action

denoted by the verbal

root,

and the

modification of that action produced by the Verbs formation of tense and conjugation stems, will have considerable influence upon our lexical treatment of the

many

verbs in which present and aorist are derived " roots. beware ") 'Opdoa (cognate with our

from different is

very clearly durative wherever *

The new

it

aorist (historically perfect) in the

accurs in the

NT

;

Germanic languages (our

and

hore)

has a constative action. ^

Note also a petition, Par P 22 (ii/u.c.), in which the tenses are carefully distinguished, as the erasure of an aorist in favour of the imperfect shows. Two women in the Serapeuni at Memphis are complaining of their mother,

who had

deserted her husband for another

man

:

/cat

tovto

irorjffacra

ovK i(JX^ '^ fV^ ddiKriffdar]^ irpbawwov, aXKk crvuripyaaaTO (lis eirave\e'iTai avTov o "she did not put on the face of the wrong-doer, but (her para-

Sr]\ovfxeuos,

mour) began

to intrigue

with her to destroy (her husband)."


HI

THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. we

are at liberty to say that this root, which is incapable of " forming an aorist, maintains its character in the perfect, I have watched, continuously looked upon," while oirwira would "

be

have caught

I

"

io^Qrjv

Elhov

of."

sigiit

came before the eyes

I

and we remember

I

and

discovered,"

are

obviously pointElirov has a similar disof,"

words, and can form no present. ability,

"

at once that its congeners

{F)e'iro<;,

much the vox, Sanskrit vac, etc., describe a single utterance same is true of eppidrjv, and its cognate nouns {F)'prj[Jia, :

verhum, and

On

loord.

the other hand, Xeyco, whose constative

aorist eXe^a is replaced in ordinary language by el-rrov, clearly denotes speech in progress, and the same feature is very

marked in X0709. The meaning of /V.0709 has been developed in post-Homeric times along lines similar to those on which the Latin serino was produced from the purely physical verb One more example we may give, as it leads to our

scro.

'Eadico

remaining point. fier

Mk

i/jiov,

The root ed

is

very obviously durative 6 eadiwv is taking a meal with me." :

"he who

14^^, is

so distinctly durative that

is

forms no

it

aorist,

" but the punctiliar ^ayetv (originally to divide ") supplies the It will be found that j)a'^eLv in the NT is invariably defect. ^

denotes simply the action of ia-dcecv seen in perspective, and not either the beginning or the end of that constative

:

it

But we

action.

Compounds and

^'^^>

Action

find the

compound

KareaOieiv,

^aracpayeiv, used to express the completed

sating something till it is finished. How the preposition's proper meaning affects

little

the resulting sense is

Karea-Oieiv "

up

and

and

seen by the fact that what in Greek

is

in

Latin

in Latin also

"

"

is

f?cvorare,"

In

comesse."

all

in

"

English

eat

the Indo-Germanic

in the languages, most conspicuously and systematically Slavonic but clearly enough in our own, this function of verb

compounds may be is to

^

produce

There

"when

I

is

seen.

The choice

this perfective action

^

one apparent exception, Rov

had eaten

it

up."

But

i(pa.yov

of the preposition

which

depends upon conditions

10'째, is

where

simply

ore tlic

^(payov

avro

is

continuation of

KaTe(payoi' (see behjw, p. 115). One could wish that a term had been chosen which would not have "Perfective action" has nothing suggested an echo of the tense-name. whatever to do with the Perfect tense.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

112

which vary with the meaning "

Most

of the verbal root. "

of

them

an imperfective verb, when the are capable of perfectivising has been sufficiently obscured: local sense adverb's original

We may

compare in English the meaning of hring and hring and sit down, drive and drive away and drive home} up, knock and knock in and knock doion, take and overtake and take over and betake, carry and ca^^y off and cai^ry throufjh, vjork and work out and work off, fiddle and Jiddle in (Tenny" son's Amphion "), set and set hack and set at and overset, see and see to, vjrite and write off, hear and hear out, break and to-break (Judg 9^^ AV), make and make over, wake and loakc up, follow and follow up, come and come on, go and go round,, sit

and shine away

shine

(

= dispel

by

Among

shining).

all

the

be seen that the compounded adverb in each case jierfcctivises the simplex, the combination denoting action which has accomplished a result, while the

varieties of

this

list

will

it

simplex denoted action in progress, or else momentary action In the above list to which no special result was assigned. exx. in which the local force of the from being exhausted. Drive in, drive out, very drive away, and drive home are alike perfective, but

included

are

adverb drive

is

off,

many far

goals attained are sense of the adverbs.

the

local force of the

adverb

different

to

according

the

distinct

In a great many compounds the is

so strong that

it

leaves the action

The separateness of adverb and verb in English, as in Homeric Greek, helps the adverb to retain its force longer than it did in Latin and later the verb

of

In both these languages

Greek. verbs

untouched.

have

lost

completely borne by the

many

consciousness

of

the

compound meaning

the

of

prepositional element, which is This is to its confined perfectivising function. accordingly ex in as in and com with the case Latin, (e) {con) especially " ^ " " and out with work follow attain," 07it, efficcre consequi originally

;

OTTO,'* Zed,

Kara and "

{Ovrja-KeLV "

flee "),

be

in

crvv

Greek, as in dirodaveiv "

"

dying

KaTuSicoKeiv

"),

"

escape

Siacfivyeiv

hunt

down

"

(Bicokq)

"

die

"

= {^evyeiv = " pursue "),

"Prepositions," when compounded, are still the pure adverbs they were is entirely on all fours first, so that this accusative noun turned adverb ^ gee p. 237. with the rest. ["^ee p. 247. '

at the


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. "

=

"

watch

An

").

how

"

"

work

KaTepyd^ecrdai

out,"

example

avvrrjpetv

may

be

113

keep safe brought iu

{rrjpeiv

here

to

principle works in details of exegesis. In Lk 8-^ the true force of the pluperfect, combined with the vernacular usage of ttoXXo?? 'xpovoi'i (see p. 75), goes to show illustrate

this

is "it had long ago obtained and now kept complete mastery of him." Xwapira^oi then, as the perfective of dpira^co, denotes not the temporary paroxysm,

that the meaning

but the establishment of a permanent hold. The interpretation of (Tvv here depends upon the obvious fact that

normal adverbial force is no longer at work. It is however always possible for the dormant (tvv to awake, as " Seize and a glance at this very word in LS will show.

its

"

is the common meaning, but in ^vvapirda-aa-ac carry away ra? e'/ia? eL-)(^ov ^e'pa? (Euripides Hec. 1163) we may recognise the original together. Probably the actual majority of

compounds with these prepositions are debarred from the in perfective force by the persistency of the local meaning :

types like hiairopevea-Oat, Kara^aiveiv, a-vvepj(6adaL, the preposition

is

still

very

much

alive.

And

though these three

prepositions show the largest proportion of examples, there are others which on occasion can exhibit the perfectivising

One

power.

rather inclined to bring livL'^ivuxTKOi under this

is

category, and so take a middle course between the old view of Lightfoot and that recently propounded by Dean Eobinson The present simplex, fyLVMaKeiv, is durative, {Ephes. 248 ff.). " The simplex aorist has point to be taking in knowledge." action,

generally

effective,

meaning "ascertain,

realise,"

but

occasionally (as in Jn l7^^ 2 Tim 2^^) it is constative e'yvwv ae gathers into one perspective all the successive moments of :

is

ai in Jn 17^.

'

ETnyvcovai, "find out, determine," rather more decisive than the yvcovai, (effective) but in

yivcoaKcoari

;

the present stem it seems to differ from jivtoaKeiv by includit tells ing the goal in the picture of the journey there Thus 1 Co 13^^ may be of knowledge already gained.

—

"

paraphrased,

Now

partial at best know, as God in

The 8

I am acquiring knowledge which is only then I shall have learnt my lesson, shall my mortal life knew me."

meaning roots

tivised

:

of

naturally

the

Present-stem

of

demands explanation.

these

perfec-

Since

6v)]-


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

114

"

aKâ‚Źiv

is

there

left

be

to

for

"

dying

and aTToQavelv

airoOvrjdKeLv

"

to

An

?

die,"

what

the

of

analysis rences of this stem in the

is

occur-

NT

will anticipate gQj^g important points we shall have to make under the heading of Tenses. Putting aside

Present btem

Verbs

we find Co 15^^, and as Eev 14^^: the

the special use fieXkco airoOvrjaKetv} the present stem used as an iterative in 1

frequentative in Heb 7^ 10"^, 1 Co 15^-, latter describes action which recurs from time to time with

different individuals, as the iterative describes action repeated by the same agent.^ In Jn 21^^ and 1 Co 15^^ it stands

on which usage and Heb 11^^ is it

see p. 120.

for a future,

2

Co

6^,

Only

Lk

in

8*^,

strictly durative, replacing the

now

obsolete simplex The simplex, however, OvrjcrKoo.^ " vanished only because the " linear perfective expressed its meaning sufficiently, denoting as it does the whole process

leading

an attained

to

up

KaracftevjeLv, for

goal.

example,

implies that the refuge is reached, but it depicts the journey there in a coiqj d'ceil KaTacj>vy6lv is only concerned with the moment of arrival. very important example in the :

A

the recurrent

is

much

oi

NT

"

airoWvixevou

the perishing."

Just as *

and

its passive diroOvrjaKw, air oXkv fiat the of the process of destruction. When implies completion " we speak of a " dying man, we do not absolutely bar the

as aTTOKTelvo)

possibility of a recovery, but our word implies death as the goal in sight. Similarly in the cry of the Prodigal, Xifim Lk 15^*^, and in that of the disciples in the storm, aTToWv^ai,

acoaov, aTroWv/ieOa, Mt 8^^, we recognise in the perfective verb the sense of an inevitable doom, under the visible con-

even though the subsequent story tells us it was In oi airoWvjjbevoL, 1 Co 1^^ al, strongly durative

ditions,

averted.

though the verb goal ^

(/i.

12*

M^XXw

iaeadai) ;

^ ^

also

Both

c. ;

Lk

c.

*

we

l^dvrjKa

a

complete

the fact that the

transformation

NT

Rom

20"" in

is

see perfectivity in :

pres. inf. comes eighty-four times in aor. six times (Ac 12", 8^^ Gal Z^'\

;

c. fut.

Eev

of

twice in

its

Ac

3^ {airoBavdv) Z^^

D and

Marcion). a series of points, on the graph hitherto used. a perfect needed no perreally the perfect of airodvydud}

will be

fectivising in a

(.

.

.),

:

"point-word"

Note that in

each case.

is,

ideally reached

is

all

like this.

three the simplex

is

obsolete,

for the

same reason

in


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

briug them out of the ruin imphcit

subjects is required to in their state.

Before

.

.

we may note

on,

passing

NT

^iirvival in

norrTpe!ted.

115

Greek

a

of

classical

the

idiom

by which the preposition in a compound

omitted, without weakening

the

when the verb

sense,

is is

Thus in Euripides, Bacch. 1065, KaTrj<yov, rj'yov, " answers to the English rjjov, pulled down, down, down." I do not remember seeing this traced in the NT, but in repeated.

Eev

1 0^° {supra, p. 1 1 1 n.) ecpayov seems to be the continuation in Jn 1^^ eka^ov takes up irapiXa^ov, and in

of Karecpayov

Eom

15*

vwvT6<; 1

;

repeated as evSu(Td/jL6Vot 2 Co

7rpoe<ypd(jiT]

Pet

1^*^^-,

is

just possible that rj'yeade in 1 to the ciirayofievoi that follows, but

(It is

In

So also epav-

ijpd(f)r).

5^,

and

Co 12^ its

arrjvat

Eph

6^^

similarly related position makes serious is

we

these cases

are justified in treating the difficulty.) a full of as the equivalent simplex compound. " The perfective Aktionsart in Polybius,"

Growtn

01

all

of the great Kotvi] writers, forms subject of an elaborate study by Dr

^YiQ earliest

^^®

Aorist

Eleanor Purdie, in Indog. Forsch.

ix.

63—153

In a later volume, xii. 319-372, H. Meltzer con(1898). and an independent troverts Miss Purdie's results in detail ;

comparison with results derivable from NT Greek ehows that her conclusions may need considerable qualification. Eesearch in this field is, as Brugmann himself observes (Griech.

Gram?

484), is

philologist of the best thesis

still

in its initial stages

on the right authorities,

the

aorist

the constative

wp^f

+•

Compounds

>•

Newnham

but that the

by some Thumb, who thinks her

including

Her contention

supported by MGr."

Homer

;

lines generally, is held

simplex

is

that since

had been progressively taking

the

expense of

colour,

at

tiliar

character

and

;

its

that

earlier

there

puncis

a

tendency to use the compounds, especially those with Zid, Kara, and avu, to

growing

express what in the oldest Greek could be by the simplex. To a certain extent Thus (f)vyelv is use agrees with that of Polybius,

sufficiently indicated

the

NT

constative eleven times,

"

to flee,"

with no suggestion of the of its successful accom-

prolongation of flight ((pevyeiv) or "

See

p. 247.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

116

(It seems to me clear plishment {hiac^vyetv or Kara^vyetv). that in Heb 11^* we have ecfivyov for the heginning of action,

—

not the goal of safety attained, but the

first

and decisive step

away from danger. Similarly in Mt 23^^ we should read " " how are ye to flee from the judgement of Gehenna ? ^just The thought is not of the inevitableness of God's as in punishment, but of the stubbornness of men who will not take a step to escape it. The perfective therefore would be inapThe papyri decidedly support this differentiation propriate.) of simplex and compound. In the same way we find that

—

3'''.

StM^ai is always constative in NT, while the perfective " hunt down," occurs once in Mk 1^^, where KaraStM^ai, " " followed after (AV and EV) is not exact. 'Epydaaa-dat certainly constative in Mt 25^"^, 3 Jn^, and Heb 11^^: it surveys in perspective the continuous labour which is so often In Mt 26^*^, and even 2 Jn^, the expressed by ipyd^eaOai.

is

same

is probably the case the stress lies on the activity rather than on its product. This last idea is regularly denoted :

by the perfective compound with Kara.

Lk

"

4^*^.

Similarly

r'rjprjaac

process seen in perspective

only) denote

"

"

watching

time contemplated.

(See

:

preserve occurring watch, keep," a continuous

aw- and

Bta-rrjpelv (present

which succeeds up p.

237.)

^ayeiv and Karacpayelv

On Polybian lines (see above). verbs Miss Purdie examines, the constative

which

she

notes

(Heb

11^^) is

quite on hand, in the

differ

other

the

NT

makes decidedly

compound than does Polybius

use of the

stem

to the point of

^Aycovi^ea6atis only used

in the durative present, but Kara<ycoviaaadat,

a good perfective,

guard

"

"

seems always constative, Sia(f)v\d^aL in

"

"

^vXd^at

;

less

while the non-

as

exceptions to the general tendency are reinforced by others which in Polybius are seldom such. Thus ISelv is comparatively rare in aorists

"

Polybius

:

in several cases the

and those exx. admitted frequent

bear a very small proportion to the extremely occurrences of the compound verb in the like "

^

meaning is purely constative, which a perfective ^ meaning must be

in

"

That is, punctiliar : Miss Purdie does not distinguish this from perfective proper (with preposition). Brugmann, following Delbriick, has lately insisted on reserving "perfective" for the compounds. Uniformity of terminology

is

so important that

I

have adapted the

earlier phraseology

throughout.


THE VERB sense"

:

TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

1 1 7

94

In the NT, however, the simplex f.). while the compound {Kadopav, common, exceedingly

{op. cit. p.

ISetjj

is

Kom

1-^)

so far as I can only appears once. It is moreover without the labour of a count as often judge punctiliar

"

Mt 2^*^, when they caught sight (ingressive) as constative of the star," will serve as an example, against constative " uses like that in the previous verse, the star which they :

(In numerous cases it would be difficult to disHere comes in one of tinguish the one from the other.) Meltzer's criticisms, that the historian's strong dislike of hiatus (cf above, p. 92) accounts for very many of his

saw."

for

preferences

damages the case pose

compound

inferences

of

less

undeniably

NT

but

are not surprised to find that the

NT

has no perfective

of Oedofiat, Oecopico, Xoycl^ofiai, irpdcrcrfo, KivSvvevco,

compounds ap'^o/xai,

fact

not unimportant Greek and that of the papyri.

decided,

which may be drawn from

We

This

verbs.

for Polybius himself; but it does not dis-

/jbeXXo),

opji^o/jbac,

Svvco, or fxlcryco (fxtyvvfic), to

set

beside those cited (rightly or wrongly) from the historian. Noeo) is rather difficult to square with the rule. Its present

often obviously linear, as in vowv koX ^povoyv, the standing phrase of a testator beginning a will the durative " " " " conceive is the only possible translation understand or

simplex

is

:

NT

The aor. in Jn 12*'' and Eph 3* may passages. " realise." of be the constative this, or it may be ingressive,

in

many

But

it is

often difficult to

make

a real perfective out of the

compound KaravorjcraL, which should describe the completion In some passages, as Lk 20-^ ("he of a mental process. detected their craftiness "), or Ac 7^^ (" to master the mystery "), but the durative action is most certhis will do very well ;

tainly represented in the present Kuravoetv, except Ac 27^^ " Madeiv is sometimes connoticed one after another "). (?

summing up the process of /lavddveiv but it has often purely point action, "ascertain": so in Ac 2327, Gal 3^, In other places moreover it and frequently in the papyri. describes a fully learnt lesson, and not the process of study. stative,

On Miss

;

Purdie's

KarafjbaOelv,

which

principle this occurs in Mt

should 6^^

:

be

reserved

for

both here and for

KaTavorjcrare in the Lucan parallel 122*-27 the PtV retains " " understand. It may however mean the durative consider."


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

118

NT

The

take in this fact about."

use of reXew, again, differs

widely from that of Polybius, wliere the perfective compound in NT the simplex outnumbers (avvT.) greatly predominates Moreover the aorist in the NT is always punctiliar it fourfold. " " a perform (" finish ") only in Gal 5^^ is the constative :

:

possible alternative. 'OpjLa-dPjvai, is another divergent, for " instead of the perfective Biopy., fly into a rage," we six times have the simplex in the NT, where the constative "

"

be angry never occurs.^ Finally we note that " in NT (" sit," not durative sit is Kade^eaOat always purely down," which is KaOia-ai), thus differing from Polybian use.

aorist

A few additions might be made. "

trade,"

irpa^ixa-revcracdai

Thus Lk 19^^ has the simplex with the perfective compound in

But the great BteTrpay/xarevaavTo "gained by trading." hid of the ^La. retain the full force of the compounds majority

v.^^

The net Provisional Results

,

result of this comparison

^^1^.1

,

perhaps

be

stated

like a

may

n

thus,

provisionally

decisive settlement

c

tor

:

we must

anything wait for some )(^aX/cevT€po^ grammarian who will toil right through the papyri and the Koivrj literature with a minuteness

a matching Miss Purdie's over her six books of Polybius task for which a year's holiday is a condicio sine qua non.

The growth in the

of the constative aorist

development

of

later

Greek

was certainly a feature :

its

consequences will

occupy us when we come to the consideration of the Tenses. " But the disuse of the " point aorist, ingressive or effective,

and the preference of the perfective compound to express the same meaning, naturally varied much with the author. The general tendency may be admitted as proved the extent In the of its working will depend on the personal equation. ;

compound verbs, especially, we cannot expect the negligS of ordinary conversation, or even the higher degree of style use of

Luke or the auctor ad Helrceos could rise, come near the profusion of a literary man like Polybius.^

elaboration to which to

Perhaps Tense

by ^

Rev

11^^

this brief

account of recent re-

searches, in a field hitherto almost untrodden

NT

scholars,

may

prepare the

suffice to

might mean "were angry," but the ingressive "waxed angry"

(at the accession of the

King) suits the context better.

*

See

p. 237.


THE VERB

TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

:

1

1

way for the necessary attempt to place on a scientific basis the use of the tenses, a subject on whicli many of the most It has been made crucial questions of exegesis depend. clear that the notion of (present or past) time is not by any means the first thing we must think of in dealing with tenses. it is a mere accident that and e^evyov, ecpvyov, and <^v<yoiv (generally) present settle we must is the distinction between main the point past is common to all their moods. which and ^vy ^eu7

For our problems

Aldionsart

of

(peuyo) is :

Tli6 Pr6S6nt

On the Present stem,

'

as normally denoting o ./

.

durative

linear or

action,

not

much more

The reader may be reminded of one idiom need now be said. which comes out of the linear idea, the use of w^ords like trakat with the present in a sense best expressed by our Thus in 2 Co 12^^ "have you been thinking all perfect. this time?" or Jn 15^'^, "you have been with me from the So in MGr, k^rivra jirjva^ aa'^aTroi (Abbott 222). beginning." The durative present in such cases gathers up past and preIt must not be thought, however, sent time into one phrase. In that the durative meaning monopolises the present stem. the prehistoric period only certain conjugations had linear action

;

and though

the primitive

later analogic processes

diversity,

there

are

still

mostly levelled

some survivals

of

The punctiliar force is obvious in certain importance. " such Burton (ifT 9) cites as "aoristic presents presents. words as jrapayyeXko)

moment etc.

forgiven,"

So possibly

Ac

Mk

16^^, acpievTat

contr.

d(})ecovraL

Lk

5^^),

Lk ll^ which

a^ioiJiev

has

2^ ("are this larai Ac 9^^ acfiyJKafiev

as

to But here it seems representative in Mt. " " for we hahitually forgive recognise the iterative present this is like the generalising of Luke seen in his version of for daily bread. the (Cf also Lk 6^0.) Blass (p. 188)

its

better

:

prayer adds aa-TTd^eTat as the correlative to the regular da-TrdaaaOe.

It is very possible that in the prehistoric period a distinct aorist stem, such as Giles present existed for the strong

plausibly epxecrOai}

1

ManuaP

traces

in

apxecrOat compared

The conjecture

482.

The ap

—which

is like

is

with the durative

necessarily unverifiable

familiar pa in rpaireTv against Tpivuv, the

Greek representative of the original vocalic

r.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

120

—would But

explain this verb's punctiliar action, indeed be suspected that point and line action

sufficiently

may

it

were both originally possible in present and aorist-stem mations which remained without formative prefix or

On

for-

suffix.

was largely responsible to most of the the present. But this is con-

this assumption, analogical levelling

the

for

durative character which

special conjugation stems of

belongs

and we need only observe that the punctiliar roots which appear in the present stem have given ,f denotmg future e ^^ j ?

jectural,

,

^.-u

^^®

4.

so-called present tense to denote future time.^ In avpiov airodvy^^^^

time-

Co 15^2) we have a verb in which the perfective prefix has neutralised the inceptive force of the suffix -iV/ceo aKo/Mev (1

:

only the obsoleteness of the simplex which allows it ever to borrow a durative action. E2fit in Attic is a notable

it is

example

of a punctiliar root

But though

indicative. of

present

tense

momentary

NT "

originates in the words with limitation does not appear in the

future

this

examples, any more than

am

I

for

action,

used for a future in the present generally asserted that this use

it is

in

going to London to-morrow

a.nd htepyoixai in 1

Co 16^

We

English, "

can say,

just as well as

"

Mt 26^ and other

ylveTat in

I

"

go

:

futural

presents that may be paralleled from the vernacular of the In this stage papyri, have no lack of durativity about them. of Creek, as in our own language, we may define the futural

present as differing from the future tense mainly in the tone of assurance which is imparted. That the Present is not primarily a

tense,

and past time well

-

known

in

the usual acceptation of the term, is fact that it can

shown not only by the ;

,

stand

use

as

»

p

for

a

future past.

time,

The

,

but

"

n

^

by

its

Historic

"

equaliy

present

by Brugmann (Gj\ Gram.^ 484 f.) into the " " " and the " registering dramatic The latter present. occurs in historical documents with words like 'yl'yveTai, TevvaTai in Mt 2* is the Tekevra, etc., registering a date. nearest NT example I can think of, and it is not really The former, common in all vernaculars we have parallel. divided

is

^

Compare the

the future, which

close connexion is

indeed in

its

between aorist (not present) subjunctive and history mainly a specialising of the former.


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. only to overhear a servant girl's desiderate proof that the usage

"

121

if we home among us is From that mine of abundantly represented in the NT. statistical wealth, Hawkins's Horce Sijnopticcc, we find that Mk uses the historic present 151 times, Mt 93 times, Lk 8 also that it is rare in the LXX, times, with 13 in Ac except

she says to me,"

so

at

is

—

;

in Job,

and in the

rest of the

NT, except in Jn. It does that it was " by no means common in Hellenistic Greek." Sir John Hawkins himself observes that it is common in Josephus, and of course it was abundant in Attic. The fact that Luke invariably (except in altered Mark's favourite 8*^) usage means probably that it was too familiar for his liking. I have not catalogued the not, however, follow

from

this

evidence of the papyri for this phenomenon, but it is common. OP 717 may be cited as a document contemporary with the NT, in which a whole string of presents does duty in narrative.

the

It

NT:

be seen alternating with past tenses, as in the curious document Par P 51 (ii/B.c), recording

may

cf

some extremely K\aiya>

.

.

.

Thus avv^w

dreams.

trivial

eTropevofiTjv

.

.

.

Kal ep-^ofiaL

.

.

.

.

.

.

opw

.

.

.

eXeyov, etc.

It was indeed a permanent element in prose narrative, whether colloquial or literary ^ but it seems to have run much the same course as in English, where the historic ;

present

is

not normally used in educated conversation or in It carries a special effect of

literature as a narrative form.

own, which may be a favourite mannerism of a particular author, but entirely avoided by others. Applying this principle, we conceive that Josephus would use the tense as an

its

imitator of the classics, Mark as a man of the people who heard it in daily use around him while Luke would have ;

Greek education enough

to

know

that

it

was not common

in

the

cultured speech of his time, but not enough encouragement of classical writers whom he probably never to

and would not have imitated

read,

The

he had read them.

limits of the historic present are well seen in the fact

that

1

if

recall

A

it

is

absent from Homer, not because

peculiar use of the historic present

is

it

noticeable in

was foreign

MGr, where

to

it fre-

quently takes up a past tense thus, oTo-o'X/cas e^ea-n-dduire, Kpdi'ei to. waWyiKapia, "drew his sword and calls" (Abbott 44 see also 22, 26, etc.). See p. 139 n. :

—


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

122

the old Achaian dialect, but because of epic style

:

it is

The Moods

incongruity in

absent from the Nibelungenlied in the same way. of the present stem will be treated under their

separate heads later.

come

its felt

But there are two uses which should

on the kind of action belonging to The first concerns the two normal methods of expressing Prohibition in classical Greek, which survive in NT Greek, There though less predominant than before.

in here, as bearing

the tense-stem. Present and Prohibitions is

or

•

a familiar rule that aorist

subjunctive

;

is used with present imperative but the distinction between these,

i^rj

expounded by Gottfried Hermann long ago, seems to have been mostly unnoticed till it was rediscovered by Dr Walter Headlam in OR xvii. 295, who credits Dr Henry Dr Jackson himself conJackson with supplying the hint. suggestive note in xviii. 262 f. (June and then writes in full upon the subject Dr Headlam 1904), in xix. 30-36, citing the dicta of Hermann from which the doctrine started, and rebutting some objections raised by Mr H. D. Naylor.'* Dr Jackson's words may be cited as linking the beginning and end of the language-history, and proving incidentally that the alleged distinction must hold for the NT " Davidson told me that, when language, which lies midway. he was learning modern Greek, he had been tributes a brief but

puzzled about the distinction, until he heard a Greek friend use the present imperative to He This gave him the clue. a dog which was Imrking. turned to Plato's AiJology, and immediately stumbled upon

Greek-

20e fir) Oopv^ijarjTe, before clamour The and 21a /xt) Oopv^elre, when it has begun." begins, " latter means in fact desist from interrupting," the former " Headlam shows how the do not interrupt (in future)." " But I am not the out calls often retort, present imperative it would never does aorist locution which the doing so," the excellent instances

:

"

require

where

No,

fxr)

writing, .

ypd^rj'i is

firj

rypdylrrj<;

'

OP

:

we

This

is

and for present-day Greek be supplemented from the four volumes may need not labour the proof of a canon which facts for classical

.

_

of

certainly the case in MGr, addressed to a person who is already The has not begun. to one who

I will not."

could hardly be invalid for a period lying between periods "See

p.

247.


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. in

which

noted

requests

attended fjurj

it

six

made

in

to

dXXco^

ii/A.D.).

known

is

OP

in

a

the

till

7roit'](T'r]<i,

One

to

cases

other

/z?;

c.

letter

firjSevl

.

.

.

I

force.

course

Thus

be

cannot

firj

uixe\i]a-r)^,

7rpocrKpovarj<;,

etc.

(all

worth quoting as a

is

i/B.c.)

have

referring to

subj.

of

arrives.

(OP 744,

in

aor.

which

letter,

opa

been

liavo

of

123

sample of such requests followed by a reply etprjKa^ On the ITco? Buva/xai ere eirCkadelv ; oTt Ml] fie iTTiXdOrj'i. other hand, we have four cases of firi c. pres. imper., all clearly Tovto fxrj Xeje (what he had said)- /xt) referable to the rule. .

:

"

"

dycovLa

(bis)

.

.

aKXvWe eari^v don't go on worrying fxr) " in the don't bother to give information (??) the writer had apparently left school

" ivTTrjvai, (sic !)

last case

:

(295 i/A.D.) young, and we can only guess her meaning, but

it

may

"

As we shall see, the crux is the stop troubling." differentia of the present imperative, which is not easy to illustrate decisively from the papyri. Only one case seems well be

FP

112, from I/a.d.), and a gap there makes the meaning very obscure nor are we more fortunate in Tb P, the prevalence of reports and accounts in this volume giving In the royal edict, little opportunity for the construction. to occur in

(no.

;

Tb P

6 (ii/B.c),

we

find

Kal

ixi-jOevl

iirLTpeTreTe

Ka6' ovtlvovv

n

t(ov TrpoSeSujXwfjiivcov, the conformity of rpoTTOv irpdaaeLV which with the rule is suggested by the words "as we have

commanded," with which the sentence apparently opens a hiatus again causes difficulty. The frequency of these prohibitions in NT presents a very marked contrast and in NT. before

:

to the papyri, but the hortatory character of

The following table gives the the writing accounts for this. 2nd the with statistics for fit] person :


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

124

We

have included the cases where /u.77 But sometimes this is not

the like.

preceded by opa or

is

(as

in the

Gospels) a

" mere compound prohibition, like our take care not to In Gal 5^5 "take heed lest" can hardly be classed

.

.

as

."

a

Mk

while in 1^*, opa /xTjBevl etTTT??, there prohibition at all is virtual parataxis, opa being only a sort of particle adding The analysis of the list raises several suggestive emphasis. ;

Mt we

note that except V^ and 3^ all the of Christ, 39 in all, while in sayings examples Lk 32 are thus described (36 if we include a citation of

In

points.

are from

Since Mt has 12 pres. four precepts from the Decalogue). to 27 aor., but Lk 21 to 11, we see that there was no sort of

There is no uniformity in translating from the Aramaic. case where Mt and Lk have varied the tense while using ^ but we find the same word in reporting the same logion ;

Mt

Mk

manifestly for the better, if the In the balance is heavily inclined to canon is true. the pres., for 5 out of 9 aor. examples are in the recitation In Jn there is only one aor., 3^, of the commandments. an exception the more curious in that desine mirari seems altering

in

24^^,

Mk

Paul uses the aor. but see below. than he appears to do, for Eom 10*^ is a quotation, and Col 2^1 ter virtually such this leaves only 2 Th 3^^, Heb 1 Tim 5\ 2 Tim l^ with Gal 5^^ on which see above. the latter with ^XeVere), has only two aorists (10^^ 12^5 clearly

even

the meaning;

less

:

ajDart

from a

predominance except in Mt,

marked

^^

The very 4^. triple quotation 3^of the fir] irolet type is accordingly unbroken In and in Eev and 1 Pet so far as they go.

NT as a whole the proportion is 61 does not greatly differ from the 56 to Attic Orators by Miller {AJP xiii. 423). the

Before Passages

we proceed

to

p.c.

to

39, which in the

44 noted

draw our deduc-

^.^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^ ^j^^^ applied to the it will be well to present a few of

NT, the

In the following holds. passages in which it obviously to the (x^ Troiet must clearly be either the reply places " " " " 5^^ I will stop doing it or I am not doing so :

*

D

in Lk,

Lk 18'", where Mt and Mk, much more appropriate present.

uses Kw\v(rT]T€ in

have the

—Mk

as well as the other

MSS


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. a^ti

9=59

Lk

parallels,

117 1412 2328, Jn

349

7^3

352

1921

51^

2i<5

Mk

(cf

2017-27,

20

ri /cXa/ere

Ac

125 :)

iO^c

is" 20io, Jas 2\ 1 Pet 4^2, would be answered 1015

1420^ 1 Qo 727^ 1 Tim 523, In the following, the iiy] iroiyjar)^ with "I will avoid doing so": Mt Q^^ 10^ 179, Mk 8-'^ the two prohibitions) 148 218, 925, Lk 62!> 10^ (contrast

Ptom

1118-

Kev 5^

Ac

938

7««

Tim

5^, 2 Tim 18, Eev 6« 7^ 10* he had not begun). It must however be admitted that rather

1628 2321, 1

(following ij/xeWov ypd(f3eiv ...

_,.„

Dimculties.

— ^

,

.

T

,

,

strong external pressure is needed to force the rule upon Paul. It is not merely that his usage is very So is that of Jn, and yet (with the doubtful one-sided.

exception of

10^^^

he

every present

But does

uses

Tim

ajxekei in 1

/xr] completely. " " believe that Timothy was neglecting

and fiT^he Kocvcovet in to stop what he was hitherto guilty

fxrjSevl eTTirlOei,

say that like, a

a/MeXet

firj

marked If we Koivcovetl

is

522

of

durativc,

with

jDaraphrase the

be deliberate in choosing your ^ force of the present

Heb

not rather

a similar account of

fir^he

clause in 522 "always office-bearers," we see the first

coming

recognise again in 426,

canon

that he was warned

May we

?

the

equivalent to irdvroTe fieXera or the

iterative

Eph

fits

4^* require us to " " his charism

typical passages 13^, 2 Jn^^, 1 Jn 4.\

like

Then

in

;

Lk

and

we G^^,

Co 1439

j^ow

10^,

in 1

this

Kom

" imagine Paul bidding the Corinthians desist from " the exercise of their darling charism ? His forbidding

are

we

to

means

"

do not discourage glossolaly, as after In other words you might be incUned to do." my previous words, we have the conative^ which is clearly needed also in such passages as Gal 5^. M?) irolei, accordingly needs " It is various mental supplements, and not one only. Stop KcoXvere

/JLT)

doing,"

or

"

Do

not (from

time

to

time),"

or

"

Do

not

"

Do not attempt to do." of doing)," or are not justified in excluding, for the purposes of the present imperative in prohibitions, the various kinds of

(as

you are in danger

We

action which

1

we

find attached to the present

stem elsewhere.

In 1 Co I.e. we might also trace the iterative, if the See below, p. 128. whenever it breaks out." So Dr is "Do not repress glossolaly,

meaning Findlav.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

126

But since the simple

linear action

in the present stem,

naturally follows that

it

is

by far the commonest

stop doing," though (as Headlam To xix. 31) it does not always mean this. such difficulties on the other side as Ju 3'^,

pursue the quotation from the scholar "

discussion.

this

Tro/et

/xr/

"

means

M^

always,

Bpaay^;

who I

usually

CB

admits,

account

we may

for

well

on

us

started

means I

believe,

against doing this, I beseech you will not though sometimes used when the thing is being done notably in certain cases which may be called colloquial or idiomatic, with an effect of impatience, fii] (^povrlcrr]'; Oh, never mind ! Never fear ! fir) dav/xday'i You nuistn't he surprised" fit] Seia-y'i

warn you

;

this is

;

wny

^j^-^

main motive

my

Perhaps Jr'aui

has

discussion

j^

in

been

pursuing

to

solve

a

DrBiors ^

Church

when we (Eph

5^^),

logion of

Paul

find

What

History.

bidding

his

are

converts

we

firj

our

for

consequences

to

infer

[xedvaiceaOe

y^ev^eade (Col 3^), or James changing the ^^ into the suggestive j)resent (5^^) ?

fir]

Mt

has

that

question

^o^gi,

5^^-

What

has been said will

were

very

practical

make

indeed,

it

—

clear that such

that

commands

the apostles were

not

at windmills, but uttering urgent warnings against which were sure to reappear in the Christian com-

tilting

sins

The critics munity, or were as yet only imperfectly expelled. so much of lapses among Christian converts of the

who make first

generation in modern missions might have damned Paul's Time has shown time will show.^

—

results with equal reason.

The second point in which we shall anticipate later discussion concerns the uses Like the rest of the verb, of the Participle.

Participle

outside the indicative, it has properly no sense of time attaching to it the linear action in a participle, connected with a finite verb in past or present time, partakes in the time But when the participle is isolated by the of its principal. :

the article, its proper timelessness is free to This can hardly happen with the aorist, where point action in such a connexion cannot well exist without the suggestion of past time 17 reKouaa must be rendered

addition of

come

out.

"

who

:

she

bore

not

a child," 1

because

See p. 238.

reKovoa

is

past

in


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. time like

eVe/ce,

but because the action

not in progress

is

and therefore must be past. But i) rUrovaa in tragedy (cf Gal 4-'') as a practical synonym the

title of

a good selection of classical exx. as

CPE 24

ment, stole

"

from

etc.

who

parties,"

CPE "

or

are called

28

(ii/A.D.).

he who

ot

So

steals,"

KXeirrr]^

the

"

yafj,ovcn,

ryeya/mijKore';

Eph

but simply

"

"

called

is

is less

^airrl^cov

of a technical

sarily connotes linear action "

like

murderer,"

"

the

4^8, is

"

not

more

only in being

(Mk

contracting

G^^- 2^),

is

he who

"

closely

If the coming. the baptiser," the

term than the noun, but

phrase wise synonymous therewith.

fj-yjTrjp,

444) gives

(p.

the stealer," differing

associated with the verb KXeTTTera) which

Baptist

t)

in a similar docu-

6 Kki-mcov,

thief

common

is

of

add from the papyri such

:

T049

(ii/A.D.)

"

6

Winer

a continuous relationship.

127

is

other-

An

:

agent-noun almost necesthere are only a few exceptions,

bankrupt," where

the

title

is

generally

Hence given in respect of an act committed in the past. it coincides closely with the action of the present participle,

which with the article (rarely without see Kiihner-Gerth We return to the aorist 266) becomes virtually a noun. not more on the minute part and need say participle later, of its field which might be connected with the subject of But it must be remarked that the principle this paragraph.

i.

of a timeless present participle needs

very careful application, since alternative explanations are often possible, and grammar In my speaks to exegesis here with no decisive voice. Introduction'^ (p.

199)

Mt

27*^

KaTaXvoav rov vaov, "the

the temple," was given as an ex. of a participle turned noun. But the conative force is not to be missed here

destroyer of

:

"

"

gives the meaning more exactly. Another ambiguous case may be quoted from Heb 10^"^: is " the objects of sanctification," or T0U9 dy(.a^o/x€i/ov<; timeless,

you would-be destroyer

"

iterative,

those

who from time " those who

to

time receive sanctification,"

are in process of sanctification"? The last, involving a suggestive contrast with the eVre aecwa^evoi telling (like the unique perfect TerekeicoKev of Eph 2^- s) of a work which is finished on its Author's or purely durative,

but progressively realised by its objects, brings the tense into relation with the recurrent ol aq)^6/xevoi and side,

01

cnroWv/xevoi,

in

which

durative

action

is

conspicuous.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

128 The

will

examples

teach

to

suffice

the

oi

importance

caution.

We

turn to the Imperfect, with which we enter the sphere of Tense proper, the idea of past time being definitely brought in by the presence of the This particle perhaps a demonstrative base in augment.

—

its

origin,

"

meaning

then

"

—

the only decisive

is

mark

of

past or present time that the Indo-Germanic verb possesses, unless the final -i in primary tenses is rightly conjectured to have denoted present action in its prehistoric origin. Applied to

the

present

stem,

the

throws

augment

linear

action

into the past applied to the aorist, it does the same for The resultant meaning is naturally various. action. punctiliar have pictorial narrative, as contrasted with the may ;

We

summary given by the aorist. times sign his work o Belva

Thus the sculptor will somethe eiroiei, sometimes eVotT/cre :

former lays the stress on the labour of production, the latter When the difference is a matter of on the artist's name. emphasis,

imperfect

we

naturally find

in form,

is

sometimes evanescent.

it

aorist in

meaning, because

But eXe^ev often

punctiliar

root.

elirev

pictorial character is largely

differs

"E^iq,

0a

little

is

a

from

very rubbed off by time, In words and in MGr the two forms are mere equivalents. The less worn the distinction can hardly ever be ignored. to which we were in alluding just now, categories discussing

—

its

the participle, are everywhere conspicuous in the imperfect indicative. Thus we have frequently the iterative, its graph (

)

instead of

(

),

describing

past action

that

was

repeated. Especially important, because more liable to be is conative imperfect, for which we might give the the missed,

graph o

(

of its failure to

Action going on implies the contingency ). our linear graph may either reach an end :

be produced beyond our vision, or reach a definite terminus in view {Karrjadiov, perfective, see above, p. Ill), or stop How important this is for the NT may abruptly in vacuo. be seen from some of the passages, in which the Eevisers have

earned our gratitude by their careful treatment of the Tenses, Ac 26^^ is a notable a specially strong point of their work.

example

:

the

AV

actually forced

commits Paul

weak

to the statement that

Christians to

he had

renounce their Master.


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

Now

in

itself

"

course be

of

might

i^vajKa^ov"^

129

I

repeatedly ]jut the imperfect just sudden abandonment of the aorist, used up to this point, gives a strong grammatical argument for the nlternative " I tried to forced," the iterative

force,"

which

is

referred

to.

made certain by the whole tone of the Apostle we cannot imagine him telling of such a Other typical exx. are Mt 3^*, Lk 1^^,

in his retrospect success so calmly :

!

EV

AV

being right in all in Ac I.e. the curiously blundered into the right meaning by mistranslating a wrong " " text. (Their avvi^Xaaev would naturally mean that he drove Did the translators (Tyndale and them to shake hands

Ac

7^*^,

the

:

!

successors) mistake

his

emend

consciously

this

for

crvvifSXaacrev,

The Vulgate

?

or

reconcilidbat

Mk

did

they

may have

In 9^^ the Eevisers unfortunately corrected the text without altering the translation it seems clear that the imperfect is conative, the man refusing to be

encouraged them.)

:

So also in Heb 11^'^ irpoa-e^epev stopped in his good work. appears to be a conative imperfect, as the RV takes it the :

contrast between the ideally accomplished sacrifice, as permanently recorded in Scripture {nrpoaevipo-^ev), and the

that

fact

historic

the

deed

was not

finished,

makes an

I extremely strong case for this treatment of the word. cannot therefore here agree with Thumb, who says that we expect an aorist, and suggests that ecpepov had already begun

an

to be felt as

(TIiLZ all

NT

aorist as in

MGr

e(j)€pa,

the aorist of ^epvco

He cites no ancient parallel; and of 423). author of Heb is the least likely to start writers the

xxviii.

an innovation „, . Tlie Aorist

of this kind.''

(See p. 238.) In the Aorist indicative, as in the Imperfeet, wo have past time brought in by the

.

:

.

.

To appreciate the essential character of we must start with the other moods.

use of the augment.

aorist action, therefore,

The contrast stem Kad'

is

of its point action with well seen in 809 ai^fiepov in

rj/j,epav

iravrl

in

Lk 11^:

airovvn SlSov

reversed)

Mt

5^-

Xapr^re iv eKecvj) trast so well that

us present g

in

cf

also

Lk

6^''

Mt ;

tlie

Mt

linear of the present 6^\ against hihov to

5*^ t&> aiTovvrt 809,

x^lpeTe, without note of time, but Trj

vfiepa.

but

and (with respective parts

Lk

6^^

The Imperative shows the con-

we may add another example Eom 6^^ gives TrapiaTdvere (see pp. 122 ff.) and TrapaaTijaare to:''

»«":Seep. 247.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

130

the daily struggle, always ending gether in marked antithesis in surrender, and the once-for-all surrender to God which Note further the delicate nuance in Ac brings deliverance. 2537f.

Barnabas, with easy forgetfulness of

.

Mark

—Paul

wishes cvv-

risk,

refuses avvTrapaXaii^aveiv, to have irapaXa^etv with them day by day one who had shown himself unreliable. Examples are very numerous, and there are few of the finer

shades of meaning which are more important to grasp, just because they usually defy translation. The three kinds of point action, Ingressive, Effective, and Constative,^ are not Two or even always easy to distinguish. .

three of them may be combined in one verb, we saw above with /SaXelv (p. 109) for of course this may " be the summary of ^dWetv " throw," as well as " let fly and

as "

;

hit

In usage however nearly

".

all

verbs

keep to one end

though the marked growth of the constative enlarges the number of cases in which the whole action is comprised in one view. Thus from ^acnXeveiv we or other of the action

;

have the ingressive aorist in ^aaL\eva-a<i dvairarjo-erai, " having come to his throne he shall rest" (Agraphon, OP 654 and Clem. Al.), and the constative in Eev 20* "they reigned a thousand years." The ingressive especially belongs to verbs

of

effective

bring

to

fected in 2^^

Aonst

p.

MT

For the condition (Goodwin 16). " durative reXeiv fulfil,

we may compare

perfection"

weakness

")

(2

Co 12^

"my

is

is

power

with the aorist TeXeaat

The constative

etc.).

(above,

or

state aorist,

"

being per-

finish

used apparently in

"

(Lk

Gal

5^^

118).

The aorist participle raises various quesParticiple ^:^q^^ ^^ j^g ^ which must be considered

of Coincident

,

m .

^i

i.i

^

n

so far as they concern the nature oi The connotation of past time aorist action. liQre

Action

has largely fastened on this participle, through the idiomatic it stands before an aorist indicative to qualify

use in which its action.

in the

1

A

As

point action is always completed action, except the participle naturally came to involve

ingressive,

We may express them by the graph A A will be Ingressive, B Effective,

to B.

line

reduced to a point by perspective.

B, denoting motion from > and the Constative would be the


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

131

main verb. Presumabl}' would happen less completely when the participle stood The assumption of past time must not however be second. In regarded as a necessary or an accomplished process. in the the and the cases, NT, especially many participle main verb denote coincident or idenfAcal action. So ottopast time relative to that of the

this

Mt

eltrev

Kpi6e\<i

Ac

The

10^^.

22^ etc./

Ka\co<;

recurring in the papyri: thus "

eiTo[riaa<;

latter puts into the past a

FP 121 "

7rapa<yev6fi€i'o<;

formula constantly

(i/ii a.d.)

ev TrotJ^Vet?

will oblige me by giving si dederis in Latin. In Jn 11^^ we have elirovaa first for past action and then the changed form is suggestive, etiraa-a (BC*) for coincident 8ov<i

you

:

One probable perhaps without conscious significance. example of coincident action may be brought in here because but

is

its inherent difficulty, though it belongs rather to lexicon The participle ein^akoov (Mk 14'^-) than to grammar. which may well have been obscure even to Mt and Lk, who

of

both dropped

it

has

now presented

itself

in the Ptolemaic

Tb P

50, iirt^aXoov avveywcrev ra iv rrji eavrov <yrjL papyrus " he set Tov arj/jLacvo/xefou vSpaywyov, which I translate, fiepr] It is true that in Tb P 13 eTn^okyj to and dammed up." means " embankment," as Dr Swete has pointed out to me.^

But Dr F. G. Kenyon has since observed that if e7rc/3dW(o were here used of casting up earth, it would add nothing to (xvve^waev alone.

Moreover, since Mark's phrase has to be

any case, there is good reason for taking the same sense in both places. Many versions take this view of iirt^aXayv (cf Euthymius' gloss

explained in word in the either

or translate the paraphrase rjp^aro found in D. If this substitute the ingressive aorist eKkavaev. account is right, iirt^aXdov is the aorist coincident with the ap^dfj,evo<i),

Mt and Lk

point of the linear eKkacev, and the compound phrase expresses with peculiar vividness both the initial paroxysm first

This phrase, except for Ac 19^^ 25^, occurs in the Semitic atmosphere alone we should look at the Hebrew icN-i fj;-], whieli suggested it through the medium of the LXX. (It is not Aramaic, Dalman thinks, ^orcJs 24 f.) The form of the Hebrew prompts Dr Findlay to suggest that dTroKpiOeis is ingressive, That dTroKpidrjvaL is generally constative, does not d-rrev consecutive upon it. 1

;

so that

make *

this account any less possible. See notes in Expos, vi. vii. 113 and

viii.

430.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT

132

C4REEIv.

its long continuance, which the easier but tamer word of the other evangeHsts fails to do. There are even cases where the participle

and

^°^

Thus in 189 we have, "when the flower of his sailor-folk came down to lolcos, mustered and thanked them all (Xe^aro eTTai,vrjcrai<i). Jason seems

'^^ "^^^f ÂŽi^^-^ auent Action.

This

is

to involve subsequent action.

I'i^clar

Pyth.

iv.

Gildersleeve notes

really coineident action, as

;

but

had the poet felt bound to chronicle the exact order of proceedings, he would have put the muster first. I am strongly disposed to have recourse to this for the of

course,

much

-

discussed

suspicions of

seem more "

Ac

in

daTraad/xevot

"

"

prior corruption serious still that

though

25^^,

induce timidity. Blass

Hort's

It

might 197) pronounces

(p.

the reading of the majority of the MSS Blass comes as near to an Athenian

^

not Greek," revenant as any

.

.

for

.

But when he says that the modern could hope to be. cannot yet be regarded accompanying circumstance

"

.

as concluded,"

may we not

.

.

reply that in that case Pindar's

The effective aorist equally needs emending ? different from a durative like eiropevovTO, very which could only have been followed by a word describing eiraLvn^aai'^

KaTi]VT7}(rav is

them on

the purpose before

"

But in they submit that the case is

their journey.

arrived on a complimentary visit

"

I

KV

The text gives the meaning really one of identical action. There a are adequately.good many passages in which

NT

between antecedent and coincident in the Heb 9^^ where action, places participle stands second It would take too much space will serve as an example. exegesis has to decide

:

^

Blass here slurs over the fact that not one uncial reads the future.

The

paraphrastic rendei'ing of tlie Vulgate cannot count, and a reading su}i}>orted by nothing better than the cursive 61 had better be called a conjecture outright. (Blass's misquotation

edition.)

As

interpolation"

"who -We may

quotes,

5tl)creis

little (p.

as

I'f^

KarrjXdov,

by the way,

is

not corrected in his second

share his confidence that Jn 11- "is certainly an What difficulty is there in the explanation he 198 n.). " well known did (or, has done) this ? (See p. 238.)

can

I

quote an example from the vernacular:

'SapairiiiM'L

ry

<pi\u}

.

.

.

OP

530

Zv " of which " AVe clothes. (ii/A.D.) i^

'KvTpuxxacTd fiov to. i/j-aria op. cKarov,

will give 'my uncle' Sarapion 100 draclunce and redeem my should add that Dr Findlay would regard da-Tr. in Ac I.e. as denoting the See further p. 238. initial act of KaTT^vrrjaav,

you


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. discuss

to

adequately the

alleged

action participles for which

but a few comments must

examples

of

13:3

suhsequenl

Eamsay

pleads {Paul, p. 212), be ventured. In Ac 1 G'' (WH)

first of a series of passages which Rackham {Ads, we really have nothing to 184) regards as "decisive" show when the Divine monition was given. Assuming Ramsay's itinerary correct, and supposing that the travellers realised the prohibition as far on as Pisidian Antioch, the aorist

the

p.

remains coincident, or even antecedent, for they had not yet In 23^^ (and 22^*) it is entirely crossed the Asian frontier. arbitrary to make assumptions as to the order of the items. The former is " he said meanwhile ordering him ., .," .

.

.

.

which may perfectly mean that Felix first told his soldiers where they were to take Paul, and then assured the prisoner of an early hearing, just before the guards led him away. In 22^^ Lysias presumably said in one sentence, " In 1 7^^ the opiaa^ is not Bring him in and examine him." " " than the iirotijaev in time the determination of later well

:

man's

home

his

|-?rcce(^6c?

in

creation,

the

Divine

plan.

"

exx. are 24^^ in which etVa? Rackham's other " decisive and 8caTa^dfM6vo<i are items in the action described by dveand 7^*", where the constative i^y]ya<y6v describes (SdXeTo Rackham's object is to justify the Exodus as a whole. ;

the

reading returned to

of J.

them John."

nBHLP and

in

al

fulfilled "

Now

"

1 2^^,

by translating they their ministry and took with

returned

...

in

fulfilment

.

.

." is

a

and quite admissible. But to take an in involves this way unblushing aorist (Tvv7rapa\a^6vTe<i of suhseqaent action, and this I must maintain has not yet been paralleled either in the NT or outside. ITort's conjecture

good coincident aorist

Tr}v

best.

el<i

'I.

iT\7]pu>cravTe<i

The alternative

is

SiaKovLuv

—mends

so flatly out of

this

passage

agreement with the

normal use

of the aorist participle that the possibility of it only introduce serious confusion into the language. Prof. Ramsay's appeal to Blass will not lie, I think, for any

could "

subsequent action

"

use

:

we have

already referred to the

great grammarian's non possunnis for Ac 25^^, which entirely bars his assent to any interpretation involving more than All that he says on 23^^ is that KeXevaa^ coincident action. — cKeXcvaev re, which is not warrant for Ramsay's inference.


A GKAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

134

On

we may safely accept the vigorous stateAc 16« {EB ii. 1599): "It has to be maintained that the participle must contain, if not the whole case,

ment

Schmiedel on

of

'

something antecedent to they went (Su^Xdov), at least something synchronous with it, in no case a thing subsequent '

to

the rules of

all

it, if

grammar and

of language are not to be given up."

^^^^

Aorists

sure understanding

The careful study of the aorist participle show surviving uses of its original time-

less character, besides those we have noted 10^^ idecopovp (durative) top Saravdv e'/c rov

Lk

already.

all

^

ovpavov Treaovra,

—which

.

is

ovK iK

exactly like Aesch.

.

.

FV 9561,

T(ovB' iyo) [sc. Trepydficov^

Bi(raov<; Tvpdvvov<i €K7rea6vra<; rjaOojJL'qv^

or

Homer

//. vi.

284,

el Ketvov

FISoi/xl

KareXOovT "yltSo? ecaw

a category of which many exx. are given by § 148, in which the sense of past time does

to

belongs

ye

MT

Goodwin

HG

" not appear cf Monro I watched him fall" 212, 401. will be the meaning, the aorist being constative irLinovTa :

:

"

"

falling

Vulg. cadentem) would have been much weaker, the possibility of recovery. The triumphant

(cf

suggesting

Eev 18^ (cf next page) is the same action. need not stay to show the timelessness of the aorist in the imperative, subjunctive and infinitive there never was any time connotation except when in reported speech an eireaev eireaev of

We

:

optative or infinitive aorist took the place of an indicative. Cases where an aorist indicative denotes present time, or even future, demand some attention. 'E^Xrjdr] in Jn 15*^ is paralleled by the well-known classical idiom seen in Euripides " Ale. 386, dTTcoXofirjv €0 fie Xei-v|rei9, I am undone if you leave me." ^^ Similarly in i^iaTr), 3^^, English again demands the

Mk

perfect, "he has gone out

notes that this idiom

of his

mind."

survives in

analogous use of the perfect aorist of

Mk

1^^

and

3

be seen.

parallels, iv crol ev86Ki]a-a,is

thee I have set the seal of ^

may

Jannaris ITG § 1855 In Eom 14^3 an

MGr.

my

The

probably "on

"

approval

" :

literally

" we 21^^ may be leiidered ceased, with the words Suggested by my friend Mr H. Bisseker. See Giles, ManuaP 499.

Ac

difficult

.

.

I set,""

."

See

p. 247.


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. which

at a time

is

None

not defined.

of

135

these exx. are

really in

present time, for they only seem to be so through a difference in idiom between Greek and We have English.

probably to do here with one of the most ancient uses of the aorist the ordinary use in Sanskrit expressing what has 16^ Lk 7^^ I420 15^2 24^^ Jn 11*2 just happened:'' ci 1219 131 13^^ 2P«,Eev 148 132, etc., and see p. 140.^ " In two other uses we employ the present, the "

Mk

(^xM

Eph

and the

so-called

6^2),

epistolary

"

"

gnomic (3IT § 155) observes that the gnomic " give a more vivid statement of general (as

aorist.

Goodwin

and perfect truths, by employaorist

ing a distinct case or several distinct cases in the past to represent (as it were) all possible cases, and implying that what has occurred is likely to occur again under similar

The present is much commoner than the which generally (Goodwin § 157) refers to "a single or a sudden occurrence, while the present (as usual) The gnomic aorist survives in MGr implies duration." (Jannaris HG § 1852), and need not have been denied by Winer for Jas 1^^ and 1 Pet l^*: see Hort's note on the latter. Jas 1^* combines aor. and perf. in a simile, reminding us of the closely allied Homeric aorist in similes. ^® have seen that the aorist descriptive English of what has just happened has to be rendered Rendering of Aorist Iq English by what we call our Perfect Tense. Indicative. j^ ^^^^ ^^ admitted that this is not the only usage in which the English and the Greek past tenses do not circumstances." aorist,

coincide.

— —

Our English Past

mostly built on the Perfect

historically a syncretic tense,

is

essentially

a definite tense,

connoting always some point or period of time at which the action occurred. But in Greek this is not necessarily involved all. Idiomatically we use the past in pure narrative, where the framework of the story implies the continuous dating of the events and though the Greek aorist has not this implica-

at

;

we may regard

tion,

the tenses

as

equivalent in practice.

But outside narrative we use the periphrastic have tense

^

In classical Greek

wliich

we may

as an

find an aorist of this kind used with a sequence perfect, as Eurijiides, Medea 213 f.

would naturally suggest a foregoing

i^TjKdov

oofj.ui' [xi) fxoi Ti /ji.e/j.<pT](Td'.

See Verrall's note.

:

["See

p.

247.


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

136

and it thus becomes the inevitable representa Greek aorist when no time is clearly designed e.g 1 Co 15*^ Tivh iKoifM/]di]a-av, "fell asleep (at various times)," This has two unfortunate and so "have fallen asleep." We have to decide for ourselves whether a Greek results. often no easy aorist refers to definite or indefinite time And we have to recognise that our own perfect is task.

indefinite past

;

tive of the

:

—

ambiguous

it is

:

not only the genuine Perfect, describing action

in the past with continuance into present time, but also the As Dr J. A. Eobinson says {Gospels, simple indefinite Past.

in Mt 11^^: "If we our Thou didst reveal,' minds are set to search for some specially appropriate moment to which reference may be made. The familiar Thou hast revealed,' expresses rendering, Thou hast hid the sense of the Greek far more closely, though we are using what we call a perfect.' The fact needs to be recognised p.

107), on '

render,

eKpv\\ra'i

Thou

and

didst hide

uTreKciXvyjra'i

.

.

.

.

.

.

'

.

.

.

'

that our simple past and our perfect tense do not exactly coincide in meaning with the Greek aorist and perfect The translation of the aorist into English respectively.

must be determined partly by the context and partly by ^ The use of the English perfect considerations of euphony." to render the aorist evidently needs careful guarding, lest the Take for example impression of a true perfect be produced. " " we have received decidedly rings as a Eom 1^ The

AV

perfect

:

it

means

"

I

received originally and

still

possess."

emphasis on the wrong element, for Paul clearly means that when he did receive a gift of grace and a commission from God, it was through Christ he received it. If a man says to his This is not an indefinite aorist at all. " friend, Through you I got a chance in life," we should This

lays

never

the

question

distinct meaning.

the

idiom

Among

"

have

:

"

got

would

the paraphrasers of

convey a

Eom, Mofiatt

This thesis was elaborately worked out by Dr R. F. Weymouth in a On the B,endcring into English of the Greek Aorist and Perfect (1890 in Modern Speech was intended to give His posthumous since in 2nd ed.). ^

pamphlet, effect to

:

NT

the thesis of the pamphlet.

Weymouth's argument

RV

is

damaged by

but in this one point it may were sometimes applied in fairly be admitted tliat the Revisers' principles See however pp. 137 ff. rather too rigid a manner.

some not very wise language about the

;


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. and the Tiventieth Century with the

here

EV

NT

Eutherford,

:

13V

rightly give the pcast tense

Way

and Weymouth

less

The limitations of our idiom accurately give the perfect. are evident in the contrasted tenses of 16*^ and 1 Co

Mk

15*.

'Hyepdr)

states

simply the past complete

fact,

the

see above on astounding news of what had just happened this use of the aorist. 'EyrjjepTat sets forth with the utmost possible emphasis the abiding results of the event, which supply the main thought of the whole passage. But " He is risen " is the only possible translation for the former while in the latter, since a definite time is named, our usage rather rebels ;

against the perfect which the sense so strongly demands. must either sacrifice this central thouoht with the AV

We

and the "

who had a chance that was denied versions, or we must frankly venture on " English with the EV to fit our idiom we might

free translators,

the

to

literal

translation

:

detach the note of time and say " that he hath been raised raised on the third day, according to the scriptures."

A AT

„„V

,

El

a,Tid.

in

Mt

The subject of the rendering^ of the Grreek aorist is so important that no apology

needed for an extended enquiry. We will of AV and EV in Mt, which will serve as a typical book. If my count is right, there are 65 indicative aorists in Mt which are rendered by both AV and EV alike with the English perfect,^ or in a few cases the is

examine the usage

AV is deserted by the EV for the These simple past.^ figures alone are enough to dispose of any wholesale criticism. In 11 of the 41 Weymouth present

;

while in 41 the

himself uses the past in his free translation. therefore touches between a quarter and a

His criticism third

of

the

Including 6'-, where the AV would certainly have translated dcpi'iKafxev as has done. In a private memorial wliich was sent to the Revisers by an unnamed colleague, before their final revision, it is stated that out of nearly 200 places in the Gospels where the aorist was rendered by the English perfect, the Revisers had only followed the AV iu 66. The figures above for Mt show 1

the

RV

that the appeal took effect but in Ju 17, wliich is specially named, the 21 exx. remain in the published text. That the majority were right there, I cannot ;

doubt: the English perfect in that chaitter obscures a special feature of the gi'eat prayer, the tone of detachment with which the Lord contemplates His earthly -

life

One

as a period lying in the past.

passage, 18'^,

is

only in

EVmg.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

138

From which passages which come under our notice in Mt. infer that the Eevisers' fairly English was, after as black In examining the not as it was all, quite painted. we may

material, is

we

will

assume in the

instance that the aorist

first

rightly rendered by our perfect (or present) in

AV

places where

EV

and

agree. (This the sake of argument, as will be seen below.) then is with the 41 passages in which there

Of these Weymouth's own translation definite aor. its

by

wrong

vv.21-27)

25^0 in

his^

v,*2,

103«.

see

531.

11^) translation of

(AV

ca77ie

in

^j^g^.^

T6t<i

dp^aLOL<;

for

task

2^^

(a very ^g^g misled

^y

first

a difference.

is

justifies

33. as. 43

one of

Our

the

it

is

the

right in 17^^ 2142

three) as justified by the 25^^-^^ as on all fours with the past "I sowed."

We may and

Hos

all

only assumed

is

AV

2V^

further deduct

It remains to discuss the legitimacy of the English past in Our test shall be sought in idiomatic the rest of the exx. constructed so as to carry the same grammatical sentences,

conditions

:

they are purposely assimilated to the colloquial

idiom, and are therefore generally made

parallel in grammar the to illustrate. In each case the prepassages they only terite tacitly implies a definite occasion ; and the parallel will

show that

this implication is at least a natural under-

Where

standing of the Greek. we may infer that the

the perfect

is

equally idiomatic,

Greek is indeterminate. Taking them " as they come, 2^ etSofiev seems to me clearly definite I saw the news in the paper and came off at once." 3'^ vireBei^ev " " " " has warned may be justified, but Who told you that ? :

:

We

may put together S^'' 10^^^152* As we have seen, the and (aTreaTaXrjv). (•^XOov) in use the one of these and past Weymouth passages, they " I came for business, not are all on the same footing. is

presumably EngKsh.

AV

for pleasure is

"

good enough English, even if correct and not very different. is

likewise

"

have come

"

Or compare

Shakspere's "

Why

came

I

hither but for that intent

?

"

In 7^^ (eTrpo^riTevaaixev, e^e/SaXo/xev, i7rot7]aa/xev) the perfect would be unobjectionable, but the past is quite idiomatic cf all

"

such a sentence as over the country

?

Now

then

Didn't

I

:

didn't

I

make speeches

subscribe liberally to the


THE YEEB

TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

:

139

10^ (eXa/Sere): cf "What do you expect' IV' (rjvXicrafJLev, nothing: you get nothing." There's no pleasing you. I made small talk, and

party funds?"

You

paid

etc.)

:

"

cf

you were bored

gave you a lecture, and you went to see above): cf a'ireKakv>\ra'i very glad you kept me in the dark, and told my friend." 13^'' {eTrediifiijcrav, elSov, rjKovaav): here no better justification is needed than Watts's 11^^

sleep." " I am

I

:

(dTTeKpvyjra'i,

"

How

blessed are our ears

That hear

tliis

joyful sound,

Which kings and prophets waited

And 13** (eVpf i/re)

:

for,

sought, but never found."

the aorist

almost gnomic, like Jas

is

1-*,

but

would be wrong to obliterate the difference between the aorist and the present (historic) which follows.^ 15^^ i^v" which cf movement didn't start is revaev) Every you "I cf 16'^ no {eXa^ofiev) brought wrong." money away

it

:

:

with me."

19^^ (evvov'^io-av)

is to

my mind

the only decided

Unless Origen's exegesis was right, the third exception. verb does not refer to a single event like the other two, except so far as concerns the moment of renunciation in the the perfect therefore would perhaps be less misleading, past :

21-*^

despite apparent inconsistency. " on earth did that happen ?

21^^

(AV

(e^rjpdvdt])

:

cf

"How

wrongly joins ttw? and

for iyevero see above) is the aorist of an event just completed, 28^^ is right, but this may well be pure narrative. the " " here the added words [and continueth] (8c6(f)r]fXiadT])

-jrapa^pT^fia.)

ambiguous

:

if

(ijevrjOr]

is

it

AV

:

leave the verb to be a narrative aorist.

Finally 28^° (iverei" Mind you attend to cf obviously idiomatic In all these passages then, with one everything I told you." possible exception, the simple past is proved to be entirely Xdfirjv)

is

idiomatic perfect

;

as

:

and

if

this is allowed,

permissible

in

perhaps preferable. Let us go back for a

1

For this idiom see it an Aramaism.

makes

with the proviso that

it

we may

several

moment

freely concede the

cases,

to

our

and occasionally lists

for

Mt,

to

121 n. above. Wellhausen, on Mk T^ {Einl. 16), In view of the MGr usage, we can only accept this he counted good vernacular Greek as well. p.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

140

draw some inferences as to the meaning of the aorist where simple narrative, and the reference to a specific time, are Parenthetically, we might strike out a few and the passages in which agree on the English " You did that " is quite as 13^^ is not indefinite perfect.

mostly excluded.

AV

of

RV

:

"

You have done it," and seems to me more suitable where the emphasis is to lie on the subject. In 19^ avve!^€v^ev carries the thought immediately and obviously to the wedding " " is on this view those whom God joined together day Similarly dcp/jKa/jLev {-Kev) in 19-^-^^ calls up preferable. In 20^ we cannot unmistakably the day of the sacrifice. correct as

:

"

has hired "; but it may be observed object to rendering " " is not exactly a Grtecism. And that nobody asked you is

surely rjiJbapTov '7rapaBov<i (27*)

definite

"

enough

— "I

sinned

We may end this section by putting betrayed ? Under the together the exx. of two important categories. when

I

"

"

come 9^^ ijekevrr^aev (with things just happened dpri): 5^^ e/jiOL-^evaev and 14^^ irapifkOev and 17^^ rfkde (with ^*°' rjhri); 6^^ d(f))]Ka/ji€v, 12^^ e(f)0aa€V, 14^ T^yepOr), 16^^ direhead of

18-^^

KaXv^Ire,

26^^

eKephriaa<i,

20^^

iiroiTjaav

-a?,

26^''

r/pydaaro 27^^

iTTOiTjae, 26*^^ i^Xa(T(f)ri/j,i]aev, rjKOvaare, 26^^-*^* etTra?,

e7ra0ov, 21^^ eyKareXcTre^, forbids),

and perhaps 21*^

28^

elirov,

eyevrjOr}.

28^^ iSoOv (unless ll^' Some of these may of

If they rightly belong to this course be otherwise explained. Equally heading, the English perfect is the correct rendering.

tied to the have tense are the aorists of indefinite time-refer-

ence as all

;

we

we must be ready to substitute our preterite as soon see reason to believe that the time of occurrence is at

but

prominently before the writer's mind.

Clear examples of ^^'^

^^'^'

rjKovaare, 8^*^ evpov, 10^^ eireKuXeo-av, 12^ dviyvcore (ovSeTroTe in 21^^ brings in the note of time: cf " dost thou wrong her that did ne'er wrong Shakspere, this are 5-^

Why

thee?), wpLOLOiOrj

13^^ iiraxvvdr]

etc.,

15« riKvpayaare, 13^^ IS^s

(probably because the working out of

tlie

22^^

comparison

included action partially past: Zahn compares Jn 3^^), 21^*^ ^^ eKepSijaa, KaTrjpriaa), 23^^ d(f)i]KaTe, 24*^ KaTeaTtjaep, 25'^27^^ eiroiriae.

Our study

of

tlie English periphrastic us for taking up the most perfect prepares the Greek of all Tenses. In Greek, as in important, exegetically,

^

f.

'


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

141

English, the line between aorist and perfect is not always easy to draw. The aorist of the event just passed has inherently

that note of close connexion between past and present which the differentia of the Greek perfect while the perfect was

is

;

increasingly used, as the language grew older, as a substitute for what would formerly have been a narrative aorist.

A

shows us how much more the vernacular tends to use this tense and the inference be drawn that old the distinction of aorist and perfect might was already obsolete. This would however be entirely unwarrantable. There are extremely few passages in the of the earlier centuries a.d. in which an aoristic perfect papyri is demanded, or even It is simply suggested, by the context. cursory reading of the papyri soon

;

that a preference grows in popular speech for the expression which links the past act with present consequences." casual from the of Attic writers example prince

A

show that this is not only a feature of late Near the beginning of Plato's Crito, Socrates explains his reason for believing that he would not ^^^^

of Aorist

Greek.

" This I infer," he says in Jowett's the third day. " I had last night, or rather only which a vision from English,

die

till

now."

just

The Greek, however,

is

reK/jLatpofiat

€k

rivo'?

iaypaKa oXvyov irporepov ravrrj'i t?}? vvkt6<;, where point of time in the past would have made elSov as inevitable as the aorist is in English, had not Socrates meant to emevvTTViov, o

It is for exactly phasise the present vividness of the vision. the same reason that iy/jjepraL is used with the point of time in 1 Co IS'* (see above). So long as the close connexion of

the past and the present is maintained, there is no difficulty whatever in adding the note of time. So in Eom 1 6^ we have to say either "

"

who were

in Christ before me," or

(much

better)

A

who have been

in Christ longer than I." typical parallel 477 (ii/A.D.) rcbv to ire^iTnov from the papyri may be seen in " " who came of age in and a fusion of ero? i^r/^evKOTQjv .

"

.

.

who have been

of

OP

age since the

fifth

year."

Now,

if

the

tendency just described grew beyond a certain limit, the But it must fusion of aorist and perfect would be complete. be observed that it was not the perfect which survived in the

MGr

the old perfect forms only In struggle for existence. survive in the passive participle (with reduplication syllable « Sec pp.

247

1".


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

142 lost),

and

the

in

-Ka which was tacked on to the aorist

passive {ehedrjKa for iSeOrjv)

:

there

is

also the isolated evprjKa

It does (Thumb, Handb. 94), aoristic in meaning. not appear that the perfect had at all superseded the aorist at the epoch when it was though in a fair way to do so itself attacked by the weakening of reduplication which

or ^prjKa

chance of

all

destroyed

of the Perfect

its survival as a distinct form, in competition with the simpler formation of ^^^® aorist. But these processes do not fairly

set in for at least two centuries after the was complete. It is true that the LXX and inscriptions show a few examples of a semi-aoristic perfect in the pre-Eoman age, which, as Thumb remarks {Rellenismus, p. 153), disposes of the idea that Latin influence was workBut it is easy to overstate their ing; cf Jannaris, § 1872. number.'* Thus in Ex 32^ Ke^poviKe is not really aoristic (as Thumb and Jannaris), for it would be wholly irregular to put an aorist in oratio oUiqua to represent the original " " " " Moses is tarrying or has tarried present or perfect

NT

:

its

analogue

do to

is

rather the

;^poi/i^et of

Heb

cite the perfects in

where the use

Mt

24^^.

11^'^ al (see

of this tense to describe

what

Nor

pp. 129, "

will

143

it

ff.),

stands written

"

is a marked feature of the author's style :^ cf Plato, Apol. 28c, ocrot iv Tpola rerekevWjKacriv, as written in " Bible." In factMt 13*^ TreTrpaKev kuI rjyopathe Athenians' a-ev is the only example cited by Jannaris which makes any

in Scripture

NT

impression.

(I

may quote in illustration of

this

OP 482

(ii/A.D.)

The distinction is very clearly seen in papyri for some centuries. Thus t?;? yevoiu,evT]<; Kot aTTOTreTre/xfievT]'; yvvaiKo'i NP 19 (ii/A.D.), "who was my " o\ov top -^oXkov [8eSa]7rdpr]Ka et9 wife and is noio divorced avT(o BIT 814 (iii/A.D.), where an erased e- shows that the scribe meant to write the aorist and then substituted the more appropriate perfect. As may be expected, illiterate documents show confusion most: e.g. OP 528 (ii/A.D.) ovk iXov^&)/3i9

oi)v

aTreypayp-dfiTjv koX ireirpaKa.)

;

Perfect and

a-dixi-jv

toffether

ovk

i)\Ljx€ (

= }]\€LfxiJ,at) y".e'^(oet i/3 'A6vp.

^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^ combinations of aorist

we

and perfect

naturally look first for the weakening of the distinction, but even there it often appears clearly drawn. At the same time, we may find a writer like Justin

that

"i

»

See p. 248.


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF

143

xiCTIOX.

Martyr guilty of confusion, as in Apol. i. 22 TreTroajKevaL dveyelpai, 32 eKd6i,cre Kal elcrek-i'fKvOev, 44 vorjaai, SeSvp7)UTat kul Other aoristic perfects may be seen in 60 i^tjXOov i^7]y7]aavTO. koX Koi yeyovaat, 62 uKi'jKoe eXa/3e, ii. 2 TreTroi'rjKe .

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

We may compare

from the LXX such eKoXdaaro, a mixture as Is 53^ irpavfj^aTiaOT) /nefiaXuKiarai, (aor. in A). The NT is not entirely free from such cases: cf Mt 13^^ (above). Kal

.

.

etc.

.

.

In Jn

o'^-

ecopafcev

by Blass

Mk

5^^

as

oaa

due .

.

.

and

rficovaev

(JOL

.

contrast 1

the

to

.

stress

Jn

1^

is

explained

on the

laid

greater ire'iTO it] Kev Kal rfKerjaev ae

seeing.

shows

the

In Lk 4^^ it seems best, with proper force of both tenses. Nestle and Wellhausen, to put a stop after expia-e fie, so that uTrea-TaXKe

the governing verb of

is

all

the infinitives, and

is

Ac 2P^, elarjyayev Kal k€ko[v(ok€v, Eev 3^ 5'' and 8^ we must return

not parallel with e')(^pi<Te. To needs no explaining.

There are other places where aorist and perfect are

later.

used in the same context, but they do not belong to this category of aorist and perfect joined with Kal and with identical subject. fairly

suppose

When

the nexus

is

so

close,

we might

possible for the tenses to be contaminated

it

by

the association, even where a perfect would not have been But there are evidently no used aoristically by itself. exx. to place by the side of those from Justin, except Mt 13*^

NT

and the passages from Eev.

(See further p. 238.) to the general question of ^^^ existence of aoristic perfects in the NT.

We

Perfects in

NT

">

come then

It is a question which must be settled on its without any appeal to the a priori, for aoristic

merits,

certainly be found in and even before the epoch are entirely at Hberty to recognise writings. such perfects in one writer and deny Lhem to anotlier, or to perfects of the

may

We

NT

allow whole.

them

for certain

Among

the

verbs and negative the class as a we find Blass (p. 200) and most sparingly in other places.

authorities

admitting them for Eev Even less concession is made by W. F. Moulton Burton (MT 44) allows rather more, but says,

(WM "

340 n.). The idiom is

The extremely small will exx. even naturally prevent us proportion possible We from accepting any except under very clear necessity. 9^^ 11^^ Heb from exx. out the (7^^ begin by ruling alleged

confined to narrow limits in the NT." of


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

L-44

they are obviously covered by the author''s usm described above (p. 142). Some isolated cases may loquendi Lk 9^*^ ecopuKav seems to also be cleared out of the way. 11^^), since

a ewpaKajxev takes this form be virtually reported speech in form of this sentence suggests. orat. which the ohl., regularly In Jas 1^^, KarevoTjaev kol aireXijXvOev Kal evOeca eireKadero, :

momentary acts, which are thrown and the perfect accurately describes the

the aorist expresses two into narrative form,

In

one action with continuance. to

them, and

it

Ac

7^^,

airearaKKev, with

more plausibly conformed round, that this word is alleged to have happens

the forest of aorists

all

is

But, after all, the abiding results of Moses' mission formed a thought never absent from a Jew's mind. Then there is an important category in which we are

aoristic force elsewhere.

to be misled by an unreal parallelism in English. Burton rightly objects to our deciding the case of vv)^d/]/u,epov ev TM ^v6u> ireiToirjKa (2 Co 11^^) by the easy comment that " " it But it does goes quite naturally into English (Simcox). not follow that we have here a mere equivalent for eVoiT^o-a. That would only place the experience on a level with the others this recalls it as a memory specially vivid now. There is in fact a perfect of broken as well as of unbroken " ...>... ?," which leads from a continuity: in the graph

liable

:

'^

moment

past

tolerate the

to

the

company

moment

of

speech,

the

perfect will on the

of adjuncts that fasten attention

point (as in Rom 16'^, above) or on some indeterminate in its course (as here), or on several points in its course. point Plato Thccet. Cf Lucian Pise. 6 irov yap eyed vfjia<; v^piKa;

initial

144b

MT §

cLKrjKoa

fi6v

Tovvofia,

46) — BU 163

p,vrj/j,ov€vco

8'

ov

(see

Goodwin

ol 7rap6vTe<i eKeivov

jxaXkov (ii/A.D.) cfiacrl (?" often") TovTo TreiroiTjKevai, Kal yap aXkot q)<; ir\r]yevTe<i viro avTov dva^optov BeScoKaai. To this category belong Jn 1^^ 5^'^ with as 8^^, and such cases as TrcoiroTe, [)erfects 2

Co

1

time) I

wv direaraXKa, " of those whom (from time to have sent." That the aorist is very much com-

2^'',

moner

in this delineation of repeated action is obvious but that does not prevent the use of the perfect when the additional thought is presented of a close nexus with the

present time. turn finally to the residuum

We

;

of

genuinely aoristic


THE VEEB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION. perfects, or those

which have a

claim to be thus regarded. yield those alleged for Eev, viz. 5^

we may frankly

First,

and

1117

33

fair

^^ et\7](f)ev (and

^^^*^^

Rev

T

145

by consequence probably and 19^ eiprjKa (-ap).

71*

227),

Since these are without apparent reduplication, they may well have been actual aorists in the writer's view Bousset :

remarks how ^'

Eev

little

uses

eXa/Sov.

Secondly,

we have

eaxnKa in 2 Co 2^^ V 7^ Eom 52'^— outside Paul only in Mk 5^^. We must, I think,

'

treat all the Pauline passages alike,

though Blass believes the

It seems clear that an perfect justifiable except in 2 Co 2^^ aorist would suit all four passages, and in the first of them it

seems hopeless to squeeze a natural perfect force into the Greek ^ an aorist would suit Mk I.e. perfectly, but that :

matters

Now,

less.

if

we may take them

altogether,

we can

an excellent reason why ea-^^rjKa should have been used There is no Greek for possessed, the constative as an aorist. aorist, since ea-'^^ov is almost (if not quite) exclusively used see

the ingressive got, received. "Ea'^ov occurs only 20 times in the NT, which is about 3 per cent, of the whole There is not one place where ea)^ov must be record of e;^£u. Jn 4^^ may be rendered " thou hast espoused " constative for

:

as in

Mk

12^2, the

forming

does not contravene Plato's

Apology)

of the tie is the point.

Dr Adam's dictum

that

"

(p.

the aorist means

49

The

of his notes

got,

NT on

acquired, not

The

similarity of ea'^rjKa to the aorists e6r]Ka and a^rJKa gave a clear opening for its apj)ropriation to this " " will suit the case possessed purpose, and the translation

had."

We

throughout.

Eev and

thus get in the required aoristic perfects

Paul without sacrificing a princijile. Passing over ireirpaKa (Mt 13*^), where the absence of an aorist from the same root may have something to do with the usage, we in

in

come eirpaKa.

do the work of

to the perplexing case of yeyova.

Its

would naturally be with the present, and there seems small reason tor lettmg it Yet even Josephus the common eyevofirjv. affinities

Plummer {CG2' in loc.) says, "As in 1", the perfect shows how vividly he " This means a^iplying so Findlay. : recalls the feelings of that trying time what is said above on Tr€iroir]Ka in 2 Co 11"^. But is this natural, when the 1

coming of Titus with good news had produced «Seep. 248. TO

avecris so conijilete

?

(See p. 2SS.)


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

146

4.

Apion.

(c.

has

21)

irporepov

oXt'yo)

"

avOpooirov

TvpavvlSoi; before P."

'yeyovoTO'i,

who

t?}? TIeitnaTpdrov. flourished a little

From

the papyri we may cite two exx. (both from "I declare that my son has reached 478, ii/A.D.). (irpoa-^e^rjKevac) the age of 13 in the past 16th year of Hadrian and that his father was (yeyovevai) an inhabitant and is now dead {TeTeXevrriKevaL)." BU 136

OP

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

tov

.

.

yeyovevai tov irajepa tTj^ there are not a few passages in which it is far from easy to trace the distinct perfect force of yeyopa, and exx. like those above make it seem useless to 8iaj3el3acov/j,evov

II.

But

try.

45

fir)

NT

Now

iK8iKovfjb€V7]<i 6vr]\dr7]v.

aoristic sense is not really

proved for any of the

NT

passages in which yey ova (indie.) occurs, and in the Lk 10^^ and great majority it has obviously present time. Jn 6-^ are unpromising for our thesis. But the first has the

— —

vivid present of story-telling

The

"

seems to have shown himself "

when inevitably translated " earnest thou hither ? is only another instance of the perfect with point of time, dealt with already it is the combination neighbour."

second

:

of

"

"

when did you come "

here

?

The

general in

more

and

"

how long

have you been yeyova is said by Burton to be Blass only admits it in 25*^. Even this last ?

aoristic use of

Mt

:

a historic present. The remaining passages mostly belong to the formula which tells us that the abiding significance of an event lies in its having been anticipated in In general, it would appear that we can only prophecy. is

like

admit a case Buresch, in pp.

193

ff.),

of

his

kind with the

the

valuable

article

utmost caution.

"Feyovav"

{BUM

K.

1891,

noting an example of aoristic yeyovaai, in Plato (?) never found in Greek that

Alcih. 124a,^ observes that this is

at all respectable. In later Greek, he proceeds, the use of " It has present force always where yeyova greatly increases. it denotes a state of rest, preterite force where it denotes Hence in innumerable cases it is quite an becoming. is

equivalent veni,

etc."

of (p.

elfxi,

as

231

n.).

with It

exstiti,

may

/actus

be

or

natiis

doubted

sum,

however

whether this canon will adequately account for the exx. from Josephus and the papyri with which we began. Since the earliest period of Greek, certain perfects pos1

But

see below, p. 238.


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

147

sessed a present meaning, depending upon the mode of action belonging to the root, and on tliat exhibited in the Tims the markedly conative present present. ^ ^ ^ •.-, Perfects with ^a u '^^'^^' ^^PPv persuasion, with its new perPresent Force.

„•.,.

^

fect nreTreiKa its

and

aorist eireiaa to match, kept is intransitive (like most

ancient perfect ireiTOLOa, which

early perfects

Monro's

meaning / trust. Homeric stage of

see below, p. 154), with the I'erfect in its

account of

"

If we compare the development may be quoted meaning of any Perfect with that of the corresponding Aorist or :

we

Present,

permanent

shall state,

usually find that the Perfect denotes a the Aor. or Pres. an action which brings

about or constitutes that oXcoXe .

.

.

undone.

is

eaTTjKa,

.

.

state.

Thus,

Thus the

.

.

.

ixefJuvqiMai,

.

.

.

cokero

.

was

lust,

so-called Perfecta proiseyitia,

ireiroiOa, olha,

eoiKa,

KkKTr^iiai,

are merely the commonest instances of the rule. Verbs expressing sustained sounds are usually in the etc.,

.

.

{HG

Perfect"

.

,

.

.

This last remark explains KeKpa'ya, which

31).

LXX seems to show Moulton (WM 342 n.) says, "In Jn V" seems the more probable meaning," observing that

has survived in Hellenistic, as the

W.

F.

the pres. Kpd^o)

is

decisively. hath cried

rare in classical writers.

It is

common

him in making when exx. are

a fact which probably weighed with But the LXX, K6Kpa<y6v a normal perfect.

in

NT,

must certainly count as and when we find KeKpaja 14 times, sometimes indisputably present, and never I think even probably perfect cf esp. Ps 141(140)^ Trpo^ ae €K€Kpa^a

so

numerous and well

distributed,

evidence for the vernacular here

;

.

.

.

7rpb<i

irpoayeii rfj

ak (Heb.

the iinpf.

cjjcovy rrj^ Seijcreco'i

''^?"!P3)

VHt/'i^

,

as a true perfect in

;

/ulov

ev

rw KeKpajevai

fxe

30"°, where KeKpaja translates difficult to suppose the word used " It has not however been borrowed

and Job

it is

NT.

"

from the literary language in place of the Hellenistic Kpd^ei (Blass 19S). Kpd^Q) has its own distinction as a durative cf Ps 32(31)^ diro Tov Kpd^etv fie oXrjv t7]v r/fxepav; and KeKpaya, with KCKpd^ofiac and eKeKpa^a, may well have been In any case we differentiated as expressing a single cry.

cannot treat the of the

nXTTLKa

survival.

and

LXX

as evidence for the literary character the necessity of putting

One may doubt

ireireia [xai

into

this

category

;

but

rkdurjKa


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

148

and rjyijfiat in Ac 26^ (contr. Phil 3'') uaturally belongs to it is one of the literary touches characteristic of the speech ;

before Agrippa

see Blass in

:

loc.

(See further p, 2 3 8.)

The Pluperfect, which throws the Perfect The Pluperfect. ^ ^ J . into past time, was never very robust m It must not be regarded as a mere convenience Greek, .

•

,

for expressing relative time, like the corresponding tense in The conception of relative time never troubled English.

the Greeks

and the

;

aorist,

which simply

states

that

the

generally quite enough to describe what like to define more exactly as preceding the time of the

event happened,

we main

verb.

stood

is

Lk

A 8^^,

is

typical case of a pluperfect easily misunderwhich we referred to on p. 75 in connexion

with the concurrent ambiguity of iroWoh ')(^povoL<i, and again (p. 113) in connexion with the perfectivisiug force of avv. Since vernacular usage so clearly warrants our rendering the " for a long time," we are free to observe that to

former

"

"

had seized him (EV text) involves a It would have to be classed as the decided abnormality. " " which we discussed perfect of broken continuity past of the But it must be admitted that above (p. 144) on 2 Co 11^^ the extension of this to the pluperfect is complex, and if there

render

is

oftentimes

it

a simple alternative we should take it EVmg " " though held fast would be better than ;

We

need not examine further the use

of this

essen-

is

"

tially right,

seized."

tense,

which

be interpreted easily from what has been said of Perfect It should be noted that it appears sometimes in action. conditional sentences where an aorist would have been pos-

may

The pluperfect expresses e.g. 1 Jn 2^^ fiefiev^Keicrav av. the continuance of the contingent result to the time of speakIn Mt 12'^ iyvcoKeire is virtually an imperfect to a ing. sible

:

which the perfect form has the same and in Jn 19^^ iSoOij^ would have only pictured the original gift and not the presence of it with Pilate at the moment. Last comes the Future. The nature of e u ure present eyvcoKa, in rationale as in olSa;

.

-^^

action

may

be looked at

^

On

tlie

This

first.

be examined in the history of

its

form.

periphrastic pluperfect, ^v oedofi^vov, see pp. 225

ff.

may Its


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

140

close connexion with the sigmatic norist act. and mid., and the two aorists pass., is obvious. Except in the passive, in fact, the future was mainly a specialised form of the aorist

As such

subjunctive.^ of the aorist.

it will

We

naturally share the point action

cannot however decisively rule out the that another formation may have contributed to possibility the Greek future, a formation which would be originally

The Aryan (Indo-Iranian) and Letto-Slavonic branches of the Indo-Germanic family have a future in -syo,

linear in action.

which however was very moderately developed in these conGreek, geographically tiguous groups before they separated. contiguous with Aryan on the other side in prehistoric times, may have possessed this future but the existing Greek future can be very well explained without it, though it might be safest to allow its probable presence. In any case there is no question that the action of the Future is in usage mixed. ;

"A^w

either

is

"

I shall lead

"

durative, the latter effective. is

"

"

—

I shall bring the former Thus in 14^^ irpod^M v^a<i

or

Mk

probably "I shall go before you," while a^wv (Ac 22^) "to

bring,"

and a^ei

(1

Th

4^*)

"he

will bring," refer to the

end of

An ingressive future may the action and not its progress. probably be seen in vTrorayrjaerai, 1 Co 1 5^^ the rore seems :

thought of as initiating a new kind of subordination of the Son to the Father, and not the perto

show that the Parousia

is

petuation of that which had been conspicuous in the whole of The exposition of this mystery must the mediatorial ?eon. be taken up by the theologians. pass on to note

We

the ingressive future, to be found in another example Jn 8^2. ^EXevOepovv appears to be always punctiliar in of

NT, but et9

it is

not necessarily so: cf Sophocles

kavTov irav iXevdepoi aro/xa,

"

"

lips

wholly pure

(Jebb).

(It is

OT

706

to 7'

as for himself, he keeps his " true Sir E. Jebb uses set

free" in his note, but the durative force of his translation seems more suitable.) It is therefore noteworthy that in v.^^

we have

the paraphrase iXevOepoi ^evrjcreade, to bring out the Some(ingressive) point action of the future that precedes.

times the possession of two future forms enabled the language Thus e^co was associated to differentiate these meanings. 1

See Giles,

" Manual 446-8.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

150 with

and

so

NT

in

and meant " I meant " I shall

Attic

170

ff.

:

in

"

shall

ep^ft),

possess ^

get."

Pet 4^^ ^aveirat

1

with ea')(pv, one possible ex.

a'^ijaco

;

There

is

well be durative as in

may

note the durative o-ci^erai preceding it in the same clause; while (^aw^crerat (Mt 24^*^) has obviously point action. See the classical evidence marshalled in Kiihner-Gerth i. 1 14 ff., :

add the note

in Giles,

Manual^ 483

n.

Since Hellen-

—even

generally got rid of alternative forms this distinction will not entirely obsolete,

istic

a'^^rjaw

is

be expected to Indeed even those futures

play any real part in NT Greek. which by their formation were most intimately connected with the aorist, such as (fio/BojO/^aonai, (for which Attic could use a durative

double mode of action

the

exercised

cfyo/Sr^aofxai),

which was attached to the tense as a whole: cf Heb 13^ " where " be afraid (durative) seems to be the meaning, rather " than become afraid." This question settled, we next have ^^ decide between shall and will as the Qh II A wii The volitive future appropriate translation. involves action depending on the will of the speaker or of the subject of the verb in

will

there

you go

is

the

?

rules

Not only

/

is

the latter.

will go,

you

shall go, it is the

former

;

Side by side with this

we shall go, they will go. rules for the rendering of the almost as complicated as are the

futuristic

down

to lay

the case

the use

for

in

purely

It is impossible

Greek future

:

it

of

is

and

sliall

are the volitive and

loill in standard English. the futuristic often hard to

distinguish, but we have to reckon with an archaic use of the auxiliaries which is traditional in Bible translation. For in such a passage as Mk 1 324-27 ^^ have shall seven times where in modern English we should undeniably But in v.^^ (" the same shall be saved ") the use ^vill.

instance,

substitution of

loill

is

read as a promise

be

correct.^

^

and "

not at (a

all certain, for

volitive

Speaking generally,

it

use),

may

in

fairly

the words

which

The

is

be claimed that

See Brngmann, Kurze vcrgl. Gramm. 568, for this as seen in koKCos also his GV. Gravi.^ 480.

AcaXtDs e|ei

may

shall

ffxv<^et

:

is dealing with fxiture time is often parhave heard of an intelligent child who struggled under years because of the words "Thou shalf, deny nic thrice:" it

use of shall wlien prophecy

ticularly unfortunate.

I

perplexity for could not therefore be Peter's fault,

if

Jesus

commanded him

!

The

child's


THE VERB: TENSES AND MODES OF ACTION.

151

unless volilive force it

would be better

is distinctly traceable from tlie context, to translate by the futuristic form. The

modernising of our English the sacrifice

NT

in this respect

would involve

of a

very large number of shalls in the ord person, for our idiom has changed in many dc])endent clauses, in which neither shall nor will is any longer correct. In Mk 14^*, for example, we should certainly say, "Follow ." It is one of the points him, and wherever he goes in. in which modernising is possible without .

.

sacrificing dignity a sacrifice only too palpable in the various attempts to render the NT into twentieth century English. are still waiting for our English Lasserre.

We

Future Prohibitions,

What remains to be said about the Future will most appropriately come in when we discuss categories such as Commands and Conditional Sentences, etc. It will suffice to of the Future have in Hellenistic

remark here that the moods Greek receded mostly into

their

non-existence, as

original

The imperative and subexperiments that proved failures. a few lapsus calami like KavOrjacofun,, junctive never existed :

or analogically formed aorist subjunctives like 6'^i](x66, Scoar} Ajyp 172), will not be counted as efforts to supply the The optative, which only performed the function of oral, gap.

(WH

The same way, except for the construction with fieWco,^ has shrunk very considerably, though not obsolete. With /xeWco it is only found in the word eaeaOai. The innumerable confusions in the papyri, where a future form often is a mere blunder for an aorist, show that the tense was already moribund for most practical purposes see Hatzidakis 190 ff. Finally the participle, the only modal form which may claim prehistoric antiquity, retains a limited The volitive force (here though genuine function of its own. obi.

substitute for fut. indie, has disappeared entirely.

infinitive, originally limited in the

:

final or quasi-final) is tlie commonest, as Brugmann remarks,^ and the papyri keep up the classical use but futuristic forms are not wanting— cf 1 Co 15^7, Heb 3^ Ac 2021 ;

probably more wiilely shared tlian we think and a modernised passages like Mk 14™ e.g. "you will be renouncing me three would relieve not a few half-conscious difficulties.

determinism version of

times 1

"

is

many

Goodwin

MT § 75.

;

'^

Gr. Gravi.^ 496.


CHAPTER

VII.

The Verb: Voice. of Voice in Greek present us with conditions which are not very easy Active we know, and Passive for the modern mind to grasp. we know, nor can we easily conceive a language in which

Voice

either

:

The phenomena

But nothing

absent.

is

more certain than that the

is

our family possessed no Passive, but only parent language Active and Middle, the latter originally equal with the former in prominence, though unrepresented now in any all distinction of language save by forms which have lost of

^

^^^'

^^M'^ddl

What

meaning.

the

^® ^^" °^^^

prehistoric distinction

gaess.

It

is

suggestive

primitive type which is seen in the Greek TiOrnxi jWe^iai, the principle of vowel-gradation (Ablaut) will account for -6e- as a weakening of -6r)-, and -fjbi as a weakening of -fiac, if we posit an accent on the that

the

in

in one form and on the person-ending in the other. Such an assumption obviously does not help with riOe/xev

root

TiOiixeda,

nor with Xixa

of the variation,

;

but

if it

accounts for part

to suggest a tentative interIf such be the origin of the two forms,

pretation of the facts. in the active

point the agent.

\vofiai

we have enough

we might assume a :

We may

difference of emphasis as the startingthe action was stressed, in the middle illustrate this

by the

different

emphasis

we hear which

in the reading of the sentence in the Anglican liturgy One reminds the penitent of the Divine forgiveness. "

He pardoneth," wishing to lay all stress on " Hq pardoneth" the pardon the one Source of pardon, another could easily itself being the uppermost thought with him. the former represented by d^ieTat and the latter reader

says

We

suppose

by

d(f)ir]cn

in a language

in

which

stress accent is free to

alter the weight of syllables as it shifts 1

See below, p. 238. 152

from one

to another.^


THE VERB: VOICE. „. , ,, The Middle „,

m .

Sanskrit

15S

Out

of these postulated conditions, which ^i , course the merest conjecture, we could readily derive the nuance which meets us in »

.

,

^^® °

,

,

the earliest accessible developments of Indo-Germanic speech.

The Indian grammarians acutely named the active parasmai" " pada and the middle dtmane-pada, a word for another and " " " for oneself respectively. Thus ^('(jate would be he sacrifices dtmane is present in " the context, is he sacrifices for another." The essence of the middle therefore lies in its calling attention to the agent as for himself," while ydjati, unless the dat.

some way

in

closely concerned with the action. characteristic is ultimately found

The same in other

languages. In Latin the middle has been somewhat obscured formally by the entrance of the r suffix, which it shares with its most intimate relative, the Keltic branch.

But

has not caused any confusion with the active

this

;

so that

the Latin, Greek, and Sanskrit middle voice may be put together, the differentia of Latin being that it has made no reserve like the Greek aorist and future middle, in lending its middle

forms

the

to

meaning conveyed by the middle, we naturally start with the verbs which are found in active middle only, to both of which classes the unsatisfactory

,

only or

"

"

name

In our inquiry into the

invading passive.

should be given, deponent Typical words not used in the middle,

are the originals of our verbs

(simplex) and pew

SiScofjui

veoybai,

eiro^ai

(

Kd9i]^ai, Kelixai}

=

;

eat,

retained for either.

if

in the parent language,

come, am,

and the Greek

while no active can be traced for

sequor),

fiaivofiai,,

The former

class

fnjrLOfxat

(

will be seen

=

metior),

to denote

"

"

as likewise do the an action, an occurrence, or a state " latter, but prevailingly such as take place in the sphere of their subject, the whole subject being concerned in the action." ;

Where

the distinction

is

so fine,

it

is

easily seen that

many

which we can no longer detect it, and are in Our investigation must take of over-refining if we try. danger account of the rather extensive categories in which one part cases

must

of the

^

arise in

verb aflects the middle and another the active form.

I qTiote

from Brugmaun, Knrze

vergl.

his account throughout this paragraph.

Gramm.

% 799,

We

and mainly follow


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

154

have a number

of cases in

attaches

in

which the

"

"

strong

perfect active

the

to

middle, either figuring meaning the of a verb which has no other among parts r^^^i^Q forms, or siding with the intransitive

itself

Intransitive

middle where the rest tive. So conspicuous is

Perfects

of the active is transi-

that the

this,

grammars

which we learnt Greek thirty years ago actually gave " " rervrra the product, by the way, of an inventive imagination as the perfect middle of that highly irregular and defective verb which in those days was our model regular.^ As exx. of this attachment we may cite jejova from jLvofiai and iXijXvda from ep'^^o/xai," with ai^ewya, kardvat, uTroXcoXa, crean^ira, and iretroiOa as intransitive perfects from transitive verbs. Among the few remaining strong perfects occurring in

NT, we note

aKrjKoa, KeKpa'ya^ ireTrovOa, reT{e)v^a, and from verbs with a future middle. We have the defectives otSa, eoiKa, and etwOa and the two isolated actives evy]vo^a and jeypa(f)a remain the only real exceptions to the rule wliich finds some link with the middle in each of the The relatively few survivors of the primitive perfect active. list might perhaps be slightly extended from other vernacular Greek thus djijo^^a (uyeio'^a, dye(o^a) is found freely in The conjecture papyri, and belongs to a purely active verb. that the perfect originally had no distinction of active and

in the

elX'r)(^a,

as

;

:

middle, its person-endings being peculiar throughout, affords the most probable explanation of the facts when the much :

later -Ka perfect arose, the distinction

Future Middle

.

,

^i

V.

p

universal.

much more

Parallel with this peculiarity, but

,,.

• -,

n

i-

i.

the category or middle lutures attached to active verbs. As an abnormality extensive,

in Active sense for

had become

is

which no reason could be detected, it naturally began to from levelling in Hellenistic, but is still prominent. We

suffer

have

in

^ofiai,

^

aKovcrco as well as uKovaofjuai,

Kpd^w beside KeKpd-

d'7ravr7]crco, Slco^co,

In this the grammars followed ancient authority

"

says,

NT

yeXdaa), e/XTTTvaco,

fxeaoTijs 8e

ij

:

pevaw,

crTrovSdcro),

thus Dionysius Thrax

TTOTS /xev ivepyeiav iroTe de irdOos rrapiffTuiaa,

olov wiwoida.^

Su(f>0opa, € TTOir] a a /j,T]v, iypa'il/dfiriv.''

Tlie aorist fjXdov

is

really

due to the influence of a third constituent root

this defective verb. ^

KeKpa^ofiaL

is

only formally passive.

in


THE VERB: VOICE. '^(opyjaco, efiirat^Q),

the selected

list of

155

—

all these from upirdao), Kkey^w, dfiapTi'](T(o such verbs in Rutherford's small raammar

which supplies only about as many exx. of the (Some of these active futures, indeed, have warrant in classical Greek of other dialects than Attic, even from the Homeric period but the of Attic Greek,

preservation of the old future middle.

;

the weakening of this anomaly.)

list will sufficiently illustrate

In spite

of

this,

we

'yvMcro/xat,,

(f)d'yofxai,

\7']/u,ylro/jLai,

Trio/jiai,,

to

enough obsolete.

still

find

aTrodavovfiai, Treaovfiai,

NT

in

o-^ojxat,

-(Syjaofiai,

and

Ko/xiovfiai,

(j)â‚Źv^o/xai.,

which are

KOfilao/jiac

re^Ofxai,

show that the phenomenon was anything but Eutherford classes most of them as " verbs which "

denote the exercise of the bodily functions or " intellectual " and he would suggest that " the or emotional activity ;

notion of willing implied in the future tense" reason of the peculiarity. Brugmann connects

may it

be the

with the

This tendency of the strong aorist to be intransitive. would naturally prompt the transitive use of the sigmatic aorist

and consequently the

attaches

itself to

future, so that the middle future

the active intransitive forms.

only invoked for cases like exclude Eutherford's suggestion. tion

is

^yjao/jbac,

We

may

The explanaand does not

fairly

take the

existence of this large class of futures as additional evidence of a close connexion between the middle flexion and the stressing of the agent's interest in the action of the verb. What has been said of the history of Use of the Middle prepares us for the statement the how Middle :

far is it

that this voice

reflexive.

As

flexive.

a

^j empiric matter of

quite inaccurately described grammarians as essentially reis

fact,

the

proportion of strictly

NT we may

In reflexive middles is exceedingly small. clearest as the example, diTi'i'y^aTo (Mt 27^)

cite

and a survival

from classical Greek. But even here one may question whether the English intransitive choke is not a truer parallel It is curious that in than the reflexive hang oneself. Winer's scanty list of exx. (WM 316), presumably selected as the most plausible, we have to discount all the rest. Aovoiiai accompanies its correlate vi'TTTOfiai and its one decisively middle form (5? Xovaafievrj, 2 Pet 2-"^) would raise diffi;

culties

if

it

occurred in a better Hellenist.

Certainly,

if

the


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

156

pig's ablutions are really reflexive rather

than passive, sundry

To our author at any rate current notions need revising. In citing not did XovarafxevT) suggest willing co-operation.^ eKpv^r) is not KpvTTTOfMai, (Jn 8^^), bonus dormitat Homerus middle in form, nor does the verb show any distinct middle In irapacrKeudaeTat (1 Co 14^) the intransitive in NT. make preparations, gives a better sense than the •prepare, :

We

such

an

example as fih contemporary But though no doubt papyrus OP 295, fxr] tr/cXuXXe eaTtjv. a reflexive meaning ultimately accrued to the Middle, and in MGr almost drives other uses off the field, it would reflexive.

might

bring

in

Lk 7^ compared with

(TKvXKov

the illiterate

If the be wrong to suppose that it was originally there. middle indicates that the action is transitive, the

active

agent himself, a sense which the concentration on the agent naturally Thus vi'jrTOfiat is " I wash," characteristic of the middle. with or without object, but implying that the action stops

goes

no

than

further

comes

with myself. myself

there

if

the

of

then there

If

" :

out

is,

is

no

vinnofiai

object, viVTo/j-ai " I ra? %et/3a'?

=

="

1 wash wash my

This characteristic produced a passive use of the middle, in Brugmann's opinion, before the dialectic differentiation of Indo-

^^^^^^s."

Bearinff of the

Passive upon Theory of Miadle.

use is a Germanic speech. Intransitive of the idea from the fundamental development middle and from intransitive to passive is but a step. The well-known classical use of airodv^a-Kei, viro tlvo'^, as natural

;

correlative

a'KOKTelvei

to

rt?,

illustrates

the

development.

us strange that the same form should be used indifferently as active or passive in meaning that, for example, ivepyov/uuevr} in Jas 5^^ should be translated It

may seem "

"

working to decide. ^

to

" ^ with only the context (EV) or inwrought," Our own coincident transitive and intransitive,

The rhythmical conchision

of the proverb suggests that it originated in from comedy. Was 2 Pet citing from memory a verse the If so, the original would of course metrical nature of which he did not realise ? not admit \ov(rafiivri it would run \e\ovfiivy} 5'6s ei's KvXia/j.bi' ^op^bpov, or \ovde1<r

an iambic

line

ixTrat. Cs,

2

See

or the like.

Mayor in

But see below, p. 238. and J. A. Robinson, Exih.

loc,

favoured the second rendering. marginal place, is hard to divine

:

it

247.

W.

F.

Moulton strongly

the Revisers did not give was there in their first revision.

Why

it

even a


THE VERB: however,

is

almost equally capable of producing ambiguity, it were not for the studied avoidance of

would be if ambiguity which or

157

VOICE.

"

is

He who

necessarily characteristic of an analytic " hides can find," He who hides is safe,"

language. exhibit the same form both as transitive and intransitive

;

and it would be easy to devise a context in which the second would become really ambiguous. From what has been said, it is clear that The Middle the most practical equivalent of the Middle paraphrased by Reflexive will generally be the active with the dative in Dative case,

^f ^|^g reflexive pronoun. This is in fact the nearest approach to a general statement which we can formulate, premising of course that it is rough in itself,

In Trpoa-e'xeTe and an exaggeration of the differentia. eavToU (Lk 12^), "pay attention for yourselves," we have a " be on your phrase differing little from (pvXdaaeade (v.^^), Mk 14*'^ oTraa-dguard," being only rather more emphatic. /xd'^atpav is paraphrased by Mt (26^^) direaTraoev here, as in Ac 14^^ where 8tapp)]^avT€<; ra ifxaTia

IJLevo<i Ti-jv

T.

/JL.

avTov

:

more idiomatic

eavTMv

replaces

we

the possessive gen.

the

ra

Ziapprj^dixevot,

i,

expressing the same shade of Sometimes we find redundance, as when in Jn 1 9-* meaning. eavTOL<i stands against the unaccompanied Bie/xeplaavTo see

.

Midges myself,"

A few verb in the same quotation Mt 27^^ of the general principle typical illustrations " I call to may be added. IIpoaKdXov/LLai,

is

.

.

clear

" :

its

opposite aTrcodov/xai,

from myself," is not really different, since would show a legitimate dativus commodi.

thrust

I

diroidoi

We

away

epLavTw

have in fact

vary the exact relation of the reflexive perpetually if we are to represent the middle in the form appropriate to the particular example. Hvve^ovXevaavro Mt 26* answers to

"

o-vve/SovXevaav kavroh, they counselled " here we have the redi^rocal one another to

.

'

:

"

they picked middle, as in pidyeaQai} 'E^eXeyovro Lk 14'^ " " cf the distinction chose out for themselves," and so :

this

Cf the closeness of dWr/Xovs and middle in Indoc/. Forsch. v. 114.

may

comfort one another

1

"

Brugnianu has some notes on

eavrovs.

Cf

MGr

(Abbott 228, distich

va

56).

irapiTYopridov/j.€,

"that we


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

158 of

alpa)

and

alpov/juai.

UeiOeiv

is

"

to

exercise

suasion

" :

keeps the action within the sphere of the " to admit suasion to oneself." agent, and consequently means " " I make XpMfiai, from the old noun %/3>7 necessity," is

in the middle

it

"

hence the myself what is necessary with something Less instrumental, as with the similar middle utor in Latin. for

"

"

easy to define are the cases of dynamic middle, where the middle endings only emphasised the part taken by the subject in the action of the verb, thus vij^fo and v^^o/xai (not NT) " to swim." .

'

The category

will include a

number

of

verbs in which

it

is

useless to exercise our ingenuity on interpreting the middle, for the stage.

development never progressed beyond the rudimentary We need not stay to detail here the cases where the

middle introduces a wholly new meaning. On the point of principle, it should however be noted that mental as opposed TUT

1

A

+•

physical applications of the idea of the verb will often be mtroduced this way, ^^

m

since mental action

is

especially confined within the sphere of "

the agent. Thus KaTaXa/jb^dvo) seize, overtake" (Jn 1^ 12^''), " in the middle denotes mental comprehending," as Ac 4^^. " On the whole the conclusion arrived at Hellenistic ivElddle

^^^^^^

^^

^-^^^

^j^^

-^rj^ ^^^^^gj^g

^^g^g

perfectly

capable of preserving the distinction between the active and middle." Such is the authori-

which makes it superfluous Differences between Attic and for us to labour any proof. in are details Hellenistic use naturally found, and the unfor middle or middle for of active classical substitutions the Abbe Viteau for proof numerous to serve as active are so As Hebraism on a scale. Thumb remarks (Hellenof large an a into Hatzidakis's mere ismus 127), Einleitung glance list of from Viteau's the absence which indispensable classic, would have of works consulted accounts for a great deal him in Hellenistic Greeks that the shown by birth period were guilty of many innovations in the use of the voices The NT which could never have owed anything to Hebrew. exx. which Hatzidakis gives (pp. 195 ff.) are not at all inThe consistent with the dictum of Blass quoted above. all as not at of middle we have the seen, was, sharply sphere tative

summary

of Blass (p. 186),


THE VERB

:

159

VOICE,

delimited, and usage inevitably varied in different localities There are plenty of middles in Attic, and and authors. even in Homer, in which the rationale of the voice is very hard to define. Naturally such words may have dropped a no longer intelligible distinction, just as popular Latin did in such words as scqiLor and utor, while in other words the distinction may have been applied in a difWe can see why 'yaixelaOat, = nuhcre fell ferent manner. out of use in Hellenistic ^ even if a need was still felt for a separate word to suit the bride's part in a wedding, the appropriateness of the middle voice was not clear, and The accuracy with which the distinction was liable to lapse. the middle was used would naturally vary with the writers' Greek culture. Note for example how Mt and Lk correct :

the

Mk

10'^**. (legem ohservare) of their source in another incorrect have removed unless use, they for to be read there with B etc. (WHmg) is

i<j)vXa^djj,i]v

Mk

In

2^^

oSoTToielv

68ov

;

means

TToielv

"

construct a

road

"

(Gildersleeve Synt. In the instead.

and the middle should have been used

69),

educated papyrographers we find blunders of this kind considerably earlier than the time when the more subtle

less

meanings

we

of

As early as 95 B.C. and eav alprjade used side by side for " if 36), and in the preceding century hiaXvwfjiev

the middle disappeared.**

find iav alprjre

you like"

(GH

These are of appears in the sense of ScaXvoofieOa in LPc. course sporadic, but some violations of classical usage have almost become

This especially applies to the idiom-

fixed.

atic use of TTOLetadat

with a noun as substitute for a verb.

Here the middle sense was not clearly discernible to the plain man, and iroLeiv invades the province of the middle very largely.

BU BU

vrjfid

and TT.

We

still

have

ixveiav Troteladat (as in

632 (ii/A.D.), Kara^vyrfv iroietadai, TP 5 970 (ii/A.D.), etc. But the recurrent phrase (aov)

Mt

6^

Eph

(ii/i

1^^) B.C.),

to irpoaKv-

only once (Letronne 117) shows the middle; e\ei]pioavvT]v, Mk 15^ avfi^ovXtov it.," Lk 18''

iroiu) tt.

GKSiK'qaLv, etc., will

serve as specimens of a fairly large

of marriage contracts Speaking generally it survives in the legal language [째See p. 248. 496 (early ii/A.D.). Cf the modern jihrase av/x^ovXio yia va KapLovv "to consult," of physicians (Abbott 200). (On Troielf in such phrases, cf Robinson, Uj^h. 172.) 1

as

OP

:


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

160

which we cannot accuse the writers

of usages, in

class

of

ignorance, since the middle could only defend itself by pre-

So when a new phrase was developed, there might be hesitation between the voices awapau Xoyov appears in

scription.

:

Mt

BU

1823 25^^

OP 113

(i/A.D.),

775

(ii/A.D.),

(ii/A.D.),

is

but the middle, as in

more

classical in spirit.

FP 109 In places

however where an educated Hellenist like Paul markedly diverges from the normal, we need not hesitate on occasion to regard his variation as purposed: thus rjpfMoadfxijv 2 Co 11^ itself by the profound personal interest the in this spiritual irpo^vrjaTLKr']. took apostle This is not the place for discussing, or _ ., even cataloguing, all the verbs which vary from classical norm in respect of the middle

fairly justifies

,

voice

a

;

but there

little

is

longer.

because of the juxtaposition of the two in

claims attention

Jas

42'-,

Jn

1

one special case on which we must tarry distinction between anoi and ahoOfxai,

The

5^ Mk

grammarian Ammonius

622-25

iq^s-ss

(

^ Mt

The means to

2020-22).

declares that alTco (iv/A.D.)

ask simpliciter, with no thought of returning, while alrovfiai involves only request for a loan. This remark serves as an

example

of

the indifferent success of late writers in their

an extinct subtlety. Blass (p. 186) says that atTco in requests of was in used business transactions, alTovfxat a son from a father, a man from God, and others on the same lines. He calls the interchange in Jas and 1 Jn ll.cc. efforts to trace

"

"

arbitrary James could

Mayor ask

;

but

it is

commit

not easy to understand

in his note cites

/xed'

lKecrLa<;,

"

When it

If its

a writer like

would

be.

grammarians who made ahov/xat =

or fiera TrapaKXijaeco';, which certainly suits

the idea of the middle better than "

how

so purposeless a freak as this

Ammonius' unlucky guess. Mayor proceeds,

alTâ‚ŹCTâ‚Ź is thus opposed to alreicrde,"

implies using the words, without the spirit, of prayer." the middle is really the stronger word, we can understand being brought in just where an effect of contrast can be

secured, while in ordinary passages the active would carry as much weight as was needed. For the alternation of active in the Herodias story, Blass's ingenious remark " the daughter of Herodias, after the be that recalled, may king's declaration, stands in a kind of business relation to

and middle


THE VERB: VOICE. him"

(p.

186

n.),

161 middle cited

so that the differentia of the

above will hold.

Passive Aorists.

demarcation between Middle

of is

generally

drawn by the help

of the passive aorist, which is supposed to be criterion in verbs the voice of which is doubtful.

a soimd

however be pointed out no value. The

should

It

The line ^^^ Passive

criterion has little or

that "

historically this " aorist passive strong

nothing but a special active formation, as its which became passive by virtue of its preshow, endings in

-7)v

is

The

ference for intransitive force.

-Ot^v aorist

was

originally

to

according Wackernagel's practically certain conjecture, out of the old aorist middle, which in nonthematic formations ran like eBoixijv eSoro when e86di]<;

developed,

—

the thematic -ao displaced the older

form

was

e8607]<i

set

free

-61]^

—

:

(Skt.

-thds),

the

form a new tense on the which was no more necessarily to

analogy of the -rjv aorist, passive than the identic formation seen in Latin

Jic/hes,

hahct.

from %at/3(w (also )(alpoixai in MGr, by formal levelling),^ where the passive idea remained imperceptible even in NT times the formally passive eKpu/St], from Kpvirrco, in Jn 8^^ (cf Gen 3^*^) will serve as an ex. of a pure In Homer (cf intransitive aorist from a transitive verb.-

Compare

i^dpijv

:

Monro in use

HG

45) the -drjv aorist from the aorist middle

is ;

very often indistinguishable it is unsafe to suppose

and

that in later periods of the language the presence of an aorist " " -rjv is proof of a passive meaning in a deponent

in -Otjv or

Of course the -6t]v forms, with their derivative future, verb. were in the very large majority of cases passive but it may be questioned whether there was markedly more passivity in " the " feel of them than there was in the present or perfect formations. For example, from airoKpivo/xai,, " answer," we have aTreKpLvdjjbrjv in Attic Greek and predominantly in the papyri, while aTreKpldrjv greatly outnumbers it in the NT but the evidence noted above (p. 39) shows that the two forms were used concurrently in the Koivrj, and without ;

;

So Ac 3^ D cf Tiygaeus in Arist. Pax 291 (Blass). To match these specimens of formal passives with mifldle meaning, we may cite middles in passive sense. Thus BU 1053, 1055 (i/j;.c. to ev 6(piXrj Orja-ofjievov, "the amount that shall be charged as due." 1

:

^

)

II


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

162

the slightest difference of sense. W. F. Moidton was inclined " " a faint passive force ... in most of the instances to see

NT, though observing that

of earddr^v in

use as an intransitive aorist the

also

"

in

it

"

MGr (WM ^

in regular

is

315

that

in

He

n.).

Th

4^* iKoifjLTjdrjv suggested possibility " be a true was to which might passive, put sleep," gives a A beautiful sense. middle use of strikingly Koi/xrjdrivat, purely "fell

patent in such phrases as

is

asleep,"

yfjbeWov

KocfjbT]6r]vat

Koifidv however,

eypayfra eina-ToXia

clear passive "

may

he folded,"

Ch P

3

classical

We may also

riviKa

The active

/? (iii/B.c).

though apparently dormant in

LXX, as Gen 24^1. in FP 110 tm (I/a.D.)

revives in the

1

prose,'-^

compare the

ra irpo^aTa eKel KoifxijOPji, It seems possible

as the edd. translate.

therefore to conceive the passive force existing side by side with the simple intransitive, as apparently happened in eVraOijv (see

note

^

below)

;

but

we cannot speak with

confidence.

Perhaps the matter is best summed up ^^^^ ^^速 remark that the two voices were not

Ground

differentiated with

anything like the same

sharpness as is inevitable in analytic formations such as we use in English. have seen how the bulk of the forms

We

were indifferently middle or passive, and how even those which were appropriated to one voice or the other are

Common ground between perpetually crossing the frontier. them is to be observed in the category for which we use the translation

35

(ii/B.c.)

a middle

;

submit to," " let oneself be," etc. Thus in Tb P eavTov alrida-eTat, "will get himself accused," is but in 1 Co 6^ dZiKeiaOe and diroa-repelaOe are "

described as passives by Blass, who says that " to let in the " sense of occasioning some result is expressed by the middle The dividing line is a fine one at best. 'Atto(p. 185). '

'

rypd-yjraaOai

in

Lk

the present in

^

2^

vv.^-

^,

might seem

'EcTTadriKa is used as aor. to ctt^kw

(Thumb Handh.

to

determine the voice of

but Blass finds a passive in "stand," and

iaT-qd-rjKo.

v.^

to arrivw

Is

"place"

92).

^

Cf iropeveiv and (po^eTv, which have entirely given up their active we should hardly care to call TropevOiivai and <po[ii)Orivai passive. In MGr we have some exx. of the opposite tendency, as Sat/xoJ'/j'w "drive mad" (Abbott 224, :

no. 47)

:

dakis 198

in older f.

Greek this verb

is

purely middle.

See other exx, in Hatzi-


there adequate

THE VERB: VOICE.

163

evidence for separating

them ? Formally and so are ^diTTLaa;

Gal

aTToKoylrovrat,

5^^

(Dt 23^),

is

middle,'

and a-TToXovaai, Ac 22^^ (cf 1 Co e^i lO^); but if the tense were present or perfect, could we decide ? The verb inrordaaw with a rather

us

furnishes

What

question. Is it passive

—

"

is

"

be subjected

things to

subject all

application of this virora'-p'](TeTai in 1 Co 15^^?

important

the voice of

him"?

hy as well as

Or

is it

"

middle

to

him that did

—"be

subject"?

"

Findlay pass, in

{EGT in loc.) calls it middle in force, like the 2nd aor. Rom 10^, in consistency with the initiative ascribed to

I incline to this, but without accepting Christ throughout." " the reflexive subject himself," which accentuates the difference between the identical viroTwyrj and vTrorayi'jaeTac the ;

"

"

be subject explains both, and the context must In Eom 10^ the RV renders "did decide the interpretation. neutral

not subject themselves," despite the passive; and the reflexive an accurate interpretation, as in vTrordaaeade Col 3^^.

is

itself whether we are at liberty to press the passive force of the aorist and future and perfect of eyelpci), when applied to the Resurrection of Christ.

The question next presents

A

glance at the concordance will show how often rj'yepdr^v etc. are merely intransitive and we can hardly doubt that 'ijyepdrj, ;

Mk

But if np (cf Delitzsch). the context (as in 1 Co 15) strongly emphasises the action of It is in fact God, the passive becomes the right translation.

in

more

16^ and the

for

between

like, translated

the exegete

rose

unambiguous

and was :

one

than for the grammarian to decide even if the tense is apparently

raised,

may

speaker of Greek really

confess to a grave doubt whether the felt the distinction.^

similarly treated with reference to its voice, whether we The various arguments in favour of margin of RV. the margin, to which the citation of Dt I.e. commits us above, are now reinforced by Ramsay's advocacy, Exjws. for Nov. 1905, pp. 358 ff. He takes the wish ^

The verb must be

translate with text or

rather more seriously than I have done {infr. 201) r but I should be quite ready See also Findlay in loc. to go with Mr G. Jackson, in the same Expos., p. 373. {Ex2).

B

On

328

f.).

made to Wellh. 25 f., for exx. showing was largely replaced by other locutions in Aramaic (osjipcia'ly the impersonal plural, p. 58 f. above), and consequently in Synoptic translations. ^

how

the Passive, reference should be

this voice


CHAPTER

VIII.

The Vekb: The Moods. The Moods which wc have

to discuss will be

Imperative, Subjunctive, and Optative, and those uses of the Indicative which make it ^^^ÂŽ

in general "

modus irrcalis." In this preliminary chapter we shall aim at evaluating the primary meanings of the Moods, a

leaving

to

fication

of

The moods

the systematic their in

grammar the exhaustive especially in dependent are characterised by a

uses,

question

subjective element, representing the part of the speaker. It

an

attitude

of

classi-

clauses.

common mind on

is not possible for us to determine with any certainty the primitive root-idea of each mood. The Imperative is tolerably clear it represented

command

—

:

prohibition was not originally associated with it, and in Greek only partially elbowed its way in, to be elbowed

out again in the latest developments of the language. The Subjunctive cannot be thus simply summarised, for the only certain predication we can make of its uses is that they all

We

concern future time.

shall see that its force can mostly

be represented by shall or will, in one of their various senses. Whether the Subjunctive can be morphologically traced to a

A

single origin is very problematic. possible unification, on the basis of a common mood-sign -a-, was conjectured by the

writer some years ago Giles,

Manual^ 460

n.).

{AJP

285

x.

f.

:

see the

summary

in

It is at least a curious coincidence

that the mood-sign thus obtained for the Subjunctive should functionally resemble the -yc- under which the Optative can

confessedly

be unified.

We

are

dealing

with

prehistoric

developments, and it is therefore futile to speculate whether it would be more than a coincidence, should these two closely allied moods prove to have been formed by suffixes which 164


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

165

make noims

of nearly identical function. However clearly the Optative may be rednced to a single formation, it gives us nevertheless no hope of assigning its meanings to a

root-idea

Optative and

:

Potential,

may and might

in

single their

various uses, defy all efforts to reduce them to a In unity. this book the discussion of the Potential might almost be

drawn on the

lines of the famous chapter on snakes in Iceland, but for literary survivals in the Lucan writings. (See pp. 1 9 7 K) No language but Greek has preserved both Subjunctive and

Optative

separate and living elements in speech, and Greek took care to abolish this singularity in a

as

Hellenistic

ought to be added, before we pass that in a historical account of the Moods a fourth, the Injunctive, has to be interpolated, to explain certain phenomena which disturb the development fairly

from

drastic way.

It

this general introduction,

and perhaps was Injunctive simply an

of the others,

without the augment.

Indicative as well. or

imperfect

aorist

The

indicative

Avov, Xveade, 'kvaaaOe,

\ii6rjT6, \vere, will suffice as specimens, enough to illustrate largely it contributed to the formation of the Imperative.

Xvaare and

how

of the

<xp^;e?

Syntactically it represented the bare combination of verbal idea with the ending which supplies the subject and its prevailing use was for prohibitions, if we may judge from ;

Sanskrit,

where

remains to some extent

it still

alive.

The

fact that this primitive mood thus occupies ground appropriate to the Subjunctive, while it supplies the Imperative ulti-

mately with nearly all nearness of the moods. prohibition, even in the

common ground Particles affect-

is

forms, illustrates the syntactical Since the Optative also can express

its

NT (Mk

11^^),

we

see

how much

shared by all the subjective moods. Before taking the Moods in detail, we

^^^^^^

^^^^^

^

ll^-^^jg

^^.gj,

^^le

consideration

'

ij^^

of

which their constructions, av and firj.

two

affect

important

particles

vitally

The

a very marked peculiarity of Greek. It is a kind of leaven in a Greek sentence itself untranslatable,

former of these

is

:

transform the meaning of a clause in which it is inserted. In Homer we find it side by side with another it

may

/cei/ or Ke (probably be somewhat weaker in force

particle,

:

Aeolic), which appears to the later dialects generally


166

A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

select

one

or

other for

the

exchisive

The general

use.

not

meaning very easily laid down. Under the circumstances," " in that case," " anyhow," may The idiomatic use of " just," common express it pretty well.^ in Scotland, approximates to av (Kev) very fairly when used of

definition

its

is

"

in apodosis

:

"

iyoo Be Kev avTO'i

eXw^ai,

I'll jist

tak her mysel'."

had become stereotyped by the time we (See p. 239.) reach Hellenistic Greek, and we need not therefore trace its It

earlier

development.

Two

originally connected

usages are

now

In one, av stands with optative sharply distinguished. or indicative, and imparts to the verb a contingent meaning, depending on an if clause, expressed or understood, in the context.

In the other, the av

—

(in the

NT

period more often

see pp. 42 f., 56) has formed a close contact with a conjunction or a relative, to which it generally imparts the meaning -soever of course this exaggerates the differentia in

written edv

:

most

cases.

Here the subjunctive, invariable

in Attic, does

not always appear in the less cultured Hellenistic writers. How greatly this use preponderates in the NT will best be shown by a table ^ :

—

"Av (idv) with subj. (or indie.)

"Av conditional, with verb.


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

167

would The disproportion between these totals 172 and 51 We be immensely increased if idv (if) and otuv were added. shall see later (pp. 198 and 200) that the conditional av is The other use, though extremely abundant rapidly decaying. in our period, falls

away rapidly long

before the papyri

fail

and even within the NT we notice some writers who This prepares us for never show it, or only very seldom. us

;

the ultimate disappearance of the particle except in composi^ a-dv as or ^ahen, from ta? tion (MGr civ if, from the old 3,v

av

;

see below

;

and kuv

even,

used like the

NT kciv — kuI,

not

affecting construction). proceed to mention a

We NT use

the

few miscellaneous points in There are three places in which the old Ac 2*^ and iterative force seems to survive .„^ „ ^ i^9 and 1 r^ uo 114-^^ KauoTi av Tt<? 'x^peiav et')(ev,

of av.

:

ItSratilVS

etc.

,

"

av

I

ji

-\

-\

"

As you would be

led (from day to day) translates the last by an English iterative construction which Goodwin coincides with the conditional, as in Greek ft)9

rjiyeaOe.^

MT

:

§

pleads for a historical connexion of these two uses of The aorist no longer appears in this construction as in

249

dv.

Then we should note the classical Greek. appearance of cIj? av in constructions which Eom 15^* is foreshadow the MGr idiom just mentioned.^ an interesting case, because of the present subjunctive that " " follows when I am on my way (durative) transfers into In the subjunctive the familiar use of present for future. :

Co 11^* it has the easier aorist, "whenever I shall have In 2 Co 10^, however, it arrived," and so in Phil 2^^. " ^ has gone further, and takes adv MGr means as it were." The weakening for when. word an indicative as the ordinary of the connexion between compounds of dv and the sub1

junctive ^

On

2

Winer

is

seen in

the appearance of

the indicative with

NT

and idv

see above, p. 43 n. {if) in di> 384) would make all these iiarallel with the use of 6irov I deal with the question below. d^'' and the like. indie, in 3 For vernacular evidence see Par P 26 (ii/B.c— with gen. abs.), 46 (ii/B.c 'dv

(p.

Mk

BM 20 (ii/B.c.) crwera^as ws cLu ds with aor. subj.) the Rosetta Stone) ws Av (xvveaTijKvias, etc. (ii/B.c.

*

12*.

;

.

.

M^fM(piv

OGIS

;

c.

90-^

.

Both the exx. of &v c. partic. quoted by Winer (p. 378) are ws S.v add 2 Mac I have noted one ex. of genuine Hv c. pte. in a Koij'?; inscr., IMA iii. 174

(A.D. 5) 8iKai6Tepov

:

B.V

aiodevra.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

168

orav and edv

(if),

infrequently in

and other words

of

So not

the kind.

as 3'^ otuv idewpovv, 11-^ orav aT7]K6Te, 11^^ orav eyevero add Rev 4^ otuv Bcoaouaiv,

Mk,

:

,,

"

oTav ypot^ev. Parallel with these are OTTOV av elaeTTopeveTO and oaoi civ 6^*^ 14^ oirov av vrrdyei (where however we are ^^

indie

7]-\lravTo,

Mk

Rev

to spell vTrdyy if we like). Since these are in the least cultured of writers, and include presents and

entirely free

NT

futures as well as past tenses, we should hardly class them with the cases of iterative dv just given from well-educated writers such as kinship.

Luke and

dv added

If

Paul, though there is an obvious the force of a relative or con-

-ever to

junction, there seemed no reason to forbid its use with a past The papyri yield tense where that meaning was wanted.

only a small number of parallels, showing that in general Thus BU 607 (ii/A.D.) the grammatical tradition held. oirorav

Par

PP 126

dvatpovvrai,

P 26

orav

(ii/B.C.)

(iv/A.D.)

Kar

e^iiixev

= merely ivheri), BU 424 (ii/iii A.D.) = when), BM 331 (ii/A.D.) oaa idv

(

oV

dv

Trda-^^ere,

to

lepov

eirdv i7rvd6/j.r]v

(also

7rap6Xa/36/M7)v.

The

dp'^d<i

et?

tendency to drop the distinction of lohc^i and whenever"' may be connected with the fact that oiroTe is freely used for ^ohe7i 'Edv with indicaso the later uncials in Lk 6^. in papyri

tive is

found in

1

Th

3^ ar/jKere, 1

Jn

5^^ othafiev, to

mention

only two cases in which indie, and subj. are not formally Winer quotes even edv yada, from Job identical in sound.

22^ (y<iA.), and similar atrocities (as the Atticist would count We may add a selection them) from the Byzantine writers. 62 Par P 1 8 idv fia-)(^ovaiv fjuer eaov. from papyri (ii/B.c.) Tb P 58 (ii/B.C.) edv Bet BU 546 edvirep eKirXypooaovaLv. OP 237 (ii/A.D.) idv 8' daiv. AP 93 (Byz.) idv olBev. There are several exx. of idv rjv, but in idv (^aiverai. (ii/A.D.) :

some cases

it

phenomenon I

for this curious recurrent certainly stands for r] xv. see notes in CB 38, 436, and above, p. 49 :

cannot therefore quote with certainty.

The same lesson 't

ounds

which

still

(See further

239.)

p.

is

taught by conjunctions take the subjunctive, though dv has It does

not seem to

make any difference whether eiw? or ew? dv is Thus PP 13 so with many other compounds.

written, and

been allowed to

fall out.

"»Seep. 21S.

(Ptol.)

oaa


THE VERB: THE MOODS

CPE

169

24, 25

ov fj ^povov, 237 (ii/A.D.) e</>' Tb P 6 GH 38 7rpoaTeKi]Tai, (ii/B.C.) eo)? fievcoai, e&)9 KUTa/Sfj'i, OP 34 SiSorw (i/B.C.) irplu avToj (ii/A.D.) /i?;Te The prevalence of this omission in iTria-TeWTjrai, etc., etc. 6(f)ei\o)(Ttv Tiue9,

oaa avTcZ

,

the papyri with fiexpi ov, eco?,

Mk

cf

With 226)

1432, 2 TTplv

where

(?/),

it is

conjunctions

.

imtil

{axp^, H-^XP^' paralleled in the 371. 138, etc.— see the list in

rod, etc.),

irpiv, irpo

Pet

meaning

.

V\ Lk

NT

is

:

WM

however, the av occurs in the only place (Lk used with subjunctive.^

Co 7^ fjih aTroarepeiTe a\X?jXoi;?, * r -A av [om. B, probably to ease a difficulty] Sk avfi^aivov irpo'i Kaipbv, we have a curious combination which seems to be matched in the papyri.2 So BU 326 el Ti eav and et Tt eav piera Tavra avQponTivov 'na\6ri\ (ii/A.D.) ^,

El

In

,

M.11TI

av.

>

€1

1

'

1

/j,i]Tc

"

"

if I should leave a codicil the 'ye^papbpeva KaTokiTro), latter phrase is repeated subsequently without edv in this :

rather illiterate

PP 130

Tc

el

(Iv/a.d.)

OP 105

will.

(iii/A.D.) civ

el

Tii/09

(ii/A.D.)

et tl

dWo

BM

233

These documents

dva\war)(;.

dira^aTrXo)';

alav (e>%w,

^oi earip.

i]hv xP^O'

are too illiterate for illustrating Paul some early scribe is more likely to be responsible than the apostle. Note that Origen quotes edv p^Tjri. This explanation (Deissmann's) seems :

on the whole preferable to the alternative cited from Buttmann 380 n. Winer's editor himself compared the dv to that in kciv and w? av which does not affect construction cf Tb P 28 el kuv Svvarat. (ii/B.C.) More important still in its influence on

WM

in

:

,

the moods

the subjective negative

is

/x?},

the

between which and the objective ne (replaced in Greek by ov) goes back to the period of Indo-Geraianic unity, and survives into the Greek of the present day. The history of p,r] has been one of continuous aggression. It started in distinction

principal clauses, to express prohibition.

As

early as

Homer

^ Lnke once uses it with sul>j. and once with opt., both times correctly with a negative clause preceding (Lk I.e., Ac 25^"). The papjyrus writers are not so Elsewhere in the infin. construction is found. particular.

NT

^

See Deissmann

H-rjTL &i> is

Blass", p. 321,

fire,

He

201 n.

a kind of analysis of euu

The point

meaning unless

in

is

that

a given

quotes

ix-fjTL,

has not summarised

mann correctly. or

BS

BU

though

him S.v is

326, but will not allow that

this gives the

quite adequately,

added

to

el /jltitl

case, unless 2)erhaps.

meaning

understand Deissmight be to 6irov

if I

as

tl

coiTectly.

it

See further

p. 239.


A GRAMMAE OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

170

had established itself uses, to which we have

iu a large to appeal

firi

the true nature of the

and complex variety

of

when we seek to know modal constructions as we come to

Since every Greek grammar gives the ordinary rules distinguishing the uses of ov and /iry, we need not examine

them.

them here in will come up

their historical relationship what must be said best as we deal with the moods seriatim. But :

the broad differences between Hellenistic and earlier Greek in this

moods as a whole, must therefore sketch

respect raise questions affecting the

and especially the verb

We

infinite.

the subject briefly here.

The

,

KoLvrj

difference

of

the

NT

between ov and jjut) in the becomes a very simple

we

accept the rule which Blass lays down (p. 253). " All instances," he says, " may practically be brought under the single rule, that ov negatives the indicative, fit] the other

matter

if

moods, including the infinitive and participle."

In review-

Thumb makes

the important addition that in ing Blass, MGr hev (from ovBev, which stepped into the place of ov, as we can easily understand from many of its adverbial uses in

NT)

junctive.

number

belongs to the indicative and /J't]{v) to the subclassical paper of Gildersleeve in the first

The of his

AJF

(1880), on encroachments of

in the later Greek, especially in

Lucian, makes

fi7]

upon ov

very clear standard was irrecoverable in Lucian's day even by the most scrupulous of Atticists cf the parallel case of the optative (below, p. 197). It is of course obvious it

that the Attic

:

that the ultimate goal has not been completely reached in times. Mt] has not been driven away from the indicative.

NT

Its use in questions is very distinct

from that

of

ov,^

and

is

254 n.) thinks that /x^rt in Jn 21^ " hardly lends itself to the " Bnt the tone of this word, introducing a certainly not I sni^pose.' We often hear "I hesitant question (as Jn 4^"), is not really inappropriate. suppose you haven't got ... on you, have you?" Moreover, the papyri show us that 7rpo(X(pa.yiov is not so broad a word as "something to eat." See my note, Expos. VI. viii. 437, to which I can now add OP 736 and 738 (cir. a.d. 1). Tlie they might well have apostles had left even iLpTOL behind them once (Mk 8") ^

Blass

(p.

'

meaning

:

It would normally be fish; cf Mk 6^^. "relish" on this occadon. (While speaking of Jn I.e., I should like to add that the address Waioia, "Lads!", may be paralleled in MGr, e.g. in the Kluiiht ballad, Abbott 42— iraiUa fxov and iraidia, to soldiers.) See further p. 239. left

the


THE VERB: THE MOODS. maintained in mains after et

NT c.

Greek without

indie,

iu

171

real weakening.

unfulfilled

conditions,

Mr;

re^

except in

Mk 1 421 (and Mt). But in simple conditions et ov is common. Luke has 6, Jn 3, Paul 16, Jas 2, and Mt, Heb, 2 Pet, and Eev one each. Against this total of 31, we have 4 exx. of in simple conditions with verb expressed, and three of firj these (1 Co 15^, 2 Co 13^, Gal 1^) are anything but normal ^ 1 Tim 6^ is more ordinary, according to classical standards. Blass adds el Se fir] olSwi from the agraphon in 1) at Lk 6^. el

:

El

firj

common

three times as

is

soon see that

NT

in

as el

ov,

but

we

restricted to three uses: (1) iu protasis of unreal conditions (2) meaning except, much like ifKi^v it is

;

;

Lk (3) with he, meaning otherivise, without verb expressed. 9^^ with a deliberative subjunctive following, is exceptional. Such being the facts, it is difficult to combat the assertion that el ov came to be the norm ^ though doubtless several of its exx. were correct according to classical standards, as in Eom 8^, where a single word is negatived rather than a A few survivals of fii] in relative sentences presentence. ;

serve literary construction so Ac 15^^ D, 1 Jn 4^ (unless we desert the extant MSS for patristic evidence and read \vei, and Blass) Tit l^^, 2 Pet 1^. with genuine ;

A

WHmg

of the old distinction is

example

identic phrases of

Jn

3^^

and

1

traceable in the otherwise

Jn

5^*^

:

the former states

the charge, q\iod non crediderit, the latter the simple fact, quod But it must be allowed that this is an isolated non credidit. case.^

We will leave to the next chapter the only other excep-

tion to Blass's canon, the limited use of ov with the participle. First among the Moods we take up the It is the simplest possible form "Aye the imperative of dyco, and aye the vocative of dyof, are both of them interjections formed the thematic vowel by isolating the root and adding no suffix e is now generally regarded as a part of the root rather than In our own language, where nouns and verbs have a suffix. T

.

Imperative. of the verb.

.^

—

in hosts of cases reunited through the disappearance of suffixes, we can represent this identity easily. " Murder ", in Eussia or

Armenia, might be either verb or noun 1

"

See below,

p. 239.

—

!

a general order to

See p. 240.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK,

172

soldiers charging a crowd, or the

The

interjection, as

for

2nd and 3rd

Skt. ajatCit,

(

we might

scream

of

one of the victims

expect, was iuditTerently used

person, as is still shown by the Latin agito, the ablative of a demonstrative pro-

= age + tod,

"

from this (moment)," added to make the command more How close is the kinship of the interjection peremptory). and the imperative, is well shown by the demonstrative noun,

adverb Sevpo,

mark

to

make

"

hither," it

mean

"

which only needs the exclamation " it even forms a plural

come here

:

We

Sevre in this sense.

shall recall this principle describe the use of the infinitive in commands.

There one Imperative. his action, it

variety ''

of

when we

being in Greek a considerable forms in which one man may

....

.

,

express to another a wish that is to control will be necessary to examine the tone of that

As we might is appropriated to this purpose. from our own the imperative has a very expect language, The context will determine how much decided tone about it. stress it is carrying this may vary from mere permission, as mood which

:

in

Mt

8^^ (cf eTrerpeyjrev in

the presumed source

Mk

5^^) or

A

Co 7^^

to the strongest command. imperative in the Attic Orators, by 1

careful study of the Prof. C. W. E. Miller

xiii. 399 ff.), brings out the essential qualities of the The grammarian Heras used in hortatory literature. of the imperative;^ be feature harshness to a asserted mogenes

{AJF mood

and the sophist Protagoras even blamed Homer for addressing the Muse at the beginning of the Iliad with an imperative.^ By a discriminating analysis of the conditions under which the orators use the imperative. Miller shows that it was most avoided in the proem, the part of the speech where conciliation of the audience's favour was most carefully studied and the criticism of Protagoras, which the ancients took more seriously than many moderns have done, is seen to be simply due to the rhetorician's applying to poetry a rule If a cursory and limited that was unchallenged in rhetoric. ;

observation

may

be

trusted,

had not changed in the age

the

ethos

of the

^

Zx7';^taTa de rpax^a, yudXtcrra

2

A2J. Aristotle Poetics ch. 19.

/.u'^

of

the

papyri.

tu TTpoaraKTiKa,.

imperative

Imperatives


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

173

are normal in royal edicts, in letters to inferiors, and among equals when the tone is urgent, or the writer indisposed to multiply words they are conspicuously few in petitions. :

When we come

to the NT, we find a very different state The prophet is not accustomed to conciliate his hearers with carefully softened commands and in the imperial edicts of Him who "taught with authority," and the ethical exhortations of men who spoke in His name, we find naturally a large proportion of imperatives. Moreof

things.

;

over, even in the language of prayer the imperative is at Gilderhome, and that in its more urgent form, the aorist.

sleeve observes (on Justin Martyr, p. 137), " As in the Lord's Prayer, so in the ancient Greek liturgies the aor. imper. is

almost exclusively used.

The language

prayer."

of

It is the true tense for

petition to

human

'

instant

superiors

'

is

irocr/aeiii, and various other periphrases the To God we whereby request may be made palatable. are bidden by our Lord's precept and example to present the claim of faith in the simplest, directest, most urgent form with which language supplies us. The distinction between present and enses aorist imperative has been drawn already, ^ , Imperative. Âť to some extent, the discussion of pro-

full of Zeojxai, Ka\w<i

m .

hibitions

for

;

.

,

though the subjunctive has to

.

lie

used in the

question that for this purpose the two moods hardly differ the reason for the ban on /xrj TTohjaov lies buried in the prehistoric stage of the language.

aorist, it

is

difficult

to

—

And whatever

the distinction may be, we must apply the same essential principles to commands and prohibitions, which were felt by the Greeks to be logically identical The only difference categories: see Miller op. cit. 416. will be that the meaning of firj 7roi7]crr]<; (above, pp. 122 ff.) comes from the future sense inherent in the subjunctive,

while in estimating the force of but the aorist idea to consider.

iroirjcrov

Tliis,

we have nothing we have often

as

In the repeated, lies in the "point action" involved. imperative therefore the conciseness of the aorist makes it a decidedly more sharp and urgent form than the present. The latter

action.

may

of course

There

is

show any

of the characteristics of linear

the iterative, as in

Lk IP,

the eonative.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

174 as in

Mk

Phil 2^^

do not try to stop him, as you are doing "). working out ") and of course the simple

9^^ ("

to

(" set

;

durative passim. Writers differ in their preferences between the tenses. Thus 1 Pet shows a marked liking for the aorist,

which he has 22 times in commands (2nd pers.), against 6 presents on the other hand Paul has 9 presents to 1 aorist (apart from LXX citations) in Gal, and 20 to 2 in In Mt 5-7 the presents (still 2nd pers.) are 19 to Phil. in corresponding parts of Lk 21 to 16. and In seven 24, do two use different the tenses, and passages only evangelists ;

in all of

them the accompanying

variation of phraseology

way which shows how delicately Mt 5^^ = Lk 6^", and the distinction of tenses was observed. Mt 6^^ = Lk 11^, we have dealt with. Mt 5^^ has continuous in Lk 6-^ a little more presents, following oTav c. aor. subj. stress on the ingressive element in these aorists makes the addition iv eKelvrj rfj rj/xepa suitable, and this carries with it In Lk 12^^ S09 is natural with iv rfj oSm: the aor. imper. Mt 5^^ has ta0i evvooiv, which is curious in view of Ta')(y. But since et/it has no aorist, it is not surprising that its cf Mk 5^^ Lk imperative is sometimes quasi-ingressive earw The punctiliar and the 19^'^, (Ac ter). phrase yvcoa-rov accounts for the difference in a

:

:

(npey\rov, turn, in

Mt

5^^

answers well to the linear Trdpexe,

The vivid phrase dycovi^ea-Oe hold out, offer, in Lk 6^^. elaeXdetv of Lk 13^* may well preserve more of the original In all these cases than the constative elaeXOaTe of Mt 7^^.

we may reasonably from Aramaic detail; but

the

varying translation not perhaps wholly fixed in original, see no trace of indifference to the force of see

effects

of

itself

we

The remaining example is in a quotation from which Mt 7'^^ preserves the LXX except in the verb

the tenses.

Ps

6速, in

air 0^(1) peiTe, d8iKla<;

:

while

here

it is

Lk

13^'^

enough

modifies the address to epydrai to say that the

meaning

of diro-

'Xwpelre imposes a quasi-ingressive sense even on the present. "We have so far discussed only commands

'im^trltivr

^^^ prohibitions in the 2nd person. Not much need be added as to the use of the

Here the veto on the aorist in prohibition is withwe need not stay to ask why. Thus in Mt 6^ firj ^^ , Kara/Sdrco firj yvdiTw, 24P' eTnaTpey^aTw, which fir] 3rd.

drawn

:

,

,


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

175

come under ordinary aorist categories. As in classical Greek, the 3rd person is naturally much less common than the 2nd. Though the 1st person is not

all

^0^'"^^^^^

"^for Fi^rsr

it is

it

here

:

a passage

Mk

14*^ iyeipeade aycofiev shows that fair to speak of three persons in the imperative like

logically

brought in under the Imperative,

^^^^ ^^ '^ÂŽ^^ ^o treat

^^

Person.

mood, since arywixev only differs from

iyeipeaOe in that the included with the of the command. That speaker objects this should affect the tone of the command is of course inevitable but indeed all three persons necessarily differ is

;

etJios they The closeness severally show. connexion between this volitive subjunctive 1st person

considerably in the of

and the regular imperative

is well seen in Sanskrit, where the Vedic subjunctive is obsolete in the epic period except for the 1st person, which stands in the grammars as an

ordinary part of the imperative like

(pepco/juev, <^epere,

^epovrwv

—

hhardvia, hharata, hharantu, In Hellenistic Greek

(Att.).

the imperative 1st person is beginning to be differentiated from other subjunctives by the addition of a^e?, a<^ere, a use which has recently appeared in a papyrus of the Koman period (OP 41.3, a^e? e7&) ainrjv dprjvija-Q)), and has become normal in MGr (a<? with 1st and 3rd subj. making

This

imperative).

why

not in

27^^

is

always recognised in Mt 7* = Lk 6*^ 15^^ one has never been able to

:

= Mk

Mk

To force on Mt a gratuitous deviation from seems a rather purposeless proceeding. Translating both passages " simply Let us see," the only difference we have left is in see.

the speakers, which

(Hawkins iva

US

rrip-qarj,^

56

is

ff.).

paralleled by several similar variations It is possible that Jn 12'^, a^e? avr^v

has the same construction in the 3rd person, to

be literally rendered like the rest by our auxiliary, " Let her keep it." The alternative is (So practically EV text.) let her keep it," which is favoured by Mk 14^. compared with the e^ca seen in OP 413, disWe shall courages our treating a^e? as a mere auxiliary.^ "

Let her alone

The

^

:

ace. aimqv,

TerriprjKev (a-text) IS a self-evident correction.

^

If we suppose the ri Kdwovs irapexere (diirative) to indicate tliat Judas and the rest were trying to stop Maiy, the " let her keep it" (rTjprjcrTj constative) ;


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

176

be seeing shortly that 'iva c. subj. is an imperative (tW = MGr va ''rrfj<;^ say !). The word had not yet by any et7r»79 means developed as far as our let, or its own MGr derivative

much more frequently takes the infiu. other parts of the verb take infin. 7 times NT) once ha c. and (Mk ll^*^). Our own word helps us subj. of auxiliary and independent coexistence the in estimating Note that

a?.

(8 times in

it

:

"

allow in our rendering of Mt 7* " " " " for let allow substitute but to the is me meaning, in a phrase like "let us go" would be impossible. M0e<f " " " a9 is the simple do let me go," while let as in is

verb in the same word

:

"

MGr

auxiliary.

The scanty Perfect

^-^^

rLQQ(\

active

the Perfect ImperaIn the very briefly.

relics of

detain us

never existed, except in verbs whose

it

we find KeKpayeToyaav In the passive it was in NT. no ex. but (Is 14^1), in 3rd common person (periphrastic form in plural), fairly that something just done or about "a command expressing " We have to be done shall be decisive and final (Goodwin). perfect liad the force

'^

of a

present

:

LXX

in

Lk

this in little

in

is,

Goodwin

more emphatic than the present or

fact,

Cf

The rare 2nd person

1 2^^.

the

Tre^/'yixcoo-o

4^^

with

:

(pifMwOijrt

"

it

a

shares,

3rd person.

noted for the

characteristic just

Mk

aorist

adds,

"

The epistolary

V^.

in papyri), does not eppwa-o in Ac 23^° (a-text), 15-^ (passim come in here, as the perfect has present meaning. are ready now to look at the other Substitutes for Command— we use the word as ^ Imperative , which supplement the Prohibition includmg :

We ^

,

.

.

,

.

,

,

We shall find that mood appropriated to this purpose. forms of command can be suppHed by all six moods of the verb acquiescing for the moment in a convenient misuse

of the (1)

Future

Indicative;

may

term

"

mood," to cover

^^ ^^^^ chapter _ _. .^ ^.

Indicative

is

the subjects

all

The Future

and the next. ,.

.

exceedingly

common m .

,,.

this sense.

That the be taken as forbidding interference with an act already begun. Tov ivracjuaa-p-ov was already come, is stated as much by tlie Trpoc'Xa^ei' of The action of v.^ is narrated completely (as it 14^ as liy tlie jilirasc in Jn.

7]fx€pa

Mk is

by Mk), 1

before the interruption is described. 100.

Thumb Randb.

'^

Goodwin

MT §

108.


THE VERB: THE MOODS. It

seems

to

come

to

it

by two roads, as

177

may

A

be seen by

the study of its negatives. command like ov cf^ovevaei^;, which can be seen in earlier Greek and becomes abundant in

'

the Hellenistic vernacular, is proved by its ov to be a purely Such a future may have the tone of absolute " in the colloquial (tv 6-^\rr], you will see to

futuristic form. indifference, as that,"

Mt

21 \

tone of one

who

Or it may show that the speaker takes the does not contemplate the bare possibility of Thus

Euripides Med. 1320 X'^^'P'' ^' ^^ never be able to touch me," shades " into you shall never touch me." Against Winer's remark (p. 397) that this form "was considered milder than the disobedience.

"

ylrav(Tei<i TroTe,

you

in

ivill

A emphatic denial. prediction may imply resistless power or cold indifference, We have also a compulsion or concession" {Sy7it. 116). rare form in which the negative firj proclaims a volitive future, in its origin identical with the ixtj Troojarj'i type already disimperative,"

we may

Demosthenes has 197 (i/A.D.), (jltj

cussed.

BU

e^earat

"

set Gildersleeve's

i^r]

^ovX/jcreade

a(/)7)o-69

BU

and ixtj show (iii/A.D.),

elSevai,

814

Blass adds sporadic existence in the vernacular Koivi']. from Clem. Horn. iii. 69.^* These fiTjSeva jxtarjaeTe passages its

help to demonstrate the reality of this rare form against Yet another volitive Gildersleeve's suspicions {Synt. 117).^ future

is

seen in the imperatival use of the future with ov in Ac 13^*^ ov iravar] Siaarpe(j)(ov Prediction and

a question

:

;

Command approximate in the NT use of pp. 187 ff.), which in Mt 15^, Lk l^^, Jn possibly elsewhere,

is

ov

most naturally classed

Next among these forms

of

firj

13^,

(see below,

Gal

43o,

and

as imperatival.

command comes

'

So we firj

the subjunctive, already largely dealt with. have had the 1st person, as Jn 14^^ d^wpucv, Gal 5^*^

rycvco/jieda.

The

future

and

the

imperative

between

them

carried off the old jussive use of the subjunctive in The old rule positive commands of 2nd and 3rd person. which in (" Anglicistic ") Latin made sileas ! an entirely grammatical retort discourteous to the Public Orator's sileam ? ^ To this class I should assign the use of Sttws c. fut. =imper., as in Plato 337b Sttcos /j.01 p.!) ipeh, don't tell me: Sttws is merely a conjunction, "in which case." Though common in colloquial Attic, it is ousted in Hellenistic by IVa note however BU 625 (ii/iii a.d.) 5ib oirus ivToKrjs. (Sec p. 240.) :

12

"See

p. 24S.


178

A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

—which —

the

iu

of

dialect

produced such phrases as

Elis "

let Nicodromus attend to €Tn/xe\etav irofqajai NcKoSpofjuop, " ^ has no place iu classical or later Greek, unless we admit

it

an ex. one line of Sophocles, much beloved of examiners.^ have dealt already with /xrj iroL^a-rj'i, the historical equiIn the 3rd person the subvalent of the Latin ne feccris.

as

We

junctive is little used: 1 Co 1Q^\ 2 Co ll^^, 2 Th 2^ are The tone of these clauses is less peremptory than that exx. of the imperative, as

may

of warning. future (as in Col 2^,

be seen from their closeness to the

Such

clauses

fi^

Heb

clauses,

with

subj.

rarely

3^^), which presumably makes the more somewhat instant are often reinforced by opa, warning It must not be supposed that the fiij ySXeVe, or the like. " " this introductory word, so clause historically depends on Even where that there is an ellipsis when it stands alone. the apparent governing verb is a real independent word and

not a mere auxiliary eXdrjre

et?

In Eev

IQ^** "

— —

e.g.

in

Treipaafiov real as it is in a phrase like

22^ we find "

Don't colloquial hibition and warning !

or

present

aorist

Mk

firj

Heb

subjunctive: is

between pro-

we may have

either

an

of the

12^^

is

ex.

to these sentences later.

Xva

takes the place of the classical

c.

subj. in

fell

we need not

An

commands, which

Whether

oTTfo? c. fut. indie.

was independently developed, or merely came

obvious equivalent, it

difference

that in the latter

innovation iu Hellenistic

it

/xr)

12^^ opdre koI ^vXaaaeade. standing alone after opa: cf our

One important is

I'va

Lk

But we must return

present.

14^^, Trpoaev'x^eade

the parataxis was probably once as

stop to enquire.

in

as

an

In any case

weakened the and from a very restricted activity in the the NT period it advanced to a prominent

into line with other tendencies which

telic force of Xva

vernacular of

;

In the papyri we position in MGr syntax (see above, p. 176). have a moderate number of exx., the earliest of which is FP 112 (I/a.D.) eVe^oy { = -cav) ZwtXoii koI eiva aurbv fir) " attend to Z. and don't look askance at him." Zvacd'in]crrj<;, An earlier ex. appears in a letter of Cicero {Att. vi. 5-) ravra Cauer 264 (iv/iii B.C.). It must however be noted that Brugmanu {Gram."^ 500) calls the connexion of this with the prehistoric jussive 3rd sing, "sehr " he does not give his reasons, zweifelhaft ^

:

2

Philoct. 300

:

see Jebb.


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

179

ovv, irpoorov fiev, iva irdvTa a-(p^i]Taf Sevrepov 8e, iva /jbrjSe tcHv Winer oXcyaipy'jarj'i. 39G) would fiud it "in the

(WM

TOKcov

W. F. poets," citing however only Soph. 00 155. in this aside as and Moulton, dubious, setting solitary observes that the scholiast took the passage this way in Greek

his

day

person iva

was common.* An ex. for the Ist 48 (ii/iii A.d.) eav ava^y^ ttj eopTfj,

of course the usage

may

opuoae

be added

:

BU

NT

In the

^evco/bieOa.

the best ex.

Eph

is

5^^

(f)o^7]raL rbv dvSpa, which is correlated with So 2 Co 8^, 5^3 Gal 2^^ uyaTTciTOi in the first clause. may be regarded as the same construction put indirectly. 7)

8e yvvr]

'Iva

Mk

Mk

1 0^^

and

OeXco ivaj' use,

which

Mk

6"-^

10^^,

Jn

:

17^*.

of course is not* confined to quasi-imperative

MGr auxiliary 6d {devd, etc.), the future tense. The Optative can

gave birth ultimately to the

cw n

+

+

foi'iiii^ig

express

but

constructions, limits

NT

its

commands through either of its main evanescence in the Koivi] naturally The

illustrations.

however, does occur in

Mk

ll^"*:

Optative proper (neg. firj), note that Mt (21^^) sub-

stitutes the familiar construction ou tial

same deXw iva more The combination

parallels have really the

nearly coalesce in

;

with av (neg. ov), as Xe^oi? found in NT at

c.

pij]

subj.

pray speak,"

The

all.^

_ '

Infinitive

The Poten-

"

dv,

is

has been needlessly objected

Eom

not

imperatival to.

and highly proLk 9^ which is merely The epistolary a case of mixed direct and indirect speech. Ac 15^^ 23^", Jas 1^, is the same in origin. We no 'X^aipeiv, It is unquestionable in Phil 3^^, bable in Tit 2^"^*^ we must not add

12^^,

:

longer need Winer's reminder (p. 397) that the verbs in 1 Th 3^\ 2 Th 217 3^ are optatives but it is well to note that our assurance rests on something better than the ;

accentuation, which any one of us may emend, if he sees fit, The infin. for without any that counts saying him nay. in laws and in in was familiar Greek, especially imper.

MS

maxims. on AP 86

It

survives

(I/a.d.), i^elvai

RhMWii. 147, who ^

An

ex.

in

notes

perhaps occurs in Par

auifiaTos eTn/xeXo/xeuos IV vytaivijs.

the Koivtj, as the papyri show

and fiiaOwaai, it

P

as

42

cf

a popular

(ii/i!.o.),

x°-p''-^°^

Eadermacher

;

in

Hatzidakia

use.*^

{1=-olo)

5' cLv 6 c

[a

g^g

Kal tov ^i.

248.


180

A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

shows

(p.

192) that in the Pontic dialect, the only form which the infinitive form survives, the infin. is still used as an imperative for all numbers and persons. We have therefore every reason to expect it in the NT, and its

MGr

of

in

rarity there -s

p

.

is

.

^

the only matter for surprise.^ Last among these substitutes for the imperative comes the Participle, the admission of which, despite

Winer's objections (p. 441), is established beyond question by the papyri. The proof of this will be given when we deal with the Participle in its place. Here it is sufficient to point out that a passage like 1 Pet

3^*-,

where adjectives and participles

obviously demand the unexpressed eVre, gives us the rationale of the usage clearly enough. It is a curious fact that while ta-0i occurs 5 times in NT, eaTO) (^tw) 14, and

alike

earwaav twice, eVre, which we should have expected to be common, does not appear at all. TivecrOe occurs and eaeade, but it seems more idiomatic to drop the copula compare :

normal

the

absence

of

the

verb

with

predicates

like

Kardparo<i, evXoyrjTot;, oval, which sometimes raises doubts whether an indicative or an imperative (optative) is

/j.aKupto'^,

We

understood. are accordingly absolved from inventing an anacoluthon, or some other grammatical device when we come to such a passage as Eom 12^^^^, where adjectives and participles, positive

and negative, in imperative sense are inter^^- ^^ vv.^*and infinitives in v.^^

rupted by imperatives in

The

this is participles are obviously durative in their action " do not v.^^, where €KS(,Kovvre<;, meaning either :

well seen in

"

avenge yourselves (whenever wronged) or "do not (as your tendency is)" (sitp7\ contrasted with the decisive aorist Sore,

make room

The

wrong)."

maxim ^

for the

of

infinitives

are

BS

command

344.

:

I

125), is strongly once and for all

!

the vernacular

of

tliere is

any

real ellipsis

Historically there is probably no It should be stated that Viteau i. 146

203.

even in the epistolary xa^peiv. See Thumb, Hellen. 130 claims this also as a Hebraism ellipsis

alone can do justice on in the concise

do not however think

see below, p.

sense

appropriate

Assuming the cogency

v.^^.

See Deissinann

of a verb of

Wrath ^ (which

p. "

iterative

f.

;

also Meisteihans*

244-6, for its use in decrees. ^ in the First Revision, and the American Eevi.sers, beyond all So the It is one more example of the baneful etlects of the two(piestion rightly.

RV

thirds rule upon the

KV.


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

181

evidence given on p. 223 below, we may select the following as probable exx. of imperatival participle from the list of passages in which the absence of such evidence compelled

Winer 4^^-

:

I.e.

to adopt other interpretations^: last passage e')(ovre<i might of

in this

1

Pet 3^-^

2^^

course be con-

structed with vrjy^are, and at first sight it seems possible in this way to avoid an asyndeton. But irpo nrcivrcov only intro-

duces a series of asyndetic precepts, in which ^Cko^evoi and 8LaKovovvTe<i

must have the same

To supply

construction.

the imperative idea (as in 4^^) seems simplest, though of course vv.^~^^ are all still dependent on the imperatives of v.^. Since Peter is evidently given to this construction, we

may take 2^^ in the same way, though it would pass as an easy constr. ad scnsum with v.^^ one would be inclined to add These are all the 1^^, but Hort's alternative must be noted.^ :

passages we can accept from Winer's list of exx. proposed a glance at the unrecorded remainder will vividly show what astounding fatuities, current in his day, the great grammarian ;

But we may extend the to waste his space in refuting. Paul was not so fond of this construction as list somewhat. had

his brother apostle

the

note

:

vTTOTaaao/xevat

is

how

in

slipped

Pet

1

into

3^,

the

echoing

Eph

5-^,

where Paul

place

(according to B and Jerome) left an ellipsis, having used the verb just before in a regular sequence. But the exx. we have Add Col 3^*^ already had are conclusive for Paul's usage. (note 2 Co

the imperative 911-

KvvfMevoi

13

is

the reason

and Eph read by

why

WH

to 42-

B

s

be supplied after irdvra in v.^'^), In 2 Co 8^1 ivhei(cf 1 Pet 2i2).

(and the S-text uncials,

relegate

it to

—presumably

the margin)

:

it

is

how-

ever obvious that the ivhel^aaOe of xC and the later uncials is not likely to be original as against the participle, which The imper. in Versions counts would challenge correction.

but little, if we are right in our account of the idiom the participle iistaiknyanclans in Wulfila is a noteworthy piece

for

;

We follow Winer's order, tacitly agreeing with his explanation when we The exx. in which the ptc. would be indicatival will pass over a passage cited. be dealt with below. (An important ex. is added on p. 240.) " the participle there goes I must withdraw 5^, cited in Expos, vi. x. 4.'>0 ^

:

closely with TaireivtbOriTe. as Cicero says.

Probably

3^

was meant

— " sed

ixv-qfioviKov a/xdprrifia,"


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

182

of evidence

plained this

Eom

ou the other side. 2 Co 9^^ is more simply exthan the way by assumption of a long parenthesis.

means "and

13^^

this (do) with knowledge," the parti-

ciple being rather the complement of an understood imperative Heb 13^ gives us an ex. outside than imperative itself.

Peter and Paul.

With

great

hesitation,

I

incline to

add

" 24*^, punctuating with Begin ye from Jerusalem as witnesses of these things." The emphatic v^eh, in thus marks the contrast between the Twelve, v.*^ repeated

Lk

WHmg

:

whom Jerusalem would always be the centre, and one to be raised up soon who would make the world his parish the hint is a preparation for Luke's Book II. There are but seem less than the difficulties, they astonishing breach of

for

:

concord which the other punctuation forces on so correct a 240.) On this usage in general W. F. Moulton sided with Winer, especially against T. S. Green's n.) that it was an Aramaism but he ends with suggestion writer.

(WM

(See

p.

732

;

saying "In Heb 13^, Rom 12^'*-, it must not be forgotten that by the side of the participles stand adjectives, with which the imperative of elvat is confessedly to be supplied." is, as we have seen, the most probable reason of a use which new evidence allows us to accept without the misIt is not givings that held back both Winer and his editor. however really inconsistent with Lightfoot's suggestive note on Col 3^*^, in which he says, " The absolute participle, being

This

regards mood) neutral in

(so far as

itself,

takes

its

colour

from the general complexion of the sentence. Thus it is sometimes indicative {e.g. 2 Co 7^, and frequently), sometimes imperative (as in the passages quoted [Eom 12^^- ^^^•, Eph 42f-, Heb 135, i Pet 2i2(?) 31.7.9.15.16])^ sometimes opta» The fact is, when tive (as [Col] 22, 2 Co ^^\ cf Eph 3^7) we speak of a part of elvai, being " understood," we are really using inexact language, as even English will show.

index to

I take the

my hymn-book

and note the

first line

of

"

three of Charles Wesley's hymns Happy the souls that " " that from soul free first believed," harms," Happy Happy In the first, on this grammatical soul, thy days are ended." :

principle,

we

we should supply

were, in the second is {the), while

But the third a vocative, that is, an interjection. " the very "-mark which concludes the stanza in each case call

!


THE VERB: THE MOODS. shows that

three are on the

same footing

183 "

the general the as sentence," complexion Lightfoot says, determines in what sense we are to take a grammatical form which is all

:

of

indeterminate in

itself.

A Some

Elliptical ^j^^

Imperative

few more words are called

subject of defective clauses

^

.

for

made .

u

upon into ^u

commands, prayers, imprecations, etc., by the Clauses. exclamatory form in which they are cast, or by the nature of their context. In Kom 13^^ and Col 3^'^ we have already met with imperatives needing to be supplied from the context: Mt 27^9.25^ q^i 46^ q^I is (gee Lightfoot) and Jn 20^*^ are interjectional clauses, and there is nothing conclusive to show whether imperative or optative, or in some like clauses (e.g. Lk 1^^) indicative, of ehat would be inserted if the sentence were expressed in full logical form. Other exx, may be seen in 732 ff. But there is one case of heaped-up ellipses on which we must tarry a little,

WM

that of

Eom

There

12''"^.

is

much

to attract, despite all the

the punctuation which contrary authority, or of what comes to nearly a comma at end v.^, places only the treatment of e;^ovTe<? as virtually equithe same thing

weight

in

of

"

But we have grace-gifts which differ e^ofiev to the grace that was given us, whether that of according prophecy (difl'ering) according to the measure of our faith, or valent

to

:

that of service (differing) in the sphere of the service, or he

his gift) in his teaching, or that teaches (exercising ex^^v he that exhorts in his exhorting, he who gives (exercising this charism) in singleness of purpose, he who holds office in a

deep sense

of

cheerfulness."

responsibility, he who shows compassion in In this way we have Bidcpopov supplied with

and StaKovlav, and then the €xovTe<; xaplafxara taken up in each successive clause, in nearly the same the durative sense of e^a), hold and so sense throughout But as by advancexercise, must be once more remembered. •7rpo(f)7jTeiav

is

:

ing this view we shall certainly fall under the condemnation " for hardihood," pronounced by such paramount authorities as SH, we had better state the alternative, which is the justi-

The fication for dealing with this well-known crux here. imperatival idea, which on the usual view is understood in the several clauses, must be derived from the fact that the


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

184

phrases are successively thrown out as interwe put into words the sense thus created,

prepositional If

jections.

perhaps eaTm will express as much as we have the right to we may have to change it to Mfiev with iv rf} express BiaKovia (" let us be wrapped up in," like iv rouroi? taOi :

In this way we arrive at the meaning given in paraphrase by the KV. We take next the most live of the „, The ^oods, the only one which has actually Subiunctive 1

Ti

4^^).

increased its activities during the thirty-two centuries of the history of the Greek language.^ According to the classification adopted by Brugmann,^ there are three main divisions of the subjunctive, the volitive, the deliberative,

and

the futuristic. Brugmann separates the last two, against W. G. Hale, because the former has firj as its negative, while the latter

originally

had

asked whether the

ov.

first

But the question may well be Prof. two are radically separable.

Sonnenschein well points out {OR berative

" is

A command ?

166) that the "deli-

only a question as to what is or was to be done." may easily be put in to the interrogative tone :

quin redeamus ? ( = wJnj shoidd " redeamus = let us), and our own Have

witness ola& ovv o Spaaov

we not

xvi.

"

answering

to

;

"

The objection to the term " deliberative," and to the separation of the first two classes, appears to be well grounded.

some

?

It should further be observed that the future indicative has

carried off not only the futuristic but also the volitive and deliberative subjunctives cf such a sentence as ecTrcofxev rj aLiywfiev; tI With the caveat already suggested, we may i] Spacro/juev -j^ ;

'

the imperative.

which

lies

The Volitive has outline the triple division. been treated largely under the substitutes for

We

must add the use with

near that in prohibition;

ductory words like (^o^ovixai,

1

So

ment

if

we

start from the

of 1275 B.C.

cf

crKoTreL, etc.,

Mt

yu,i;

in ivarning, Intro-

25^.

did not historically

mention of the Achaians on an Egyptian monuSee the prehistoric form of 'Axaiol.

—'Akauvasa='AxaiFQs,

Hess and Streitberg in Indog, Forsch. vi. 123 ff. 2 Gram.^ 490 if. ' On tliu subjunctive element in the Greek future see Eurip. Ion 771. Lat. ero, faxo, Greek irio/xat, (pdyo/xai. (Hellenistic mixture of above, p. 149. ^Sofiat

and

tff'a.yoi'),

x^w, are clear subjunctive forms, to

name only

a few.


THE VERB: THE MOODS. determine the construction fear! haply one

of

was really " Let us .!"« Out of the Volitivc

Heb

thus

:

you may

.

185

.

4^

arose the great class of dependent clauses of Purpose, also The closeness of relation between paratactic in origin. future and subjunctive is seen in the fact that final clauses

with

oTTco? c. fut. were negatived with the future did not fxi] by any means restrict itself to the futuristic use of the mood which it pillaged. On the so-called Deliberative we have (2)

:

Deliberative

^^^^ nearly

''^^^'^''^^y

enough

'

fit]

BMfxev;

Mt

23^3

^^^

Eom

cpvyriTe;

The question may be dependent,

(MGr 6a see

it

form

ecTTovfie

both

;

with

of the future

for our purpose.

Mk

It is seen in questions, as

12^^ Sw/xev y 10^* ttw? eTrLKakeacovraL;

Lk

as

O^^

OeXei^

etrrcofiei^

simple future, shall %vc say and without Xva in Lk 18*^. is

we meet

in sentences like

it

;

We

f)

In the

Lk

22^^

el

The present subjunctive is probably irara^o^ev ev /xa-^aiprj to be recognised in Mt 11 ^ erepov irpoahoKwp.ev; Finally, the ;

(3)

Futuristic

^^^^^^^^^^^

future

and in isolated

seen

is

still

from

separate

Homeric koI

tense in the

irore

the xi?

Attic Greek, like tI Trddw Its primitive use reappears in the Koivij, where in the later papyri the subjunctive may be seen for the simple future. Blass (p. 208) quotes it occurring as early as the LXX, Is FecTrrjcn,

SS''^*

acfiedfj

yap

avTol<i

relics in

7)

;

cifxaprla}

It is

from the

futuristic

subjunctive that the dependent clauses with idv and orau sprang: the negative /i?;, originally excluded from this division of the subjunctive, has trespassed here from tlie earliest times. There is one passage where the old use of

Mk

the subjunctive in comparisons seems to outcrop, 4"'^ to? rov koX all /SdXr) av6pwiTo<i airopov KaOevSy (etc., prcs. subj.).^^ It is hard to say to which of the three divisions .

this

belongs

—Brugmann

.

.

remarks on the impossibility of

determining the classification of dependent clauses in general, but perhaps the futuristic is best, like our " as a man vjill

The survival of this out-of-the-way subjunctive sow," etc. the artless Greek of is not very easy to explain

Mk

in

^

-

See some exx. beloAV, p. 240. It must be noted that Blass"

;

["

(p.

See p. 248.

^

Sec

p.

249.

321) calls this impossible, and inserts tav.

But nBDLA and the best cursives agree on this reading why should they agree on the lectio ardita ? 'iis edv (AC) has all the signs of an obvious correction. :


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

186

indeed hardly likely, in the absence of evidence from the intermediate period, that there is any real continuity of it is

But the

usage.

of the subjunctive changed the millennium or so separating Homer and the mood which was more and more

root-ideas

little in

remarkably from the Gospels

;

winning back its old domain from the future tense may well have come to be used again as a " gnomic future" without Other any knowledge of the antiquity of such a usage. as of this encroachment will occur we on. examples go The kind of action found in the present, m aorist, and perfect subjunctive hardly needs further comment, the less as we shall have to return to them when we deal with the dependent clauses. One result of the aorist action has important exegetical consequences, which have been very insufficiently observed. It affects rela-

temporal or conditional clauses introduced by pronoun or The verbs conjunction with av (often edv in NT, see pp. 42f). tive,

and the av ties them up to particular occurThe present accordingly is conative or continuous or " iterative: Mt 6^ orav Trotfj-i iXei-Jixoavvi^v whenever thou art 6^*^ otuv "whenever alms," vrjarevrjTe for doing ye are fasting" Jn 2^ oTi av \eyrj " whatever he says (from time to time)." The aorist, being future by virtue of its mood, punctiliar by its tense, and consequently describing complete action, gets a and it will be future-perfect sense in this class of sentence found most important to note this before we admit the less Thus Mt 5-^ 09 av cpoveva-rj "the man who rigid translation. has committed murder," 5'^'^ iav daTvaarjade " if you have only are all futuristic, rences.

;

saluted,"

seized

Mk

him

" :

avrov KardXd^r} " wherever it has the cast of the sentence allows us to abbreviate

9^^ ottov edv

the future-perfect in these cases. Mt 5^^ at first sight raises some difficulty, but aTroXvarj denotes not so much the carrying into

effect as the determination.

from the Meidias the difference of

neatly

:

p(;pj)

Se

We

may

orav

fiev ridPjade

rou?

vofiov<i oTrotoi rt,v6<i elcnv

aKovetv, eTreiSdv Se drjade, (^vkdrreiv Kal applies to

hills,

quote a passage

Demosthenes (p. 525) which exhibits present and aorist in this connexion very of

'^ftrjaOat,

—

Ti,drjade

Orjade to acts.

The part which the Subjunctive plays in the scheme of the Conditional Sentences demands a few lines here, though


THE VERB: THE MOODS. any systematic treatment our second

for

The

between

difference

left

and

el

^^^ heen considerably lessened in Hellenas compared with earlier Greek.

We

istic

Sentences, Simple,

have seen that edv can even take the indi-

General and Future

cative >

€(,

latter occurs

accounts

must be

of this large subject

volume. ^'"'^

Conditional

187

for

while (as rarely in classical Greek) can be found with the subjunctive. The ;

only in 1 Co 14^, where the peculiar phrase it cf the inscription cited by Deissmann :

{BS 118), iKTo^ el fir} eav'^ care to build much on Eev 1

.

.

.

1^.

We

Oekt'^arj.

Lk

In

probably have deliberative subjunctive,

9^^ "

should hardly

and Phil

unless

we

3^"-

wc

are to go

and buy," " if after all I am to attain ... to apprehend." The subjunctive with el is rare in early papyri: cf OP 496 (ii/A.D.)

ktX.

el he r)v (

The

= 17)

6 <yafiu)V

differentiation

irporepo'i reTe\evT7)K(o<;, e%e'Tft) of construction remains at present

stereotyped el goes with indicative, is used exclusively when past tenses come in (e.g. 3^^), and uses gv as its negative :

Mk

;

while edv, retaining /nj exclusively, takes the subjunctive almost invariably, unless the practically synonymous future

^Edv and el are both used, liowever, to is used. future conditions. This is not only the case with el express " c. fut.— in which the NT does not preserve the minatory or

indicative

"

connotation

monitory

Greek

classical

BU

as

which

but even with

326, quoted above,

of conditional sentences

in

p.

the

Gildersleeve el c. pres.

discovered

in such

The immense majority

59.

NT

belong to these heads.

We

deal with the unfulfilled condition below, pp. with the relics of el c. opt., p. 196.

Some Uses

the Negatives

Ou

uri

Into the

200

Leaving the Dependent Clauses 01

:—

sequent treatment, ..

for

documents

let

us turn

,-

now

>

f.,

and

for subto

some

t i 4-u v. aspects or the negative /*??, mainly though not exclusively concerning the Subjunctive. .

vexed question of the origin of the ov

iMrj

con-

we must not enter with any detail. The classical discussion of it in Goodwin MT 389 ff. leaves some very

struction

serious difficulties, though it has Goodwin's insistence that denial

^

Cf what

is

advanced our knowledge. and prohibition must be

said above (p. 1G9) about

ei /xi^tl av.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

188

dealt with

together touches a

weak spot

in Prof.

Sonnen-

schein's otherwise very attractive account of the proliibitory Sonnenuse, in a paper ah-eady quoted {CB xvi 165 ff.).

schein would

make

ov

iroL^jarj';

fxrj

the interrogative of the

"

"

won't you abstain from doing ? prohibition " noli in Latin why not refuse to faccre ? is quin Similarly iroirjarj'^,

/mt)

"

The theory is greatly weakened by its having no Gildersleeve {AJP iii. 202 ff.) obvious application to denial. ov' /ir/ aKO)-\lrrj<; = no ! ov be the that separate may suggests do

?

:

don't jeer, ov-

= no !

yevrjTat

fir)

let

it

never he!"'

Brugmann

{Gram.^ 502) practically follows Goodwin, whom he does not We start from /mt] in cautious assertion, to which we name.

must return presently /Mt]

a-Kcoylrrj<;

= yon

:

r^evqTai

/mt]

= it may

vAll 'perha'ps jeer,

\xr\

perchance hap2^en,

epet? tovto

= you

will

Then the ov negatives the whole, so that say this. " Non becomes, as Brugmann says, certainly not." nostrum est tantas comjjonere lites : these questions go back upon origins, and we are dealing with the language in a late

lierliain

ov

fir)

it is antecedently possible enough that the rationale of the usage may have been totally obscured. The use of ov fxij in the Greek Bible calls for special com-

development, in which

ment, and we may take for our text some remarks of Gilder" This emphatic sleeve's from the brief article just cited.

LXX

and of negative (ov fir)) is far more common in the This tendency to than it is in the classic Greek.

form the

NT

exaggeration in the use of an adopted language is natural." And again, " The combination has evidently worked its way So it occurs in the mouth of up from familiar language.

Thcsmoph. 1108 ovkI fir) \aXr)at av Our previous inquiries have prepared us for some " " The NT is not a phrase modifications of this statement. the Scythian archer, Ar. "

;

we can allow

;

nor will

"

"

adopted language

Exp T

429

pass muster the writer

In without qualification. ventured on a preliminary note suggested by NP 51, a Christian letter about coeval with N and B, in which Mt 10*^ or Mk 9"*^ is loosely cited from memory and ovk airoXkl xiv.

n.

There are, if memory fir) airoXeo-r]. cases of ov fir) in half-a-dozen than serves, scarcely more other the On the non-literary papyri. hand, we find it

(sic)

13

substituted for ov

times in

OT

citations

in

NT, and abundantly

" See p. 249.

in

the


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

189

these we have from these, and Apart occurs only four times in Paul and

Gospels, almost exclusively in Logia. certain or probable Semitic originals.

In

all of

the special case of Eev, it It will be seen therefore that once in 2 Pet.

if

"

translation

"

Greek is put aside, we have no difference between papyri and NT. Paul's few exx. are eminently capable of bearing The frequency of ov firj in emphasis in the classical manner.

Kev may

partly be accounted for by recalling the extent to which Semitic material probably underlies the Book but the unlettered character of most of the papyrus quotations, coupled with Gildersleeve's remark on Aristophanes' Scythian, suggests that elementary Greek culture may be partially responsible here, as in the rough translations on which Mt and Lk had The to work for their reproduction of the words of Jesus. question then arises whether in places outside the free Greek ;

of

Paul we are to regard

The

emphasis.

453 the

ff.),

analysis

ov

as bearing any special G. Ballantine (AJF xviii.

firj

W.

of

seems to show that

LXX,

i6

is

In it is impossible to assert this. translated ov or ov firj indifferently within a

The Eevisers have single verse, as in Is B-*^. in a good many passages in which the

made

it emphatic had an ordinary places unaltered, and

AV

negative but they have left over fifty do not seem to have discovered any general principle to Prof. Ballantine seems to be justified in guide their decision. ;

claiming (1) that it is not natural for a form of special emphasis to be used in the majority of places where a negative

and questions an emphatic negative is Mt wholly out of place: he instances Mk 13^ and Jn 18^^ 25^ is decidedly more striking. In commenting on this article, prediction occurs,

and (2) that

which amount

positive assertions,

to

in relative clauses,

" other examples of the blunting " he of pointed idioms in the transfer from classic Greek mentions the disproportionate use of "the more pungent

Gildersleeve

cites

.

.

.

:

the "quieter present imperative" " " the conthe overdo to of participle Josephus tendency " the articular infinitive, spicuous appearance in narrative of

aorist"

as

against the

"

of ov

fi-)']

"

So here, he says, the stress to argument." " One is inclined has been lost by over-familiarity."

which belongs

to call in the survival

among uneducated people

— English double negatives

"

He

of the older

didn't say nothing to nobody,"


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

190

which resemble ov fiy in so far as they are old like forms preserved by the unlearned, mainly perhaps because they give the emphasis that is beloved, in season and out of

and the

season, by people

whose

style lacks restraint.

But

this parallel

does not take us very far, and in particular does not illustrate the fact that ov firj was capable of being used by a cultured writer like Paul with its full classical emphasis.^ In Let us now tabulate NT statistics. text, ov fi^

WH

Of these 7 1 exx. are with aor. subj. ambiguous, ending in -co and 1 5 more, ending

occurs in all 9 6 times. in 2, the verb

is

;

;

might be regarded as equally indeterminevidence of the MSS readings is concerned. Mt 1 6^^ earat, with There remain 8 futures. Four of these in -et?

{-€(,)

or

-??9 (-rj),

ate, as far as the

Lk

Eev

21^^ and

the are unambiguous 18^* (see below) rest only involve the change of o to co, or at worst that of ov Mt 2 G^^ The passages are to 0), to make them aor. subj. 9*^

:

:

sBCD) = Mk

14^^ {-a-ofiuL ABCD, against N and the Mt is a strong confirmation of the mob). future for the Petrine tradition in its earliest Greek form.)

(-aofiai,

(The attestation in

21^^ {-(TovTat hBDIj) answers to the Marcan ov irapeXevthe insertion of /a?; by S'ACL etc. means a mere assimilation to Lk), while Mt has ov fir) irapeKOuxriv

Lk

(jovTai (13^^

BD

:

(24^^): it is at least possible that our Lucan text is only In Jn 10^ al. support and Mt. a fusion of In Heb 10^^ (from LXX) we have the aKo\ov6r)covaLv.

ABD

Mk

of xACD 17 and the Oxyrhynchus papyrus emended to fivrjado) (following the LXX) in correctors of N There remains evpijaovatv and D and all the later MSS. We need in Rev 9^ (AP evpcoaiv, against nB^) 18^*.

fivrja-dijaofiat

not hesitate to accept the future as a possible, though moribund, construction the later MSS in trying to get rid There is no of it bear witness to the levelling tendency. on to note in We difference meaning. pass may apparent :

^

Winer

(p.

634) refers to

" " the prevailing opinion of philologers in his own

" no time (and later), that ov fir] nroiyjaris originates in an ellipsis fear that he It is advisable therefore to note that this view has been abandoned will do it."

To give full reasons would detain us too long. But it be observed that the drop[)ing out of the vital word for fearing needs explanation, which has not been forthcoming while the theory, suiting denials well enough, gives no natural account of prohihitimis. by modern philology.

may

;


THE VERB: THE MOODS. the distribution

191

NT. It occurs IP. times in jjn] in from these, there are no exx. in Ac, Apart Eev has it Heb, or the General Epp ", except 2 Pet 1^". 1 6 times. Paul's use is limited to 1 Th 4^^^ {v. infr.) 5^ 1 Co 8^^, Gal 5^^. Only 21 exx. in all come from these sources, 64 for the Gospels. Of the latter 57 are from actual leaving words of Christ (Mt 17, Mk 8 [Mk] 1, Lk 17, Jn 14) of

LXX

of

ov

citations. "

:

the remaining 7, Mt 16^2 and 26^5 ( 20^^ have most obvious emphasis, and so

= Mk

143i),

may Lk

1^^

j^ 138

(from the

That the locution was special nativity-source^) and Jn IP*^. very much at home in translations, and unfamiliar in original Greek, is by this time abundantly clear. But we may attempt a further analysis, by the Synoptic problem.

Mk, we

If

we go through

the exx. of ov

firj

in

Mt

has faithfully taken over every one, 8 in has 5 of these logia, once (Mk 13^ = Lk 21*^) dropping

find that

Lk

all.

of contribution to the minutiae of

way

into Mk 7^^ and Lk into Mk 4^^ fit] and Lk into Mk 1 S^i (see above).^ Turning " to Q ", so far as we can deduce it from logia common to Mt and Lk, we find only two places (Mt 526 = Lk 12s^ Mt 23^^ = Lk 13^^) in which the evangelists agree in using ov fir],

the

firj.

and

1

Mt

Mt

introduces ov

0"^ both

uses

Mt

in

it

5^^

21-^^

(Lk

has a certain resemblance, but

in 6^'^ &zs (contrast Mt 7^). parallel), Mt or Lk, the presence of in to the Finally, logia peculiar " which in " is therefore a matter of speculation, we find ov When the testimony of Jn [irj 4 times in Mt and 7 in Lk. 16^'^

and Lk

the

is

Q

added, we see that this negative is impartially distributed over all our sources for the words of Christ, without special prominence in any one evangelist or any one of the documents is

which they seem

have used.

to

Going outside the Gospels,

we find ov yJ) in the fragment of Aristion (?) ^ ([Mk] 16^^) in 1 Th 4^^ (regarded by Ropes, BB v. 345, as an Agraphon) and ;

in the

Oxyrhynchus

1 It comes from the changed to the aor. subj.

the

NT. As to

2

Mk

(12=) has ou ^

The

/J.7J

4=2, :

Sayings

LXX But

—

no. 2 of the first series,

A

Sam 1", if A is right there, with wieTat of course may show a reading conformed to

new Oxyrhynchus " Saying,"

criticisms of B.

W.

and

of 1

" note that in the doublet from

the

double the query.

"

"

;

Q

"

neither

Mt

(lO^")

no. 4, has also simple

Bacon, in Expos, for Dec. 1905,

may

nor

Lk

01).

dispose us to


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

r92

the preface of the second. The coincidence of all these separate Moreover in Eev, the only witnesses certainly is suggestive. NT Book outside the Gospels which has ov firj with any fre-

quency, 4 exx. are from the Epp. to the Churches, where Christ

is

speaker; and

the rest, except 18^* (which

of

all

is

very emphatic), are strongly reminiscent of the OT, though It not according to the except in I822 ( = Ezek 261^).

LXX

NT

as it is in the quite as rare in the aside (a) passages coming from the papyri, and of these two classes accounting Christ, OT, (&) sayings Since these are just for nearly 90 per cent, of the whole.

follows that ov

fxrj

is

when we have put

the two elements which of Christianity, cause in both

one

—a

rendered by words

is

made up

tempted

"

"

Scripture

to

put

it

in the first age to the same

down

feeling that inspired language was fitly of a decisive tone not needed generally

elsewhere.

In connexion with

uau

lous Assertions.

Mti

in

this use of negatives, ^^^i pursue here the later develop„ / , n , ments or that construction 01 (mt] Irom which

^^ ^

,.

1

fi7] originally sprang, according to the theory that for the present holds the field. It is obvious, whatever be its antecedent history, that fi^ is often equivalent to our

the use of ov

"

A

well-known sentence from Plato's Apology anything: Socrates says (p. 39a) dXKa fir) ov tovt' y '^oXeTrou, Odvarov eKipvyetv, " perhaps it is not this which is hard, to escape death." This is exactly like Mt 25^ as it stands in nALZ the ov fxi'i which replaces perhaps."

will illustrate it as well as

:

ov in

has

BCD

its

The subjunctive starts most and seem,

does not affect the principle.

futuristic

sense,

would

it

naturally in Greek from the use of fjur} in questions how this developed from the original use of ^nq in prohibition (whence comes the final sentence), and how far we are to :

call

the

in

widely separable, in this treatise.

meant

"

of fearing, which are certainly not would not be relevant for us to discuss

sentences it

Mr] tovt y x^Xeirov,

will this possibly be difficult

as Plato Protag.

312a aXX' dpa

firj

?

if

"

originally a question, So in the indicative,

ou;^ viro'kaiJbfidveL^,

"but

We have perhaps then you do not suppose" (Eiddell 140). thus both these forms abundantly before us in the NT " Look perhaps Lk 11^^ aKoirei /Ltr; to ^co? 0-/COT09 eVrtV, :

.

.

.

!


THE VERB: THE MOODS. the light

...

'

.

.

darkness

" ;

Col 2^ /SXeVere

(cf

earac o

rt?

!

;

"

KeKOTriaKa,

am

I

afraid about

you

:

perhaps I have toiled in

P 49

So in the papyri, as Par

vain."

jju-q

"

Take heed perhaps there will be someone who Heb 3^^) Gal 4^^ (f)o^ov/jcac vfid^ fii] ttw? et/c?}

avXaycoydw, .

is

193

(ii/B.C.)

dycovLM

ixrjiroTe

appwarel to TraiSdpiop, NP 17 (iii/A.D.) ucfjcopov/xe /Lt?) In all these cases the prohibidpa ivOpdoa-Kwv eXaOev vSart. .

.

,

or less latent, producing a strong /jby is more deprecatory tone, just as in a direct question fiy'j either demands the answer No (as Mt 7^ etc.), or puts a suggestion tive force of

most tentative and hesitating way (Jn 4^^). The of the distinction between this category and the clause may be illustrated by 2 Co 2'^, where the purpose " paratactic original might equally well be Perhaps he will " " be overwhelmed or Let him not be overwhelmed." In the

in

fineness

Gal 2^ the purpose clause

start

—

"

(if

such

goes back to the

it be),

am running, or ran, in 1 Th 3^ The warning of Ac 5^^ might similarly from either " Perhaps you will be found," or " Do not

former type vain ? "1 Cf be found

"

:

Can

be

it

that

I

the former suits the ttotc better.

It will

be

seen that the uses in question have mostly become hypotactic, but that no real change in the tone of the sentence is

introduced by the governing word. The case is the same as with prohibitions introduced by opa, /SXeVere, Trpoa-e^ere, etc.:

One very

see above, p. 124.

head should be mentioned here,

2

Tim

2^^.

under

We

this

have

55) expressed the conviction that Booij is really Not only would the optative clash with subjunctive.

already 8(07},

difficult case

tliat of

(p.

dvavrjylrmaiv, but it

cannot be justified in

itself

WH

by any clear

The difficulty felt by (Aj^p 168), that syntactic rule. " its use for two different moods in the same Epistle would be strange," really comes to very little and the survival of the epic Scotj is better supported than they suggest. There is an apparent case of yvcarj subj. in Clement Paed. iii. 1, ;

eavTov yap riq idv

yfcorj,

of quotations for

hoirj

^

deov elaerai.

is

A

respectable

number

given from early Christian litera-

perhaps subjunctive, since the sentence as it stands is felt as This interpretation as a whole has to reckon with the alternative renderThere is much to be ing, "Am I running (said I), or have I run, in vain T' said for this see Findlay in Exp B p. 104. T^pix'^ ^^ tiest

final.

:

13


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

194

90

ture in Eeinliold

456) may

as

called

evidence

NP

429, only for the

Phrynichus (Paitherford

f.

fairly be

not

Hellenistic hwr} and hihwr) (which he and his editor regard " as utterly ridiculous ") but for the feeling that there is But a subjunctive Swt;, though he only quotes Homer.

we must not

press this, only citing from Eutherford the " " for Sw in Plato that some MSS read hotr]

statement Goi'g.

481a, where the optative would be most obviously

out of place.

If

only assume

that

we

Tim I.e., we can an obsolete idiom,

read the opt. in

the

writer

2

misused

Against this correctly used in Lk 3^^ in past sequence. stands the absence of evidence that Paul (or the auctor ad

Timothcum,

if

the

demur) concerned

critics

himself

with

literary archaisms, like his friends the authors of Lk, Ac,

and

we make

and Heb.

Taking

the

introduce a hesitating question, to try whether " cf the well-known idiom with el, may give

avavr]y\rwaiv together, "

ixrjiTore

haply God "

Soorj

to see

:

as in

if,"

Ac

favour of the subj.

Eoni V^, Lk U^s, Phil 3^". the careful note in 120.

See in

271^, Bcoij

WS

Blass

50) agrees.^

(p.

We The Optative :— ^^ Proper

take next the Optative, which makes

p^^^, ^ ^^^^.^

-^^

^1^^ j^rj. ^^^^^

In

hurry on.

MGr

its

^^

only

^^.^

relic

tempted -

is

the

phrase /u.?; •yevono, which appears in Lk 20^® and 14 times in Eom (10), 1 Co (1) and Gal (3). This is

Optative proper, distinguished by the absence and the presence (if negative) of firi. Burton {MT 79) 35 proper optatives from the NT, which come down to

of course the

of av cites

^

Unfortunately \vc cannot call the LXX in aid Tts oi^r) ... 5(^77, but they all seem optative.

exx. of

2

Sam

18^^,

Ps 120(119)^

Job

31^^,

Ca

8^,

Jer

9",

:

;

there are a good many in 11-'', Judg 9^^,

Num

miglit ^ve^ seem deliberative subj., but

tI doOeirj croi Kal ri irpoa-Tedeir] aoi

;

is

unfortunately

q^uite free

from

We may regard these as real wishes thrown into the interrogative form. The LXX use of the optative looks a promising subject for Mr Thackeray's much-needed Grammar. We will only observe here that in Num I.e. the Hebrew has the simple imperf. — also that A has a tendency to change opt. into subj. (as Kuth V S(^ evp-qn), which accords witli the faint arabiguit}'.

.

Dt

.

.

we have opt. and fut. indie, alternating, with no variation in the Hjbrew. A more surprising fusion still worse than 2 Tim I.e. with Syi? is seen in 2 Mac 9-^ idv n Trapddo^ov diro^ali} Kai

distinction between them.

In

vpoffawiXdri, ^

But

see p. 240.

28"***


THE 20 when we drop

(Eom

155-

1=^,

Tim

2

^o^

P^-is,

and 2 Th), while Mk, Lk, Ac, Heb,

1

one apiece.

NT

in the

195

Of these

yevoiTo.

/x?;

Philein

THE MOODS.

VERI5:

1

ra,ul claims 14 and the rest in Pet and 2 Pet have

'Oval/juTjv in Pliilem-" is the only proper optative which is not ord person.^ It will be noticed that

though the use is rare it is well distributed even Mk has it, and Lk 1^ and Ac 8-*' come from the Palestinian stratum of Luke's writing. We may bring in here a comparison from our own language, which will help us for the Hellenistic :

The optative be still keeps a real optative as a whole.^ .though diminishing place in our educated colloquial: "be it " " or so so be it," is preserved as a formula, like fxr) yevoiro, " " but Be it my only wisdom here is felt as a poetical archaism. So in the application of the optative to hypothesis, we should not generally copy " be not fair to me

" :

never so humble," or " If she on the other hand, " If I ivere you "

Be

it

"

the only correct form.

is

"

may,"

I

bless

you

" "

!

Come what

wish I were at home," are further examples of still

optatives

God

But a somewhat archaic

surviving.

style

is

would equally avoid

in

recognisable in

"Were

the whole realm That were a present

We

of nature mine, far too small."

shall see later that a Hellenist

colloquial speech a construction like ei

TO.

Koi

TTavT

TO.

TTavra

e\arT(Tov

r]

The Hellenist used the optative

much

as

we

(OP 240

ii/A.D.),

301

.

.

ii/A.D.),

.

evopKovvri

— :

i/A.D.),

r]

TrapaSwao)

etc.

But

it

eirj,

in wishes

use our subjunctive.

as in oaths passim

evavrla

i'fi

ye volt uv coare Sovvcu.

fioi

fjbefi

It is at fiot

ev

eirj,

and prayers very

home

i(f)topKovvTi 8e to.

(OP 715 tm opKW (BM evaj^eOeirjv in free use, as OP 526

tool evo'^ot etrj/mev

...)) is

also

in formulse,

opKcoL

LP& (ii/p-.C.) o? SiSoLrj j(aLpoL<;, KakoKatpe, kol A.D.), /jb7}SeL<; fie KaTajBidaano and elaeK6oi<i

LPw

(ii/A.D.)

aoL,

(ii/iii

7roi7]aai<;,

^

Some support

for the persistence of tliis optative in the Koivri may be found appearance in a curse of iii/i5.c., coming from the Tauric Chersonese, and showing two Ionic forms (Audollent 144, no. 92). * Cf Sweet, New English Grammar : li:>ynlax 107 ff.

in its


NEW TESTAMENT

A GRAMMAR OF

196

BU

741

(ii/A.D.)

o

fjbt)

yeiPOLTO,

BM

21

GREEK.

(ii/B.C.)

aol Se yevoiTc

BCH

1902, p. 217, Ke^oXcofjuevov €y(^ono Mrjua KUTaxdoviov, HI P 6 (iii/iv A.D.) ippco/Mevov ae rj 6ia irpovoca In hypotaxis the optative of wish appears in (pvXd^ai.

evr]fiepetv,

.

^,

clauses with

.

in Hypothesis,

add

si,

el,

if,

shown by the

as is

el,

,

negative's

^ f being fjtr), as well as by the tact that we can to a wish, or express a hypothesis without a

.-,

.

.-,

.

Ei conjunction, by a clause of jussive or optative character. occurs in 11 passages, of which with the optative in the

NT

4 must be put aside as indirect questions and accordingly The three exx. in Ac are all in falling under the next head. or. ok: 20i« ("I want if I can to "), and 27^9 ("We will beach her if we can"), are future conditions; and 24^^ " puts into the past (unfulfilled) form the assertion They " ought to bring their accusation, if they have any (e-^ovat). The remainder include el tu')(ol in 1 Co 14^^ 15^'', the only exx. in Paul, and two in 1 Pet, el koI irdcr'X^oiTe S^'^ and el Oekoi 3^^. The examination of these we may defer till .

.

we

.

take up Conditional Sentences together.

We

only note

HE

give no more than 12 exx. from LXX of el c. from 4 Mac and two passages I cannot trace) opt. (aj)art about 2 of these are wishes, and 4 are cases of (oaiirep) et Tt9, while 2 seem to be direct or indirect questions. Neither in LXX nor in NT is there an ex. of el c. opt. answered with opt. c. av, nor has one been quoted from the To the optative proper belongs also that after final papyri.^ as we infer from the negative /u,?; and from its being particles, an alternative for the (jussive) subjunctive. It does not how-

here that

:

ever call for any treatment in a NT grammar. m „. Final clauses. crx that iva hot We have seen already (p. 55) .

,

,

"

i

and (ib.

'iva <yvo2

/

.i

^

''

s^

-

are unmistakably subjunctives if iva SojT] be read loish f.) in Eph 1^'^ it will have to be a virtual :

and pp. 193

merely to link it to the previous verb but This banishment of the final optative only means that the NT writers were averse to bringing in a clause, tva serving Scot] is

^

Meanwhile we

form

is

;

preferable.

used "if

I

dictum (p. 213) that tlie ei c. ojit. wish to represent anything as generally possible, without

nia_y oliserve tliat Blas.s's

regard to the general or actual situation at the moment," suits tlio NT exx. well and it seems to fit the general facts better than Goodwin's doctrine of a ;

"less vivid future" condition (Goodwin, Greek Gram. 301).


THE VERB: THE MOODS.

197

construction which was

The obsolescence time of the

and papyri

of

LXX, of

artificial, though not quite obsolete. the optative had progressed since the and we will only compare the writers

i/A.D.

and

ii/A.D.

Diel in

his

program De

enuntiatis finalibus, pp. 20 f., gives Josephus (i/A.D.) 32 per cent, of optatives after iW, oVft)? and &)9, I'lutarch

Lives

(i/A.D.) 49, Arrian (ii/A.D.) 82, and Appian (ii/A.D.) 87, while Herodian has 75. It is very clear that the (iii/A.D.) final optative was the hall-mark of a The pretty Attic style.

Atticisers were not particular however to restrict the optative to past sequence, as any random dip into Lucian himself will

We may

show.

contrast the

whose percentage

who

to

falls

5.

more natural Polybius

of optatives is only 1 } or The writer of 4 Mac

Diodorus

(i/A.D.)

(ii/B.c), (i/p-.c),

outdoes

all

71, so that we can see the cacoethes Atticissandi affecting Jew as well as Gentile. The papyri of our period only give a single optative, so far as I have his predecessors with

OP 237

observed: later

(late

ii/A.D.)

we have LTw

tW

.

8vvr]6eLT]v.

.

.

A

evoSov clpn [loi (ii/iii and before long, in the Byzantine €c7]t, in primary sequence age, there is a riot of optatives, after edv or anything else. The deadness of the construction even in the Ptolemaic little

a.d.)

tv

;

period

may

be well shown from

-Xprj/xaTcaOrjaoLTo and citations will

attempt

future suffice

TP

1

(ii/B.c.)

rj^Lwa-a

ha

Perhaps, these facts to show why the NT does not optative!

to rival the litterateurs in the use of this resuscitated

elegance.

We

.

turn to the other main division of

^^® Optative, that of which ov and av are With av the Potential frequent attendants.

Ontative

/ should, you or he would, generally a It was used to express a future in condition. following a milder form, and to express a request in deferential style. But it is unnecessary to dwell upon this here, for the table answers to our own

given above

(p.

living form in as

166) shows that times. It was

NT

Luke's use

It

proves.

19 times when 4 Mac ^

is

it

was no longer a

literary,

figures

but not

30 times

excluded, and

its

See Kiilkei's observations, Quasi. 288

in

really

artificial,

LXX,

or

occurrences are

f.


A GRAMMAE OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

198

and not abnormal in form. We of av, which was previously 194 n.)} We shall see that av tends

tolerably well distributed

should note however the omission cited in one phrase (p.

the general weakening of to be dropped with the indicative the particle is probably responsible for its omission with the Tt? av Sort], Job 31^^ al, does not differ optative as well. ;

from Tt9 Bwr) elsewhere and no distinction of meaning is conveyed l)y such an omission as appears in 4 Mac 5^^ ;

"

even if there is (earl) [a God], he would In other ways we become aware how little differforgive." Thus in Par ence dv makes in this age of its senescence. P 35 (ii/B.C.) i^)]veyK6v oiroa av €pevv[u)\To^ the dropping avy'yv(ofiou7](T€iev,

of

dv would affect 'the meaning hardly at all, the contingent So when Luke says in 1^being practically nil.

force

deXot "

how he would like," cf 9*6,— there is a minimum of difference as compared with Ac 21'^^ eirwOdveTo Ti<i eXri "who Not that dv he might be," or Lk 18^6 j<AB t/ eit] tovto. ivivevov

.

.

Ac 10l^ Lk

to tl av

.

1526

1836 (D)

an indirect question is always as near as in this case Thus in unaccompanied optative which we treat next. ri avru) a-rj/xacvei i) the inscr. Magn. 215 (i/A.D.) iirepwra TL av iroirjaa'^ aSeco? SLareXoir] represents the conditional sen" " " If I were to do what, should I be secure ? i.e. what tence, ?" So in Lk 6^^ rt av ironjaaiev must I do that I may

c.

opt. in

to the

.

.

.

.

.

.

the hesitating substitute for the direct rl 7roii]ao/jbev; Ac 5-* " Tt dv yevoLTo tovto answers to What tvill this come to ? "

is

Cf Esth 13^

irvdofjuevov

.

ttw? dv d-^deLij In direct (KV).

.

.

might be brought to pass have Ac 17^*^ rt dv 6e\oi

.

"

.

.

\e<yeiv\

.

dv in a softened assertion meets us in "

dv

I could pray."

there

is

Svvalfjiijv,

Among

all

only one which has a edv

/m7]

Ti<i

oSrjy/jaet

Ac

/x,e

;

.

"how

question

The idiomatic

this

we

opt.

c.

26^^ X°AB, ev^aifxrjv

the exx. of dv protasis,

.

Ac

c.

opt. in

8^^ ttw?

Luke

7a|c»

dv

a familiar case of future

Par P 63 (ii/s.c.) has a dropped &v in a place where it is needed dWd. /J.h oxidiva iirelTrai/xi ttXtjc 6'rt ^XKeadai jSe/Soi/Xei/xat. But I badly should prefer to read ovdh a<^v^ if one may conjecture without seeing the papyrus. It is unfortunate that this crucial y is missing, for epewaro (an nnaug^

:

mented form) is quite possible, though less likely. optative, in indirect question, eirjcrai' dairopivadfxevoL.

The

papj'rus has another


THE VERB: THE MOODS. with the

condition

more need be

less

vivid

said of this use

;

199

No

form in the apodosis.^ nor need we add

much about

the other use of the Potential, that seen in indirect questions. The tendency of Greek has been exactly opposite to that of Latin, which by the classical period had made the optative

subjunctive ") de rigueur in indirect questions, whatever Greek never admitted t/? el7}v the tense of the main verb.

("

= quis

sim into primary sequence, and even after past tenses the optative was a refinement which Hellenistic vernacular made no effort to preserve. On Luke's occasional use of it we need not tarry, unless it be to repeat Winer's remark

375) on Ac 21^^, where the opt. is appropriate in asking " about the unknown, while the accompanying indicative, what he has done," suits the conviction that the prisoner had comThe tone of remoteness and uncertainty mitted S07ne crime. (p.

in such a reported question given by the optative is well seen as Lk 3^^ /xjJTTore avro? etrj 6 Xpicrro?, or 22-^ to Tt<? dpa e'lrj ... 6 ravra fieWcav irpdaaeiv. It will be noted that Luke

observes the rule of sequence, as he does in the use of irplu 169).2

(p.

T

J-

The Indicative apart from its Future, which we have seen was originally a sub-

i-

Indicative.

m .

.

junctive

,

the

mam .

.

is

-^

-,

-^

,

^

-,

suited by its whole

character only to positive and negative statements, and not to the expression of contingencies, wishes, commands, or other are not concerned here with the subjective conceptions. " " unreal use of the forces which produced what is called the

We

indicative, since Hellenistic

Greek received

it

from the

earlier

which it proceeded to age as a fully grown and normal usage, Its most prominent use is in the limit in sundry directions.

two parts 1

We

of the unfulfilled conditional statement.

It is sentences of this

kind to which Goodwin's "less vivid form" does

the rule for the whole class apply his extension of this to be see above, p. 196 n. ture to dissent from :

^

be is

On

made

must

I

should ven-

the general question of the obsolescence of the optative, reference may to F. G. Allinson's paper in Gildersleeve Studies 353 IF. where itacism Kal Cf OP 60 (iv/A.D.) iV odv e'xoire to be a contributory cause. ,

.

alleged

KaTaaTrjffTiTa.1.

(

= -e),

similarly a misspelt subj. (or «' «'' equivalent of v, V, «'> a"'l

phonetic distinctness.

Prof.

.

.

meant; OP 71 (ib) where ei aol BokoI is When oi had become the complete indie).

where exvre ^'

is

the optative forms could no longer preserve dissents see p, 240.

Thumb

:


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

200 take

this

up among

other

tlie

Conditional

in

Sentences,

only dealing here with that which affects the study of the indicative as a modus irrealis. This includes the cases of

vol.

ii.,

omitted av, and those of ov instead of fi-q. It happens that the only NT example of the latter has the former character-

Mk

well:

as

istic

14-^

= Mt

(

26-^)

Kokov

avrai

eyevv)]6r]^^lt improves the Greek by adding rjv. " the ultimate sense which makes this " unreal at

ovk

el

It is only all

:

as far

form goes, the protasis is like Heb 12-'' et eKelvoc ovk " " " if they failed to There, it e^ecpvyop, escape (as they did). " was a warning to us might have formed the apodosis, and so that sentence and this would have been grammatically similar.

as

We

might speak thus

thing

if

of

= that) (nearly

some

villain of tragedy,

" e.g.

there never was such a man."

A

good Trans-

ferred as it is to a man who is actually present, the saying gains in poignancy by the absence of the contingent form. El ov occurs fairly often with the indicative, but elsewhere

always in simple conditions see above, p. 171. The dropping of av in the apodosis of unfulfilled conditions was classical with :

phrases like eZei, ixPW> Kokov rjv. did it, it was the right thing,"

Such sentences as

may

"

If

be regarded as

he the

starting-point of the use of the indicative in unfulfilled " but condition, since usage can easily supply tlie connotation he did not do it." The addition of av to an indicative

apodosis produced

much "

the same effect as "

we can

express in

"

if lie had anything, he gave " if he had it," or anything, in that case {av) he gave it," alike suggest by their emphasis that the condition was not

writing by italicising

We

realised.^

if

:

need not enlarge further on this form

of

sentence, except to note the familiar fact that the imper" " fect in all unreal indicatives generally denotes present

time:

cf

use with ocfieXov in

tlie

Eev

3^^

and 2 Co

11^.

(These are the sole NT examples of this kind of unreal indicative. The sentences of unrealised wish resemble those of

Co

(1 ^

OP

unfulfilled in

4^)

Two papyrus 526

(ii/A.D.

)

exx.

el

condition

reference

Kal

(ii/A.D.) ii Tr\eiov bi fxoc

may

to

further

past

in

time;

usino-

the

aorist

but

this

could

be cited to illustrate this tendency of av to drop. OP 530

dvi^eve, e7tb tov \oyov /^lov ov irapifievov. irapeKUTO, ttoXlv croi aTreardX/cet;'.

fiyj


THE VERB: THE MOODS. hardly have

been

The

otlierwise.^)

201

difference

of

the real and nnreal imperfect will be seen when the aV in the stock sentence ei rt dxov, eScSovv

time in

we drop "

if

civ,

1

had anything {noiv), I should give it," which by elin)inating the av becomes " if {i.e. whenever) I had anything, I used to

Goodwin {MT § 399, 410 ff.) shows that this use give it." of the imperf. for present time is post-Homeric, and that it is not invariable in Attic see his exx. For the we

cite

Mt

2330 24*3

where

as

places condition

;

el

but since

which have no of the classical

NT

= Lk (^'ge^)

12^'^

Jn

may

410 1121.32^ 1

j^

2^^

with imperf. decidedly denotes a past all

aorist,

these exx. contain either

I'uxrjv

or yheiv,

they prove nothing as to the survival

ambiguity

—we have

here, as in all cases in the older

to decide

literature,

by the context as to whether

The distribution of tenses in present or past time is meant. the apodosis (when civ is present) may be seen in the table on The solitary pluperf. is in 1 Jn 2^^. It need only p. 166. be added that these sentences of unfulfilled condition state nothing necessarily unreal in their apodosis it is of course usually the case that the statement is untrue, Ijut the sen:

tence itself only makes it untrue " under the circumstances " The time of the {av), since the condition is unsatisfied. apodosis generally determines itself, the imperfect regidarly denoting present action, except in Mt 23^0 (?;/xe^a). Unrealised purpose makes a minute addition to the tale of

unreal indicatives in the NT.

Gal

2'^,

with which stands

The afterthought Th 3'', has plenty

1

MT

eBpa/xov in of classical

parallels (see Goodwin § 333), but no further exx. are found in writers, and (as we saw above, p. 193 n.) the former ex. is far from certain. Such sentences often depend

NT

and the decadence more subtle and less

on unfulfilled conditions with carries

with

it

that of a

av,

still

of these

practical

form of language. ^

There

is

one

the particle (as

it

ex. of o<pe\ov

now

is)

c.

help to

fut.

,

Gal

5'",

and there

also the associations of

mark an

expression never meant to be taken in cJ(pe\oi> may be Ionic, as it is found

The dropping of augment seriously. in Herodotus ; its application to '2nd or 3rd pers. is probably due to its being felt to mean "1 would" instead of "thou shouldst," etc. Note among the

LS (p. 1099) that with Grimm -Thayer gives LXX

late exx. in

fie

ment.

parallels.

.

.

.

oXiadai, a

lirst

step in

See also Schwyzer

tliis

develop-

Percj. 173.


CHAPTEE

IX.

THE INFINITIVE AND PAKTICIPLE.

The mention Nominal Verbs and Verbal Nouns

^j^g

j,-^

"

of

heading

The Verb

"

has been omitted

of this chapter, in deference to

.i -i-^e susceptibilities oi

,.

grammarians who wax warm when Xveiv or Xvaa^ is attached to the But having thus done homage Verb instead of the Noun. to orthodoxy, we proceed to treat these two categories ahnost exclusively as if they were mere verbal moods, as for most practical purposes in origin and in

noun

;

they

i

Every schoolboy knows that

are.

use they belong to the part but on this side they have been sufficiently treated

in chapters iv. verbal. .

Its Oriein

v.,

their

and nearly

all

that

The Greek Infinitive — ^ locative or a

is

.

The Infinitive

and

of

:

,

,.

.

>

'

n

(as Xueiv)

is

distinctive is

historically either i

^-

/

%-

dative (as Xvaai,

elvai, etc.) from a noun base closely connected We can see this fact best from a glance at with a verb.^ Latin, where regcre is obviously the locative of a noun like

the dative of a noun much like rex except in and rectum, -tul, -tu the accusative, dative, and locaquantity, In tive, respectively, of an action-noun of the 4th declension. Plautus we even find the abstract noun tactio in the nominative governing its case just as if it were tangcre. Classical Greek has a few well-known exx. of a noun or adjective governing the case appropriate to the verb with which it is Thus Plato Apol. 18b to. /jLerecopa (fypovTtclosely connected. Ant. 789 o-e ^u^t/^o? see Jebb's note. Vedic arri<i, Sophocles

f/enns, regi

:

^ On the morpliology of the lufinitive see Giles Manual- 468 fF. It should be noted that no syntactical difference survives in Greek between forms oi'igiually dative and those which started in the locative.

202


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

203

Sanskrit would sliow us yet more clearly that the so-called of a noun which nothing but a case any case

infinitive is

had enough verbal consciousness in it The isolation and stereotyping of a few

"

"

govern an object. of these forms produces to

the infinitive of Greek, Latin, or English, It will be easily own language that what we call the infinitive is

seen in our

only the dative of a noun Middle English had a locative with " In such a sentence as He went out to toil again," how :

at.

shall it

we

parse substitute

:

One

Make

toil ?

"

from

clear inference

hard

all this

voice for the

is

infinitive.

"

davfidaai, in the same

and the Noun claims Verb comes to its own. that there was originally

toil,"

for

"capable

°"^''

distinction.

"

hard," and the

toil

no

it

worthy

Avvaro<i davfxd-

wondering,"

and

a^io^ the

for wondering," use

" able to noun way but one means " other to wondered at." and the be The wonder," deserving middle and passive infinitives in Greek and Latin are merely adaptations of certain forms, out of a mass of units which had lost their individuality, to express a relation made

verbal

prominent

the

by

closer

;

connexion of

such

nouns

with

the verb.

C

«5e

There are comparatively few uses of the Infinitive in which we cannot still

Grreek

force

by restoring the dative Indeed the very from whence it started. fact that when the form had become petrified the genius of the language took it up afresh and declined it by prefixing the The article, shows us how persistent was the noun idea. noticed above have which we of the survival imperative use, trace the construction

or locative case

in interpreting it in (pp. 179 f.), is instructive if we are right dative close connexion with the origins of the infinitive. used as an exclamation conveys at once the of

A

purpose

The frequent identity of noim and verb imperatival idea. forms in Eno-lish enables us to cite in illustration two lines of a popular

hymn

:

" So

now

And

A

to watch, to work, to war, " then to rest for ever !

schoolmaster entering his classroom might say either

then, to

work

" !

or

"

at

work

" !

"

Now

dative or locative, express-


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

204 ing

2nd

imperative

person. rest the

many

Among

the

person, as the hymn lines express 1st exx., Phil 3^^ has the 1st/ and the The noun-case is equally traceable in

NT

2nd person.

Thus the

other uses of the infinitive.

Jn

purpose, as in

for worshiiJjnng

,

infinitive of

2P

aXceveiv a-jishing, or Mt 2^ irpoaKwrjo-ai of consequence, as Heb 6^*^ i-rrcXaOeaOai, to

"

"

and other complementary infiniof forgetting, 11^^ as Heb tives, Kaipov avaKajjiy^aL opportunity for returning, 2 Tim 1^- 8vuaTo<i ^ukd^at competent for guarding. The force the extent

of such infinitives is

always best reached by thus going back

to the original dative or locative noun. From the account

just given of the of it follows that it the infinitive genesis In was originally destitute of tense as much as of voice. classical Sanskrit the infinitive is formed without reference Tenses.

to the conjugation or conjugations in

present stem

:

thus

v

which a verb forms

f^"^ {kXvco), inf. p-otiim,

its

pres.

— grnomi

V ^^^'^ (4'^'^' f'^^'^> ^^)' ^haviyohtum, yunajmi can see almost as clearly in Latin, hhavdmi. We this tum, where action-nouns like sonitum, positum, tactum and tactio, etc., have no formal connexion with the present stem seen

V yW

(i^'^ngo),

The cr in XvaaL lias only accidental in sonat, ptonit, tangit. But when once link it with that in eXvaa. to similarity these

noun forms had established

their close contact with the

verb, accidental resemblances and other more or less capricious causes encouraged an association that rapidly grew, till all the tenses, as well as the three voices, were equipped with infinitives appropriated to their exclusive service.

Greek had

been supplied with the complete system from early times, and we need say nothing further on the subject here, since the infinitive presents no features which are not shared with other moods belonging to the several tenses.^ ^ Brugmann, Gram.^ 517 n., regards ws ^iros e'nre'iv as being for etirwixei', and coming therefore under this head. It is a literary phrase, found only in Heb On this and other exx. cf the would-be literary papyrus, OP 67 (iv/a.d.). 7" of the "limitative infin." see Grliueuwald in Schanz Beitriige ir. iii. 22 ff., where it is shown to be generally used to qualify ttSs or oi)5ets, and not as here. ^ The Hellenistic weakening of the Future infinitive, which in the pajiyri is very frequently used for aorist or even present, would claim attention here See Kalker 281, Hatzidakis if we were dealing with the Koiv-q as a whole. The NT does not show this form— whether any MS variants 190 f., 142 f. :


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. Some important

.

^^® "^

^^^^

Purpose etc

^^

°^

20o

questions arise from the infinitive

^'^^

whicli

is

In ThLZ, 1903, equivalent to iva c. subj. Prof. Thimib has some 421, suggestive remarks on this p. He shows that this infinitive is decidedly more subject.

prominent in the Koivr]

tlian

in

Attic,

and

is

perhaps an

Ionic element, as also may be the infin. with tov, of wliich the In the Pontic dialect of MGr as mentioned same is true.

the old infin. survives, while it vanished above, pp. 40 f. in favour of vd c. subj. in European MGr, where the infin.

was

Now

prominent in ancient times."

less

infin. in

Pontic

is

restricted to certain

the use of the

syntactical sequences.

To these belong verbs of movement, like come, go wp (cf Lk 18^*^, Par P 49 (ii/B.C.) kav uva^o) Ka^co 'irpoaKVv?]craC), turn, It is found that, speaking go over, run, rise wp, incline, etc. and we find a similar generally, the NT use agrees with this ;

correspondence with Pontic in the NT use of the infinitive after such verbs as jBovkoixai, eTndvfjbw, airovSa^u). ireipd^o), eiri'^eipw, ala'^upofiat,, (po^ovfxai, d^tw, Trapaivcv, KeKevo), Tdcraco, With other verbs, as ew, eTTLTpeiray, Svva/Mac, £X^> dp'^o/xai. This correspondence Iva the construction prevails. TTapaKoXSi,

between ancient and modern vernacular in Asia Minor, Thumb suggests, is best explained by assuming two tendencies within the KoLvri, one towards the universalising of ha, the other towards the establishment of the old infinitive in a definite province the former prevailed throughout the larger, western :

portion of Hellenism, Hellas, where the

and issued

in

the language of modern while the latter held

infinitive is obsolete

;

in the eastern territory, exemplifying itself as we should dialect expect in the NT, and showing its characteristic in the

sway

Prof. Thumb does not spoken to-day in the same country. the more than to provisional acceptance of this pretend urge be indeed can which decisively accepted or rejected only theory, when we have ransacked all the available inscriptions of Asia

Minor

for their evidence

do so

cannot say.

later

I

MSS

;

biit

Jn

on the use

of the infinitive.

But

it

2125 has x^PVi^^^" (»<BC), replacerl hy xwp^Jfrai in the The aorist may be due to the is wanted here.

the future

late scribes wrote. meaning in xcop^crec by the time when the and papyri has been remarked obsoleteness of fut. infin. with /^eXXw in [" See p. 249. already (p. 114 n.).

loss of future

The

NT


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

206 is

certainly very plausible, and opens out liints of exceedingly on lines as yet unworked.

fruitful research

,,„

^.

,

„„

"Ecbatic"

The long debated question

I'm.

"

'

of

A A

V.

^-fi

"ha

eV-

^ k

.1,

paTLKov may be regarded as settled by the new light which has come in since H. A. W. Meyer waged heroic warfare against the idea that tva could ever denote anything but purpose. All motive for straining the obvious meaning of words is taken away when we see that in the latest stage

Greek language-history the infinitive has yielded all its functions to the locution thus jealously kept apart from it. " " is beyond quesThat iva normally meant in order that of

It is perpetually used

tion.

the full final sense in the

in

papyri, having gained greatly on the Attic

But

ottci)?.

it

has come to be the ordinary construction in many phrases where a simple infinitive was used in earlier Greek, just as in Latin ut clauses, or in English those with that, usurp the "

And this is life eternal, prerogative of the verbal noun. " that they should know thee (Jn 1 7^), in English as in the Greek, exhibits a form which under other circumstances would

make

a

final

clause.

Are we

to

insist

on

recognising the ghost of a purpose clause here ?*^ Westcott " says that iva here expresses an aim, an end, and not only

The

compared with (to) yLvcoat acquiring knowledge of effoo^t I will not deny it, having indeed committed myself God. to the assumption as sufficiently established to be set down in an elementary grammar.^ But I have to confess myself troubled with unsettling doubts and I should be sorry now a fact." (TKeiv,

tva

clause then, as

adds the idea

aim

or

of

;

to

commend

that

ha

as strong

enough

to carry one of the

heads of an expository sermon Let us examine the grounds of this scepticism a little more closely. In Kiilker's often quoted monograph on the language of Polybius, pp. 290 ff., we have a careful presenta!

tion of iva as

it

appears in the earliest of the Koivrj writers, life than

who came much nearer to the dialect of common We see at once the Atticists who followed him. has made great strides since the Attic golden age. invaded the territory of

ottco?,

1

as with

Introd."^ 217.

(ppovri^eLv

that "va It

and

[''

Sec

has

airov-

]>.

-249.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

207

The Bd^etv, to mention only two verbs found in the NT. And former occurs only in Tit 3^ the latter eleven times. instead of Attic ottco?, or Polybian tva, behold the infinitive Under Kiilker's next head in every occurrence of the two ;

!

Polybius is brought into an equally significant agreement He shows how the historian favours iva after with the NT. .

words

of

ypiicfieiv,

quoted

:

commanding,

TrevrrjKOVTa

Iva

Tov<i

etc.,

such

as

Siaaacbelv,

aneiaOai,

One ex. should be TrapayyeWetv, and the like. re avveTd^aro irpo'; Tavplcova TrapaaKevd^eiv tTTTret? Kol

Koi

irevraKoa-lov^;,

7re^ov<;

T0VT0t<i

i(Tov<;

koX

(TTTret?

7rpo<;

ire^ov';

Meaarjvlov;,

i^airoarebXwcn.

of infin. and "iva c. subj. here is very plain. In the later Koivrj of the NT, which is less affected by literary standards than Polybius is, we are not surprised to and the resultant idiom in find 'Iva used more freely still

The equivalence

;

MGr

takes

away the

excuse for doubting our natural an eminently sensible note in SH on last

There is 11 ^\ in which the laxer use of Xva is defended by the demands of exegesis, without reference to the linguistic The editors also (p. 143) cite Chrysostom on evidence.

conclusions.

Eom

5^*^

:

ro he Xva ivravOa ovk alrioXoyta^ irdXiv dXX' eKl3acre(D<i It will be seen that what is said of the weakening

i(TTiv.

of final force in iva applies also to other final constructions, And on the other side we note that such as Tov c. infin.

wcrre in passages like

Mt

27^ has

lost its

consecutive force

and expresses a purpose." It is indeed a repetition after many centuries of a development which took place in the In simple infinitive before our contemporary records begin. the time when the dative So/xevat and the locative Sofiev were still distinct living cases of a verbal noun, we may assume that the former was much in use to express designed result the disappearance of distinction between the two :

cases,

and the extension

of the

new

"

infinitive

mood

"

over

the involved a process essentially final in the normally vanishing of the exclusively final force The burden of constructions of Greek, Latin, and English. making purpose clear is in all these cases thrown on the

many

various

context; and

like

uses,

cannot be said that any difficulty results, And even in these the diffiexcept in a minimum of places. fact that we necessarily the to due only culty is probably it

ÂŤ See p. 249.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

208

read an ancient language as foreigners no ditiiculty ever arises in analogous phrases in our own tongue. :

The suggestion

of Latin influence in this

development has not unnaturally been made ^ but the usage was deeply some very good authorities by rooted in the vernacular, in fields which Latin cannot have touched to the extent which so far-reaching a change ;

A

involves. (I/b.C.)

epwTOi ae

(joi

'iva

few exx. from papyri

ha

irapaKoXo) ae

'iva

ufycovidarj^.

BU

ryLvq)

BM

21

OP 121

ri^icoad

19

ae

be cited

NP

BU

(ii/iii A.D.)

(iii/A.D.) oVft)?

:

— OP

744

7 (I/a.D.) eypayjra

(ii/A.D.)).

625

KaTda'xrj<i.

eiva ervfxdar}. (ii/B.C.)

fir]

(cf

cf)v\axO(!5(To

may

531

(ii/A.D.)

eS/]\(i)ara

Aoy-

etTrd crot eXva Bcoawaiv.

ctTToBoOf}

:

d^to)

c.

infin.

Par P 51 (ii/B.c.) Xe7&) occurs in the same papyrus. In such clauses, which remind us 'iva irpoaKvvtiar)'? avTov. 5i« 3» etc., the naturalness immediately of Mt 4^ 16^'^ .

.

.

Mk

the development purpose clause with

of

obvious from the simple fact that the ha is merely a use of the jussive sub-

is

its appearance after junctive (above, pp. 177 f.), which makes The a verb of commanding or wishing entirely reasonable. cf AP 135 (ii/A.D.) infinitive construction was not superseded :

We

need add nothing to Winer's /ir; d/iie\etv fiov. 1 Co 14^ remarks (WM 422 f.) on Oekw and irotw c. ha. in that Oekw this under ex. is a head, good iproTM ae

particularly

we may trace a greater urgency From such the meaning demands. the object clause, from the nature of

has both constructions: that with

in

sentences,

in

as

ha, which

the governing verb, had a jussive sense in it which made the subjunctive natural, there was an easy transition to The idea was absent. object clauses in which the jussive careful study of typical sentences like Mt 10"^ 8^ (contrast 18«, Jn 127 (contr. Lk 15i») 4^* 15S- 1^ Lk 1*3 (for which 311)

Winer quotes anyone who is

a close parallel from free

Epictetus), will

from predisposition that

ha

show

can lose the

If the recognition of a shred of purposive meaning.^ better than the denial context the suit will purpose conception

last

So Gbtzeler Dc Folyhi elocMtionc 17 iT. for irpoffixeiv 'i-va and irapaKoKetv 'iva Kalker op. cit., and Viereck SG 67. Against these see Radcrmacher " See further pp. 240 f. RhM Ivi. 203 and Thumb Hcllcn. 159. ^

(XT)

:

also


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. we remain

209

but the day is entirely free to assume it such strictness as great commentators like Meyer and Westcott were driven to by the supposed demands of grammar. The grammarian is left to investigate the extent to which the Iva construction ousted the infinitive after of

it,

;

past for

particular expressions, to observe the relative frequency of these usages in diflerent authors, and to test the reality of

Thumb's proposed test (above, of what may be

p.

distribution

to

205) for the geographical some extent a dialectic

difference.

The consecutive infin. with wcrre has been already alluded to as admittmg someThe total thing very much like a purely final meaning. occurrences of ooare in the NT amount to 88, in 51 of which „ Consequence.

takes

it

the

t

,

infin.

A

i-,

-,

,

^

.

,

number

considerable

.

of

the

rest,

however, are not by any means exx. of what we should call Mare consecutive with the indicative the conjunction be" comes (as in classical Greek) little more than " and so or :

"

and is accordingly found with subj. or imper. Of the strict consecutive wo-re c. indie, there are very few exx. Gal 2^^ and Jn 3^*^ are about the clearest, but the line is not easy to draw. The indicative puts the therefore,"

several times.

result merely as a

main verb

much upon

;

new

fact,

co-ordinate with that of the

the infinitive subordinates the result clause so

as to lay all the stress on the dependence of the result Blass's summary treatment of this construc-

its cause.

tion (p. 224) is characteristic of a method of textual criticism which too often robs us of any confidence in our documents

and any certain basis for our grammar. we find any rate a v.l. with the infin." vai

"

" ,

"

In Gal

in Ti

2^^ there is at

" a^*^*"

a-uwira'^dr)-

while in Jn 3^^ the correct reading in place of ware

is oTt, which is doubly attested by Chrys. (in many passages) and Nonnus."* Those of us who are not impressed by such

evidence might plead that the text as it stands in both places " the importance It is just entirely fits the classical usage. " of one Blass's criteria to to the result quote attaching

which he says would have demanded the indie, a classical writer which accounts for the use

Jn 3^^

tive: in so

much

— "had —been

as to give

14

the other construction used,

some

« See p. 249.

stress

in

Ac

15^'' in

of the indica-

wo-re Sovvat,

would have been


210

GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

A

taken off the fact of the gift and laid on the connexion between tlie love and the gift." ^ Even if the indicative construction was obsolete in the vernacular which the

evidence hardly suffices to prove indicative for a special purpose, as the independent oi(jTe = and so.

So in

6^°.

,

The

OP 526

without above (p. 204), ovk Tjfirjv a'iradr]<i

infinitives

were explained

uKTTe in consecutive sense

upon Heb

was easy

to bring in the it differed so little from

it

(ii/A.D.),

" so unfeeling as to leave you," etc. aK6y(o<i ae airoXeimv, Sometimes we meet with rather strained examples, as those in

Lucan hymns,

154-72 especially. The substitution of iva for the infin. makes iva consecutive, just subj. occasionally as we saw that coo-re could be final so 1 Jn 1^, Ecv 9-'',

the

c.

Jn

9^

—where

earlier

:

Blass's "better reading" otc lias no authority his own, unless Ti needs to be supplemented.

than

Blass quotes a good ex. from Arrian, ovtw /u,(opo<i rjv Xva fir) shoiild not however follow him in making iva conISrj.

We

Lk 9*^ for the thought of a purpose of Providence seems demanded hj TrapaKeKoXv/M/xevov. 1 Th 5* we can 2 Co l^^^ but is better treated as final: Paul is concede, secutive in

disclaiming

the

mundane

virtue

of

unsettled

convictions,

See p. 249. which aims at saying yes and no in one breath. The infinitive when used as subject or as object of a verb has travelled somewhat innmtiye further away from its original syntax. We obiect see

may humanitm

errarc

est

But the

erring."

the "

into

had ceased

locative

we resolve human in be felt when the

original idea if there is something to

construction acquired its commanding prevalence, and the indeclinable verbal noun could become nom. or ace. without

The iva alternative appears here as it does in the purpose and consequence clauses, and (though this perhaps was mere coincidence) in the imperative use (pp. 176 and

difficulty.

178 f.). Jn 18^'^

Thus we have

Mt

avvr]deia iariv, 1

5"^ al av/xcfiepei,

Co

4"^

Mt

ei? eXd-^irrrov

10^^ ^pKerSv, iariv,

Jn

4'^*

See Blass's ^pcofid ia-Tiv, all with iva in a subject clause. full list, p. 228, and note his citation from "Barnabas" 5^^, e/jbbv

eSei iva TrdOj] ^

:

still

more marked are such

exx. (p.

229) as

I quote from luy Introduction 218, written before Blass's book.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

211

Lk 1^^ 1 Jn 53, Jn IS^^, etc. The prevalence of tlie 'iva in Jn has its bearing on Prof. Thumb's criteria described above (pp. 40 f. and 205); for if the fondness of Jn for e'/xo? is a characteristic of Asia Minor, that for iva goes the other way. It

would be worth while

for

some patient scholar

to take

up

examining the vernacular documents among the papyri and inscriptions and in the NT, with careful discrimination of date and locality where ascertainable. this point exhaustively,

Even the

Atticists will yield unwilling testimony here for a Iva, if normal in the writer's daily speech, could hardly be kept out of his literary style there was a

"

"

wrong

;

use of

very manifest dearth of trained composition lecturers to correct the prose of these painful litterateurs of the olden time !

" Schmid, Atticisuncs iy. 81, shows how this Infinitivsurrogat made its way from Aristotle onwards. Only by such an inquiry "

could

we make

sure that the dialectic distriljution of these

alternative constructions

NT.

was a

real fact in

Tentatively I should suggest

investigation lies wholly below

my own

the

ao-e of

the

time for such an

for

horizon

that the

preference was not yet decisively fixed on geographical lines, so that individuals had still their choice open. The strong tva to which would flavour volitive clung perhaps commend but one it as a mannerism to a writer of John's temperament would be sorry to indulge in exegetical subtleties when he substitutes it for the infinitive which other writers prefer. ;

We

might

dwell

on

the

relation

of

(after verbs of saying, ^^d "l^fi^v*^^^ and the like) to the periphrasis and substitutes, believing, with on which has superseded it in nearly

the accus.

all

of

the

NT

meaning

But no

writers. arises

c.

here

;

and

infin.

real question as to difference will suffice to cite Blass's

it

and refer to him for details. He shows that " the use of the infinitive with words of believing is, with some doubtful exceptions, limited to Luke and Paul remnant of the literary language (Hebrews), being a So with other verbs akin to these: Luke (Viteau [i.] 52)." " is indeed the only writer who uses [the ace. and infinitive]

summary

(pp.

230

ff.)

'

at

any length, direct form."

'

and even he very quickly passes over into the The use of &)? instead of on is limited, and

tends to be encroached upon by ttw?: cf Hatzidakis 19,

who


A GRAMMAR OP NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

212

ought not however to have cited The combination w? on in 2 Co

by Blass (Gr} 321 the Vulgate quasi

Ac

4-^

5^^

1V\

iu

this

w?

as equivalent to Attic

f.)

connexion.

Th 2^

2

c.

taken

is

gen. abs.,

It must be representing it correctly. noted that in the vernacular at a rather later stage it meant " " that thus CPR 1 9 (Iv/a.D.) vrpcorjv I3i/3\ia i-rrtmerely :

on e^ovKi^Oriv riva virdp'^ovrd " notes w? on seem to be there, Wessely combined where the single word would be adequate." He SeBcoKa

rfj

off

eirLfJieKeia

&)<?

fxov dirohoadai,

quotes another papyrus, co? on '^peoarelrac ef ainov o Kvpa Two Attic inscriptions of I/b.c. show co? on c. superl.

'lavs';.

in the

Winer ft)?

oTt

sense of w? or otl alone: see Eoberts-Gardner (p.

cites

771) Xenophon, and Lightfoot (on

oKvoiT],

Hellcn. in. 2

Th

2^)

ii.

179. eltrmv

14,

and Plummer

but the editors have agreed to eject repeat the reference oTt from the text at that place. Its isolation in earlier ;

Greek seems adequate reason for Winer's citation from the Argument Kari]'yopovv

avTou

dispose of Blass's

co?

"

on

flouting

Kaiva SaLfxovia

unclassical

"

(as

the argument is obviously late.^ and Blass without much hesitation.

the

MSS

here.

to tlie Jyusiris of Isocrates, elac^epei, will

Plummer

We may

hardly

supposes), since follow Lightfoot

Accusative

In classical Greek, as any fifth-form boy ^ ^ -i ^\ loi'gets at his peril, the nominative is used

to the infinitive

regularly instead of the accusative as subject when the subject of the main verb is the

.

.

Nominative

for

»

i

^^i

This rule e^rj ovk awro? aXXa KXewva arpaTTjyetv. by no means obsolete in NT Greek, as passages like 2 Co 10^ Eom 9^, Jn 7* (WH text), serve to show; but the ten-

same

:

is

dency towards uniformity has produced a number of violations of it. Heb 7^'^ has a superfluous avrov, and so has Lk 2* Mt 26^^ inserts ixe, Phil 3^^ e/xavTov, and so on. Blass, instances, and remarks that translations p. 238 f., gives from Latin (Viereck, SG 68) exhibit this feature." Kalker (p. 280) anticipates Viereck in regarding this as a case of :

jrroptcr

hoc

as well as 2^ost hoc.

But the development

of

^ Dr J. E. Sandys {Aristotle's Constitution of Athens, p. xxviii) makes the author of the virbOecns to the Arco/icgiticus "a Christian writer of perliaps the sixth century." He kindly informs me that we may assume the same age for that to the Busiris. [* See p. 249.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. Greek

213

untouched by Latin shows that no outside was needed to account for this levelling, which

in regions

influence

was perfectly natural. The accus. c. inf. and the on construction ^^^^ been mixed in Ac 27^^ by an inadvertConstruction ence to which the best Attic writers were See the parallels quoted by Winer (p. 426), and add liable. from humbler Greek OP 237 (ii/A.D.) BtjXcov otl el ra d\7]di} Also see Wellh. 23.

Kplcrew^ heladai to Trpdyfxa.

(fiaveLi] /xrjSe

We

will

proceed to speak of the most

Greek

characteristic feature of the

Infinitive

"

in

post-Homeric language.

By

infinitive

the

sub-

stantial loss of its dative force," says Gildersleeve (AJP iii. " 195), tlie infinitive became verbalised by the assumption of ;

was substantivised again with a decided increment Goodwin, who cites this dictum {MT 315), power."

the article of its

it

the description of the articular infinitive, with "its wonderful capacity for carrying dependent clauses and " adjuncts of every kind," as a new power in the language, of

develops

which the older simple infinitive gave hardly an intimation." The steady growth of the articular infinitive throughout the period of classical prose was not much reduced in the Hellenistic vernacular.

NT statistics with

This

is

well seen by comparing the

those for classical authors cited from Gilder-

The highest on the same page of Goodwin's 3IT. an who shows in is found Demosthenes, average of frequency 1-25 per Teubner page, while he and his fellow orators sleeve

developed the powers of the construction for taking dependent In the clauses to an extent unknown in the earlier period.

NT,

if

my

calculation

Teubner page for Plato.

—

not

is right,

much

less

there is an average of '68 per than that which Birklein gives

The fragmentary and miscellaneous character

of

the papyri make it impossible to apply this kind of test, but no reader can fail to observe how perpetual the construction is.

I

have noted 41 exx. in

will serve

vol.

i

of

BU

to illustrate the statement.

(361 papyri), which

An

which we may not at present concerns the appearance of the articular Since it is manifestly developed dialects. in the Attic orators, we should natu)'ally

of inquiry,

interesting line

pursue very

far,

in

the

infinitive

to a high degree

attribute its fre-


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

214 quency

the Hellenistic vernaculur to

in

the Koiv7]

;

and

this will be

Kretschmer's view

against

no more than other dialects this

test

Greek

of

to

we ought

adequately,

Sammhing

Attic elements in

rather a strong point to make (p. 33), that Attic contributed

the resultant language. To to go through the whole

dialect -inscriptions.

I

have had

to

content myself with a search through Cauer's representative Delectus, which contains 557 inscriptions of all dialects except It will be worth while to set down the scanty Attic.

comes a Laconian

First

results.

182) tVl TO /caA-w?

47

.

.

,

inscr. of

Bie^ayvrjKevac.

32 ( = Michel Then the Messenian

ii/B.c,

= M.

G94), dated 91 B.C., which has tt/jo tov c. inf. twice, the second time with a subject in accusative. Four Cretan exx. (

follow, all

from

and

ii/B.c,

all in

tw

the same formula, irepl

(once tov) yevia-dat with accus. subject (Nos. 122—5

= M.

55,

The Gortyn Code (Michel 1333, v/b.c.) has no Then 148 ( = M. 1001, the Will of length. cir. dated 200 B.C., in which we find ttjoo tov tclv Epikteta), avvohov rjfieu. No. 157 (M. 417), from Calymnus, dated 56, 54, 60).

ex., for all

its

one exception the oldest ex. we have at rraaav airov^av erroLy^cravTO tov {touJ- 8ia\v6ivTrapajevofxevoL

end

of

Iv/b.c, is with

Ta<i Tov<i

:

TToXtVa? ra ttot avTov<i TroXtTeveadai,

//.er'

ofiovoM^;.

No. 171, from Carpathus, Michel (436) assigns to ii/B.c. it has Trpo tov fiiaOcoOijfieiv. No. 179 (not in M.), from Priene, has [rrrepi t'Iov irapopt^eaOai, Ta<y ^(opav. apparently iii/B.c, :

The Delphian

220 has irpo tov Trapa/meivai. Elis 264 ( = M. 197), dated by Michel in and so the oldest quoted irepl Se tw

inscr, no.

contributes one

ex., no.

the middle of Iv/b.c, to aTToaToXafxev Finally Lesbos gives yjrdcfjLafjia. us (no. 431 = M. 357), from ii/B.c, eVt Twt irpay/xaTevdyvai. I have looked through Larfeld's special collection of Boeotian :

.

.

.

.

.

.

Unless the inscriptions, and find not a single example. selections examined are curiously unrepresentative in this

one point, it would seem clear that the articular infinitive only invaded the Greek dialects when the KoLvrj was already arising, and that its invasion was extremely limited in extent.

To judge from the silence of Meisterhans, the Attic popular It would seem to have been speech was little affected by it. mainly a literary use, starting in Pindar, Herodotus, and the The statistics of tragedians, and matured by Attic rhetoric.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

215

Birklein (in Schanz Bcitr., Heft 7) show bow it extends during the lives of the great writers, thougli evidently a matter of Thus Sophocles has "94 examples per 100 personal taste.

Aeschylus "63, and Euripides only •37. Aristoplianes but if we left out bis lyrics, the frequency would be

lines,

has "42

;

This is eloquent testimony about the same as in Euripides. for the narrowness of its use in colloquial speech of the Attic golden age and the fact is significant that it does not appear in the early Acharnians at all, but as many as 17 times in ;

the Plutus, the last product of the poet's genius.

Turning to Herodotus showing only "0 7 examples per Teubner page, and only one-fifth of his occurrences have a preposition. Thucydides extends the use greatly, his total amounting to 298, or more than "5 a page in the speeches be has twice as many The figures for the orators have already been alluded as this. of the whole matter conclusion The to. subject to correction which is needed for more the from thorough investigation

prose,

we

find

:

safety

— seems

to

be that the articular infinitive

is

almost

entirely a development of Attic literature, especially oratory, from which it passed into the daily speech of the least

cultured people in the later Hellenist world. it is

enough by

itself to

If this is true,

show how commanding was the part

taken by Attic, and that the literary Attic, in the evolution of the Kotvr].

The application

of the articular infin. in

NT

Greek does

not in principle go beyond what is found in Attic writers. have already dealt with the imputation of Hebraism which

We

the frequency of iv tcS

c. inf.

has raised.

in Thucydides, 26 times in Plato, and the fact that it exactly translates the

make

It is used 6 times

16 in Xeuophon

Hebrew

infin.

;

and

with 3

any worse Greek, though this naturally inOnly one classical development failed frequency. to maintain itself, viz. the rare employment of the infin. as a thus in Demosfull noun, capable of a dependent genitive

does not creases

it

its

:

"

" or in Plato, their good sense thenes, TO 7' ev ^poveiv avrSiv, Heb 2^^ hia ttuvto^ tov ^>> is an exact Sia Trarro? tov elvai. ;

NT

alone in Greek, though parallel to this last, but it stands ro uSiaKptTov ri/xa)v ^?>. has Gildersleeve as notes, Ignatius,

The

fact

that

^P/v

infinitive

form

may

was

by

this

account for

time an entirely isolated its

peculiar treatment.

A


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

216

may possibly contribute to the common vernaNT) phrase ek irelv,^ which we compared above

similar cause

cular (not

81) to the Herodotean uvtI

(p.

prepositions which Birklein

(p.

anarthrous

c.

104)

notes

infin.

The

never used

as

with the infin. retain this disqualification in the NT: they are, as he notes, either purely poetical or used in personal It

constructions.

be worth while to give a table of

may

relative frequency for the occurrences of the articular infini-

NT

in

tive

Jas has

books.

(7=)

•89 (in

1-09; Lk (71=) nearly ) Ac (49 = ) Pastorals not at all) ;

•68incc. 13-28);

(13=) -32; Jn one

has 1

-43

that

:

1

=

(4

NT

the other

Mt and Mk c.

this

writer's

books have none.

The general blurring

mf.

(-73 in cc. 1-12,

'7

=

'35; Mk [Mk] le^^" )

figure will

It

stand

at

be found

are about level with the Kosetta Stone.^

.

Tou

per page; Paul (106 = )

-99;

Pet (4 = ) '59; Mt (24 Eev (1=) -027. ) '076;

makes

which

ex.,

WH

1'08

Heb (23 =

,

.

,

of the expressions •

J.

J

£

which were once appropriated tor purpose, That has infected two varieties of the articular infinitive. with Tov started as a pure adnominal genitive, and still such

remains

•jropeveadat.

in many places, as 1 Co 16*, u^lov tov But though the rov may be forced into one

the ordinary genitive categories in a fair proportion of occurrences, the correspondence seems generally to be

of its

accidental

makes

almost as TOV

:

the extension which began in the classical period Greek a locution retaining its genitive force

in later

little as

The normal use of was specially developed this remains its principal

the genitive absolute.

c. inf. is telic.

With

this force it

by Thucydides, and in the

NT

We

will analyse the exx. given in the concordance, in which rov is governed by a preposition, those omitting has 6 exx. : and those which are due to the LXX. use.

Mt

in one of them, 21^^ tov TrtaTeva-ac gives rather the content

than the purpose of of the total for the

5

may

fiere/xeXyjOrjTe.

NT.

Luke

supplies two-thirds

Lk we have 23

In

exx., of

which

be due to dependence on a noun, and about one-half

Winer (413) cites two exx. But not to els fta^ai, OP 736 (cir. A.D. 1). from Theodoret. See Kiihner^ § 479. 2. Add an ex. with axpL from Plutarch An inscription of iii/B.c. {OGIS 41, Michel 370) has diroaToXeis p. 256 D. " See p. 241. ^TTt ras TrapajSoXas rQf SikQv 'Ka.jj.^dveiv Dittenberger emends. 1

.

:

.

.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

217

seem clearly final; in Ac there are 21, with 2 adnominal, and less than half final. Paul shows l.". (only in liom, Gal, 1 and 2 Co, Phil), but there is not one in which purpose is In Heb there is one adnominal, one unmistakable. (11*^)

or

Jas 5^^ (object clause), 1 Pet 4^^ quasi- final. ^ and the peculiar Eev 12^ supply the remainder. (adnominal), Before turning to grammatical detail, let us parenthetically commend the statistics just given to the ingenious analysts who reject the unity of the Lucan books. The uniformity of use is very marked throughout Lk and Ac: cf Ac 27^ final

We "-document) with I520 20^, Lk 21^2 with Ac Q^\ Ac We Note also the uniform "-document) with 14^^. ("

("

2 0^7

proportion of final Tov, and tlie equality of total occurrences. When we observe that only Paul makes any marked use of

Lk and Ac (the two writers together c. inf., outside accounting for five-sixths of the NT total), and that his use differs notably in the absence of the tehc force, we can TOV

hardly deny force to the facts as a contribution to the evidence on the Lucan question. In classifying the uses of this TOV,

Lk

we note how

closely it runs parallel with im.

17^ avevSeKTov eaTiv rod

.

.

.

/i?)

Thus and Ac 10^^

e\6elv,

e^evero tov elaeXOelv (cf 3^-), where the tov clause represents a pure noun sentence, in which to would have been more correct,

be paralleled at once by irodev ixot tovto Xva After verbs of commanding we may have

may

eXdy; in Lk TOV or iva.

1*^.

We

find the simple infin. used side by side with It is not worth while to (purpose) and 1'^^. labour any proof that purpose is not to be pressed into any example of tov where the context does not demand in

it

it

Lk

l'^''^-

but we must justify our assertion about Paul. It is are no possible or even plausible

;

not meant that there

cases of final tov, but only that

purpose he uses other means. c.

inf. is

(Ptoni

epexegetic

1523, 1

Co

(Eom

910

16^

1-^

2

ablative construction (Ptom

WH

when Paul wishes

Co 8^\ Phil 15'"^, 2 Co

make this a quotation from Dan Michael, who in the latter says eVioTp^/'w rod See below. ^

to express

In the majority of cases tov 7^ 8'^, 1 Co 10^^), adnominal

lO'''--":

S^i),

or in a regular

1^).

The rendering

the former verse names

TroXefj-ijaai /xera

kt\ (Theodotion).


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAIilENT GREEK.

218 "

so as to

"

will generally express 6^ and Phil ?^'^

Eom

force are

The nearest

it.

;

but in both

to pure final

would be

it

the main natural to recognise result as purpose quite purpose is expressed by a clause with I'va in each case, and the rov c. iufin. comes in to expound what is involved in as

the purpose stated. that in Eev 12'^,

An

we might

the

extreme case where 7roXe/Ao<?

of

explanatory

infin.

explained by rov The construction 7ro\efi7]aai with subject in the nominative. is loose even for the author of Eev, but the meaning is clear

is

is

:

"

et certaby Vergil's " or more closely men erat, Corydon cum Thyrside, magnum if we may pursue our former plan of selecting English still sentences of similar grammar and widely different sense " There will be a cricket match, by such a construction as

illustrate

apposition

;

the champions

to 'play

the rest."

Two ripos TO

and j^rj^yg

other modes of expressing purpose more limited extent, infected

been, to a

same general tendency. JTpo? to Mt and once in Mk, with clearly except perhaps in Mt 5-^, where it might rather by the

c.

infin.

occurs 5 times in

final force,

Lk 18^ seem to explain ^Xiiroiv than to state purpose. and Ac 3^^ stand alone in Luke, and the former is hardly final we go back to a more neutral force of Trpo? " with " Paul has it 4 times, reference to the duty (Winer).

:

and always

to

agent's mind, as

express

W.

F.

"

"

the

subjective

Moulton observes

purpose

(WM

414

in n.,

the after

This then is a locution in which the Alford). to c. infin. sense has been very little invaded.

Meyer and final is

Ek

almost exclusively Pauline.

It

occurs thrice in Mt, in Lk and Ac have it once

very similar phrases, all final Mk, each, with final force fairly certain. ;

two exx. each, also said of the 8 exx. in distributed in

final

Heb.

Paul, esp. Philem and the Pastorals.

;

Jas and 1 Pet have

and the same may probably be The remaining 44 exx. are evenly Eom, Th, and Co none in Col,

Westcott on Heb 5^ distinguishes which he notes as occurring in

between 'tva and et? to, " iW close connexion in a considerable number of passages and in the direct immediate to mark each case appears end, while et? to indicates the more remote result aimed at or reached." This seems to be true of both rov and :


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. ek

we have

Since

TO.

its

appropriation

that

would

TO

el<i

to

however, this

seen that

telic

lose

'lua

it

force,

more

it

219

has lar^rely lost

itself

would naturally follow on tlie whole, easily :

On Heb

hardly the case.

11^, Moulton and Westcott, independently, insist on the perseverance of the final meaning, in view of the writer's usage elsewhere. The eh to r-^eyovevat (mark the perfect) will in this case depend on KaTijpTicrOac, and describe a contemplated effect of

Gen 1. Paul's usage is not so uniform. It is dispute Burton's assertion (MT | 411) that in 1 2^ 2 Co 8«, Gal 3" (not, I think,i in 1 Th 2i«) ek to in

the/«^

to

difficult

Rom

is

"expresses tendency, measure of

Add

or actual."

the content of

the

acting for

remote

here

as

WM

Eom

1-''

;

dealing with

SH

in

so

is

We

must

rejecting Burton's reasoning as

this belongs to the category of passages Divine action, in which contemplated and actual for

results, final

and consecutive

differentia.

It

paper by

or result, conceived

epexegetic inf. (1 Th 4^). Purpose to be practically evanescent.

however agree with to

effect,

414 n.) exx. of eZ? to expressing (with a command or entreaty (as 1 Th 2^-), or

Mr

clauses, necessarily lose their

been often asserted cf especially a " A. Carr on The Exclusion of Chance from the has

that Hebrew teleology is Expos, v. viii. 181 ff. responsible for the blurring of the distinction between pur" subtle influence of Hebrew pose and consequence it is a Bible," in

:

thought on the grammar of Hellenistic Greek."

a Hebraism

This might

in thought, not language of where the action God that last like mentioned, passages " can But the idea that " Hebrew teleology is described.

be allowed

have

much

as

to

of

do with these phenomena as a whole

is

put

out of court by the appearance of the same things in language which Semitic influences could not have touched.

We

Evidence of the Papyri, etc.

BU

have already shown ^^ .f

witnesses:

^-^^^1

JjU

this for

'iva.

^^^

^^^^^

^^^

boo

rU

t.\ (i/A.D.)

A

few exx.

vernacular '

^

-

afieXecv

tov

830

Koi irpoaipetu, ypu(f)etv. (I/a.D.) )(^pr} ovv eroi/xdaeiv for parallel construcXv TOV Jn -n-wkelv: cf Mt 5^, 18^^ e;^t

^

See Findlay

CGT

in loc, where strong reasons are given for accepting

EUicott's interjiretation, seeing here the purpose of God.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

220

BU 1031 (ii/A.D.) tions with e^&). JHS, 1902, 369 (Lycaonian inscr., rod

fie

Sc'^oToiJ,t]aavTi (iii/A.D.)

KwXvovTe'i rov

BU

36

(ii/iii

164

(ii/iii A.d.)

BM

23

ere

.

.

tov

/jlov

evpeOrjvai,

tu>

NP

16

4*^,

Ac

2

Co

cf

:

ireccrat

.

nroirjaai.

earlier)

(cause).

Lk

/xeTaaTrja-ai

irpoaheofxevov fjui^i

eh

cf

:

or

iii/A.D.

^t]v

aireipeiv

^r]v

TrapaKoXa)

TOV ae

(i/A.D.)

XoeTrov

fir]

tov

A.d.)

(ii/B.C.)

to

rod

(ppovrjaop

1 4^^, etc.

BU

TreptTroitjaai.

"

apparently meaning ^ the document is

of your not being found," as if tw and naturally ejects the dative.

86

595

because

illiterate

:

OP

BU

1^.

avrov tov eXdelu.

(Iv/a.d.) e'^o?

eaTlv

OP 275 (I/a.D.) airoairaOrivai deaOai tov cf 156 i^ovalav tov cf BU 46 (ii/A.D.) evKai,pia<; 1 Co 9*^. evpelv ae tov irdv Lk 22*^. BU 625 (ii/iii a.d.) irolrja-ov aireveyKe The usage is not common in the papyri. so 845 (ii/A.D.). TOV

tov

TTapaa-'^edrjvai.

CPIt

eTTiTeLfiov.

.

,

.

.

.

.

.

.

:

.

:

:

plentiful testimony from LXX, Apocrypha, 411) illustrates what the Byzantine writers

Winer's

(WM

suggest, that

statistics

PFi 2

as

telic:

et?

laneous exx.

to iv

NT

the higher stratum of belongs For et? to we may quote the reto

it

education in the main.

current formula

and

firjhevl fie/ju^dPjvai,

which

is

decidedly

OP 82

Miscelquater, (iii/A.D.). 18 69 in be seen (ii/A.D.), (ii/A.D.),

(iii/A.D.)

BU

OP

may

195 (ii/A.D.), 243 (ii/A.D.), 321 (iii/A.D.), 457 (ii/A.D.), 651 Like the rather 731 (ii/A.D.), and 747 (ii/A.D.). (ii/A.D.), the to commoner Trpo? to, it seems carry thought of a remoter an This is well shown by end. purpose, the tendency towards is main the the cases in which represented by iva or purpose and an ultimate object is tacked on with the articular Thus BU 226 (I/a.D.) otto)? elSfj irapeaeaTai. infinitive. = OTUV ktX Trpo? to tv')(Iv /xe tt}? utto -6ai) avTov ( uKoXovda OP otto)? 237 (ii/A.D.) (TOV ^orjOei'm. (f)povTi(Tr]<i nraXiv avTov avTwv twv to firj irepl 'irpo<i irpa^ai OTTO)?,

.

.

.

TT/JO?

force

is

nor do

ih.

^

\^(,va\

h'

ovv

.

.

.

8ia/xevrj

.

.

.

i]

^pT]aei<i

NT

which the purpose

is

least evident

;

go beyond

see in these other illustrations.

Before .

.

.

This kind of final fir) irdXiv diroypa^ri'; herfOrjvaL. exx. in seen have what we nearly all the just

those in

what we

.

.

.

evTVj^dvetv.

TO

.

Cf 2 Co

with

dealing

the

2^^

;

l^Vh (ii/B.O.) ^XXws ^k

proper,

Participle ___

^

.

tQ

fxi^Oiv

.

we may

-

e'xetv Tr\i)v

rod JlroXefxaiov,


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

221

touch on another category closely connected with it. Brugmann has shown {Idg. Forsch. v. 80 ff") that the briefly

Greek The Participle and the Verbal

participle,

-mcno-, and

_^^^

.

..^,

.

^.

proethnic

Adjectives

\

,

sufiixes

represents the •

,

,.

,

,

which was intimately the tense system while

participle,

with

connected there are primitive verbal which in other languages

—have become examples

formed with the -loos- (-^ls-),

;

notably that in -to-, Latin and English arc obvious

adjectives,

associated more intimately with the form in Greek has never come into the and its freedom from tense connexions may verb system " " amatus est and " he is be seen from the single fact that " " " and \o\ed represent different tenses, while scri])tv.m est " " Even in Latin, a word like iacitus it is writtc/i agree.^ illustrates the absence of both tense and voice from the verb.

The

-ro'i

;

in

adjective

its

primary

concerns Latin and the

use.

Brugmann's paper mainly and we shall only

Italic

dialects,

pursue the subject just as far as the interpretation of the The absence of voice has just been Greek -to? calls us.

remarked or

"

This

on.

Tov in lioni

8^:

is

is

well shown by the ambiguity of aSvva-

it

"incapable," as in Ac 14^ NT occurrences ?

impossible," as in the other

cannot

us

tell

it

:

a

is

of

English

this adjective is

"

tense,

Aktionsart."

purely note

we may

absence

lexical

Eom 15\

Grammar As to problem.

that both

Greek and

in of

time and of

wholly independent and beloved may answer and ajair'qdel';. '^yaTTTjfMevo'?, a<ya'7rcofxevo<i,

Both

dyair'nTO'i

indifferently to This fact has some exegetical importance.

the timeless adjective

"

cursed

"

Thus in Mt 25^^ would answer to the Greek

The perfect Kari^pa/jbivot has the full perfect and this force, "having become the subjects of a curse"; makes the predicate translation (RVmg "under a curse") That our -d (-n) participle has no decidedly more probable. tense force in itself, and that consequently we have no exact KaTaparoL.

aorist or perfect participle representative of either present, is a point that will often need to be borne in Greek, passive

mind.

in

1

The

times.

The very word

just used, ho7me,

verbal adjective in -no- stands parallel with that in

translates

-to-

the

from primitive


222

A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

Mk

while its punctiliar equivalent the aorist eve-^Oeiaav in 2 Pet 1^^ hrought represents (RVmg) and the similar taken aioay stands for rjpixevov in Jn 20^; " and yet all these are called " past participle in English present alpofievov in

2^,

Having cleared the way for a lexical treatment -t6<;, by leaving usage in each case to decide whether an intransitive, an active, or a passive meaning is to be assigned to each word, we may give two or three examples which will lead to a new point. HvveT6<; is a good example " it is always active, of an ambiguous word intelligent," in

grammars.

of the verbals in

:

NT, but Euripides the two.

in

writers

earlier

IT 1092

it

6v^vveT0<;

Eom

''Ao-vveTO'; in

is

also

^vverolac

passive.

^od

1^^ is also active,

LS

cite

as

combining but the next

combined with it by paronomasia, gets its from the middle o-vvOeaOai, " not covenanting." An meaning of the and at the same of time the free use example passive, " of these adjectives in composition, is OeoStSaKTo^; GodIntransitive verbs cannot show naturally tauglit." passive Thus ^6aT6<i fervidus, from ^e{a)ai " to boil." But meaning. when we examine 6vr]T6<i, we see it does not mean " dying " " " " " mortal but but iraOrjTO'i is probably not suffering of So often with transitive suffering," ^^aT^z'&ife "capable " " would be rendered o The invincible Armada verbs. invictus be similarly used in would o-ToXo? ariTrriTo<i Br] " " in that sense in and can be read Latin, unconquered

word

a(7vv06To<i,

;

'

'

:

A

considerable number of these adjectives answer English. thus to Latin words in -Mlis, as will be seen from the lexicon :

we need

cite

no more here.

It will

be enough merely to

mention the gerundive in -reo?, as it is only found in Lk 5^^ It is not unknown in tlie papyri, /3\'t]Teov "one must put." but can hardly have belonged to the genuine popular speech.

A Indicative

^^^^ÂŽ

considerable ^°

proportion

of

what we

^^^ about the Participle has been

One Hellenistic use, already anticipated. in the discussion of the Imperative (pp. 180 ff.), be finished off at this point, before we go on to describe

adumbrated

may

That the participle can be subordinate participial clauses. used for indicative or imperative seems to be fairly established now by the papyri. Let us present our evidence before applying

it

to

the

NT

exx.,

which we have already


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE. given so far as the imperative the following may be cited: a-TjfiaLVOfjbevcoL

For indicative

concerned.

is

—Tb

P 14

evooircov,

iraprj'yyeXKOTe^:

tw/-

(ii/r..c.)

"

'Hpan

223

I

ovv

gave notice

Tb P 42 (ih.) j^St/CT/z^eVo? (no person" (no verb follows). AP 78 (ii/A.D.) ^(.av irda'^cov e/facrroTe, etc. verb follows). Tb P 58 (ii/p..c.) 'ypd-\lra<i oTrft)? ei'S^?, kuI <tu (no verl)).

in

NP

49 (iii/A.D.) ort ". dvaycovlaro'; taOet. e^ayp7]aavTe^ Kol ." On a(f>eTepiaavre<;, koX dirdvTrjKa avToi<;. .

.

GH

.

.

.

26

.

.

.

.

<7Vve7nKe\€vova7]<i t^9 tovtcov

(ii/B.c),

T/79 TIa(bTo<i "

crvu€vSoKovvT€<i

Twv

.

fir}Tpo<i

irpoyeypadix/jiivcov),

0pf]pi<;

the edd.

The construction is hopeless one of the participles avvevS. must be emended to the indicative, and The writer of the papyrus the cases altered accordingly." uses his cases in a way which would have convicted him of remark

:

;

crvveTTiK. or

Semitic birth before any jury of but if awevSoKovfjLev long ago

NT is

;

SoKovvre'i,

we may perhaps

grammarians not very meant by the crvvev-

translate

without

emendation,

taking tmv it. as partitive gen. like Ac 21^^ {s2qn\, p. 73). In Par P 63 (ii/B.c.) evrev^iv rj/xlv irpocfiepo/uLevoi comes in so long a sentence that the absence of finite verb may be mere

OP 725

anacoluthon.

"

Be 'H. evSoKcov TouTOi<i irdai

(ii/A.D.) to all this,

In and to teach," etc. CPE, 4 (I/a.d.), Kal fjirjheva KcoXvovTa, for KtoXveiv, seems to be the same thing in oo^at. ohl., but more clearly due to anacoPor the imperative there is the formula seen in luthon. Kol eKheihd^eiv,

G

35

H. agrees

iavrcov 8e einp,e\6ixevoL "v

(i/B.C.)

plural precedes): so (all

Ptolemaic),

Par

P

G

63,

FP 112

etc.

vyiaivrjTe (1st person 30, Path P 1, Tb P 12 translated above, (I/a.d.,

178) kirkypv {= -cov) Zw'ikwi Kal elva avrov /j-t] SucrwTTjjcri;?, Tb P 50 (I/b.C.) eV oh idv irpoaBajade fxov i'lmda-crovrh fioc (This is a letter from following a gen. al)S. irpoOvfiorepov p.

"

an official of some importance (G. & H.), who bears the Greek name Posidonius. We may observe that the parti-

"

cipial

use

mark

of

though

we

are discussing

is

fairly certain,

was not

in the papyri not at all a

It will be

inferior education.)

seen that the use,

in the vernacular very

common.

may be recalled that in a prehistoric stage Latin used tlie the 2nd plur. middle for participle for an indicative, where some reason became unpopular and scquiminl = eiro/xevoi not

It

;

only established

itself

in

the

present,

but even

produced


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

224

analogy-formations in future and imperfect, and in the subjuncCf the constant ellipsis of est in perfect indie, passive. If tive.^ further analogies

may

be permitted, we miglit refer to the plaus-

connexion claimed between the 3rd plural indicative and the participle in all languages of our family hheronti {fervid, ^epovai, Gothic hairand, etc.), and hheront- (fc^'cns, (fiepwv,

ible

:

These analogies are only adduced

hairanch).

use of

tlie

show that the

to

participle always lay ready to hand, with or without

the auxiliary verb, and was a natural resource whenever the

ordinary indicative (or, less often, imperative) was for any In D we find this use apparently arising cause set aside.

from the

translation

literal

Aramaic:

of

see

Wellh.

21.

We may

proceed to give some NT passages in which the those where participle appears to stand for an indicative the imperative is needed were given on pp. 180 ff. As before, :

we shall begin with those from Winer's list (p. 441 f.) in which we may now reject his alternative construction. Kom 5^^ is most naturally taken this way Winer's explanaKav)((jiJixevoi :

seems forced. reading with their tion

L and

the rest correctly glossed the true

Kav)((M[xe6a.

In

Heb

7"^

we might have

to

take refuge in explaining ipfirjvevo/jievo^ as an indicative, if we felt ourselves tied to 09 a-vvavTr]aa<i in v.^ which is read by XABC^DEK 17. But it seems clear that we may here

accept the conjecture of C*LP and the later MSS, the doubled sigma being a primitive error parallel with those in 1135 ryvvaiKa<i (i^AD and the new Oxyrhynchus papyrus) and

11^ auTov Tm 060) (where Hort's avTcp rov Šeov is now found in the papyrus, as well as in Clement) this is an excellent witness to the scrupulous accuracy of the /S-text in preserving :

even errors in is

to

parallel

maintained

omit

:

Sft)cro)

its

the

LXX

if

had

the order Si8ov<i

Heb of

Scoaco,

8^^ 10^^ SiSoix;

thought is to be but AQ and Heb

(because there was only the simple Qal in the leaving BlSov<; to do the work of an indicative.

Hebrew ?), Winer (p. 717) would make

Co 7^^

ciple, as in

Col

at the goal

by the way

^

In

ancient source.

eTnypd'xJrco,

l-*",

1

of

e7riypd\lfco etc.

In

anacoluthon

a substitute for parti-

Ac 24^

—Luke

evp6vTe<; arrives

cruelly reports

Scquiminl imperative has a different history: ef the old infinitive

Skt. sacamane.

See p. 241.

eir^/Mevai,


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

225

In 2 Co V' OXi/So/xevoi is most simply perhaps 7rap€KX)'j67]H€v was in mind for 'ATrayyeXkwv in the a-text (HLP and cur-

the orator verbatim.

taken in this way

main

the

of

verb.

Ac

sives) of

26-*^

:

woukl be explained

iyevofji'tjv is still

though the influence were this a marked

thus,

consciously present

:

irregularity, the Syrian revisers would hardly have admitted 12*^ exovre^ is I think for In it. see above, e^ofiev In Eev 10^ ^X^^ is ^or el'^ev Winer allows that p. 183.

Eom

:

:

"

i(TTL [rather ^v]

may

be supplied."

class of participle altogether is that " of hanging non)inative," which our

So 21^^- ^^ A different coming under the head

own nominative

absolute

translates so exactly that we forget the genitive presumed in the Greek. Heb 10^ will be a case in point if the text is

—Westcott and Peake

acce])t hvvarai, which is strongly boh vg the the combination supported by (so W. F. in follows the Comvi. construction Moulton, loc.) expressly vouched for by Theophylact, reading ej^wy as an " absolute

sound

DH

In Phil

clause."

1^*^

abs. (or dat. agreeing

as

if

HG

similarly takes the place of a gen.

viiiv)

ekd^ere had preceded.^

anacoluthon

to

e')(ovTe<i

with

500.

here.

:

the construction

The idiom

see other exx. in

Answering Viteau,

Thumb

EV

:

who

in fact is

WM as

taken up

is

due merely

716 and Jannaris Hebraism

usual sees

observes {Hdlenismus 131) that the usage is Greek, and in Hellenistic both in and

found in classical

outside Biblical Greek,

which

ends

in

MGr

"

and

with

is

the precursor of the process disappearance of the old

the

only an absolute form in -ovra^ is identical, to be sure, with This construction being the nom. 'pendens unaccompanied by the participle it is as

participial

constructions,

left."

:

common

in English as in Greek, the one as in the other.

We

and just as

saw when we

first

"

Hebraistic

introduced

"

in

the

participial substitute for indicative or imperawith tive (p. 182), that its rationale was practically Our next subject the suppression of the substantive verb. will therefore naturally be the use of the participle in peri'

^

Liglitfoot rejects the alternative punctuation So Kennedy . . Trao-xe'" as a parenthesis. seems to me. Tjrts

.

15

(WH) which wouhl treat {EOT in loc.) — riglitly, it


226

A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

Since the question of Semitism is rather phrastic tenses. Blass (pp. 202 ff.) acute here, we will deal with it first. discovers the influence of Aramaic especially in the periphrastic imperfect: in the case of Mt, Mk, Lk and Ac 1—12 " this is no doubt due to their being direct translations from "

Aramaic

"

based on direct translations," would be originals a better way to put it. Schmid (Attic, iii. 113 f.) has a valuable note, in which, after sketching the extent of this

periphrasis in classical Greek and literary Koivrj, he remarks that in Par P he can only find it in future-perfects, and twice in optative with aor. participle. Comparing this scanty result witli

"

the extraordinary abundance of the participial

NT

NT

one cannot avoid separating the ., periphrasis in use from that of the Koivrj, and deriving it from the Heb. and can of course have no Syr. application of the participle." .

.

We

In translated Greek, as we objection to this, within limits. have seen again and again, we expect to find over-literal

still more to find an overdoing of correct idioms which answer exactly to locutions characteristic of the The latter is the case here. No one language rendered.

renderings,

denies that periphrasis is thoroughly Greek and a half of classical exx. in Kiihner-Gerth

see

:

i.

38

the page ff.

It is

only that where Aramaic sources underlie the Greek, there is inordinate frequency of a use whicli Hellenistic has not

Of Wellh. 25. The exx. in conspicuously developed. (see Blass 203 n.) and Paul we may treat on purely

Jn

Greek lines. By way of further limiting the usage, we observe that the imperfect is the only tense in which correspondence with Aramaic is close enough to justify much of a case for dependence. No less an authority than Wellhausen warns us not to carry the thesis into the imperative " "laOi :

in

participle or adjective often le^O, and in consideration of Prov 3^

imperative

before

b^\ Lk not to be treated as an

(Mk

occurs

LXX

is

"

{Co7mn. on Mt 5^^). Then we note the papyrus usage. "E'x^cov earl and Seov eari (with other impersonal verbs) are both classical and vernacular.

Aramaism

The future eaofxaL c. perf. part, is well kept up in the papyri, and so is the periphrastic pluperfect: thus, OP 285 (I/a.d.) ov T^fiTjv evS€Sv/jLevo<{ 'y^LTWva, Par P 8 (ii/B.C.) wv rjiMrjv hi avTOJV There can be no thought of Aramaisms Trapafxe/uberprjKVLa.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

227

But BIT 183 (I/a.d.), 6</)' ov xpovov ^waa y, is rather Imiited ilhistratiou for the present participle in this usage. Winer however cites Lucian, observing that its common appear" ance in the was but seldom the Hebrew." here.

LXX

Aa

suggested by G. Kutherford's suggestive xvii. 249, in which he shows that the idiom

to classical Greek, note

Dr W.

paper, OR So in Thuc. iv. 54 ?]aav Be xii/es imparts a special emphasis. Kal ryevo/xeuoL Ta> NcKia \6<yot, "some proposals were even little

made

actually

to N." "

evTavda

peirayv,

484

Aristoph. Acli. "

Antiphon

the

puzzle

earrjKaq;

M.

(Fr.

did

3.

ouk

G7)

r)v o

ryp2(}io<i

as

much."

mean

indeed

Karainwv EvpiTriBrjp

el

not effectually saturated with Euripides " not apply this in the originally Greek parts of NT

afraid to go

we

"

Gal

1"^-,

I

!

!

was

entirely

unknown

.

.

.

;

May

—

e.g.

only they had been

." ? Paul has only one other ex, in imperfect, hearing Phil 2-^, where eiTLirodwv and uBtj/jlovoiv seem decidedly adjec.

.

and not at all improved by reading them as imperfect. (No one would cite 2 Co 5^*^.) Blass well remarks that in Jn "in most passages ^v has a certain independence of its own"; and he further notes that in Ac 13-28, where Aramaic sources are almost entirely absent, the Semitisms tival,

The except in 22^^, in a speech delivered in Aramaic. exx. of pres. partic. with imperf. of elvai is

fail,

total nmiiber of for

Mt

3

(only

Ac (1-12)

1-^

possibly

Mk

Aramaising),

Lk

16,

30,

U

(13-28) 7, Jn 10, Paul 3, 1 Pet Large deductions would have to be made from these figures, on any 17,

theory, to get the translation of an

maximum

of exx. for the

literal

supposed

Aramaic periphrastic imperfect.

Even

in

Mk

and Luke the yv is generally very distinct from the and whatever was the Aramaic original, we may participle ;

we

be quite sure that such expressions as

Lk

owe nothing The participle

4^^

earlier

usage

that

to

it

in this way.

as a whole has

See

find in p.

Mk

10-'-

or

2 4 'J.

diverged so

from

little

we have not very much more

to

say.

need no further discussion in this volume and for our present purpose little need bo added to what was An said about the articular participle on pp. 120 f.

The

'

Lk

tenses

I

3--\

count

;

eoTois as a present,

but omit

^^6;^

Tjv.

Jn

1" is ineliuleil,

but not


A GEAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

228

idiomatic

ouaav

use

o &v may be noted in Ac 13^ Kara ri]i> "the local church," 14^^ D rov 6vro<; Aio^

of

eKKKrja-lav,

Gf Ramsay's Upoirokeoi^ (or tt/oo iroXew^)} remark in Rom. Emp. 52, quoting J. A. {Ch. Particiule " Eobinson), that in Ac o &v introduces some technical phrase, or some term which it marks out as having a technical sense (cf 5^'' 13^ 28^'^), and is almost equivalent Dean Eobinson has not mentioned to ToO ovo/xa^o/xevov" this in his note on Eph 1^, though an ingenious person

might apply it there to the text with ev 'Ecfyeacp absent but the usual view needs no defence against such an alternative. With at ovaai in Rom 13^ we may compare Par P 5 (ii/fi.c.) On the crucial e(^ lepiojv Kal lepeiwv twv ovrav koX ovawv. ;

passage Rom 9^ see the argument that to be

6

eVt

6.

TT.

SH "

235

p.

He who

f.,

with

whom

I agree,

though

God over all," would have might perhaps be met by applying the is

idiom noted above for Ac, with a different nuance, ©eo^i may still be subject, not predicate, without making wv otiose

:

the consciousness

of

Ex

3^^

might

fairly

account

than grammar which makes the reference to Christ probable. One other Pauline passage claims a brief note, Gol 2^, where the natural o? It is exegesis rather

for its insertion.

" directreplaced by o avXaycoyMv, to give " ness and individuality to the reference Rela(Lightfoot). a-vXajcoy/ja-ei is

tive clauses are frequently ousted

by the articular participle, which (as Blass observes) had become synonymous therewith. There is a marked diminution in the use of the participle with verbs like Tvy^dvco, dp'^o/xai, XavOdvw, ^a'lvopbat, etc. But this was, partly at any rate, mere n Participle as i t ^ 'Occident, for Tvyxav(o c. part, is exceedingly •

Complement.

is

a phrase

common

NT

'

-

in

i.

the papyri

"

I

:

happen

to

be

"

KaXw? writers would instinctively avoid. (once or twice infin., but the participle

7rot?;cret9 c. aor. part,

overwhelmingly predominant) is the normal way of saying " and So 3 Jn in the papyri, and is classical. please I cannot in the past Ac 10^3, Phil 4^4 cf 2 Pet l^^. agree is

"

'^,

:

with Blass's

"

incorrectly ev Trpdaa-ecv in

^ Cf such phrases as rod ovtos mouth."

/j.-qvos

xo'^f,

NP

Ac 49

15'^^" (p.

(iii/A.D.),

245)

"the current ':

I


THE INFINITIVK AND PARTICIPLE.

229

except in the query he attaches to the remark.

Surely this

"

If you keep yourselves is an ordinary conditional sentence, " Ev irom^aere, from ? free from these things, you will prosper " " will but vernacular usage, would suggest you oblige us With verbs like oTBa, o/xoXoyo), Blass can hardly mean this. it a])pears fxavOavo), the participle is being encroached upon ;

:

in

2

but

is

regularly

Ac

24^*^,

recurrent

we can quote

6/A0X0709),

Jn

1

12^,

4^ (not B),

Jn^ Lk

2

generally replaced by ace. and

So Par

clause.

the

Co

P 44

(ii/B.C.) ere

or a

inf.

8^«,

on and

<yivwaKe fxe TreiropevaOai, 6tl for the participle

deXco

BU 151 (Christian period — cctOl), TP 1 (ii/B.c. NP 1 (ii/A.D. — el /judOoifii, the optative of which fyLvooa-Ketv

:

Of course Phil 4^^, efxaOov suggests culture). have learned how to be," is classically correct

.

:

.

1

.

elvai

Tim

"

I

S^^ is

any case no ex. of fiavOdvco c. part., for this could only mean "learn that they are going about." (The EV rendering is 276b 01 dfia6el<i apa Plato Winer with Euthyd. supported by

in

and the parallel phrase hihuaKeiv tlvcl from Chrysostom el mrpo? fxeWeL<; The construction /xavOcivo) liavOdveLv, with other parallels. is not unnatural in itself. as passive of hihaaKw Despite Weiss, the absolute fxavO. seems intolerable, and there is no fxavdavovat,,

aocfiol

ao(ji6v

:

Field

adds

We Participial

^^^^

we

boldly insert elvai.) come then to the manifold uses of as forming an additional clause

real alternative, unless with Blass

participle in the sentence.

one of the great resources of Greek, in which the poverty of Latin shows This

is

Our own language comes much by contrast. cannot nearer, but even with the help of auxiliaries we our cannot we match the wealth of Greek thus, participle by The elasticity of Greek distinguish \e\vK(a^ and Xuo-a?.

markedly

:

however has supplying in

and aWwufjh.

its disadvantages, such as the possibility of translation particles as widely apart as hecanse But it seldom happens that serious ambiguity

from this absence of strict logical differentiation. W^e need spend little space in classifying participial We have already seen (pp. 170 f.) that one important usages. in Hellenistic, by the encroachments criterion has arises

disappeared of fir) over the whole

In Conditional,

^^^^^^

.^

field,

^^^ essentially

when

in classical

conditional.

We


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

230

The

return to this point presently. clauses aor.

still

is

indie, in

Lk

in

subj.

Co

1

stitution for

found

freely.

compared with Mt IG-*^; for et c. pres. There seem to be no exx. of its sub-

9^^

11-^.

et

very

opt., or el c. indie,

c.

participle in conditional It stands for idv c.

irreal.

but this

;

an

is

accident, due to the relatively small number of sentences of Another class is called by Blass ^ .. „ the kind. .

"Conjunctive,

,.

.

^^

'conjunctive (cf

Ac 3")

r,,-

1

-

^

'

Giroirjaa "

Who In Mt G^^ even if he does worry, add a span to his

his ex.

is

"

can by worrying," or

>

l^** iim -i^^ ayvocov we have a choice

^ :

"

Concessive clauses are often expressed " with the participle alone Eom 1^^ though " " free big though they are," 1 Co 9^0 they know," Jas 3* Where etc. as Jude^ I causal, am," Winer), (not though ambiguity is possible, we sometimes find the meaning fixed by Heb ter once by KauTot, Kalirep, as Thil 3-*, 2 Pet 1^^ and life

.

?

'

:

;

Heb 4^

Kal

Causal

note 11^^ or Kai 76 Ac 17^^ the ov there surviving, with characteristic

ravra Heb

'

emphasis. ceedingly 2^,

Mt

l^**,

The opposite causal sense

is

ex-

Heb

Ac

6^ (unless temporal), Jas 42\ often is less etc. expressed by the partiPurpose ^ we have was future as the decaying ciple,

common

:

so

:

however Mt 27^^, and two or three in Luke. The present sometimes fulfils this function, as in Ac 15^^. which describe Finally come the temjwral clauses, or those ^^^^ attendant circumstances of an action e.g. Temijoral and Mt 13^ ware avrov eh ttXoIov e/jL^dvra KadAttendant Circumstances fjadai, " when he had entered, he sat down." ^ '

:

Clauses.

-^^

should

clause to represent these, as

few

in comparatively

cases,

not

usually

a

put

temporal

would overdo the emphasis like Ac 17^ and similar narrait

:

Our replace with iiret or ore. unless best the representative, generally Enghsh participle we change it to the indicative witli and Latin, unless the tive

passages,

we might is

:

ablative

cum

c.

absolute can be used, subj.,

circumstances.

1

It

necessarily

was not however by any means dead

ciplfs in

OP

has recourse to

normal method of expressing attendant The pleonastic participles Xa^cov, dvaard^,

its

727 (ii/A.D.)

;"

BU

98 (iii/A.D.)

:

ci'

etc.

the string of tinal fut. jiartiSee p. 241 "'

.


THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.

231

aveXdcov, largely occurring in translated passages,

iropev6e'i<;,

have been already referred to (p. 14). One interesting Aramaism may be noted here from Wellhausen (p. 22). He asserts that in Mk 2'^ \aXel l3Xaa^7]fiel (without stop) literally translates two Aramaic participles, the second of wiiich should in Greek appear as a participle. In Lk 22''^ we find ^\aa-(f)r]fiovvTe<;

But

eXeyov correctly.

it

must be noted that

punctuation Mk I.e. is perfectly good Greek, so that we have no breach of principle if we do allow this account of the passage.

with the

EV

The

large use of participles in narrative, both in grammaconnexion with the sentence and in the gen. abs. construction (p. 74), is more a matter of style than of grammar, tical

and

calls for

no special examination

We

may

some

notes on the places in which the ordinary rule, that /x.^ goes with the participle, is set

,

.

here.

close our discussion with

The number of passages is not large, and they may Mt (2 2^1) and Jn (lO^^^ have one well be brought together.^ Ac 262^ Luke 7^ 6^^^ each; (Lk 28^'^-'^) five; and there are aside.

two each in Heb (ll^-^s) and Paul has eight passages (Horn 1 Co y26, 2 Co 4s- 9 qnatcr, Gal Before discussing them, for

OP 471

ov.

1

9^^ 4^,

Pet (1^ 2^^ and Gal

4:'^'^

Phil

Col

3^,

(ii/A.D.)

OP 491

Mt

ovSeTTO) ireTrXr^pwKorcov

(when they are not yet

ov

OP 726

Svvafjievo'i

I.e.

ijKaprepeiv

ov hvvdixevo<i

(ii/A.D.)

727

— quoted

2^^, 1

Th

;

2^).

us put down some papyrus exx. rov qvk eV XeuKai^ iaOPjaiv iv

let

Oearpcp Kadicravra: cf

(ii/A.D.)

a quotation).

his

Si'

iav TeXevTi]a(o

(ii/A.D.)

€7nSi8cofj.t

:

25).

AP

78

Th

3^.

contrast 1

aadeveiav irXevaat since he

Tb P 41

ov ajo'^aaaa long gen. abs. succession): so Par P 40 ovre rod lepov aroj(aadp.evoi ovre Par P l.'> (ii/B.C.) Kparovaiv ovk dva-nkpi,rov Kokcos €^oi>ro<;.

cannot): so fjbevo'i

(

=

-ov)

(ii/A.D.).

cdv

e')(op.ev

.

.

.

(ii/B.C.)

Trlarecov (in

Tb P 34 (ii/B.C.) fxr] TrapapoxXeida) (sic) 361 (ii/A.D.) X^P^^ ^^'^ ^'X^^' ^^'^ etriordSee also Par P 14, OP 286 dTre/cpeLvaro.

\lravT6<i rrjv ^epvrjv. vtt'

fxevo^ TL (i/A.D.),

^

BU

ovSepu^.

I

Tl'Xti"'.

eKelvo<;

TP

omit

1

(ii/B.c),

ouic i^bv,

3 and 8 (ii/B.c).

used for iudic, and the

common

In

many

of

veruaeiikr phrase

these

ol'-x

o


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

232 exx.

we can

sciousness

it seems, the lingering conproper negative for a statement of a The same feeling may have made ov

distinctly recognise,

the

that

downright fact

is

oi).

when an emphatic phrase was wanted, as in Tb P 34 above. The closeness of the participle

rise to the lips

the illiterate

to the indicative in the kinds of sentence found in this list

makes the survival

Much

of ov natural.

the same principles

may be applied to the NT, though in Luke, Paul and Heb we have also to reckon with the literary consciousness of an some of the old idioms even where In two passages we had generally swept them away. [x-)] Mt 22^^ (see parallel have ov and fm] in close contact. educated man, which

above) oihe

(xrj

first is

is

left

followed in the king's question by ttw? elarfkOe^i the The distinction is very natural

6-^(ov

.

.

.

:

;

a plain fact, the second an application

of

The

it.

In emphasis would have been lost by substituting fiy^. alike are the two Pallis's MGr version of the Gospels phrases translated with hev and indie. (The completeness of MGr

by his version

levelling is well illustrated

The former becomes

koL

.

.

.

hev

of

Lk and Jn

indie.

c.

;

the

ll.cc.

latter

is

Koi ^oaKo<i /jbi]v ovra-i, followed by ttov 8ev elvat ra irpojBara " Outside the SiKa Tov, whose own the sheep are not." indicative

Sez/

is

not found.)

"

1

Pet 1^

is

...

best left to

Hort

:

not capricious. The change of negative participles fact the second of historical The first is a direct statement is

;

is

introduced as

it

bring out Blass thinks it arti-

were hypothetically, merely

the full force of iriaTevovTe';."

Though

to

hard to believe that any but a slovenly writer would have brought in so rapid a change without any The principles already sketched may be applied to reason. the remaining passages without difficulty, in so far as they In the quotations from the LXX we are original Greek. ficial to distinguish, it is

have, as Blass notes, merely the fact that i6 c. partic. was The passages in question regularly translated with ov. would also come very obviously under the rule which admits

ov

when negativing

a single word and not a sentence.


ADDITIONAL NOTES. p. 2.— Tl.imil) points out [Ildlen. 125) tliat Josephus liiis only been convicted of one Hebraism, the use of irpoaTideaOai c. inf. = " to <'o on to do" {) n^pn, i.e.

Jos. 514-7,

" to do (For this, cf Wellh. 28.) He refers to Selnnidt again "). and Deissmann BS 67 n. That the solitary Hebraism in the Pales-

tinian writer should be a lexieal one, not a grammatical, P- 7.— In the Expositor for September 1905, Prof.

tombs

earlier

at Lystra

This

normal.

is

suggestive.

Ramsay

says that

tlie

show Latin

inscriptions, while at Iconium Greek is involve our substituting Latin as the language of Paul's

may

preaching at Lystra such a conclusion would not in itself be at all surprising. P. 8. "Even a Palestinian like Justin knew no Hebrew," says Dalinan :

44) in arguing against Resch's theory of a primitive Hebrew Gospel. 14'^'' as (on Gal 4«) prefers to regard 'A/3j3d 6 iraTi^p in spoken l)y our Lord in this form. He cites from Schottgeu the ad-lrcss n'3 no, in which the second clement {Kvpie) emphasises the first by repetition ; and he compares Rev 9" 12^ 20". Thus understood, the phrase would be a most emphatic

{Words P.

10.— Lightfoot

Mk

'•'testimony to that fusion of Jew and Greek which prepared the way for the preaching of the Gospel to the heathen." Rut Lightfoot's first alternative (practically that of the text) seems on the whole more probable.

In Ac 2^ D, Blass pi;ts a full stop at the end of the verse. P. 16. But we might translate without the stop: "It came to pass during those days of fulfilment of the day of Pentecost, while they were all gathered together, that there M'as

." This is the {h) form, with /cat loov, so that it comes This punctuation helps us to give adequate force to the durative in fin. On this view D gives us one ex. of the (a) form, and one of av/j.ir\T]povadai. the (b), to reinforce the more or less doubtful ex. of {b) in the ordinary text of Ac 5''. Tliose who accept Blass's theory of Luke's two editions might say that the author had not quite given up the («) and (b) constructions when he wrote lo

!

near

.

.

{a).

his first draft of

corrected

Ac

:

before sending the revised edition to Thcophilus, he of these (like a modern writer going over his jiroofs to

what remained

expunge "split infinitives"), but overlooked 5''. I am not commending that view here but I may suggest a systematic study of the r/rammar of the D text in Luke as a })robably fruitful field for those who would contribute to the ;

greatest of all textual problems in tlic NT. P. 23. might have expected to find a specimen of Cretan in Tit 1^^ but if Ejiimenides the Cretan was really the autlior of this unflattering description of his countrymen, he waited till he came to Athens, where (among other

—We

;

aei and disyllabic dpyal. Plato makes him reach Athens just before the Persian "War. P. 30. It may be worth Avhile to add a note illustrating the early date at which some characteristic MGr elements began to ajipear in the vernacular.

advantages for this composition) he could write


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

234

On a Galatian tombstone of \i/A.-D.{BC'II 1903, 335) the word di'dTraiwts is written av<^dTr'^a^is, showing the fully developed result of the pronunciation of an as av of MGr iiraxpa from 7rai;w. liamsay (C. and B. ii. 537) notes Karea:

He also (TKi^aaa (BCH 1888, 202), which is an ex. of the same phenomenon. gives a Christian inscription of iii/A.D. from Phrygia, containing the 3 pi. eiriT-qSevaovv, and "an anticijiation of the modern periphrastic future" in noted by Mordtmann. "We may add the gen. eaov from ii/A.D., But Thumb (in BZ ix. 234) cites a yet earlier ex., exoi'ires for noni.

^ov\-i]6rj dvol^i,

as

OP

528.

or ace. pi. fem., from an inscription of I/a.d. P. 43. S. Langdon (^ JP xxiv. 447 ff.) examines the history of Mv for dv, and agrees with Winei', who thinks it a peculiarity of the popular language

Mr Langdon

attributes

"the

elTort to emphasise the abstract This would of course occur nuich more frequently with relatives without antecedent than when they were defmed This popular idiom met the necessity which the LXX by an antecedent.

(\VM

390).

it

to

conditional aspect of the relative clause.

.

.

.

translators felt in their effort to distinguish between the complete and inIn the complete relative clauses when translating from Hebrew.

...

NT

the rule of using idu in sentences without antecedent is invariably followed, almost invariably in the OT and in Christian Greek writers." Mr Langdon's trust in his one or

we can

two exx. from

MSS

classical

can hardly be sliared

LXX

;

and

translators themselves used this edv, and meant anything by the distinction, we should at least have examined the early papyri very carefully. Tlie earliest exx. quotable, so far as I know, are 220 his (133 B.C.) and G 18 (132 B.C.): Tb P 12 bis, 105, 107, are also from

before

feel

sure that the

BM

ii/B.c.

A

suggestive ex.

is

Tb P

with either interpretation of

edv.

59 (99 B.C.), where the sentence is translatable It may be noted that the rarity of antecedent

makes it easy to misinterpret statistics. banned by as "Western," occurs frequently in See Schwyzer Ferg. 118 for exx. and an explanation inscriptions and pajiyri. in these relative sentences P. 44.

—'EipiopKelv,

WH

(Thumb's). P. 55.

—A

more peculiar

189 (Rome), to wdiich Prof.

jiroduct

Thumb

is

[einKaJXeo/jLe

calls

my

{

— -ai)

attention.

in Audollent no. So KoXeu ib. no. 15

That these are genuine survivals of uncontracted forms (e.y. (Syria, iii/A.D.). from Epic dialect) is very improbable. "Pindaric Construction," wIku the verb follows, is hardly anaP. 58. colnthic it is due to a mental grouping of the compound subject into one entity " " "flesh and blood = humanity," "heaven and earth "=" the universe." A papyrus ex. may be cited BU 225 (ii/A.D.) virdpxi- Si avry iv Ty kw/j.tj oIkLm So also 537. 8uo Kai kt\. Meisterhans^ 203 (§ 84) cites a number of exx. from Attic inscripP. 60. tions of v/ and iv/i!.c., where in a continued enumeration there is a relapse Gildersleeve adds CIA i. 170-173 (v/b.c. = Robertsinto the nominative. Gardner no. 97) rdoe Trapeooaav arecpavos (pLaXai etc. To discuss this large ipiestiou for individual exx. would take us too P. 63. Blass in § 39. 3 states the case fairly he notes that the luisuse of ets long. was still a provincialism, which in respect of the local signification of ets and ev is not present in the Epistles nor (strangely enough) in Rev, though found in Hatzidakis 210 f. illustrates both the use all the narrative writers of the NT. for the latter, add the early Par P 10 of ets for iv and that of iv for ets (He should not have cited 2 Tim 1'^, where ets is dvaKex^py)K€v iv 'AXe^avdpeia. We need not accept all Blass's exx. thus Jn 17^^ is perfectly normal.)

:

:

.

.

.

.

.

.

:

:

:

surely "perfected into one."

But

it

must be confessed that our evidence now


ADDITIONAL NOTES.

235

" the combination impossible to see iu Jn l^^ (6 a-c ds to;/ kuXvov) and motion, of a continuous relation with a realisation of it " (Wcstcott). Without further remark wo will reserve discussion till the time comes for

makes

it

.

.

of rest

the prepositions systematically, suggestive substitutions of iv for els in Ac

treating

involving an entirely different sense— see et's

On

Tdpo-oc).

P.

D

only noting that in

p. 71),

and

eis

there arc

however probably

(the latter

7^- 8-^

for eV in

Ac

ll'-'^

(ecrric

this cf Wellh. 12.

65.— D

often, as Wellhausen notes (p. 13), shows ace. with aKovuf, and Kparelv, where the other texts have gen. 67.— Both in Ac 16^4 and in 18», D alters the dat. to tVi (ets) c. ace.

KaTT/jyopeTv,

P.

;

but in the latter a clause is added containing iriixTeieiv tui de<^. P. 69.— It should have been noted on p. 49 that Blass's objection

to recog-

nising the noun 'EXanbv, in Ac 1^^ and Josephus, rests upon the fact that assimilation of case is generally practised, and that in rb 6pos rCbv ekaiQiv the genitive is unmistakable. But the nom., though rare, has parallels: see Deissmann

BS

Blass rightly,

210.

equivalent to (pwvelri

fie

I think, regards Jn \Z^'^ as a vocative, and not as rbv diSciffKaXov but Winer's 1 Sam 9" is a clear ex. to ;

put by liev 9" and Blass's own Mk 3^" (as foimd iu A and the Latt.). It is noteworthy that both Luke and Josephus {Ant. xx. 8. 6 irpbs opos rb irpoa-ayopevoJud. ii. 13. 5 ets rb 'EXotwc KaXoifxevov 6pos) not only use the unambiguous genitive -Qvos {Ant. vii. 9. 2 8ia rod 'EXaidvos opovs) but also put the anarthrous eXaiuv in combination with the word called. This seems to

fievov 'EXatw;/, Bell.

show that the name was not yet fixed in the Greek speech of Jerusalem residents, and that the halfv/ay-house to the full proper name wanted some To opos

apology.

The new name

thus be a translation of

tuiv iXaiQiv will

for the hill

would

si)ring

tlie native name. from two sources, the vernacular word

and the impulse to decline the stereotyped iXaiQv. An exact was quoted in Expos, vi. vii. 111. In the Ptolemaic papyri Tb P 62, 64, 82, 98 the noun i^loov is found, which the editors connect " for the with of the word treated for olivcyard,

parallel for the latter

ibises," closely i^iwv {Tpo<prjs) feeding being as nom. sing, instead of gen. pi. : they observe tiiat "the declension of the village called 'JjSiwv ]irobably contributed to the use of this curious form."

a gen. pi. made into a new nominative which slightly different meaning already existing. Prof. Thumb tells me that the construction (parenthetic nomina-

In both words then we see

noun of

coincides with a

P. 70.

tive) survives in

E.

Tagen."

MGr

:

"

thus

tSw /cat TreVre /idpes [noni.]r= heute vor 5 "a year xxiv. 1) cites a rare use from Skt.

{dir')

W. Hopkins (^J'P

:

(nom.) almost, I have not gone out from the hermitage." Contra, Wellh. 29. it is the name given in one of lb. EiV-oj'es perhaps should be translated

:

BU

the latest issued papyri in iv. to the personal descriptions which accompany an lOU, receipt, bill of sale, census paper, etc. Ih. The vocative t] ttols, as Dr Ecndel Harris reminds me, literally trans-

Aramaic absolute an-b-q have remarked tliat the irsage lates the

Semitic.

Luke

in

Dalman gives it, Gramm. 118 n). I should commonest where there is translation from

(as is

The author of Heb does not use it except in OT Ac 13-28 (though we may note that in the three

citations,

nor does

citations involved

there is no article in the Hebrew). It is only another instance of over-use of an idiom through its coincidence with a native usage. P. 74.

— See

KtUmer-Gerth 401

Typical exx. are

awTToXoyov

irdaris <pdopa,s,

doiardaTovs ovras

irdcnis

n.-''-

Tb P

",

for these genitives

after a negative

aKivSwos iravrbs Ktvdvvov, and dvvirevOvvoL wavrbs eirirlfiov. Tb P 124 (ii/B.O.)

adjective.

ahlas.

BU

105

(ii/B.C.)

970 (ii/A.D.)

al,

Tr?s els

diravras evepyealas

.

.

.


A rfilAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

236

They

dj3ori0riTos.

differs

illustrate avofxos Oeou iu 1

only in that the genitive

Co

9'-'

=

dvev vo/wu 6eov, which

subjective, while the rest are cither objective

is

genitives or jtuve ablatives. lb. One or two parallels

may be added for the free use of the gen. abs. For the sulistitution of gen. for the case in construction, cf Tb P 41 (ii/B.c), BU 1040 (ii/A.D. ) xat'pw 6'ri ^oi iKavCiv Tj/j-Qv vwhtrTWi exovruv afa/ce%ajpT7^a/ie;' Other exx. will be seen in ravra eiroiriaas, ifjLov /j.eTa/j.e\o/j.^vov irepl fxrjoevbs. OR XV. 437. For gen. alis. without expressed subjects, cf BU 925 (iii/A.D. ?) ;

dvayvwo-OevTUV, 970 (ii/A.D.) orfKudevros di' fjs Trpoeidr] /xol da(pa\eias, etc. in Ac 4^", (paveporepov Elative comparatives may be seen in P. 78.

D

WH

(sic)

It cf p. 44, and 10^8 ^eXriov e<piffTacr6e {= ejr. ^^?i7. 144). On substitutes irXelaroL for irXeiovs in 19^", and adds an elative ribiara in 13*. As to 10^8 Blass compai'cs 24- 25^o in the ordinary text, and 2 Tim l^*, Jn 13"^. iffTiv,

and

Xeipwv, we should add that xetpta-r?;!' is found in Tb P 72 (ii/B.c). P. 79. Before leaving the subject of comparison, we ought to remark on curious forms which have been brought into existence by the weakening of the

old formations, or their detachment from the categories of comparative and Beside the regular form eXdx'O'Tos, which is predominantly supersuiierlative.

but elative in Lk {ter, and 12"^ doubtful) and Jas, Paul uses eXaEph 3^, whether as comparative or true superlative the sentence leaves uncertain. He uses eXaxttrros as superl. in 1 Co 15^, and as elative in 4^^ 6^. The double comparative /xei^'orepos occurs in 3 Jn * cf our les^icr, which is

lative in Mt,

Xi-<rT6r€pos in

:

equally due to the absence of clear comparative form iu a word whose meaning is clear. See Jannaris 147 for a list of these forms add /xei^orepos, Archiv

HG

iii.

173 (iv/A.D.)

(i/A.D.), Trpwrtcrra

On

:

BM

/.(.eyKXTOTaros

al,

BU

G65

130

(i/ii

A.D.), irpea^vrepuTepa

BM

177

Exx. are found even in older Greek.

(i/A.T).).

the Aramaising use of positive c. ij or irapa, for compar., see Wcllli. 28. AVellhauscn (p. 26) finds in the Synoptists some traces of insertion of the article through literal translation of Semitic idiom here again D is conP. 81.

:

Thus Mt

spicuous.

from the rule which a definite noun

:

so

10-^ Tov da-a-apLov. Note also his exx. of Semitism arising drops the article with a noun in construct state preceding

]\It

—Westcott

12*-

"the

(|)ueen of the

South."

"

in time of solemn translates iv avvaywyyj (Jn Q^^ IS^'') assembly." Our own use of "in church," "in or out of school," etc., is enough to illustrate this phrase, which nuist be explained on the lines described in the

P. 82.

text above

P. 84.

Westcott seems to be somewhat

it.

— On the presence or absence of the overpressing article when a prepositional clause :

has to be added as an epithet, cf J. A. Roliinson, E^ili.as. 149. For its presence may be cited such passages as Eph 1^^, for its omission, Eph 2^^ 4\ Phil 1*, Col. l^-

8.

seldom that we find in Greek of tlic NT tjqies the complex arrangement by which the classical language will wrap up a wliolc series of adjuncts between the article and its noun. 1 Pet S'' will serve as an exceptionally It is oidy very

The

good example.

simplicity of

NT

style naturally causes less involved forms

to be generally preferred.

One more paralipomenon under the

In G. A. be brought in. there is a bilingual inscription, Palniyrene-Araniaic and Greek, containing within its compass a good parallel to the genealogy in Lk 3-'^"'"^ AatXa/j.et;' Alpdvov tov MoKifiov tov There are one or two other specimens in Aipdvou Tou MaOOd (Wadd. 2586). Article

Cooke's North Semitic Inscriptions, no.

110

may

(ii/A.D.),

:

:

113 the article P. 85.

is

dropped

— In Mt 6" note that D

two

steps, as iu the first step in 110. reads dXeifov, rejecting the middle in view of

for the last


ADDITIONAL NOTES.

237

D

In Ac 5- ^Bero and ^^ crvyKaXea-dnevoi, tlie presence of a-ov. makes the opposite change, which in the former case, at any rate, is no improvement. " I'Sios in Mt and Lk is sometimes 3rd pers. P. 88.— Cf Wellh. 30: possessive." Prof. P. 89.

Thumb notes how accent may dinVrentiate words capable of "God is," but " God is Abnir/My." attenuated meaning To the exx. cited from Blass (top of p. 95) add from Hawkins Jn 1-^ P. 94. (taken like Lk Z^*^ from the original source in Mk I''), Ac Vo^~ (LXX), Rev 3^ full or

:

12 72.9 138. The idiom is in 208, ajid 1 Pet 2-^ (Ti with n"" LP, against ABCK). one place translation Greek, and in the rest a sign of inferior Greek culture, which makes it the more striking that Lk and Jn (not Mt) faithfully coj^y their Since tlie Greek of 1 Pet is remarkably good, it does not seem likely source. that ov ry nutXajTri avrov is due to the autograph the LXX airov may well have been added by a glossator who did not notice that the ov made it needless. :

This consideration may fairly be set against the a yriori argument of Ti in >Sce p. 249. favour of the reading of N. Of Josephus Ant. i. 1. 1, ai/rvj fikv o.v e'ir] Trpwri] rifj-ipa, Mwvarj's 5' P. 96.

avTTiv filav elwe TTpdiTov, fiia

Tou

Note in Gen 8^^ the variation /ii-qvbsTov which had adequate motive in the different words of the Thumb has traced the history of the Greek names for the days

(quoted by Schmidt). /j.rjvds,

Hebrew. Prof. week in ZcitscliTift fur deulscha Wortforschund i. 1G3-173 (1901). P. 102. The importance of Heb 13-^ in critical questions justifies our adding In Thcol. Hundscliaw v. 64 Deissmann writes two one more note on airo. " " marginalia i;pon Harnack's famous article in ZNTIV i. 16 ff. He notes the of the

masculine

Sirjyovfievop in ll-^-

— not,

I

presume, as a difficulty likely to give

Harnack much trouble; and observes that ol dirb 'IraXi'as "can, according to the late Greek use of airo, describe very easily the greetings of the brethren He refers to the article by E. Brose in Theol. Stud, und to be found in Italy." Brose examines dirb, trapd, viro, Krit., 1898, pp. 351-360, on d7r6 in 1 Co 11-^. and iK, showing that in daily speech these prepositions were used without exactThe argument is designed to show that dirb tov Kvplov in ness of distinction. Deiss1 Co I.e. does not mean by tradition, but by revelation from the Lord. mann observes that Brose could have made his treatment of dirb still more he refers to a "stop-gap" of his illuminating, if he had gone outside the NT own in Hermes xxxiii. 344,- which touches on the passage from Heb. :

105— On vwip we may cite a good parallel for Rom 12^, TP 8 (ii/B.c.) tavrbv <ppovQv. A very good ex. in Greek is 2 Co 4^, where perfective e^ shows the P. 112.

P. VTT^p

dwopia in its final result of despair.

In the Dream of Nectonebus, the last Egyptian king of the old P. 116. dynasties (LPw, ii/B.c), there occurs the phrase dLaTerqpTjKa tt)v x'^P"-" dfiifjurrus, The perfective in the king's which gives a striking parallel to 2 Tim 47. words emphasises the fact that the country is safe, the watchful care has been " I successful ; the simplex in Paul lays the stress on the speaker's own action,

have guarded my trust." P, 118. Hawkins, US 142, gives the number of compound verbs for the His figures work out thus :— Heb has 7*8 per several parts of the NT. Mt 3-6, Cath. Epp. and Rev 3-1, page, Ac 6-4, Lk 6-0, Mk 57, Paul 3-8,

WH

and Jn 2"1. The high figure of Mk in this table is rather surprising. That Heb and Luke (whose unity comes out by this, as by so many other tests) .should be at the top, is what we might expert. Since writing this, I have noticed Prof. Ram.say's suggestive P. 126.


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT

238

language on the early Christians of the average also his Paul 208 f. Pp. 126 and 129. F.

W. Mozley

in

—On

JTS iv.

CxREEK.

tj-pc in C.

and B.

ii.

485

:

see

the biblical use of present ami aovist imperative, cf tf. Prof. Thumb notes that Mozley independently

279

confirms his judgement on the aoristic n-pocxi<f}epev in Heb 11^'', by the observaWere the author Mark or the tion that (pipe and 6.ye are aoristic in meaning.

John of Rev, and the context yield. P. Ih.

132.— See now D. Smith, In

— In OGIS 219

(iii/B.c.)

clamant

less

the

there

is

for

an imperfect,

Days of His an

'Kodtnv

aiirCoi

message

:

tii]v

ri]ix'r]v.

it is difficult

P. 143.

— In Mt

should readily

Flesh, p. 208.

ex. of coincident affwaaiixevoi

iXiadaL de Kal irpeajSevras maj^ be worth quoting auTov rrapa t[ov orjfiov irpwTOv fx^v KeKevaovaLv i']7taii'etf :

I

.

The "salutation" seems

.

.

which

[olVtces] aa-iraaajxevoi

. . [eTretra S' airayyeto consist in the double .

anyhow to make it precede the wish for good health. we find 6 ei\ri(p<hs in a phrase otherwise parallel with

2.^-"*

\a^wv. The intervening space supplies an excuse for the change which Both tenses out of the category described in the paragraph above. were entirely justifiable, and the rather more emphatic perfect suits the situation

v.-", 6

takes

it

of v.-^ better.

must make

it clear that in this tentative account of ^trxTj/v-a which propounded with great hesit;ition, and with a full appreciation of its diffithere is no suggestion that the aoristic meaning proposed was more culties than an idiosyncrasy of individual writers, or (better) of certain localities. The pure perfect force is found long after Paul's day thus in the formula of an

P. 145.

is

I

:

aov dia x^'pos i^ oIkov -x^prjcnv '^vtokov (])U 1015 But in AP 30 (ii/B.c), early iii/A.D.), "to have received and still possess." tov M. Karecrxv^^'''^'- '''^v OLKiav irpb rod nokiixov, the aoristic TTpocre/xapTvpovi'

lOU,

dfj.o\oyu> iaxV'^^'"'-'- TajOot

in an early illiterate document. possessed seems to be recognisable, P. 146. Ol/xai dk kSlv Aa/uLTTiSu), tt]v AeurvxiSov fih dvyaripa, 'Apxi-ddfioii oe It is yvvaiKa, "AyLdos 8k /xrjTipa, ot Travres ^airiKecs yeyovaai, Oavfidaai &v kt\.

hard to see why this should be cited as aoristic Agis was on the throne at the supposed time of the dialogue. In connexion with this paragraph should be mentioned the birth P. 148. of the new present ottjkw (MGr ar^Kw) from the jierfect 'iarriKa., with the same :

meaning.

On this view of the prehistoric relations of act. and mid., cf Hirt, P. 152. The theory had been restated in terms of the Tndog. Forsch. xvii. 70. new school of philology, in OsthofF and Brugmann's pioneer Morphologische UntersucMmgen iv. 282 n. (1881). There H. Osthoff conjectures that "Skt. and dvis-te depend on one and the same proethnic basis-form [dueistai], which was difl'erentiated by the accent, according as one wished to say I had overlooked this passage, 'hdtes for himself or 'hates for himself.'" and am all the more confirmed by it in the theory which I had independently

dv6s-ti

developed as to the relationship of the voices in the element they severally emphasise. On the late Greek developments of the voices the student should carefully observe the rich material in Hatzidakis 193 ff.

The proverb in 2 Pet 2^- is acutely treated by Dr Rendel Harris, ought to have remembered, in The Story of Ahikar, p. Ixvii. He cites as the probable original words appearing in some texts of Ahikar "My son, thou hast behaved like the swine which ^ven.t to the hath with people of quality, and when he came out, saw a stinking drain, and went and rolled himself in it." P. 156.

as I

:


ADDITIONAL NOTES. seems extremely likely,

as

If,

tliis

is

239

the source of the

to wliicli

irapotfila

2 Pet refers, of course Xovaa/x^vr] is used in its correct sense, and tlie possiliility of a Cireek iambic verse being the medium of its transmission is all that remains

my note on the passage. I leave it unaltered in view of the measure of uncertainty attaching in Dr Harris's judgement to the account he jiroposes. Mr P. Giles, in a letter endorsing and improving my Scotch transP. 166. of

Homer

lation of

does for

ment

11.

i.

like at the

had added

many

137, says,

P. 168.

and B.

dialects

— Add to

agree that dv

is

what the subjunctive did

in a polite, inoffensive

elsewhere.

"I

very like

way

and

jist,

end you would have got your sulyunctivc for Greek,

if

you

This like

also.

putting a stateIt is found

asserting only verisimilitude."

this list the curious anti-Christian inscription in

Ramsay,

477 (uo. 343) oSros 6 ^ios /xol yeyovev (aoristic !) orai' t^wv eyd). Since writing the paragraph on el ix-qn dv, I have observed several P. 169. dv in illiterate Greek of a century or two later than the other exx. of ei C.

ii.

.

.

.

An

NT.

JUS

W.

inscription from Cyzicus, lately ]iublished by ^Ir F. XXV. 63, has t tls 5' av ToKix-qcn, /uiTtXdri avrov 6 Geds.

Ilasluck

(The second subjunctive here is the itacistic equivalent of the optative which would have been used in earlier Greek: cf p. 199u.). In Ramsay's C. and B. vol. ii. I No. 210 (p. 380) ei de tls dv (pavelr) ^arai note the following ., where the optative shows the writer a bit of an Atticist, but not very successful. in

:

No. 377 Tivi

.

530) KareaKevaaev to

(p.

.

.

,

Kal tu> dvopl avT?is iivrvxr) Kai

ijpi^ov eavrr)

el

No. have not had time to

idv ris

j"w(ra cruyx^pi^eret' el 8e /xera ttjv TeXevTrjv /xou

dv

.

eTnxi-pricrei

kt\.

I dv ewLxeipTjlaei, drj]aei kt\. (p. 394) el dk [eVepos] search throughout, but I suspect there are many other exx. On /XT? in questions see J. E. Harry, Gildersleeve Studies, 430. P. 170. He shows it was absent from orators and historians, and from the later writers

273

and Diodorus. Plato uses it 24 times but the 69 occuroutnumber those in all the prose and poetry of ten previous The inference is that it was a feature of everyday language. In

Aristotle, Polybiiis,

;

NT

rences in centuries.

nearly half the exx. the verb

from Jn and Paul (only

Rom

is he,

and

can, or have

;

three-fourths of the total comes

Co).

For ^ktos el firj see Deissmann, BS 118. Cf also Ramsay, 0. and B, 391 (no. 254) xwpis el firi tl TrdOrj. lb. On the encroachments of /xiy, especially as to oti /xri and /n-n c. inf. after Green verba dicendi et cogitandi, see E. L. Green in Gildersleeve Studies, 471 ff. P. 171.

ii.

shows how

in the Kolvt) literature. Considering tlie ixri intrudes increasingly extent of this intrusion in the time of the NT, there are fewer exx. of hi) that fxr} holds almost undLsj^uted wrongly used than would be expected, except

of

after a verli of

saying sway over the participle. There are 6 exx. or denying [Lk 22^^ must however be struck otl (WH, following XBLT)] one case of causal &ti ix-q, Jn 3"* 2 with verbs of thinking (2 Co ll^ Ac 25"'^) 3 of 1X7) after relatives. (In excluding Col 2^* because an imper. precedes, Green more decisive reason that ixi] is indisputably spurious.) The a ix-fj

c. inf.

;

;

;

ignores

yet

in causal, concessive, obi. occurs only in Ac 23-^ 28" participle with n-q in orat. and temporal clauses it abounds. The comparison of Plutarch with the NT shows a great advance in the use of 6Vi yttr?. The whole paper deserves study. A few papyrus passages may be cited in illustration of the subjects of Green's For ij.t] in relative clauses :—BU 114 (ii/A.D.) irpooTKa i]v diroSidwKev paper. For d /j.t] avve<pil,vr]<Ta. CPR 19 (iv/A.D.) evTd^as 86vaTaL avTu, ;

.

die.

KaTeyvwKws

.

.

Xajie'iv,

/JL-fiTe

verba

et cor/. (xt)

:— MP

Swacr^ai,

25

OP

(iii/B.c.)

206

/xry

64>ei\eLv 6/x6ffas /xoi,

(i/A.D.) o/xoXoyel

p.}]

BM

401

(ii/fi.c.)

cvKaXelv (classical, as

ofi.

=


A GRAMMAE OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

240

OP

midcrtaJces),

237

dTreKpeb'aTo cf /.L-i]

(ii/A.P.)

For eVet

S-nXovu (liU 5, 11, etc.).

/j.^

BU

c

inf.,

and several

530 (i/A.D.)

fiit-Lcperai

ex. in Jn /.c). dvTeypa^pai avrrj (the charge, like the On ei ov Blass notes {Hermes xxiv. 312) its identity with

ci^l

cases with

ae fVt

fn)

^ii;

in the

OP

119 (see p. 28). A note may be added on /xt] '6ti for though the NT only uses ovx on, the to speak of mere affairs syntax is identical with that in f/.'fiTi-ye, 1 Co 6" ("not 42 (ii/B.c.) ixt) 6ti ye roaovrov xpovov ewiyeyoIt occurs in of daily life").

illiterate

;

BM

"not to speak of so much time having gone by." - e), which P. I77._ln Mt 6^" D reads /xtj eyjaavplaerai (= may just possibly But it is more likely to be a mere mistake. An earlier be added to the list. ex. oi ix7)C. fut. than those cited in the text is Par P 15 (ii/ii.c.) /ii; yovv /cai vdros,

Kparrjo-eii

— but this may be aor.

subj.

— Essentially the same principle must be traced in

tXetos trot (Mt 16'--), are on [God be] merciful to thee." The iuterjectional adjective and participle In CE xv. 436 are the same footing, and must be explained in the same way. 2 Sam 20"-», 1 Chr IV^) quoted inscriptioual parallels for this phrase (Gen 4323, IlXdrwv Kal ivravda, and without subject Letronne 221 (iv/A.D.) I'Aews Letronne also cpiotes Kal 'EpaKXeios d8e\(p6s. 557 I'Xecij crot, 'Epp-eias

p. 181.

"

:

rj/j.'ii'

.

(ii.

read

it.

Alypius," as

I

we may 182.— Dr

phrases p.

.

.

i'Xews trot dXvirl {leg. 'AXvin),

"[Sarapis] help thee, the development of a deprecatory force in such " " Mercy on us compare that in our vernacular expression, Greek. translation be Rendel Harris thinks the vp.as may only

another inscription

286)

With

!

allusion to Paul is in any case only propounded tentatively. Ac lO'^' is fairly It is curious that dp^afxevo? gives us trouble elsewhere in Luke. as it stands, and Blass thinks apt- dirb t. T. interpolated from Lk 23^.

The suggested

hopeless It is conceivable that dp^d/xevos yap in vg may preserve the relics of a better was continued with 'Irjcrous 6 d-rrb there sentence a new which in beginning text, "^^'^ change needed to make the reading • •» 0^™^ (^)N., 6p (D) ^xP'o-f" now Wellli. 12.) grammatical is but small. (See The practically complete equivalence of subjunctive and future is P. 185. as in the Alexandrian Greek Bible or quite ns evident in Phrygian inscriptions Thus we have in JHS xxiii. 85 et 8^ tls dvv^as 'irepov late papyri.

AD

D

^d\ri

Egyptian and in Eamsay ;

(no. 445, iii/A.D.)

el'

and B. ii. 392 (no. 260) el' riva. dWov povX-ndrj, In nos. 317, 5^ erepos (Triaev^vKei (so nos. 448, 449). found 472, 535-8) we have ov TeOfi for the 01) Te^vjo-erat 559

C.

tis

391, 395, 399 al (pp. The progressive disappearance of the Future prepares us for MGr, elsewhere. 303 (vi/A.D.) where the tense is a periphrastic one. For the papyri, cf AP 144 (v/a.d.) ^Xdu "I will come." Innumerable Trapdax^ "I will furnish," subexx. of verbs in -aei and the like, after 6s dv and other forms requiring cited from various sources ; but these being itacistic prove could be junctives,

BU

less

— see p.

35.

p, 194. —Prof.

of learned origin.

Thumb (I

tells

me

that

MGr

/xi]

notice that Pallis retains

yivoLTo seems to him a phrase See p. 249. in Lk 20i6.)

it

in itacism as P. 199 n. 2.— Prof. Thumb observes that he does not believe "since the coincidence of m contributory to the obsolescence of the optative, and V took place very late." It has been made clear in the text that the the very birth of the Koivv, while ot (and v) did not optative was doomed from

become simple P.

i for several centuries.

208.— By way

of adding to our illustrations from the Bezan text of Ac, in le^*^ substitutes I'm o-t7[ ]<nv for 0-1751', and

wemay notethatin 12"D IVa i^iXOy^ for (^e\Oc?v,

.

.

.

both after words of commanding.

In

17==^

however the


ADDITIONAL NOTES. omission of ev

fi

tendency to use the use of

241

fieWei aJds to the tale of quasi-final infinitives. Were this more marked, it might help us to fix the 2)rovcnance of D, by

it>a

Thumb's canon (p. 205). Some further exx. are noted by Votaw

(p. 18) from the LXX. : gives on p. 19 the totals for the articular infin. in OT, Apocryplia, and there are 1161 occurrences with a preposition, and 1614 without. Tlie anarIn the statistics of the articular infiii. throus infin. occurs 6190 times in all.

P. 216.

He

XT

have checked my count (based on MG) by Votaw's they differ slightly where have omitted passages which enclose in double brackets, and also through my not counting twice the places where two infinitives stand under the government of a single article. Votaw's total for Heb has a slight error. To the footnote it should be added that Hirt and Sommer make P. 224.

I

:

WH

I

sequimmi imperative the

original form, supposing it simply transferred to the indicative at a later stage (Indog. Forscli. xvii. 64). The phrase in Mt 13^ is quoted here purely as it stands in Greek ; P. 230.

exx. of this participle could be cited from almost any page of narrative in the It happens however, as Dr Rendel Harris tells or other Greek writing.

NT

me, that my example is a translation of a phrase meaning simply "he went on board a boat." He observes, '"To go up and sit in a ship' is a pure Syriac Sometimes you get 'sit in the sea' for 'embark'" (Mk 4^, the expression. This superfluous Kadrjadai is rather like the pleonasms quoted original here). from Dalman on pp. 14 ff. Of course the recognition of this as translation Greek does not affect the grammatical category in which we place ^/x^dcra. have not given a chapter to Conjunctions, I may put at the end upon a use of a'XAd which has excited much discussion. " In Mt 20-^ some have translated dXXd except," as if=et /xri or TrX^y. Against this both Winer and his editor (p. 566) speak very decisively thus, the latter " Even in Mk 4"- a'XXct is simply Swi (but rather), not save, cxcejit." I have says, a draft letter of his to a I'ellow-Eeviser (dated 1S71), in which he argues at length " would be equivalent to supplying against the lax use of dWd, which in Mt I.e. Since

I

of these addenda a note

:

efj.ov

Zovvai in the second clause."

iffTt.

Blass does not allude to the latter

" save that." et /xij I.e. (p. 269) he says dXX' It is certainly passage, but on here to the dWd from the iav which difficult stands in the parallel fir) separate I am very unwilling to challenge an opinion held so clause. sti'ongly after careful study; but the discovery of Tb P 104 (i/B.c.) makes me ready to

=

Mk

WM

believe that the note in

Kat

evidence.

must

fxrj

e^^orw

call for a sense of

contrived we

may

might have been

altered under stress of

dWd

though they are often far from simple but is there straining the natural meaning of the phrase ? In Gen 21-'^

allow,

adequate motive for ov5e iy(h rJKovaa dXXd

new

yvvalKa dW-qv ivayayeaSai dXXd 'AwoWuviav very near to el firj. That supplements may be

^CKlffKui.

;

<ji)iJ.€pov,

well be that the

the

dWd

actually translates 'n^3, except.

AV or RV supplement is correct.

But

In

Mt

cannot feel and it seems moreover that the meaning need not be affected at all sure of this by reading dWd &s = d ixr). In Jn IS'*, Lk 4-'^^-, Ac 27", Eev 21", etc., we are familiar with the brachy logy which makes et fi-q and the likQ — hut only: why not apply this to dWd ? This would mean that only the thought of Sovvai was I.e., it

may

I

;

carried on,

and not that of

ip-bv as well.

(Cf

now Wellh. 24

in support of

my

position.)

The study of Wellhausen's illuminating forty pages increases my regret that can only refer to them generally in notes inserted at the last revision. My argument in chapter i. is not afiected by AVellhausen's exposition ; but had his I

i6


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

24 2

book come into my Lands earlier, I should have taken care to emphasise more "translation Greek," and the tendency clearly what is said above concerning to over-use a correct vernacular idiom where it exactly or nearly translates an Wellhauseu rightly warns us against denying Aramaism from holes and corners of scrape together one or two parallels Greek writing. That was the error of the old Purists, and we must be on our But if we neo-Hellenists need to be careful, Wellhausen's criticisms of guard. Dalman show that the neo-Semitists want watching as well. It is necessary in Wellhauseu to remember that he only professes to speak from the

Aramaic because

original.

we can

studying

and eavros and oWtjXoc on p. 30 omnia possumus oinncs ! Space forbids oui'

his ^payye\ovv {bis) on p. 10

Semitist's

sside

:

illustrate

his

limitation

ncii

the great importance of mentioning more than one further feature of his work, his treatment of the Eezan text. 'He shows that D in a large number of places If stands distinctly nearer the Aramaic which underlies the Synoptic records. this is proved, we have manifestly taken a large step towards the solution of our Let me finally quote his dictum that Mk is tolerably <^reat textual question. LXX Mk is free from Hebraisms, i.e. pieces of translation Greek due to the however richest in Aramaisms, which Mt and Lk have largely pruned away Of course Wellhausen's argument has no bearing on free Greek in the NT. :

ADDITIONAL NOTES TO THE SECOND EDITION. p.

3.

—To

anticipate a possible objection, I

may

say that the evidence for

see large Jewish settlements in Egypt from an eaily date is indisputable for example Mahatfy's and Th. Reinach's contributions to Melanges Nicole Mahaffy speaks of Aramaic trade documents in Upper (pp. 619 ff., 451 ff.). Egypt from the time of Xerxes down. So far, however, no "Hebraist" has tried to use this fact to discount the deductions of Deissmann from the papyri ; :

ixud I 76.

need not meet the argument before it arises. —The Rev. J. Pulliblank sends me an interesting extract from his notes

of Bishop Lightfoofs lectures in 1863. Speaking of some NT word which had only classical authority in Herodotus, he said, "You are not to suppose that the word had fallen out of use in the interval, only that it had not been

its

probably it had been part of the common speech all along. I will go further, and say that if we could only recover letters that ordinary people wrote to each other without any thought of being literary, vre should have the greatest possible help for the understanding of the language

used in the books which remain to us

of the

:

NT

— Agenerally." testimony may be cited from Cicero, Pro ArcJthi, — Nam quis striking minorem gloriae fructum putat ex Graecis versibus

P.

23

:

5,

^-ery

si

percijii

ex Latinis, vehementer errat, propterea quod Graeca leguntur in omnibus fere gentibus, Latina suis finibus, exiguis sane, continentur. P. 14.- To the exx. of ei's airavrTjaip c. gen. may be added two (one of them

quam

avvavT.) from the PeLigia stories {Leijcndcn cler hi. Pelagia, ed. Usener), The documents are written in excellent vernacular, which does not pp. 19, 22. seem open to the charge of being merely modelled on the biblical Greek.

els

#


ADDITIONAL NOTES TO THE SECOND EDITION.

243

P. in. Dr Marcus Dods finds a weak spot in my ])arallcl, in tliat Greek was generally "not the vernacular, but a second languaf^e acquired for commercial or social purposes. The real parallel would therefore be the English-

speaking Hindu, or semi- Americanised German or Pole, or the jiidgin-Englishspeaking Chinaman, or bilingual Highlander or Welshman." But I think my statement in the text will staud. The Hindu and the "Welshman, " [/ranted a tolerable 'primary education" in English, will not show much difference in their written dialect. P. 22.

—A reviewer in the Athenaeum, to whom my attitude towards the translation of Pallis.

I

am

greatly indebted,

(So far from "strongly I cannot go objecting," Mr Pallis prefers to be so styled, and not as Palli.) into detail, but I would make two or three notes. (1) The Reviewer expresses the "shock" which even a foreigner experiences in finding Christ's speeches criticises

" abounding in Turkish words." Mr Pallis gives me a list of all the foreign words in his version of Mt, some two dozen in all, and not a quarter of them Turkish. This accusation of bringing in foreign words has been freely made by many on mere hearsay. (2) A lover of Hellenism can feel nothing but sympathy But whether Greek for the modern Greeks' national pride in their language. artisans can repeat the NT Greek by heart or no, it is abundantly jiroved that they cannot understand it and that is sufficient justification for a pojiular ;

of the Purist movement tempts discussion has only one side which is relevant for this book. If the movement onh' concerned the abolition oi foreign ivords, the grammarian could quote Purist as readily as pojnilar Greek. But the Kadapevovaa is an artificial language in its version.

but

(3)

The general question

;

it

NT

it is therefore obviously useless when we are seeking scientific The strongest sympathiser with €vidence bearing on ancient Hellenistic. Purism as a national movement would have to admit that for such purjjoses as ours the faintest suspicion of artificiality makes MGr valueless nothing Imt

grammar, and

:

the unschooled speech of the people can help us here. P. 23. On the use of the term Kotv-rj Prof. Thumb observes that the grammarians were far from consistent with themselves. A definition like kolvt) oidXeKTos y irdvTes xpwyite^a is not far from our present use and even if the term be historically incorrect it is a pity to banish from science so wfeU-established and

;

pregnant a word {Ncue JahrbiicJier f. d. Mass. Altertum, 1906, p. 262). Dr W. H. D. Rouse, who has an exceptionally intimate first-hand P. 32.

knowledge of modern Greece, especially in the more out-of-the-way parts, tells me he thinks it too sweeping an assertion to say that the old dialects died out comthe Koivi}. He has heard the broad a pletely, except for vvliat they contributed to in Calynmos, and ^-ai woKa in Cos. In the lecture just quoted {Neuc Jahrh. 1906,

Thumb gives some interesting survivals of old dialectic forms in he has noticed in the curse-tablets of Audollent. "We have in which Cyprus, fact to remember that the dialects existing within the Koivr, were partly or even which the mainly characterised by the survivals from the old local dialect p. 256), Prof.

levelling process failed to destroy. P. 34.— good illustration of

A my point that dialectic "differences very largely remark that a [modern] Athenian, lay in pronunciation is found in Dr Rouse's a Lesbian and an Astypaliote all will wiite Kal, while they pronounce it respectively kye, ce, tsd." P. 36.— The case of reaaapes ace. ought not to be left without remarking that this is isolated, as the only early cardinal wliieh ever had a separate ace. In the first 900 of Wilckeu's ostraka I find 42 exx. of the indeclinable, form.

and 29

of Tiaaapas,

which shows how

this

form predominated

in

business


A GRAMxMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

244

language before 200 a.d. in the same documents

might add here (with reference to p. 46) that recrcrepas and TeaaepaKovra only once each

I

find

I

(both ii/A.D.).

—A

" ostrakon in Melanges Nitole, p. 185 (E. J. probably Ptolemaic Socrts to illustrate further the early confusion and has (pCKavdpoTrla Goodspeed), Kara firivav (see p. 49) and ^TjSeci Sol's (p. 55 u.^) evidence the -^^Titer's of o and w Ih.

"

:

Earlier

scanty culture.

still is

XoyevdovTiov

HbP

(249 B.C.).

38.— The point about Kdpij needs perhaps to be stated Brugmann makes it probable that in early Attic, as in its sister

less concisely. dialect Ionic, a became ?? universally, but that in Attic iv and ptj {vyirj, irprjrTw) broadened into But this specially arise from a pre-Greek e. lE, pa, whenever the tj did not Attic power of p became obsolete while KdpFv was still j)ronounced with

P.

digamma. P. 41.— Thumb {op. cit. 260) holds out hopes that we may get some not inconsiderable help in dating and localising textual types from such peculiarities as the confusion of tenuis, aspirata and media in Egypt and Further Asia, and that of c and i sounds in Asia Minor and Syria.

the irregular aspirations might have been given oiix Here the oi'xt of BD* al probably helps (Gal 2^^ N"ACP 17 37). a repetition of the t after oi'/c would lead to the correction ovx^- and this to

P.

44.— Among

'Ioi;5au-cDs

us

;

ovx by the dropping of the same letter. explanation from the Hebrew initial "n\

This seems simpler than Lightfoot's

Usener, Pelagia, p. 50, quotes t] 'lepoadXv/xa from two MSS of In the same book we find the vocative livpi twice (p. 14— see Usener's An additional early ex. of this shortening of-:o-nouns may be 34).

P. 48. xi/A.D.

note, p. found in a Ptolemaic ostrakon in

Melanges Nicole, p. 184, avvtf/iXeiv {i.e. -lov). (The document has the word Kpa^aros, so spelt.) p. 49.— The NT forms avyyevis and ffvyyevevai (WH App 158) are both xxiv. 339). cited by Thumb from Asia Minor {JUS xxii. 358 and OP 4G6 ^vyyevea-L occurs Tb P 61 (ii/fi.C.) al. So we have double forms, eadricriv

BCH

and

iad-qaeffL (as

NT)

BU

16,

both

ii/A.D.

50.— Mr R. R. Ottley

notes a probable ex. oi irX-qpiqs indecl. in Is 63^ B. P. 59. An apparent false concord in B, irepl irdvTwv wv eUev 8vvd/j.€wv (Lk 19'^'), is corrected by Prof. Burkitt from the Old Syriac, which shows B accordingly shows the tirst stage of corrupthat dwd/xeuv is a mere P.

gloss.

tion,

D

while

shows an independent gloss, aud the other MSS (The textual phenomena here are most quoted from Wellhausen about B and D, p. 242.) Note " one." as Trdaa 'iva's

{yeLvop.ivwv)

present a completely regularised text. instructive

that in

— For

Ih.

"a

riavxi-a,

p, resist

cf

:

MGr

what

iracra

is

survived

indeclinable "

every

iras,

rt

Dr Rouse reminds me

of the

MGr

k&tl,

as kUti

little rest.

60.— Mr Ottley calls my attention to Is 37^^ where it is very hard to the impression that an accusative stands for a genitive in apposition to

an indeclinable.

/6.— A

better account of

i]

deb's

in

Ac

19^'

is

given by G. Thieme, Die

N'T (Gcittingen, 1905), pp. 10 f. Inschriftcn von Magnesia am Maeander und das He notes that the classical t] debs often appears in Magnesian inscriptions to describe the great goddess of the city, while other people's goddesses were deal, the usual term, as p.

126.

apply

\\oiv-q

term.

we might

We may

it in

The town

clerk

is

accordingly using the technical

Plentiful quotations are given by Nachmauson, expect. therefore keep Blass's comment on Luke's accuracy, but

a ditfejent way.


ADDITIONAL NOTES TO THE SECOND EDITION. P. 63.

just as

els,

r<^ KeWiifj

useful

4),

(i.

tliat liefore iv

Thus

M'as for eV.

Some

1).

(ii.

might be added

It

els

in the

dwriXdafiev iv t^ fieydXri €KK\r]aiqL

further quotations for late uses of

Program on the

prepositions in

tlie

stories 5),

(i.

was often used for we iind avrfKdoixev ev

it

disappeared

two Pelagia

245

^01/70;'

eV toIs 6pe(Xi

will be found in Kuhring's

ii>

papyii (Bonn, 1906), pp. 43

f.

lb.— On wpav (Jn 4'", Ac lO^^rtZ) see E. A. Abbott, Johaimim Grammar who suggests that the cliange from vernacular ace. to dat., Jn i-'-'-, is

75,

brought

in to denote exact time.

P.

64.— For

Kontos

xpSo-^at

c.

add Wis

ace.

T'""

(B-so

The Purist

the Revisers).

Athens, 1882, p. 420) complains of writers who used KaraxpaadaL (and even eireadaL !) with gen. As early as ii/A.i>. we find a chiliarcli of a Thracian cohort writing 'ilplo^vos {i.e. -i) xai'/>etv (Wilcken Osfr. ii. 927) so crvv M^]vo(pL\ov ib. 240 (same date). P. 66. On the construction of aKovij, ydiop-ai, and irpoaKwd, see Abbott, {rXucTffiKai TlapaTtjpT^aeis,

:

Joh.

Gram. 76-78.

—"With Deissmann's translation of Mk we may compare the of law." — Dr Rouse compares with thissphere P. nominative time-expressions Aeschines' Kal P. 71. — On the threefold in Jn see Abbott, 96 P. 67.

Gal

3-'

1'"

B, "righteousness would

ev vbixif,

lie in

70.

in

vvS,

iv

fiicriji

9]\dev.

17,

Tran'jp

P. 72.

o^).

clt.

— A full study of prepositions replacing the simple gen.

f.

may

be found

in Kuhring, Praepos. 11 ff., 20. Dr Rouse notes that diro is regularly used in partitive sense now : ScDtre p.ov dirb tovto, " give me some of that." P. 75. lus

— For should have quoted the well-known line of AeschydXX' avrf dypvirvov — Reference should have been made to Eph yivucrKovTes, where ipxo/J.ai aoi I

{PV 358), P. 76.

9j\6€v

Zijvos

/3e\of.

5^,

Deau Robinson assumes Hebraism, comparing

1

Sam

(imper.) yLvwaKovres otl (Symmachus).

(49)--, LffTe

'iffre

yivuaKuv oldev, Jer 42 So RV. If this be so, we 20''',

can only suppose Paul definitely citing OT language, just as a preacher using the archaic phrase "Know of a surety" would be immediately recognised as be noted that if to-rf is indie, it is a purely literary word, not very likely to have used it would be less improbable in Heb 12". But in these places and Jas l^'-* the imper. seems better, somewliat in the sense of the common classical ev Lad' on, "you may be sure" see LS s.v. (It

quoting.

such as Paul

may is

:

:

however, at least as probable that we are to sejiarate the verbs and read "For you must be assured of this (the following), recognising for yourselves that ..." So E. Haupt, Salmond, and T. K. Al)bott. olda

7.

)

It

is,

Dr E. A. Abbott {Joh. Gra.iii. 510) makes it seem probable that the P. 79. He would translate wpwrbs ij-ov "my Lej'den papyrus is quoting from Jn 1^®. See pp. 11-14 for his exposition, which brings in several harmonics Chief." I am not yet disposed to give up the view defended beside the main note. If Dr Abbott takes away one parallel, he gives me two new ones in the text. and his exegesis seems instead, in the quotations from scholiasts on Euripides open to the charge of over-subtlety. Jloreover, the Aelian passage, oi irpQroi ;

ixov TttOra

dvLxvevaavres {N.A.

viii. 12), is clo.-ely

parallel for

doubts as to the reading expressed by the Thesaurus editor

Jn 15'^; and tlie and in Plutarch,

liere

KaraJfos oiire vffrepos dvrfKde), only Cato Minor § 18 {ovre TrpcJros tls dvifir) a modern scholar thought Trpcoros incorrect, which is undeniable. I am tempted to claim that Dr Abbott has proved my point for me. I must confess to a ratlier serious oversight in omitting to discuss P. 80. In OR the "Hebraistic" use of ttSs with negative in the sense of oi;5ets. .

.

.

mean that

XV. 442, xviii.

155, I quote a

number

of exx.

of ttSs with prepositions

and


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

24G

adjectives of negative

meaning

Plutarch Cons, ad Uxor. Tts

:

thus dvev or X'^P'^ Trdarjs virepdea-eus, a recurrent Tb P 105 (ii/i!.C.), St^a irdcrris t^ovaias

dvvTrevdwoi. Travrbs e'Trirt^ou

formula,

with negative, as

1 (cf

/Mijdefiids

Heb

Closely allied to this

7').

KpaTriaews

is

the Koivr] use of

Kvpieias rivb^ eyyaiov Trepiyivofievris

li-qSe

auTuiL TP 1 (ii/B.c), which has analogues in MGr (Jannaris JIG § 1449 c). This was accordingly claimed as "a very slight extension of a vernacular usage under the encouragement of a similar idiom in Hebrew." It is found

not only in presumed translation, as Mk 13-", but in Paul, as Eph 5^'. lb. ilr J. B. Shipley sends me an ingenious suggestion that eirrd arose from a gloss, l^Kevd = U2V = €TrTd. lb. In Gal l*'^* Ramsay maintains against Lightfoot that erepos when

definitely contrasted with ctXXo? denotes specific difference against genetic, "another of the same kind," against "another of a different kind." Space

precludes examination of his classical exx. ; but it must not be too hastily assumed that Lightfoot is wrong. Karl Dick's " particularly good ex." of the plural for sing, appeals P. 86. less convincing on re-reading the plural seems to refer distinctly to the writer

:

and

Hibeh

his comrades.

P. 87.

P. 44 bpwvTes reciprocal e^s rbv '4va. (1

— The

.

.

uiifirjv is

.

Th

5^')

may

an early

ex.

be noted, with the

MGr

(Dr Rouse tells me the Purists say ^(r<pa^e b f/.€v rbv 8e !) lb.— On "exhausted i'otos" .see now Kuhring, Pracp. 13. P. 89. Dr Marcus Dods criticises my treatment of iv ti^ iSlcfi vo't, remarking that the danger was of a man's being "assured by some other person's convictions." That is, of course, quite true, but I think my statement holds that the phrase simjily lays stress on the personal jjronoun "let each man be 6 eVas tov 6.\\ov.

!

fully assured /or himself." P. 96. Note that 8u}5eKa greatly predominates over SeKo. dvo in ostraka. P. 99. For evuTTLou now add Hibeh P. 30 (before 271 B.C.).

— — 102. — In

P. Kuhring's account of otto {Prae}). 35 evidence of the encroachments of this preposition. ecrxov

dvb (not

ira.pd) croO

may

ff.,

52

The

there is striking regular conmiercial

tf.)

save us from over-refining in

Co

1

The

11-''.

note as to the perplexing rarity in the papyri of dirb with the agent after passive verbs will prevent us from assuming it too readily in the NT, though its occasional presence is undoubted. For oval quote excellent parallels from Pelagia, .

.

may

.

w

dirb /St'a

tQu cKavodXwv (Mt 18'^) I dwb rod Xripov tovtov .

.

.

and w dwb tQv XpLartavQv (p. 28) the difference in the Usener (p. 44) notes w ^ia interjection shows that this was not imitation. "Murder!" as a vernacular phrase. 'Ek of material (as Mt 27"") Kuhring add Mtl. Nicole, p. 281, irepiTpaxv^iStov iK only finds once, AP 99 (ii/A.D.) As to the Kadopfj.iu}u XidivQv, "a necklace made of strings of stones" (iii/n.c). (Usener, pp. 11

bis,

27),

:

:

survival of

e'/c

to-day authorities differ

:

the Athenaeum reviewer cites

among

"

others Psichari, who says of e/c tov, C'est bel et bien une forme vivante." P. 103. Tliere seem to be places where eij actually supplies for the possessive genitive, as Deissmanu BtS 117 f. shows it does for tlie dative TbP 16 ov

:

\-f]yovT€i

TrjL

(for

ttJs

!)

[eis]

aiVoi)?

avdaSia,

"not

desisting fi'om

their violent

liehaviour" (ii/B.c); x'^P'' '''°^ ^'^ avrrji/ oikov ( = oi') Par P 5, "her house" It is tempting to seek help here for 1 Pet 1^', but the illiteracy of the {lb.). documents must be remembered. P. 106.

— One more quotation should be made from Kuhring, whose jtamphlet we study the NT prepositions. Hebraism I had left to fxtrd, that

He

nuist be constantly in our hands as to demolish even the solitary

AP

135 (ii/A.D.) has

tL

8e 7]inui> <xvv^(37] /xerd

tCv dpxovruv

" ;

in

What

seems

Lk l:)efell

V'^.

us

'


ADDITIONAL NOTES TO THE SECOND EDITION. BU

So also in comiQxioji with the magistrates?" (G. and H.). Koutos (IIapaT?7p7)crets 409 ft'.) fiercely attacks troXe/jLuJ fxerd rivo^, " but he is at least eighteen centuries late. i.e. "against lb.

p.

— One

249),

"

247

798 (Byz.

).

fight 2cith,"

;

force of Trapd in composition is noted with reference to irapTjXdev in Mt 14^^.

by Tliumh

He

{JVeiie Jalirb. '06,

parallels

" " vorgeriickt" (our "advanced") by citing MGr TrapaTrdyw, " far "far in." Another force is

Wellhauscn's

far over," ira.paK6.Tui,

exemplilled in TrapawiirTu,

under," wapa/mecra,

commercial word, giving MommHe compares Xen. sen's "ungiiltig werden, etwa wegen eines Formfehlers." Hell. i. 6. 4, where it is co-ordinated with dyvodv, and Polybius, xviii. 36. 6,

which AVilcken {Odraka,

i.

78

f. )

illustrates as a

irapaTriTTTtiv rrji dXrideias.

To the weighty authorities for ^x^Mf iii Rom 5' H. A. A. Kennedy see ExpT for July 1906, p. 451. Usener (Pclagia, 49) remarks on dire pxopiaL that in P. 112.

P. 110.

Prof.

is

is

now added

:

the thought of the goal. " we arrived at the great church."

transferred

to

cKK\7](rla

=

showing

this result of perfective d7r6.

Thus

dwrjXda/jieu

later

was much

'AcpiKvovfjiai

Greek

it

iv Trj /xe^dXij

earlier in

P. 115.— In JVcue Jahrb. 1906, pp. 254 ff.. Prof. Thumb justifies his view that Miss Purdie's general position is right, though pure Koivri texts like the NT and the papyri would have served better than a writer like Polyln'us, this belonging to a transition period of the language. He points out that by development of the prepositions Hellenistic gains the means of expressing

Tlius "dTrexoucrt (Mt 6'-aoristic Akttonsart in present time. '") is in AktioHsart identical with IXajSov or ^axov, that is, it is an aorist-present, which denotes the present answering to Xa^elv or crxeti'." The recognition of punctiliar ""•

its

commercial word (see Deissmann BS 229) makes it very vivid in the hypocrites have as it were their money down, as soon as their trumpet has sounded. Mr H. D. Naylor sends me some additional notes as to the ^^7 P. 122.

force in this

Mt

I.e.

:

Some of his classical exx. against Dr Headlam are very good : note Aristoph. Av. 1534, where the conative present seems clear, and Ban. " venture to hold the view that the distinction I 618-622. Mr Naylor remarks, It was beginning in classical times ; it was nearly crystallised in is a growth. NT Greek and it is completely so in the modern language." In other words, TTot'et

canon.

;

forces of Troi'et in this locution, usage progressively restricted the various possible MuUach treated the matter well (pp. 345 f.), as the till onlyjono was left.

Athenaeum reviewer notes. P. 129.— The present of this conative rivdyKaiOv With reference to Thumb's argument on Trpoa4>epoj, him Heb 11^^ as I can give him a good ex. in a less TO 8upov in

Mt

Jb.— The

is

well seen in Gal

I

find it easier to

literary writer

very probably aorist in action, differentia of the aorist may be effectively

:

6'-.

deny

wpdadtepe

5-* is

brought in to decide

If Paul meant "go on in your slavery,'' he the famous difficulty in 1 Co 7-'. must have said xf"^ the aorist XPV<^<^'- can only be "seize the opportunity." Epictetus iv. 1. 39, p. 134.— For Jn 15*^ we might add a Hellenistic parallel 1 Co 7'-'^ and Gal y-* may be av ixh c7TpaTev(Tu/jLai, d-n-qXXdyvf irdvTwv twv KaKuiv, •

:

noted. P.

135.— An idiomatic

traveller in Cos

a old aorist belonging to this category still survives for a cup of coffee, to hear :

" had a pleasant shock, on calling

the waiter cry "E<pda(Ta." x. 102 f.), P. 141.— In a discussion of aorist and perfect {Am. Journ. Thcol. in which Latinism is regarded as contributory to the fusion, E. J. Goodspeed


A GRAMMAR OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.

248

remarks on the curious development in the formulae with the verb 5ia.ypd(poj, "pay," in recei[its. The Ptolemaic documents have diayeypa^ev, the early Eoinan 8iayeypd<pTjKev. Then in twelve years, towards the end of i/A.D., the

and completely ousts the perfect, having previously only appeared once, cir. 40 a.d., and the change occurs simultaneously in Elephantine and Thebes. It affects no other words fj.€/j.€Tp7]-/xai and -Kev continue

aorist suddenly

:

unchanged.

Mr Ottley has noted no case of aoristic perfect in Isaiah except in P. 142. the category of aorist and perfect standing together, joined by /cat. Pauline exx, of the perfect for what "stands written" may be seen lb.

in Gal S^* i-\ P. 145.

— Second thoughts as to ea-xVK^f^^" in Rom 5- make me very doubtful

my view of the perfect Avill stand for that passage. "Eaxo/J-ei', "we " "^^'e have but there seems to be received," will suit received," or ecrxv'^c-P-^'', no point in the constative "we possessed." If therefore my suggestion is to whether

;

hold, it becomes a mannerism which Paul dropped between the writing of " 3 Corinthians " and Romans. On the other hand, another papyi'us can be quoted where "possessed" suits the sense well, and the perfect stands in close connexion with the aorist e(TX''?'C(5<ri

:

BU

Kol dvev tlvos dfKpicrpTjTriffeus ev

159.— On the verb

297 (end of rrj vofxrj

ii/A.D.), toIs biKaiav airiav

yevofieuovs

= Y>^y, Wilcken

(=

-ots).

observes {Ostraka,

i. 107) that even in RL (iii/B.c.) the word occurs often both in act. and in mid. apparently without distinction. These sporadic exx. of irregular middles occur in the earliest period of the Koivq, but they do not invalidate the general rule. The papyrus exx. of oTav = ivhen make it an open question whether P. 168.

P.

irap€x<^

in

Mk

we

11^^

before the

irpuit

"when

are not to translate

In such a writer as

of v."".

evening

Mk

fell,"

this

is

that

is

the evening

at least possible,

and

The impf. i^ewopevovTo the other rendering produces an awkward sequence. may be pictorial quite as well as iterative. (Note iav 9ja6a HbP 78.) Prof. W. Rhys Roberts suggests to me another ex. of firi c. fut. in P. 177.

Eurip. 3led. 822, Xe'^ets 5e jxr^Uv . that order) has always seemed to similar cases in which the P. 179.

— Add

iv. 1. 41, tVa

fii]

MS

.

.,

him

where the change to Xe^^s (especially in " arbitrary. Probably there are other

reading should be carefully weighed."

for imperatival tva c. subj. (or fut.) 1 Co 7"^, and Epictetus " let him not be a fool, but learn. ..." /j-upos rj, d\X tVa pLddy,

0. F. Murray suggests to me that this IVa Since the jussive Ilequiescant falls from Divine

Dr

J.

Its superior fitness in tlie

troverted questions. verse is undeniable. side

by

may be

In

1

Co

14''

we have a good

lips, it

recognised in Rev 14'^. has no bearing on con-

grammatical structure of the 6e\w tva and di\ii3 e. inf.

ex. of

side with no real dilference.

— Prof.

Burkitt {Erang. da-Mepharr. ii. 252 f.) reads in Mt 23-^ ravra the Lewis, supposing the MSS readings to fj-r] atpelvai, after be corrections. In 2 Co 12^ he would follow n in reading Kavxdadai ov av/xcpepov " Now to boast it is not exeXevaofj.ai de k.t.X., which is presumably fj.€v lb.

oe

TTotTjo-at

KdKe'iva.

!

There seems no special difficulty about and Aramaism is entirely out of court. If Prof. Burkitt's " translation Greek " no but it is in Mt

pedient, but I shall be coming," etc. infin. for imper. here,

reading be accepted allowable.

I.e.,

doubt,

perfectly

The use of a"? in warning retains still the consciousness of its P. 185. Dr Rouse quotes <pofioviJ.ai /utittcos diriOave (cf Gal 4^', 2 Co paratactic origin. 11^) with the independent ^^ttws in questions expressing surprise or indignation "do you suppose I'm a millionaire ? ") (MuUach, pp. 395 f.). (yUTJTTws elixai \6p8os ;


ADDITIONAL NOTES TO THE SECOND EDITION.

— In

Gal

249

WH

read coy Kaipou ^x^Mf (»<B*17). As we have seen on can hardly perhaps be regarded as decisive between o and w but the subj. is justifiable with the sense " as long as we have opportunity, let us continue to work." (Qs in MGr takes the meaning of ?ws as well as its own.) lb.

Kom

6^"

MSS

5\ the

;

In classical Greek this futuristic subj. would demand

but words meaning

Av,

until constantly drop it in Hellenistic. Dr Giles tells me that Gildersleeve's suggestion of an independent P. 188. ov in ov ix-q was anticipated in the Middle Ages in one if not both of the best

:

MSS

of Aristophanes it is regularly punctuated oii- firi. . . Dr Rouse has noticed the old intin. in Cos, as P. 205. .

seen."

Prof.

commoner

is

purpose

Thumb

^x'"' 'Se'iv,

"I have

{JVeue Jahrb. '06, p. 259) observes that the infin. of in Homer than in Attic the preference accordingly has :

lingered in Asiatic and island Greek for three thousand years. P. 206. Dr E. A. Abbott reinforces the depleted ranks of scholars

would

who

"We might cite such passages as If we had no 15'* as affording scope for exegetical ingenuity on these lines. evidence from Hellenistic and MGr as to the loss of this force in 'iva, we might accept such subtleties of interpretation as at least not out of character with so allusive a writer. But with our present knowledge we should need much .stronger evidence than is offered to prove that Jn differed so greatly from press the telle force of IVa in Jn.

his contemporaries. P. 207.— Prof. Burkitt notes {Ev. da-ilejjJi. " so that as consecutive in Lk 4-^, they cast him

ii.

183) tliat Tatian took diare

down." P. 209. ^The consecutive on which Blass would read in Jn 3'® does appear in later Greek, e.g. Pclagia, 20, tL didoLs rots d/xvots crov, on ^utjv aluvwv exovdiv;

See E. A. Abbott, Joh. Gr.

p. 534.

—The consecutive use of was recognised by Lightfoot Th in his notes, and cf what he says on eh to Th 5* where nom. would and exx. of P. 212. — For iVa

P. 210.

1

:

c.

see

ace.

classical

regular, cf Aeschylus

PV 268

f.

infin.

dTrepxofievos

;

18,

9jv

1

in

Gal

aKoixraaa

:

note also

5^'',

2'^.

have been

and the note of Sikes and Wynne- Willson

Adam's note on Plato Apol. 36 B. The periphrastic imperf. occurs P. 227. fifi-qv

inf.

;

also

several times in Pelagia, as p. 14, ^ao yivdxxKOJU, like icrdt. evvowv

p. 26,

Mt 5-3. Cf Usener's note p. 50. That this is pure vernacular, untainted by Dr Rouse observes that it is used now in Hebraism, is beyond question. = Zaconian, as (popovvrep ?fjLe = €<popoviJ.€i>, opovfievep ^fii 6puifj.aL. P. 237.— A further addition to the list on p. 95 is given by Prof, Burkitt in

in

Mt

lO'i

D

and

28,

i]

w6\ls

ets riv

av elcre\dT]Te

ets

avTyif {Ev.

da-Mcj)h.

ii.

75).

This goes naturally witli the passages supporting Wellhausen's thesis (above, p. 242).

p.

240.— If

/J.V

yefoiTo

is

"a

phrase of learned origin,"

it is

presumably

some other survivals in idiomatic phrases, for which Dr Rouse Dr Rouse instances /J-erci x^ipSs, ciTro ^poxv^, reXos wAvtwv, tw ovtl, wavTa-jracrt. himself has never heard fiv yivoLTo, for which the people say 6 deos va. (pvXdiv. parallel with


I.

IISTDEX

{a)

Matthew

(

TO QUOTATIONS. New

Testament.


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS. Matthew — eontinved PAGE 20. 22

45 241 . 105 138, 140 179 139 .

20 210 21. 32 21. 42 59, 138, 139, 140

'

I

I

.

22.

I

.

22. 2

.

22. 5 22. II

23- 30 -> -> 23- jj

191

I.

174 124 150 190 201 140 142 146 192 116 160 140 238 140 238 138 138 221 120 157 140 140 200 140 212 191 93 157 50 140 140 207 177 155 86 140 183 102 140 90 14 157 127

I.

25 36

1.

44

2.

I

2.

3

24. 43 24. 45

. .

24. 48

.

25-

14,

25- 9

184, 189,

25. 16 25- 19 25- 20 25. 20, 24 .

25. 24, 25 25. 24, 20

40

. .

116, .

. .

26. 32 26. 35

.

190,

26. 50 26. 51 26. 53

.

.

.

64

86,

26. 65 27.

. .

27. 4 27. 5 27- II

140, .

19

40

.

.

26. 13 26. 24 26. 25

23 24 32 35

.

.

4 26. 10

21

.

.

26.

19,

.

.

25. 41 26. 2

27. 27. 27. 27. 27. 2727. 27.

.

.

25

.

77, .

.

. .

8.

. .

140 139 140 139

Mark

I-

.

.

8.

.

II

.

91 72, 73

20

28.

7

24. 30 24. 35

26.

I

I.

.

.

.

140, 185, 248 201 116, 185 .

14 19

28. 18

r-

.

8.

I

104

23- 39 24. 17, i8 24. 23

.

.

28. 7 28. 15

88,90 .

23- 23

25. 22

27. 62 28. I

231, 232

23- 21

25-

131 140

7

.

49

27.

PAOR 8,

140 175, 230

I

8.

j

.

21.

38

27. 44, 27. 46

.

21. 16 21. 19

Mark — continui'd

PAGE

.

20. 23 20. 28

251

Matthew — continued

I.

.

.

.

2. 5 2.

I

I

7

I

9 II

I

3 3.

16 21

3. 26 4. I

4-5-8 4.8

4.

22 26 28

4-

32

4. 4.

4-

39

4.

41 10

5. 5I

555-

55-

19 23

34 36

6.

22-25

6.

25 26

6.

6.

38 39 56

7.

12

7.

25

7.

26 28

6.

7.

13

o.

20

o.

29 32

o.

o. 35. o- 35 o.

45

.

0.

51

.

1.

II

I. I.

14 16

I.

19

1.

25

.

2. II

.

2.

14

2.

23

2.

40

.

I

.

2

.

6

.

.

.

3-

91

59 159 191 227 160 179 105 179 72 165, 179 176 168, 248 168 . . 59 185 145 50 . 74 189, 191 175 . .

. .

38

13 19

.

.

. .

.

.

. .

.

. .

91

.

150

.

95

.

150

3

24-27

.

3

31

190, 191

.

4 4

3

6

176 175 176 . 97 . 151 Ill 105 200 171, 149 151 190, 191 169 93, 233 178 175 . 157 38 131 159 86 20 . 71 12 .

4.8 10

.

4.

.

4. 14

.

4.

.

4.

.

51

170 97, 107 167, 168 .

f.

186 125 129 125, 174 100, 188 .

II

.

.

6. 14, 24 6. 17 f. .

6.

o.

.

13 15

,

9 25 9 38 9- 39

.

.

^' 15 ^" 23

.

8 36 9 18

9. 41 o. 7

95, 237 134 67, 245 45 176 116 124 82 222 119 . 231 16,17 16, 17, 159 208 168 69, 235 106, 134 187 241 79 103 191, 241 185 46, 50 53 176 58 20s . 172 145 143 179 174, 226 124 . 127 . 94 . 160 . . 179 .

15 17

.

24 26

52 170 50 94 125

191 13, 94, 95 . 75 .

.

8. 2

.

8.3

.

139 70 53

18

19 4. 21 4.

28

4- 3^5 4-

31

4- 2>2 4-

36

4.38 4. 4-

42 47 63 72 I

2 15

18

5-25

55, .

. .

.

.

.

.

.

. .

.

.

.

.


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

252 Make — continued .

8.

6-8

.

.

8.

27

8.

29

175 51 135, 137, 163 216 [16.] 9-20 191 . [16.] 18 36 15. 42 16. 6 15.

.

.

79 75 113, 148 54 , 114 . 102 . .

8.38 8.

42

8.43 8.

Luke II-

7 15

I.

18

I.

20 28

I.

I.

54,

/

1.58 II.

59 62

I.

76

1.

79

2.

I

f-

2.

54

92 183 195 208, 211, 217 210 106, 246 129 . 198 . 217 . 217 .

9.

.

4.

26

4-

4. 55-

6. 6.

42

7. 7.

19

7-

32

f.

o.

194, 199 95, 237

II.

35 41

227 236 116 143

1.

46

2.

I

175, 231,

16

21

7

129, 79, 125, 119, 129,

7- 13

20

O.

4

f.

7.6

o.

I.

II

6.

o. 7 o. 18

1.

I

6.

4

15

33 42 19 23

37 41

I

o.

3

6.35 6.

9o.

I-

.

29 30

9.

130 103

.

6. 13 6. 23

9-

36 42

6.3 6.4 6.

36 45 46 54

9-

0.

5-38 6.

9- 31

2.

2

2.

60

2.

4 8

241 227 220 73 119 222

2.

12

17

2.

168 171 198 65 174 174 174 65 191 90 232 156 125 135 80 82

2.

2.

15

2.

20

f.

2. 24. 2. 26 2.

2. 2.

3. 3-

333-

32 35 36 39 58 59 16

24 27 34 35

4- 7

4.8 4.

4. 4. 4.

12 18

20 28

27

15.

.

26

.

15- 32 16. 17 16. 22

17.

.

.

.

I

1718.

117 236 70 176 74 201 174 191 169 11 174 174 45 191 157 125 125 90 135 194

.

15- 19

.

70 53, 171 52, 144 210 198 185 97 125 91, 125 131 125 91 146 92 129, 17 3, 174 119 125 192 15 56 10 157 191 102 104 91 178

60 114 208 198 135 191 16 217 93 59 218 65 159 205 124 198 185 86 35, 118 174, 226 69 . 117 194, 240 114 69, 191 125 217 190, 191 69 220 . 199 . 239 51 11, 185 231 86 86 45, 240 125 51 135 182 175 .

15- 17

17.8

.

75

4. 18

25

47

25 28

PAGE 15. 14

.

.

13

99-

23 23 ft10

4-

.

9- 3

.

.

36 39 49

IS 3. 16

4.

8.

75

162 91, 212 162 . 169

3-

3-

177, 191

.

3.8

3-

52

.

2. 5 2. 26

2.

8.

.

2. I, 3 2. 4

2.

75, 103

.

1.38 1-43

229 121, 125 '125 70 179 171, 187 87, 230

46

8.49

.

Luke — continued

Luke- -contimied PAGE

PAGE

.

.

23

.

I

.

18. 2

.

18. 7 18. 10

.

.

18. 16

.

18.

36 18. 41

.

.

19. 2

.

19- 13 19. 17

19.

29

20. 23 20. 16

.

20. 36 21. 6 21. 8

.

.

21. 22 21. 33 21. 37

.

.

22. 6

.

22. 23 22. 34 22.

44 49 22. 65 22. 70

.

22.

.

.

23- 3

.

23- 5 23. 28 24. 22 24- 34

.

. .

24. 47, 49

27. 49

.

.

.

John I.

5

I.

6

.

.


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS. John — continued

253


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

254 Acts

—continued

i6. i8

119, 240

i6.

28

16.

34 36

125 67, 235 52 230 20 198 . 133 230

16. ty.

I

17.

9

.

17. iS

17. 26 17. 27 17. 28

18.

26.

240 235 125 80, 246 131 . .

67,

9

.

19- 15 19. 16

.

26

.

19. 19. 19. 19.

27 28

.

32

20. 3 20. 10 20. 16 20. 18 20. 22

20. 20. 20. 21.

27 28 29

21. 21. 21. 21. 21. 21. 22. 22. 22. 22. 22. 22. 22.

16

14

22 28 31

33

5

16 17 19

24 21

26 27

29 30 35 2 5

10

19 24. 22

24. 23 24. 24 25- 9

25. 10

25- 13 25. 16

.

,

.

.

9-19 14, 15,

15 16

15 17

194 241 36 106 117, 196 239 14 228

28. 17, 19

231, 232

12

5

23 I

.

4 5>

.

.

.

.

.

.

23 24 7

25

Romans

56 151 217 90 26 134

S

9 10

20 24 31

223 52 143 74 198, 199

32

73,

13

.

.

I

.

2 II

12

7 7

149 66 163 74 227 133 80 125 179 117 239 74, 176 133 106 224 229 196 133 236 90 88, 90 131 236 132, 133 169

20 4 6

.

.

.

II

.

13

.

8-3 8.9 12

.

8.

.

8.

15

.

8.

18

.

8.

20 28

8.

.

9- 3

.

9- 5

.

9.

.

9.

.

.

.

.

.

I

22

.

17,

.

20

.

.

.

II

.

183 225 182 180 ]80 16, 19. 180 179, 182 228 87 182, 183 89 125 134 221 115 195 217 217 167 2,141 144 75 .

9

.

6

f.

I

.

22 29 34 39

.

9ff-

.

27. 10 27. 27. 27. 27. 27. 28. 28. 28.

6-8 6

231, 232 198 69, 217 213

I

27.

.

.

20 26. 22 26. 29

236 217 125 63, 196

2

9

PAGE

239 148 78 70 128 225

.

40

23-8 23. 23. 23. 23. 232324. 2424. 24.

.

80 73 60 50

.

26. 5 26. 7

26. II

81

19. 14

25- 25 26. 2

.

.

—continued

I'AGE

.

.

17- 31 18. 8

EoMANS

ACTS- continued

PAGE

136 68 194 11; 219 217 222 230 52 35, 110, 247, 249 145 224 107 207 S3 218 103 125. 129 217 221 171 217 10 114 105 65

212 228 231

25 26

16

163 124 185

10. 3 10. 6 10. 14

11. 4 II. II 11. 18, 12. 3

12. 5

207 125 219, 237 105, 183 .

20

.

1 1.

18

Corinthians .


JN])EX TO QUOTATIONS. 1

uopaxTHi^

255


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

256 1


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS. JUDE

Revelation I. I-

4 5

I.

i6

1.

20

2. 2 2.

3) 5

2.

4

2. 5. 2. 7 2.

13

2.

26

2.

27

3-

2

3- 3 3- 5

3-8 3-

15

i6

6a, 143

25*


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

258

Insckiptions.

(c)

Archiv Archivfiir Pcq^ymsforschung,

eel.

U. Wilcken.

PAGE

PAGE 111.

129

.

,

PAGE

14

Audollent DcJJxionitiii Tabcllae, ed.

no. 15

.

.

.

234

I

Audollent (Paris, 1904). no. 92

.

.

.

195

234

no. 1S9.

|

BCH Bulletin de Corresjwndance ffellenique. 1888,

202

p.

.

.

234 I

1902, p. 217

.

.

196 I

1903, p. 335

.

234

Cauer De/c'/.us

infii'riptionuw,

Graccarum, ipropUr dialedum memorabilium^,

P. Cauer (Leipzig, 1883). no. 32

.

ed.


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

259

OGIS OriciUis Graeci Inscvipiiones Selcdac, cd. Dittenberger (Leipzig, 1903-5).

PAGE no. 17

64

41

216 105

54

PAGE .

56

.

.

TAGK


260

INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

BU — contimied. Vol.

ii.

nos.

362-696 (1898) 5E

no. 362.

366. 368. 371395424. 449. Vol. no. 731

741. 747775814. 822.

iii.

iios.

G97-1012 (1903).


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

261

MP Papyri from Magdola, in 5C//1902

ff.,

no. i6

.

.

105

ed. Lefebvre.

PAGE

PAGE no. 20

105

.

I

PAGB 1

no. 25

Mithras Liturgy

p.

Mtie Mithrasliturgie, by A. Dieterich (Leipzig, 1903). 54 . . 12 . p. 17 .

.

I

.40

NP Geneva Papyri, no.

I

ed. J. Nicole, 2 vols. (1896, 1900).

100, 239


262

GH

INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS. (e)

Greek Literature. Classical.

i.

Homer

(? x'/viii t..c.)

PAOE Iliad

i.

I

Pindar

.

.

vi.

iv.

284

.

459

Sophocles

Iliad

134

Persac 981

xxii.

Odyssey

i.

98 55

349 337

74 93 202

.

155

Euripides

.

.

.

.

Oedipus Tyranmis 236 533 706 1141

73 74 149 93

Ion 771

184

.

.

179

97

.

Oedipus Tyrannus 1199300

84 178

Pliilodetes

-£>«,

fra>,'.

doii)

201 (Diii-

97

.'

(v/b.c.)

Alcestis 386 Baccliac 1065

.

.

Aristophanes

.

Taur.

222

.

Ranae. 521

70

618-622

^47

51

101

.

(v/i;.c.)

81

Antiphon (v/i;.c.) Frag. M. 3. 67

Thucydides 54

vi. I

101

46

227

.

(v/b.c.) .

.

227

[Xenophon] (v/b.c.) De liepubl. Athen. II. 3

Xenophon

.

.

31

(iv/B.c.)

Hellenica

i.

vi.

4

247

|

m.

ii.

212

14

(iv/B.c.)

Alclbiades 124A

146, .

238 202

.

.

12"J

.

.

122

Ai)ologia, i8b

20E 21 A

1

[Demosthenes]

177

(?)

76

Aristoyciton 597

Aristotle (iv/B.c.) .

Apologia, 28c

39A

. .

.

142 192

Crito e^2\

44 A EiUhydeinus zjGb .

I

(iv/B.c.)

Aristoeratcs 659

Foctics 19

;

!

I

Demosthenes

Iphig. in Taiir. 1359

Medea. 213

(v/b.c.)

vii.

Herodotus

1092

227 161

.

.

Hippocrates

I'll

Iphig.

1320

f.

.

.

58 135 177

(v/i!.c.)

Acharn. 484 291

134 115 113

.

Hecuba 1163

Epidein.

Prom. Vind. %Gi.

|

(v/b.c.)

Antigone 114 542 789 Oedipus Colmieus

Plato

PAGB

134 185

132

189

Aeschylus (v/n.c.) Prom. Vinci. ^i^TU 76

iv.

vi.

(v/b.c.)

Pyth.

Pax

PAGE Iliad

172 166, 239

.

137

i.

263

.

172

|

Mcidias 525

.

186

Thesmophor. iioS ^rt's 1534

.

.

188 247


264

INDEX TO QUOTATIONS. Hellenistic.

ii.

[For the main writers in this section see also Index III.]

Polybius

(ii/B.c.)

PAGE

PAGE 85

SO. 7.

207

516. 30

I

PACK

\

1004

I

.

247

Cicero (i/B.c.) Ad Atticum vi. 5 (a Greek sentence)

.178f.

.

Dionysius Halicarnassensis 10.

X.

.65

.

Philo Judaeus

De

(i/B.c.)

(i/A.c.)

Posteritate

Caini, § 145

100

.

Flavius Josephus Antiqu. i. I. I

(i/A.D.)

.

A'lifiq. XX. S.

237 235

.

2

vii. 9.

.

Dionysius Thrax

Bell.

ii.

6

13. 5

235 235

Contra Apionein 4.

21.

14fi

(i/A.D.)

154

Plutarch (I/a.d.) p. 256D

[Barnabas]

ad

of

Rome

Cor. 17.

Justin

74

.

.

Clement

!

i.

Lucian

ad

2,9,

.

210

Cor. 21

95

Piscator 6

144

\

(ii/A.D.) 22, 32,

2

143

16

210

ii.

ii.

2.

(ii/A.D.)

Dialogi Marini, iv. 3

7C, 87

.

Ascensio Isaiae .

.

(ii/A.D.)

.59

(ii/A.D.) i.

i

13

.

Clement of Alexandria Paedagogus iii. i 193 [Clement] Homilies

259B

iii.

69

.

.

.

.

Homilies xv. 8

177

|

(iv/A.D.)

229

Isocrates (Argument to Busiris

(ii/A.D.)

(iii/A.i.. ?)

John Chrysostom ix.

13

I

(ii/A.D.)

Epicteius

Gen.

V.

246

(I/a.d.)

.

44, 60, 62,

Arrian

Aquila

6o8b.

Martyr

Apology

12

p.

(i/A.D.)

28.

ii.

216

.

.

— vi/A.D.)

.212

80

I

p.

767

245


INDEX TO QUOTATIONS.

265

Apocrypha in I'leusclien's

Antilegomena

(oil.

1)

PAGE Gosp. ace. to brews, (p. 4)

He-

no. •

no.

4 •

PAf.R

Ehionite

2b

Gospel, (p. 9) .

I'AOR

Gospel of Fe.ler 35 17

(p.

16)

17

in Tischendorf's Acta Apostolorum

Apocrypha

Acts of Philip 36 (p. 92)

.

.

97

iii.

Modern.

Abbott Sonys of Modern Greece, by G. F. Abbott (Cambridge, 1900) p. 22,

.

.

97


INDEX OF GREEK WOEDS

II.

AND FORMS. BdaX gender

a for an 47 d^j3d 10, 233

fidWeiv 109

uses of act. and mid. 160 aKaraTraaTOS 47, 74 ace. and c. c. dKoy 14, 75 aKoveLf

alre'iv

:

gen. GO, 245

dXXd 241 disappearance of, 100 of more diJ.(p6Tef)os supplants d/j.<pu 57 tlian two 80 df for edv 43, 167, 240— history 165 f. —statistics for NT and LXX 166 f. ws dv 167 weakeniterative 167 ing in conditions 167, 198, 200— orav etc. c. indie. 168 dropped from compounds 168 f. el (x-qTi. dv 169, 239 dropped with ^Sei et sim. 200 denoting unrealised condition 200 f. in impf. and perf. •av in 2nd aor. 51 52 -civ in inf. 53 dvd 100, 105— dca fiiffov 99, 100 avdOep-a 46 dvTL 100— c. inf. 81 \vrlvas flexion of, 12 uireKareaTdd-qv double augm. 51 d.TreXTTtj'eic C. acc. 65 dirdyxeffda-i. reflexive use of raid. 155 awS c. nom. (6 up) 9, 12 in composition 65, 112— with adverbs 99— enlargement of use 102, 237, 246 dvoypd(peadai. mid. or pass. 162

df^(pl

:

:

yeveadai c. gen. and acc. 66, 245 yiveaOai: Hebraism 14, 16 f.^e^eVero with indicative 16 f. with /cai and indicative 16f. with inlinitive 16 f. orthography 47 part, yevd/xevos 51 with eis 71 original action of yiperaL with futural present 109 sense 120 7^70j'a aoristic ? 145 f., "

104-106

dLdopai

suiierfluous,

dpxecrdai

from

Aramaic

14, 15

edp: for dp 42 indie. 168

c.

dcTTracrd/xeyos

avTbs

:

mid. 53 iKetvos

weakening

article,

of,

86 91

-

- avTov

gen. of place 73

Hes

175

f.

d(p(u)VTaL 38

ei

— relation to dcpievTai 119

.

.

.

dp

and

aorist 137, 141

— voices

163 subj. with et /tT^ri dv 169, 239— relation to edp 187, 240 c. subj. c. 187, 239 ex}ir. a wish 196 oi)t, 196— et ov c. ind. 200, 240

ei:

— —

et IMTjP

46

111, 116

f.,

138

See opdp

— with

234—

f.,

Greek 169, 239 relations with ei 187, 240 replaced by participial clause 229 f. eavTovs reciprocal 87, 246 eavrov and i5(.os 87-89 eavTc^ e. act. instead of mid. 157 ditt'erentiation of iyelpeip with ei's 71 f.

f.

action of 132, 238

replacing

49, 166, 186, — replaced hy

in illiterate

etSo:'

-atrai in 2 sg. pres.

:

^Siero 54

in composition 112 f. forms after -co and -6co verbs 55 ^50155, 196— 5w77 55, 193 f., 196 oi'/o 57, 96, 97

did

coincident or etire etc. Hebraic 14 antecedent partic. 131 dwoarepelffdai. mid. or pass. 162 113 dpTrdi'eiv perfective of, -dpxv^ and -apxos nouns in, 48

aorist 39,161

193

— aTroKptOeh

:

:

perfect

diroKpLveadaL

— — — —

238, 259—iJ.r]y€POLTo 194, 240, 249 action ol yLPwcTKeip orthograjiliy 47 tenses 113, 148 ypoT 55, 196 ypurj

:

of, 59 sim. diiferentiation of tense.s €j3\'/]d7] as timeless aor. 134 et

ei/xi:

iiexion of, 55

226— in elfxi

— ioov 11, loop 47. —imperative 180,

f.

periphrasis 225-227

120

eLP in pluperfect 53 eXirov 111 eiTTovcra and etVacra 131 with dTrdvT7](np 14 encroaches on et's

:

266


INDEX OF GREEK WORDS AND FORMS. iv 62 els

inf.

81— etsT6e.

as ordinal 95

218-220 237 — as indef. inf.

art.

— Kara and eh — foi-ming perfective 237 99, 102, 237 :

96 e\-

234 f.—forminj^ predicate

66,

f.,

71f.— c.

f.

f.,

97

6 its

ava.

10.")

eXaahv 49, 69, 235 GO

and

246—6

iSios

'iva

104 of time 14, 215 relations with ei's 12,

inf.

61,

c.

:

35

fut.

Western

87-90, 237,

f.

48, 244

— enlarged

Greek

laneous uses 103

d^Xco 208,

f.

248— consecutive

Ka

hoxos c. gen. 39 iirl: with three

Kadap6s foil, by d7r6 102 Kai ill place of liypotaxis 12

adverbs 99

— perfective 113

eirLyLVibaKeLV

99

104 — combinations —in comi)ositioii 111 f.

248

with,

ff.

KaTokafj-^dveLv act. /cXeis acc. of, 49

(mdu/xeip c. ace. and gen. 65 e^ov ace. abs. 74 ?^w contr. with <xxn'^^ 150

210

aoristic perfects in, 145, 238,

Kard 44,

CTTL^oKibv 131

113

c.

— —

f.

196— re-

opt. lations with infin 20 i>, 240 f. ecbatic use 206-209— after iroiQ auc

eveopeveiv c. ace. and dat. 64 voices 156 evepyetv : c. ace. 65

107 —-with

178

'

'

c.

f.

cases 63,

211-

205, imperative 176, in wish clause

subj.

sphere in

41,

for

—statistics 62 — —in anartlirous pre62, 60, 67, — miscelpositional phrases 82, 236

16

23-1

90

" Hebraic" use of, 11 'lepocriXu/ia fern, and neut. lSou

flexion of, 49 Uavos in Latinisms 20

iix6s for /iou 40, 211 iv : instrumental

T(p

irrational final 49 relation to eavrod

fSios

'I?;croCs

'i\eos

witli

I

2G'

and mid. 158

Kpareiv c. acc. and gen. 65, 235 KpaTidTos as a title 78

epavvdv 46 ipydi'ea-OaL and its perfective ,-es ace. in, 36, 37 -es in perf. and 1st aor. -etrat in fut. mid. 54

eadieiv

defective

why

:

113

56 doubtful gender CO XoLTTov gen. of time 73 XoiW^at 155 f., 238 Avarpa dec], of, 48

Xruxil/ofiai \l/j.6s

52

111— its

perfec-

tive with Kara 111, 116 €T€pos for aXXos 79 €vooKe7v c. ace. 64

f.

ixavddveiv

evdoKijcra

134

54

eiio8u)TaL

p.ei^ijiv

action of, 110, 145 future 150 aoristio? 145, 248 with oTov 91 c. subj. without av

^X"'',

o-xeiv

168

:

'icTXni^"-

t'ws

,

24G

— used

104-106— — alleged Semitism with

as

in translation 106, 246

ij-urd

use of ov

:

/xi)

and

/x-q

35,

TroXe/xeTv

187-192

106

— in pres.

aor. prohibitions 122-126, 173, 188 el firiTt dv 169, 239 oii normal c. indie, ix-fj with the moods 170, -in uses with indie. 170 f. 239

38, 44, 47, 111, 244

TijJivpva

c. part, or inf. 229 flexion of, 49, 50

su])erlative 78

f.

F23,

:

— — 239— 171, 187, 239 — in relative sentences 171, 239 — not used with — 171, 239 173 — but with imper. 2nd 3rd 174— with future 177, 240 —in warning 178, 184 — in command 178 — partic. impera— cautious assertion 192tival 180 19i—fi7]yeyoiTo 194,240, 249— opt. — indie, 200 — 196 in close connexion with ov 232 — 239 after verba — 239 — in

45

eZ jxt)

questions 170,

f.

93 ^Ka.ai 53

6rt

liKiKOS

^

fiijv

?IIJL-r)v

aor.

for iydi 86,

rifiets

246

'Iva

f.

^{v) subj. 49, 163

c.

c.

60

irrcal,

c. iiiiin.

davfidaai

and

act.

pass,

c.

signification

203 diXeiv Oeos

firj

c.

in

56

^Tw 56 7IX0S

pers.

pers.

46 56

7)voly7)v

fi-q

jiartic.

c.

partic.

cog. et die. ^Trei oil.

oj-at.

240^jU7j OTL ye, /.n'jTLye 240 verbs in, invaded by w forms 55,

fi-q :

foil,

and ded

-07]^ aor.

dviQaKeiv

by

subj. 185

-fj.1

56

60, 244

forms

and

in, 161 its perfective

112

—^sim-

plex obsolete except in perfect 114 action of present and aorist stem 114 6vydr7]p as voc. 71

-V

:

irrational final 49

— added

decl. acc. sing. 49 i'oOs flexion in 3rd decl.

NlJfKpnv 48

48

to 3rd


INDEX OF GREEK WORnS AND FORMS.

268 oToa

flexion of,

:

55, '245

—relation

to

eWop 109 c. partie. or inf. 229 -ow in iulin. 53 010? double use of, 93 oWvadai aor. and perf 147 with iv 104 with part, or 6/j.o\oyeif

:

and

ace.

229.

inf.

ovaifirjv 195 oTToros double

use

93

of,

why defective n Of — action ofaor.

dpav:

—in warnings 178 in imperf. and 2nd aor. 52 used for ocrns 92 — attraction 93 —replaced by 93 — reinforced with demonstrative 94 f 237 — ews otov oaris limited use 91, 92 117

-oo-a;'

OS

nouns

-pa

in, 38,

48

-aav 3rd pi. in, 33, 37 -aduaav in imper. 53 ffrd/xa in "Hebraic" locutions 99 avv relation to fxerd 106 perfective

:

with av 168

oTTov

c. gen. 79 as ordinal partlj replaced by eh 95 f., 237

TTpCiTos

:

ris

,

113, 148 crwepyeXv c. acc. 65 avveros 222 differentiation avvirapaKap.^dveiv tenses 130, 133 aoi^'ecrdai tenses 127

of

auTTjp 84

of,

91

reXetv tenses 130

double use

otTos

orac

c.

:

of,

indie.

168,

pres. subj. 186 : used for ri

Stl

Oil

93

94

239 — c.

— with 177 — partie.

:

fXT]

169-171

hibitions

and

verb re-

finite

placing ace. and inf. 211 use of ov fjLT] 39, 187-192 to

aor.

c.

—relation in pro231 —

fut.

c.

el

f.

and Av firj in illiterate Kotc^ 240 -ovdde and -ovre subj. 54 oil

200 f. with gen. 72, 73

S^eXoj'

^i

irapd 106, 247 anarthrous use 82 irarrip : as voc. 71 ireideiv : differentiation of tenses 147

act.

— f.

and mid. 158

45 wepl 104

Teaaapes 45 f. rripelv

f.,

235

TTotas gen. of place iroielv with noun,

159 KoKQs 95

supplanted by eh 97 f. 221 f. Tov c. inf. 216-220 rvyx^veiv c. partie. 228 abs. 74 -Twaav in imper. 53

instead of middle,

with

aor. part

228

-Tos verbal adj. in,

iroTairds

:

cases

64— with ^uerd 106,

247

73

n-pb 100, 109 7rp6 100, 101 irp6s statistics 63,

106

TrpSs

t6

c.

104

f.

for

99—

Sid

106 after dirodv-QaKeiv 156 vTTOTdaaeffdai mid. or pass. 16f See iadieiv

why defective 110 aoristic use of present stem ] 29, 238, 247 (pevyeiy differentiation of tenses 112, 115

tD

dat. 157 dat. and ace. 64, 66, 245 irpoaKvvelv ace. and dat. 65 c. irpoa(pu3V€iv irpoawTTOf in "Hebraic" locution 14, c.

99

statistics

adverb

agent 102 —compared with

diro

by

48

f.

inf.

218-220 irpoaix^'-'' c-

105— with

replaced

acc.

xdpis acc. of, 49 Xeip in "Hebraic" locutions 99 Xelpav et sim. 49 Xpo.<r6ai cases with, 64, 245

95

iroO gen. of place

—rvx^v

-via flexion of partie. in, 38, virep 104 f., 237 vird c. dat. 63,

TTOIOS

iroXffj.e'lp

126

TLs

(pipu:

73

TToieTc

f.

TiKTeiv differentiation offenses Ti's used as relative 93

(payeiv.

ttXovtos 60

— orthogi'aphy

and perfective 113

f.

acc. 33, 36, 55

TeaaapaKovTa 45

Treiu

wurreveiv constructions with, 67 TrXetco {et Sim.) as iudecl. 50 TrX'/jpT]! indecl. 50, 244

:

use in classical and Hellenistic Greel 71

wpav for point of time 63, 24r> u)s with dv \Q7 with on 212 uiffTf change of signification 207 secutive 209 f.

— con-


INDEX OF GREEK WORDS AND FORMS.

2U9

Modern Greek. PAGK au if

167

.

.

(XTTo c.

10 2, 245

ac(;.

3!)

dwoKpidriKa ds

— d<p€S

17 5, 176

gen. dSos, nuuus iu avT6s, Pontic dros -as,

dx (Epirot) = e^

Kdfj.i'u

Kav /ji,e

.... (aor. ^Kafia)

= fi€Td = Tjfjiipa .

/Jiipa

IJ-^iv) c. .snbj.

ftdOpaKos = €vpriKa j3pnKa yevafievos

38 142

.

51

.

159

yid vd in order that

162 S4v

= ovo(u

.

devofTas indecl. jnes. par tic Stct c,

ace.

eftdara^a

106

.

.

eMftrfKa eiTTOufie 1. pi. siibj. etTre .

of

^Xeye and eVas

= els — eiravcra .

eTraipa

.

earddriKa, €aTTj6r]Ka

= cnj

evprjKa f (/)epa

56 142 185 128 96 234 46

epevva ecru

17 0, 232 60

aor. o( <f)tpvii}=<pcpij e<pi' tTOS

(i)(piTO

=

0d, devd auxil.

162 234 142 129 44 12

formiug future 179, 185

fi7]

,

Ki

/cat,

38 47, 91

102

.

Kadeis, Ka9evas each

yevoiro

.

make


INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

III.

X

—see Sinaificvs

A — see

:

Ablative case lost in prehistoric Greek 61 as a part of the genitive 72 alleged Latinisms 101 f. Ablaut 152 Absolute genitive 12, 74, 236 accusative 74 :

:

Accent

(stress)

differentiating voices

:

238— distinguishing words

152,

Accusative

229— pi.

:

36— sg.

-es

and mixed

decl.

in -v

f.,

49— 3rd

49 — terminal

61 —

with prepositions, compared with dat. and gen. 62 with ds, encroaching on ev c. dat. 62 f., 234 f. with other

— —

for point preps, supplanting dat. 63 enof time 63 specification 63 croaching on other cases as object

— 65 — on

— on dat. — with verbs64,formerly

case with verbs gen. 64 f., 235 intransitive 65 65, 93

— internal or adverbial

— how far

the old distinctions of cases still hold here 66 constr. of TrtcTTeiyw 67 f., 235 with et's reabsolute yilacing a predicate 71 f. 74 substituted for nominative c. mixed with otl construcinf. 212

tion 213 Achaian-Dorian

I't

ionsart

— see A

f.

ctio

nform

Alkman 24 Alexander the Great 7, 30 Alexandrian Greek 40, 52

^

Alexandrinus, Codex 36, 47, 54, 76, 191, 194, 240 al American RV 180 Ammonius 160 Anabasis, effect of the expedition on

Greek dialects 31 Anacoluthon 58, 69,

95, ISO, 223, 224,

225, 234

Analogy-formations

37, 38, 44, 48, 49,

51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56

Anaplioric article 83 infinitive with prepositions 81, 216— prepositional phrases 81 f., 236— nouns in "headings" 82 use of norms with qualitative force

Anarthrous

— 82

f.

:

— proper

clauses

83

f.,

names 83 236

— adjective

infin.,

statistics

241

see Aorist, Perfect, Present,

al—

Future

Linear, Punctiliar, Perfective,

;

Con-

stative, Iterative, Ingressice, Effective.

Active Voice 152 if. see Middle Acts relations of hrst and second part 11, 216, 235— imity with Lk 14, 217 the " We "-document 217 see :

Luke Adjectives: pronominal 40, 79 f., 8791— indcclinahlcs 50— " Duality" 77 f. ])osition, comparison 78 f. with article and noun 84 intcrjectional 181 f., 240— verbal 221 f. Adverbs prepositions Kard and dva tised as 105 in composition 112 Aelian 25, 79 Aeolic 37, 38, 44, 2\i—c{ Lesbian :

A

Aorist: subjunctive c. oi' /x?? 35, 190 endings 51 f. action-form 109-111,

Koivri 37

Action-form, verbal 108-118, 221

Ahikar, Story of 238

a-text 42, 53, 175, 176, 190, 225

237

and iuhnitive 16 f., 211

in

see Index I {e), p. 263 Agent a.-rr6 for litto expressing iU2, 246 Agent-nouns 127 Agrapha 130, 171, 191

Aeschylus 215

Alcxandrimis

ilO

113, 115-118, 129 f., 132, 238— subjunctive, closely connected with f'ut. iudic. 120, 149, 240— indicative, compared witli imperfect 128 f. timeless participle 130-134, 238 as past indefinite 134 f., uses 134

135-140^expressing immediate past 134

f.,

139,

140— epistolary 135—

gnomic 135 English rendering 135140 compared with perfect 141-146 passive and middle 161 f. subjunctive after compounds of ai^ 166, 18t) no longer used with av iterative

— —

imperative, tone of 173, 189 3rd person in proliibition 174 f contrasted with imperatival pres. partic. 180 in unrealised condition, wish, or purpose 200 f. 167-


INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

Aoristic: presents 119, 247 i/jc'pw 129, 2;J8, 247— perfects 141-146, 238, 248 Apocalypse grammatical level 9 use

:

and neglect of concord

of cases

9,

60

—bearing of gransmar here on 11 — possible cism 9 — use of and in 3rd in -av 49 — person endings 52 — — — 69 nominative prohibitions 124 145 — ov 191, 192 —rod 217, 218 — does not sense 234 and ev in confuse —small use of compound verbs 237 -es

36,

position, its original adnoniinal use 216 telic force in Tliucydides and in 216 usage of the several writers in this respect 217 Paul's tendency to drop telic force 217

/jltj

local

els

Apocrypha, RV of 198 Apotheosis 84

Appian

dative 63

:

Aipiila 13

I (e), p.

75,

NT

speech of Paul imperfect 14, 226 f. of John 9 diction of Jesus 8 7 ordinals 96 tenses in Luke 14-18 139 periphrastic participle 182

— —

— see

imperative 226 f. ism and Over-use Arcadian 38 Archimedes 51

under Hebra-

— see Index Aristophanes 215 268 — Arrian, optative in 197 see Index I

(e),

I

use

— general

Greek 81

by

foreigners

"correctness"

— as

monstrative

NT

and dropped between

relative

81

21, 236 of as de-

preposition and infin. 81, 216 these three Ionic uses absent from 81—alleged Hebraisms 81 f., anarthrous correlation 81 f. 236

NT

236 82, phrases prepositional dropi)ed in sentences having the nature of headings 82 words specially aflectiug anarthrous form 82 qualitative force of anarthrous •

words 82 f. with proper names 83 used with the parent's name in gen. with names of slaves and 83, 236 animals 83 —6 /cat IlaOXos 83 col-

— before ad236 — mis-

drops art. adjuncts 83 f., placement of adjective 84

loquial jective

style

—tov deoD

Kal ffuTTJpos 7]iJ.Q>v, papyrus parallels 84 complex adjectival clause between art. and noun 236

Articular Infinitive ev ti^ in translation 14, 215— bearing on history of the Kotj'T? 34, 213-215— rare anarthrous use with prei)Ositions 81, 21() appropriate to rhetoric 189, 213, :

215

parallelism with 'Iva. 217 explanatory infin. 218 Tvpbs rb and ets t6,

far

218

telic

remaining for

f.

eis

tov,

to,

— belongs mainly

to higher educational stratum 220. Articular Nominative in address 70,

Articular Participle 126f., 228 Asia Minor characteristics of Greek 38, 40 f., 205, 211 :

Aspiration 44, 234, 236, 244 Assimilation of Cases alter verbs of naming 69, 235 omitted with gen.

:

abs. 74, 236 Asyndeton 181 Attendant Circumstances,

participle of

— —

its literary su}iremacy 24 earliest use in prose 25 grammar of inscriptions 29 Xenophon 31 lan-

Attic:

classes in Athens basis of literary Koivr} 32—

guage of the lower

264

Article:

NT

230

p.

{c), p.

235

104,

103,

95,

174, 189, 224, 226 f., 230 f., 236, 240, 242 periphrastic

124, 235,

NT

papyrus citations TTpbs TO c. inf. 219 f.

197 264

Aramaic: influences on Greek in 18,

how

— see Index^optative

3, 13, 14, 15,

f.

decl.

sg.

inf.

c.

216-

213, — citations from dialect inscriptions 214 — essentially — uso literary, specially Attic 214

with dependent gen., as if a full noun 215 tov c. inf., without pre-

-

aoristic pei'fects

NT

Greek 213, 215— for for Greek Hible 241

criti-

idov

f.

ace. pi.

271

— statistics for classical and later

31

— the

how much did it contribute to the iiom. vernacular Koiv-q ? 33 f., 214 f. KeKTw/j.aL ami pi. used as accus. 37 revival of /j-efivuifiai 54 KttTe'xea 55 the dual 57 parenthetic nominative 70 use of vocative, divergent from historic present 121 Hellenistic 71 the Orators, forms of prohibition 124, use of imperative 172 alleged ex. of aoristic perfect 146, 238 150 futures linear and punctiliar future middle active verbs with 154 f. a.TreKpivd/xTjv 161 optative in conditional sentences 196 f. imperfect in untulfilled condition 201 ws on 212 oTTws and iva 206 articular infin. mainly due to Orators

— —

— —

— —

in long for ace. 213-215 nom. enumerations 234— see under the Attic writers' names and in Index I

(d

r- 2.^6

Atticism 5, 22, 24 f., 26, 170, 197, 206, 211, 239 Attraction of Relative 92 f. .\ngmpnt 51, 128, 129 Authorised Version 93, 98, 112, 128 f,, 136-140, 189 Auxiliary a^es 175 f.


INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

272 B — see

Vaticanus 224

/3-text 42, 53,

— see

mider Sinaiti-

cns and Valicaiius Bczae, Codex 16, 38, 42, 50, 55, 56, 58, 69, 73, 80, 94, 96, 107, 114, 124, 131, 161, 171, 228, 233, 235, 236, 240, 241, 242 a^— see under d-text Biblical Greek, 2-5, 18, 99 Bilingualism in Rome 5 illustrated

:

from Wales

6f.,

in Lystra 7, 233

lOf.— in Egypt

— in

6—

Palestine 7f.,

233 Brcotian 33, 34, 55, 214 Bohairic 225 Bracliylogy, witli dWd 241 Broken continuity, perfect of 144, 145,

148

Byzantine period 88, 96, 168, 197

Cappadocian see Pontic Cardinals encroachment on ordinals 237 — simplification :

95

the

of

— uses of 96 — repetition for distributive 97 Cases in Rev 9 — history 60-76, 234f.,

" teens

"

96

ets

f.

:

236— with

100-107, 237 —see underprepositions the several Cases. Catholic Epistles, use of compound verbs 237 — see under First of JS]).

Peter, James, Second JSj). of Peter Causal Participle 230 Cautious assertion 188, 192 f. Chance in the Bible 219

Christians, ethics of average early 126,

238

terials for

study 22

f.

5f.,

19

— literary

— ma-

— papyri, inscriptions, MGr —unification of earlier Greek dialects 30 — foreshadowings of this 21 — completed in during v/iv time of Alexander 31 — decay of the — old dialects 32 their relative conlioivrj

(q.v.)

27-30

e.g.

f.

tributions to the resultant Koivi^ 3234, 36 f., 214 f.— pronunciation 34 f.

how far was KoLvq homogeneous 19, 38-41— dialects in {q.v.)

?

Comparison of adjectives and adverbs 77-79, 236 Complementary Infinitive 204

Compound Prepositions 99 Compound Verbs cases with :

fective action 111-118,

without statistics

preposition

237

237

65

— per-

—repeated 115 —

111,

:

filled condition, ei oi in

171, — futuristic subj.simple with edv —240 future-perfect in — lessened differencesense between and idv 187, 240 — these almost exclusively confined to their proper moods 187 — deliberative subj. 187 — differentia of and idv in future conditions 187 — use of optative 195, 196, 197f.— unfulfilled conditions 199-201 — participle in

200,

185 186

its

aor.

el

el

c.

el

protasis 229 f. Conjugation-stems 109 f, 120 Conjunctions with df [edv) 166, 234 " d\\d except 241 Conjunctive participle 230 Consecutive clauses infinitive alone 204, 210— wo-re with indie. a,nd with infin. 209 f. expressed by 'Iva. 210 by Tov c. infin. 218 Constative action 109, 111, 113, 115118, 130, 133, 145, 174 Construct state (Semitic) 236 Contingent dv 166, 198, 200 Contract Verbs, 37, 52-54, 55, 234 Contraction of i sounds 45, 55

:

' '

:

Correlation of Article 81

Chrysostom, on ecbatic iVa 207 see Index I (e), p. 264 Clement of Rome 95 see Index I (c), p. 264 Colloquial see under Vernacular Common Greek: takes place of "He" braic in definition of NT Greek 1 a universal language

Conative action 125, 127, 128 f, 147, 173 f., 186, 247 Concessive Participle 230 Concord 9, 28, 59 f., 182, 244 Conditional Sentences pluperfect in 148— apodosis with dV 166 f., 196, 197-199, 200 L~idv c. indie. 168, 187 el fxrjTL dv 169 el /jlt) in unful-

Cretan 214,

233— see

f.

Gortyn

Criticism, contributions of

grammar

to

40 f. Culture see Education 9f.,

D — see Bezae lost in MGr 60, 63— obsolescent in Y^oivii 62 decays through a period of over-iise, esp. with ec 62 statistics with prepositions 62 f confusion of ets and ev 63, 66, 234 f. decay of dative uses with ijitb and with e-Ki, distinct meaning Trpos 63 lost 63, 107 accus. begins to express point of time 63 reaction, as in extension of dative (instrumental) of reference 63, 75, and in some transitive verbs taking dative 64 verbs beginning to take accus. or gen. instead of dat. 64 illiterate uses of gen. and ace, for dat. 64 some improbable citations from early in-

Dative

— —

:

64 — with irpoaKwetv 64, — with some compound verbs 65 — with 67 — incominodi 75 — syncretism with locative 104 — with instrumental 75 — extenscrijitions

66

KitjTeveiv

f.

75,


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. and point of time tlins both given by dative 75 sociativc instrumental 75— instrumental userl in translating Hebrew infin. abs. 75 this and use of participle comjiarcil with classical uses and with LXX 76 various uses of iv 103 f. dat. of person judging 104 common uses of dat. and loc. in Greek and Sanskrit 104— ei* added even to instrumental dative 104 o/xoXoyeTv iv 104 (xeTa, irepi, vvo no longer c. one or two exceptions with dat. 105 viro 105 irpos c. dat. common in sion of time

— —

LXX,

rare in

NT 106— fV/

inditter-

ently with the three cases 107 dative of reflexive api<p' ifi 107 proximates to force of the Middle 157 xP^"'^^'- with instrumental 158 dat; or loc. of a verbal noun makes the Infinitive ;i02-204 articular

infin.

Days

of

(7.-!'.)

week and month

96, 101,

237

De-aspiration see Psilosis Defective Verbs 110 f. Definite nouns, in Semitic 236 Definition, gen. of 73 f. Deliberative Subjunctive 171, 185, 187, 194 5-text 14, 44, 45, 53, 181, 233, see under Bczac

Delphian, 36, 37, 52, 55, 214 Demonstrative article as 81 :

234—

— auros

36-38,

213f.

— see

,

under

p.

/xi]

30-34, Atfic,

Ionic, etc.

Dialects in Kolvi) 5f., 19, 28 f, 38-41, 47, 91, 94, 205, 209, 211, 241,243,249 23, 38, 44, 47, 111, 244 Diodorus, optative in 197 Di]ib thongs: pronunciation 33, 34 augment 51 Dissimilation 45 Distributive numerals 97 Doric 33, 45, 48, 51, 101, 214

Digamma

Double comparative 236 Dual 57 f., 77 f.

and

f.

superlative

8f.,

28, 44, 50,

18

f.,

52,

242

6,

Ellipsis 178, 180, 181, 183, 190

in pronouns 85 f.— imperfect and aorist differing in 128 possible cause of original voicedifferentiation 152, 238— on subject, l>rought out by English preterite 140 degree of, in ov ht) construction 188-190— of 01'; c. partic. 232

Emphasis:

— differentiating

words

of

full

or

attenuated meaning 237 English, Hellenistic illustrated from 39, 58,

19,

71, 77, 79, 82,

85,

89,

94, 96, 98, 99, 111, 112, 135140, 144, 150 f., 171 f., 182, 184, 185, 189, 195, 203, 206, 218, 221 f., 229, 236, 243 92,

Epexegetic infinitive 217, 218, 219 E[iimenides 233 forniulaj 28, 176, Epistolary aorist 135 180 Euripides 215— see Index I (c), p. 263

"Exhausted"

Final clauses

cavrou and Bios 87-90,

:

weakened

telle force of

205-210, 240 f., of rov c. infi)i. 207, 216-218, of eis roc. infin., in Paul 219 originated in volitive, with parataxis 185 final optative with 'iva 196 f wcrre c. infin. used for purpose 207 rov c. infin. 216218 Trpos TO and els to c. infin. 218-220— use of participle 230 Final i and v 49, 168, 187 First Epistle of Peter prohibitions 124 preference foraoiist imperative 174 for imperatival participles 181 o5 avTov improljable in such good Greek 237 Flucllen 10 f Fourth Book of Maccabees, Atticising in 166, 197

— —

:

.

.

.

Fourth Gos])el and Apocalypse 9 French idioms in English 13

f.

:

in

NT

60— in

Frequency, relative, prepositions 62 f., 98, 100, 102, 105, 106 f. 114 Frequentative verb, 190 c. IVa 35 c. ov firj 35, Future ill c. i(p' (f 107 Indo-Gerin:uiic verb 108 compared with futural present 120 history of its form 149 links with subjunctive 149, 184, action mixed 149 f. 187, 240 volitive English rendering 150 f.

Ecbatic ipa 206-209

etc. 4, 6

Egypt, bilingualism in, Elativc 78, 79, 236 Elis, dialect of 178, 214 Elision 45

of

Duality 77-80, 100 Durative action see Linear Dynamic Middle 158

Education, varieties of

;

IIcbrcvK, etc. Eflective action 109, 113, 130, 149

i'm 178,

f.

Deponents 153 f., 161 f. Dialects in ancient Hellas 23 f

under lUUeracy also under Mark, Lvlcr, Paul,

Apocalypse,

237

and ckeTi-'O'; 91 Demosthenes 213 see Index I (c), 263 Denial and Prohibition, with ou 187

52— see

27;

writers papyri,

9, 28, 44, 47, 49, 50, 51,

:

— —

— —


INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

274

its moods futuristic uses 150 f. 151 Middle in active verbs 154 f. Passive -with middle force 161 ditto used for imperative 176 f. with Sttws 177 rarely with fi-q in prohibition 177 in -warning with c. fji-q in cautious c. d 187 ^l^ 178 infiniassertion 193 optative 197

and

— — — —

— Future Conditions with idv 185 —with d 187— "less vivid form" 196, 199 Futuristic: future 150, 177 — subjuncf.— participle 230

tive 204

:

tive 184, 185, 186, 192, 240

8,

233— NT

Epistle to

Hebrews, Aramaic?

:

f.

Genitive

absolute 12, 74,

:

236—verbs

with 65, 235 with dKoveiv and 761^(oOaL 66 syncretism with ablative 72 objective and subjective 72 l>artitive 72 f., 102— with 6\pi 72, 73 time and place 73 definition 73 f.

— Hebraism

— here 74 — after

negative 235 f. prepositions of 104-107, 237

74,

adjective

with

100-102, material 102

Gnomic

future 186

— Gortyn Code 214 cf Cretan

— — Hellenistic 2 see Common Cfreck 265

1(e), p.

Heracleon 104

Herculaneum, papyri from, 27, 43 Hermogenes 172 Herodian cases in 63 optative 197 Herodotus 51, 62, 81, 91, 101, 214, 215 see also Index I (e), p. 263

literary criticism 9, 40

f.,

Semitism 12

lexical

Greece, physical conditions of 23

f.

flisplacement of, in theory Greek 1-3— in Rev of use of iv 11 f., 61, 103 cf Gallicisms in :

NT

English

— in

I'd

9—

— iu

t(2 c.

inf.

14,

215

Lk 14-18— tested by MGr

17, — predicate 72 articular — noni. in address 235 gen. of definition 73 — gen. abs. 74 — dat. or partic. for abs. 75 f.— use of —redundance of pro81, 236 nouns 85 — used reflexive — relative with superfluous 87, 105 demonstrative 94 — as ordinal 95 — and as indef. 96 — tributives 97 — illustrated by AV 98 — — (vwTnov 99 compound preposi—active tions 99 — dvoKpidels — middle 158 for imper. 180 — Hebrew teleology and clauses — 219 — nom. ^Kndcns partic. 225 — tenses 226 ''reedom jieriphrastic of Mk from 242 — cf under Over-use

94 —

ei's

for

70,

f.

infin.

article

for

i'l'xv

els

f.

art.

f.

f.

dis-

er7rei'131

for

infin.

final

c.

f.

Hebraist school of 2 f., 12, 223, 242

Hebrew

:

how

far

Historic Present, 120 f., 139 Homer the Achseans of 24 forms found in 55 syntax 121, 135, 147, 161— the Athenians' "Bible" 142— blamed by Protagoras for use of im-

NT

interpretation

known

:

perative 172

—see Index

— see under Parataxisp. 263 I (c),

Ignatius 215 Illiteracv

28, 36, 43, 49, 78, 87, 93, 142, l'69, 189, 220, 237, 238, 239 Imperative endings 53 of el/j-i 56,

—present,

compared with aor. tenses subj. in prohibition 122-126 compared generally 129 f., 173 f., 176, 189,

in Palestine

238— prehistoric

use

164—

formal history, 165, 171 f. tone of 172 f., 175 prominence of in NT 173 aorist appropriate in prayer 173 in 3rd person 174 f. expressions for 1st person 175 f. auxiliary substitutes d<pes 175 f. perfect 176 for 176-182, 203, 223, 241, 248 Imperfect 128 f. in unreal indie. 200 f. see replaced by periphrasis 226 f. Present stem 58 verbs f. Impersonal plural 74, 226 Improper Prepositions 99 of -IffKca suffix 120 action Inceptive Ineom.modi, Dativus 75 Indeclinable Greek proper name not to be taken as 12 7r\i)pT]s, ij/jucrv and .comparatives in -w 50 Indefinite Article 96 f. Indicative alone may have inherent time-connotation 126, 128, 129 aorist, used of imimperfect 128 f. mediate past 135, 140 rendering of

Headings, anarthrous 82

Hebraism

Hiatus 92, 117

174

205, 211

Grammatical and

Heteroclisis 48, 60

:

Gothic 78, 181, 224

Grammar and

96

94,

139 — present 135 —

aorist 135,

style of 18, 20,

118, 129, 232, 237 grammatical points in 62, 129, 182, 211, 217, 218 f., 231, 237 see Index Hebrews, Gospel of 17

Hypotaxis

German, illustrations from Gerundive in -reos 222

know

did author

10— Greek

:

Gender 59

163—

(Delitzsch) 104,

tenses 108

— — —

:

:

— —

English 135-140 yeyova not aoristic in NT 145 f. 238 pluperfuture 149-151 fect 148 as modus irrealislGA, 199-201— with dv 166 f., 200 f. with oral', oirov &i>, Scroi dv, idv 168, 239— negatived by ov 170 f. aorist

in

,

I


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. —but

not

170 f., 170 future used for coniniand 176 f., 240 future with ov fi-q 190 c. fi-q in cautious assertions 192 f. imperfect for present time in unfulfilled conand dition, wish, purpose 200 f.

239

entirely expelled — negatived questions /HT?

f.

— —

replaced by participle 222-224 periphrasis 225-227 Indirect Questions 196, 198 f. dual in Indo - Germanic 57 f. numerals 58 cases 61, 72, 75 verb system 1 08 f. Aktionsart 109 f. j lerfectivising by means of composition 111 f. augaorist-jnesent in 119 ment and the final -i in primary was there a future in ? tenses 128 149 future participle 151 voice, its :

— —

— —

no separate 152, 238 passive 152 verbs with no middle 153 strong perfect without voice 154 distinction passive use of rationale ni

middle already developing in 156 Greek weak aorist passive develo])ed from niidille person-ending -ilil's 161 •

— differentia

of the imperative 164, 171 f. glottogonic theories of sub164 the optative junctive and injunctive 165 the two negatives 169 jussive subjunctive in positive commands 177 forigins of the

infinitive

202

f.-

and adjectives and voice

203,

deficiency in tense 204 verbal its

participles 221 f. closeness of 3 pi. act. in -ont(i) to the participle 224 forms in c. eV ry 14, 215 Infinitive future 151, 204 f. contract verbs 53 :

—for imperative 172, 179 f., 203— articular (q.v.) 189, 213-220, 240— verb and noun 202 its origins 202204 comparisons with Sanskrit,

Latin,

English— 202-204,

207,

210—

development of voice 203, and of tense

204—case-uses 210

— anarthrous

203 f., 207, expressing purpose conse240f.— 217,

traced

204, 205, 207, 210 i|uence 204, 204 limitative 204

iVtt

c.

subj.

— complementary —relations with 240 f.— 205-209, 210 — 207, 210 alleged f.,

with wore final Latinism 208— consecutive Avith ware relations with wore c. indie. 209 f. 209 f., and with consecutive iVa 210 accus. subject and object 210 f. and infin. compared with otl clause to 211 accus. tending replace regular nom. 212— not Latinism 212 f. mixture of ace. c. inf. and 8ti construction 213— statistics 241

Ingressive action 109, 116, 117, 118, 130, 131, 145, 149, 174

Injunctive

275

mood 165

Koun) 6, 23, 28 f.— classiInscriptions cal, 23, 214— see Index I (<•), pp. :

258 f. Instrumental case 61, 75, 104, 158 use of eV 12, 61 f., 75, 104

character of voc. and of infin. in imperatival imper. 171 f. sense 179, 203— of partic. or adj. used imperativaliy 180 f., 240 pre-

Interjectional

positional clauses 183 f. Internal accusative 65, 93

confused with relative rts, woTairos 95 command 184 Intransitive verbs becoming transitive use of strong perfect 147, 65, 162 154 tendency of strong aorist 155 Ionic 33, 37 f., 43, 44, 48, 51, 55, 57, 81, 101, 195, 205 Interrogative

93

f.

:

and

TTOios

:

Ireland, bilingualism in 7 Irrational final i and v 49, 168, 187 Isolation of Biblical Greek 2, .3

Itacism 34

f.,

240

47, 199, 239,

action

Iterative

248— u.se

128, 129, 173, 180, 186, &v 166, 167, 168

James

127. of

125,

114,

109,

ISov in 11 prohibitions 126 use of Middle 160 Jerome 181 Jewish Greek 2 f., 19 see Hebraism :

and Aramaic John Greek of Gospel and Apocalypse

—place

:

use of writing 40 f., 211 of historic present 121 prohibitions 124, 125, l2Q—ixri in questions 170, 239— periiJirastic tenses 226, 227— compound verbs 237 Josephus 2, 23, 25, 62, 89, 121. 146, 9

235—see Index

189, 197, 233, p. 264 Jus.sive

178,

subjunctive

Volitire

Justin Martyr I (e), p.

8,

208

143, 233

—see

I

(c),

— see Index

264

Kadapevov(7a 26, Literary \\oivq

— cf

30

Klepht ballads— see Index

— see Common Laconian — see Sjjaria Koivfj 23

Allicism,

I (e), p.

265

Greek

Late Greek 1 Latin Bible 5, 72, 106, 129, 132, 240 —Paul speaking 21, 233— ca.scs 61 use of vc for / 87 jiarallds with Greek, etc. 112, 158— the Middle 153

:

subj.

and

171—jussive

indie,

in cause-clauses

177— prohibition 184— optative

subj. 178 — quin redeamus?

in

indirect

(question

199

—verbal


INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

276

— ut clauses — force 207 —verbal adj. turned into participle 222 221 — participle and adj. in — parallels to use of participle for — 241 poverty indie, or imper. 223 nouns 202— infinitive 204 206 their weakened linal

233— eXatwi-

LXX — see

-hilis

Lesbian

247

—see Aeolic ,

Lewis Syriac 53, 65, 72, 248

— — — — — — — — — — 235 170 —irpoaTideaOaL 232 — studies of Deissmann 4 — Lexical

vavs els awavT7)(nv 14 Lexical notes crKvWeiv 25 f. d(pi^is 26 epwTCLV 66 89 epdoTTLOv 99 evKpavi-is, ewKpdveta 131 102 dTTOKbipovraL {TTC^aXwi' Traidla 163, 201 wpoacpdyiov 170 :

elKoves

:

Hebraisms 11,

12, 46, Li^nitative infinitive 204

233

NT

Lithuanian alleged Latinising gen. found in 101 future in -siu 149 Local cases 60 f. Localising of textual types 41 Locative 61, 75, 104, 202 f. Lorjia 15, 104, 124, 126, 189, 191 Lord's Prayer 10, 173 Lost cases 61 Lucian 25, 170, 197, 227 see Index I {e), p. 264 Luke did he know Aramaic ? 10, 15,

:

— —

232— Hebraism

unity of Lucan writings 14, 217 preserving words of source 15, 18, 106, 237, contra 159, 242— construction of eytvero for 'nn 16 f., " a 70, 233— was "Hebrew's Gospel

in 13-18

— misusing a literary word 26 — recalling Homer? 26 — use of 71 — projected third treatise 79 —use " of " diml words 79 f.— oWts 91 f.— — historic present generalising 119 121 — prohibitions 124 — iterative dv

source ? 26

?

Co

?

167 f.— optative 165, 195, 198 f.— "correct" use of wp'iv 169, 199— preference

for

— — — — —

pres.

imper.

com-

pared with Mt 174 dp^dfxevoL 182, 240 ov fx7] 190 f. hymns in, their use of infin. 210 ace. c. inf. 211 ToO c. inf. 216 f. literary survival of ov c. par tic. 232 his two editions

— — in — 190, — — 191 optative 195 compound verbs 237 —rich in Aramaism 242

159 oral', etc. c. indie. 168 comparisons 185 fut. c. ov

Matthew

siibj.

f.i.rj

improves Greek of his source

:

— —aorist in 137-140 — 146 — preference for

aoristic

yiyova imper. in Sermon on the

20, 25 f., 26, Literary element in 55, 106, 147 f., 204, 211— see under Hchreivs, Paid, Ltike Literary lioivr) 2f., 21, 22 f., 24-26, 62 f., 64, 88, 118, 194, 197, 211— its analogue in MGr 21, 26, 30 element see Atticism in inscriptions 29

18, 20,

:

tionsl24

119, 120, 125, 126, 127, 128, 147, 149 f., 173, 174, 175, 180, 183, 186,

104— style 11,

Magnesia 29, 38, 43 Manuscripts of NT, orthogi-aphy tested 42-56 Marcion 114 Mark uncultured Greek 50, 53, 71 dative 62 eis and ev 62 the Middle

Linear action 109, 110, 111, 114, 117,

:

Septuagint

15, 124, 159, 200, 237, 2i2~Kalldov 17 historic present 121 prohi])i-

233

of

— com-

f.,

f.

235— artic. nom.

Lycaonian 7f., 233 Lystra see Lycaonian

in participles 229 f. Latiuisms 18, 20 f., 71, 75, 100-102,

142, 208, 212

—69,

address 235 eXaxiffros 236 pound verbs 237' sec Ads

f.

aor.

Mount 174

—ov fiT) 190, 191— Toi; c. superlative eXdxio-Tos 236 verbs 237 Middle: of elfxi 36 f., 55 f.

216— — compound —with and inf.

without expressed personal pronoun (gen. or dat.) 85, 157, 236f.— iirimiin Sanskrit, tive differentia 152, 238

— —"

Latin, and Keltic 153 Deponents" 153 links with the strong perfect how far 154, and with future 154 f. reflexive 155 f., 238 evolution of a compared with English passive 156 verbs that are both transitive and intransitive 156 f. paraphrased by reflexive in dative case 157 typical exx. 157 reciprocal 157 dynamic 158 mental action 158 differences between Attic and Hellenistic 158 f. "incorrect" uses in and papyri 159 f. Paul not implicated 160 airelu and alreicrdai 160 f. middle and passive aorists 161 f. verbs in which active became obsolete, or was recoined out of a deponent 162 common ground between middle

— — —

NT

and passive 162 f. Misplacement of article 84 Misuse of old literary words 26

Mixed declension 49 Modern Greek Kal

in place of hypoas a criterion against Semitism 17, 94 the study comparatively recent 22, 29 dialects in 23 (see Pontic and Zaconian) the

—used :

taxis 12

written language (see Atticism and use of the modern KaOapevovaa) vernacular in NT study 29 f.— versions of NT 30 (see Index I (e), Ionic forms in 38 p. 265) parti-


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. now

eiple

indeclinable

gender c^banges 60

225

60,

dative obso-vocative 71 article as lete 60, 63 a relative 81 redundant personal or demonstrative pronoun 85, 94 relative 94 interrogative 94, 95 indelinite cardinals as ordinals 96 distributives 97 article 96 supon the constaPurdie's thesis ports for tense our tive 115 present perfect, with words of duration 119

tlio

— — —

—historic

— —

present alternating with

aorist 121, 139 pres. and aor. subj. in prohibition 122 imper. in prohibition 122, 164 iniperf. and aor.

— — — idiom of compared 128 134 — gnomic aorist 135 — the perfect — use of Middle 156, obsolete 141 157—new active verbs 162 — subj. — of 167 negatives 169, 170, 232 — auxiliaries forming imperative and future 179, 185 — sole 175 178, survival of optative 194, of learned —infinitive obsolete, exorigin 240 205 — early date cept in Pontic of characteristics illustrated 233 — periphrastic future 234, 240 — — parenthetic nominative 235 t^iarri

f.

f.

for

relics

in -pa

:

clisis 48,

60

and

{q-v.)

its

f.

tlie

see

{e\ p. 265, and II, p. 269 irrealis 164, 199-201

Index

I

Moeris 46, 55 Month, numerals for days of 96 Moods common subjective element 164 other common ground 165 ai' in connexion with 165-169 negasee under tives ((/.I'.) 169-171 al SubOptatirc, Imperative, Iiijunctive,

:

junctive, and Modus irrealis Mystical ev of Paul 68, 103

Narrative, tenses in 135

Nasal in word-endings 45, 49 Negative adjective c. gen. 74, 235 Negatives in Atticists 25 in NT and

:

— in — mixeil

))assing into 3id decl. 48

from

and

-oiii

-is,

-iv,

48 declension 49 — accusatives with added — — 49 number 57-59 gender 59 — breach of concord 59 — case 60-tos

-lou

f.

-V

f.

f.

76,

234-236

Number:

disappearance of dual 57 — neuter plural, history and — "Pindaric" consyntax of 57 77

f.,

f.

f.

234— impersonal plural 163— TjME's for £7(6 86 246

struction 58,

58

f.,

f.

Numerals:

,

as an ordinal 95 f., 237 ordinals in ]\lGr 96 simplified "teens" 96 eis as indefinite article 96 f. 6 eh 97 repeated to form distributives 97 07000J' NiDc in

97

f.

— —

efs

— —

ejidofM-qKovTCLKis

AV

ewTd 98

Object clauses 210-213 Objective Genitive 72, 236 'OfxiXovixivq 26 Omission oi ixv 194, 198, 200 f. in Lucian 25 oi^rj 55, 0])tative future 151, 197 193 f. origin 164 f.— with av 166, 198— after irplv in in command 179 169, 199 LXX 194 compared with subj., and with future 194 optative proper 194-197 compared with English in 195 survivals hypothesis 196 differentia of optative conditional sentences 196, 198, 199— in final

— :

— —

Atticisers ignorant of f. sequence 197 misuses in Byzantine Greek 197 potential optative 197199 attended liy ov and dV 197 a literary use, but not yet artificial 197 omission of dV 198 in indirect Latin questions, contrasted with Luke observes sequence 199 198 f. itacisni in late period hastens decay 199, 239, 240

clauses 196

— — —

Oratio olliqua 142, 144, 151, 196, 223,

New

Origen 139, 169

Testament,

peculiar 19

Nominative

f.,

how 67

far

its

diction

as receiver of unapproname-case unassiuses 69

— —nominativuspendens — 225 parenthetic in time expressions and eiK6ves 70, 235 — articular 235 — replaced as in address 70 71 — perpredicate by sonal pronouns not always emphatic accus. as subject to 85 — priated

:

niilated 69, 235 69,

f.,

els

for

f.

c.

plified

ace.

f.

inlin.

f.

Nonthematic present stems 38, 55 North- West Greek 33, 36 f., 55

els

95

f.,

237— sun-

"teens" 96

Orthography

f.

239 Ordinals: use of

— — —

papyri 39, 169-171, 177, 184, 185, 187-194, 200, 229, 231 f., 239, 240 Neuter plurals 57 f. " Neutral " text see ^-text

212

48— hetero

-via

38, — contracted 48 — in

<iv

f.,

Modus

Nouns

277

:

Attic basis

34— a

test of

provenance of MSS 41 correspondence of NT and papyri 42-56 Over-use of vernacular locutions agreeing with Semitic 11, 14, 39, 61, 72, 74, 95, 99, 215, 226, 235, 242 Oxyrhynchus i/0(/ia 3, 51, 130, 191 f. of Heb 190, 224

—MS

Pagan phraseology 84, 102 Papyri non-literary, their importance brought out by Deissmann 3f. education of writers 4 al (see Edu:


INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

278

— —

and Illiteracy) compareil with inscriptions 6, 28 reniarkaljle antieijiation by Brunot de Fiesle 6

cation

— their

— ex1'.

character and use 27

i'.

ceptions to their general agreement

NT

with

39,

53— see

46,

Index

I

pp. 252-255 Parataxis 12, 178, 185, 193 Parenthetic nom. in tiine-exyn'essions {d),

69, 235, 245^in descriptions 69 Participle pleonastic by Seniitism 14, 230, 241— negatives with 25, 229, :

— towards —in tendency abs. 74 — transgen. abs. 76 — present lating Hebrew 228 — aorist of with article 126 coincident or identical action 130—that of subsequent action 134, 238 231

239

f.,

in-

60

decl.

inf.

f.,

167— for

denied 132-134— with Hv

imperative 180-183, 223, 240— for optative 182 overdone by Josephus 189— for indie. 222-225, 241— in compleperiphrastic tenses 226 f. contrasted with mentary 228 f. par tic. in Latin and English 229 conditional 229 f. conjunctive, con-

— —

cessive, causal, final, temi)oral,

and

attendant circumstances 230 — alleged

Aramaism 231

for event on permanent re: cord 129, 142, 143 f.— vivid use for event yet future 134 comjiared with aorist 140 f. increasing use in vernacular 141 be used with may a point of time 141, 146 decayed in mediiEval Greek 141 f. obsolete inMGr 141 f. Latin not responsible 142 characteristic use in Heb 142, 143 f. combined with aorist 142 f.,

Perfect

:

73, 223

Passive no separate forms in Indo(Jermanic 108, 152, 156 invades middle in Greek, Latin and elsewhere 153 evolved from intransitive

:

— — only partially differentiated in aorist and future 161 — common —replaced ground with middle 162 largely in Aramaic by impersonal — 163 not definitely attached 156

— —

— — — 238 — genuinely aoristic uses possible in Rev 143, 145 — broken continuity — —iriirpaKa 144, 145 145, 238 145 — yeyopa 145 239 — with present meaning 147, 176, 238 — k^Kpaya 147 — literary in Ac 148 — strong perfect normally intransitive 154 — oiiginally voiceless 154 — — imperative 176 periphrastic forms ^crxv^o.

f.,

rjyy]ixai.

176, 226 Perfective verbs 111-118, 128, 237, 247 29, 38

Pergamum

226

Periphrasis

249

f.,

and the

Participle,

— see

under

several tenses

Person-endings 51-54, 152, 154 Personal Pronouns alleged Semitism 84 f, 94 f. emphasis in nominative 85 f. rjtieh for 6701 86 f.

:

Perspective, action in

Partitive Genitive largely replaced by airo or (k c. abl. 72, 102 possibly with dxp^ 72 as subject of a sentence

— —

Philo

2,

96— see

Phrygian Greek p.

—see Constat

Index

I (e), p.

56 — see

Index

ire

264 I

(c),

259

Phrynichus 39, 194 Pictorial imperfect 128 Pindar 214—see Index I (e), p. 263 Pindaric construction 58, 234 Place, genitive of 73 Plato 62, 213, 215— see Index I (e),

p.

f.

f.

])lural

to the verbal adjective 221 f. Past time 108, 119, 128, 129 Paul: spoke Greek 7, 19, Latin? 21, limited literary 233, Aramaic 7, 10 phraseology 20 his iv Xpia-Tui 68, use of 103 use of we for I 86 f. between 99 prohibitions 124-126

238—

perfect 145, iterative dV 167, 168

middle

160—

—prefers present — imperatival parimperative 174 195 181 — 190 — — et — 211 — rodoptative 217 — t6 and eh t6 218 — — ov periphrastic tenses 226, 227 — 232 iXaxicrros and ^Xa236 — compound verbs Xicrrorepos in questions 239 — 237 — ticiple ace. •

oil

jjirj

inf.

c.

c.

Trpos

inf.

inf.

f.

c.

jiartic.

/jLrjTiye

fJ-T]

240 Perfect: action 109, its

111— in

double force 136

English,

Pleonasm 14-16, 85, 94f., 230, 237, 241 endings 53 action 113, Pluperfect 148 in conditional sentences, 201 Plural see Ntimher Plutarch optative 197 ort /at; 239

:

Index

:

see

I (c),

]>.

264

Polybins 14, 21, 23, 25, 30, 39, 62, 85, 92, 115-118, 197, 206 f., 247— see

Index

I (e), p.

264.

Pontic dialect of MGr 40, 45, 47, 94, 180, 205 Point action see Punctiliar Popular etymology 96 Position of article 83 f. Potential 165, 197-199 the Lord's 10, 173 absence Prayer Jn 17, use of aorist in of cD in 71 137 aorist imper. appropriate to 173 optative in 195

:

Predicate, with eis 71 Prepositional clause, anarthrous and articular, 81 f., 236 added to local cases in Prepositions :


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. Greek 61

— exiendorl

use in

Hellenot due to Seiuitisni Gl

nistic, statisti(^s

1'.

for

classical

aud post62 f., and for

classical

historians

NT

62 f., 98 in composition with verbs 65, 111-118, 128, 237— re"Hebraic" placing partitivegen. 72 phrases 81 f. dropping of article lietween prep, aud infin. 81, 216

tendency to drop article after 82, 236 combinations with adverbs 99 Semitism 99 f. with one case 100-104 alleged Latinisms

— —

— over-use paving the — with extinction 103 two cases 104-106 — 105 — with three cases 106 — adverbs in essence 112 — dropped when com— pound repeated soon after 115 compounds tend to be used instead — of punetiliar simplex 115-118 Polybius using conijiounds to avoid hiatus 117 — NT writers use them than the litUratcurs 118 — with articular 216, 218-220, 241 —see Index II under the several 100-102 way for

f.

statistics f.

is

less

infiuitive

Prepositions Present stem

:

Greek

twenty-three

of 109

varieties

its

action

linear

109, 110, 111, 114, 117, 119, 120, 125, 126, 127, 128, 147, 149, 173, 174, 175, 180, 183, 186— iterative action 109, 114, 119, 125, 127, 128, 129, 173, 180, 186, 233— verbs defective in 110 f. in perfectivised

— verbs 113 — punetiliar action 119 238 — contrasted with aorist in prohibitions 122-126 — conative action 186— 125, 127, 128 147, 173 timeless articular 126 — with av 166 — imperative, 238 — compared with aorist 173 quasi-iugressive in dTrox^petre 174 — subjunctive in warning clauses 178 — subjunctive with compounds — of compared with aorist 186 — special participle in periphrasis 227 f.

f.,

f.,

f.,

f.

particii^le

statistics

f.,

av,

uses of 6 &v Present tense Present tense

228 — see

Imperfect and

Prohibition

:

:

for future

distinction

of

present

and aorist in 122-126 not originally expressed by imperative, nor now in

MGr 164 use of injunctive 165 negative in 169, 187 f., 192 in same category as commands 173 ov /j-r) 187 f. must be treated here with denial 187 f.

Pronouns possessive 40 duality 77, 79 f.— personal 84-87— rellexives 8? unempliatic tavroO and i'oioj 87-90, 237 lOlos 90 f aiVos o and d :

auTos

91

— relatives

rogatives 93

91-95

— inter-

95

f.,

Pronunciation 28, 33-36, 240, 243, 244 see Itacism Proper names and Article 83, 230 Prophecy, use oH shall in 150 f. Protagoras 172 Psilosis 33, 38, 44 Punetiliar action 109-111, 116, 117 118, 119, 120, 126, 129-131, 135, 145, 149, 173, 174, 180, 222, 247 Purist school of NT granuuarians 3, 242 Purists in MGr 26, 30, 2'i3—c{ Atticism

— see Final clauses — "Q" see Logia

Purpose

Qualitative 82 f.

use of

noun

anarthrous

Quantity, levelling of 34 with p.7)TL 170 with ov Questions 170, 177— with fxri 170, 192 f, 239— in indirect, optative 196

:

Quotations from classical Greek 45, 81, 156, 233, 238 f. Quotations from OT 11, 16, 52, 124, 174,

Index

188,

190,

192,

224,

235— see

257

I {h), p.

Reciprocal Middle 157 Pueciprocal

Pronoun,

cavrov's

used for 87

Reduplication 109, 142, 145 Reference, dative of 63, 75 Reflexive Middle 155-157, 163 : no distinction for persons in plui'al 87 this confusion illiterate in singular 87 used for dXXr/Xoi's 87 replaced by Semitic use of ^I'X';

Reflexives

87 unemphatic iavrov 87-90 Relative time 148 demonstrative Relatives pleonastic :

91-93—

—237— with —confused with

with 85, 94 f., attraction 92 f. rogatives 93 f.

Soris 8.i>

234—relative

time 114, with irakai, etc., rendered 120, 167 by our perfect 119 for past time (historic present) 120-122, 139— see Present stem

279

inter-

{iav) fi-q in

1

66,

171, sentences, 239 relative clauses replaced by articular particijile 228 contechnical language 18

Religion

:

servative phraseology 20 Repetition, making distributives and elatives 97 Reported speech see Oratio ohliqua Result clauses see Consecutive Resurrection, voice of the verbs applied

to 163 Revelation see Ajiocttlypse Revised Version of NT quoted

:

or

discussed 20, 50, 69, 72, 75, 90, 91,


280

INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

117, 128, 129, 132, 136-140, 163, 175, 184, 189, 225, 229, niaigin 65, 66, 75, 7S, 98, 137, 148, 163, 221, 222— the First Revision 83, 156, ISO Rlietoric, rules ibr coiniuaud in 172 Rome, Greek used at 5, 242

116, 148, 231,

241—

Sahidic 80 Sanskrit survival of Indo-Germanic cases 61 locative of indirect object 104 aoristof "thing just happened" 135 future in -sydiid 149 grammarians' names for active and middle 153 2 sing. mid. secondary suHix

:

— — —

weak

Greek —survival of

compared with

-thus

aorist passive 161

165

injunctive

—Vedic

—-imperative

the

suffix

subjunctive makes in Epic a 1st person imperative 175

172

-tat

— Vedic

203

iniinitives

classical

—infinitive parallel with — sequimini 224 parenthetic nominaditto

204

for

235

aV234 — articular nom.

iJ-ia

for iufin.

for

241

— see

— Mk

237

address —statistics

little

influenced

TrpuiTrj

in

under Quotations, and (6), p. 250 Sefjuence, rules of Luke observes with

by 242 Index I

— :

breach 169, 199 indirect question 199 irpiv

of 197

— in

Sermon on the Mount, respective proportions of aorist and present imper. in Mt and Lk 174 Sextus Empiricus 52 !ihall and Will 150 f. Simple conditions 171 Sinaiticus, Codex 34, 35, 38, 42, 45, 47, 52, 53, 55, 65, 90, 133, 181, 190 aZ

Slavonic perfective compounds 111 future from that in -aijG (obsolete) 149 cf Lithuanian Sophocles 215 see Index I (e), p. 268 Sources for study of ILoivr) 22 f., 27-30 Sparta 24, 32 :

—see Vernacular 18 —moods genitive 72, 236

active tive in time-expression 235 and middle forms dillerentiated by

Spoken Greek

Allan/ 238

Subjective 164 negative 169 f. Subjunctive itacistic confusions with indicative 35 forms in contract verlis

Scotch parallel to dp 166, 239 Second Epistle of Peter 78, 98, 171, 238 f. Semitisra see Aramaic and Hebraism

Septuagint 2f., 13

:

"translation Greek" of

— Justin Martyr's dependence

on

— — —

els dTravTrjcnv in 14 8, 233 constructions of iyevero — ^'n'^ 16 f. extent of Luke's imitation 18 Hebraisms from this source to be

carefully distinguished

— 3rd

from Arama-

— —

forms in -aav 33 indecl. irX-iipijs 50 gender of BdaX 59 avT'ij for nil 59 TnareveLv 67 f. parenthetic nominative 70 violent use of gen. abs. 74 renderings of "exthe Hebrew inlin. abs. 75 f. hausted" iSiosand iavrov 88 redundant demonstrative after relative 95, 237 "seventy-seven times" 98 uses of iv 103 statistics for -rrpds c. historic present dat. and gen. 106 senii121 diroKpideis elirev 131 aorist and peraoristic perfect 142 fect together 143 K^Kpaya and Kpd'^w 147 KOLfidf active 162 a7ro^'e^'o/x163 statistics for dv 166 fiefos imper. 176 subj. used for perf. oi) fxrj 188, 191 f. future 185 owtj ei c. optaopt. 196 optative 194 tive disajjpearing in final clauses 197 —potential opt. 197 f.— o^eXo)/ 201 articular inlin. 220, 241 participle for indicative 224 partic. c. el/xi, N7 c, Aramaism 226 disproving edu partic. translated with ov 232 isms 18

pi.

— —

— — —

— —

— —

— —

Style, in

Luke and Heb

[q.v.)

:

54— SwT?

55, 193 f., 196— origin 164 alter relation to injunctive 165

— compounds of — alter 6.V

dv 166, 186, 239, 240 trplv (?)) dv 169— after ei fiyri 169, 239— negatives 170, 184 f.,

187 f., 190, 192— 1st person volitive used to supplement imperative 175, 177 ditto in 2ud and 3rd person volitive in positive commands 177 f. c. 'iva as an imperative 177 f. 177 f. with fxi) its tone in command 178 in warning 178, 184 present allowed volitive classified 184 here 178 184 f.— deliberative 184, 185— futur-

— — —

184, 185, 186, 192, 240— future indie, trespasses on all three 184 f., 240 volitive clauses of purpose 185 futuristic with idv and (see Final) in oTav {q.v. in Index II), etc. 185 istic

— —

— —

tenses of 186 comparisons 185 f. has excluded with ei 187, 239 optative from final clauses 196 f. c. Lva has become e(|uivalent of iufin. 205 (see 'iva in Index II)

Subsequent action, alleged aoi'. partic. of 132-134 Suffixes see severally in Index II Superfluous words see Pleonasm Superlative 78 f., 236

Syncretism of cases 61, 72, 104 of tenses in English 135 Synoptic question, grammatical points 'in 15-18, 71, 95, 103, 104, 105, 124,


INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 174, 175, 189-192, 224, 226 f., 231, see under Matthew, 236, 241, 242 Mark, LvJcc Syntax alleged Semitisms in 12 f.

:

Latinisms 21

244— see

Syriae 104, 241,

Aramaic Syrian Recension 42, 53

Lewis, and

cl'

— see a-text

Teleology 219 Telic

Temporal Participle 230 connexion with Tenses

time nn119— with dV 166,

original 108 f., 186 in conditional sentences 166, 201 in infinitive 204 in verbal adsee under the several jective 221

— —

Tenses :

pronunciation bear-

a, ft and 5 text {q. r. ) under Alcxandrinus, L'ezac,

ing on 34-36 see also

Siimiticus, Vaticamis, etc. "Textus Receptus" see a-text

Thematic vowel 171 Thucvdides 25, 62, Index I (c), p. 263 73,

215,

216— see

75

expressing 63, 70, — connexion with tense

original

108

f.,

72,

un-

119— expressed by

augment, and possibl}' by suffix -i 128 the perfect accompanied by

mark

of 141

Timelessness jicrfect

:

and

participles 126 aorist 134

Traditional spelling 35

"Translation Greek"

f.,

131

f.

4, 13, 39, 59, 76,

102, 104, 105, 106, 188 f., 237, 240, ^ee HeJ^raism ?in(\ Arn,m<n,242, 248 Translations of Latin, Syiiac, Sahidic, Bohairic, Gothic (q.v.)— Hebrew (Delitzsch) 104, 163— MGr

NT

(rallis

Index

:

and B.F.B.S.) I (c), p.

22,

30— see

Verba direncli et coqilandi 239 Verbal adjectives 221 f. Verbs forms 38, 51-56 in fit (sea Nonthematic) number 58 f. transitive and intransitive 64, 65 (7.?'.) Aktionsarl cases governed by 64-68

Uncontracted vowels 38, 48, 54f., 234 eavrou and Unenipliatic pronouns 85 ioios 87-90 UnfuUilled condition 171, 196, 199201— wish 200— purpose 201 Unification of Greek dialects 30 Uniformity of KoiciJ 5f., 19, 38-41

108-118, 221 al (see Adion-forin)— defectives 110 f. compounds (q.v.) tenses 119-151 (see under the

— several tenses) — voice —moods 164-201 —

(q.v.) 152-163 intinitive

and participle (q.v.) 202-232 Vernacular Greek 1, 4 f., 22-41, 83, 85, 188, 234, 239 al Vocative not strictly a case 60 relations with articular nominative of address 70 f., 235 few forms surviving 71 anarthrous nominative tends to supplant it 71 progressive omission of & 71 like imperative, is an interjection 171 Voice 152-163, 221, 2Z8L—iiee Middle,

:

Passive, Active Volitive future 150, 151, tive

175,

177

f.,

177— subjunc-

184

f.

— see

under

Future and Sv.hjunctivc Vulgate see Latin

Wales, bilingualism in 7 f., 10 f. " We "-document 217 see Acts Week, days of 96, 237

" Western

Wish 200 201

:

f.

"

Text

— see o-tcxt —

optative in 195 unrealised ditto in future with 6<f>e\ov

World-language —see Universal Wulfila

265

f.,

Vase-inscrijitions, Attic 31, 33 Vaticanus, Codex 34, 35, 38, 42, 47, 52, 53, 54, 80, 90, 97, 131, 133, 159, 169, 181, 190, 244 a^- see ft-tcxl

cases

:

Greek as a 5

iq.v.)

Tcrtullian 69 Textual Criticism

Time

Universal Language, 19, 28 f., 31

:

— see Final clauses :

281

— see Gothic

Xcnophon fore-runner 31 grammar of 62 :

(0), p.

(c), p.

Index

I

— see

Index

I

263

Xenophon,

pseudo- 25

263

Zaconian, 32, 249

of Hellenism

— see


adde:^da to indices

INDEX {a)

Matthew

New

I.

Testament.


ADDENDA TO {d)

BU

INDICES.

Papyri and Ostkaka.

283


ADDENDA

284 " Seinitism

/xerci

246

"

with wotdu 106,

248

oTTws 177, 178,

206

SKeuas 246

f.

= when

reaaapes ace. 213

249 246

oi) /MT]

244

avyyci'fvcTi, crvyyevis

168, 248 oTi for djare 209, 249 oral'

" Hehraistic " with negative, 245 f 245 TTfiLjTos c. gen. 245 TTtts

TraT-qp voc,

f.

/MT^TTOIS

INDICES.

T(3

Ttaaepas, Ttaffepd.Koi'Ta 244

o[/at d7r6

tbs

irapexii'V voices of,

248

for ews

wo-Te

249

249

Modern Gkeek. PAGE 'oeiv^^iSitv (Cos)

102, 246 247

e(f>6aaa

/can

PAGE

249

.

248 Trapa

compounded

iraffo.

.

247 244 247

.

.

244

.

249

INDEX Aeschines 245 action-form Aoriht :

247

— expressing

— compared with — for Egypt 242

ivimcdiatr. past 247

perfect 247 f. in Aramaic :

infin.

imper. 248 Attic treatment of a 244

III. 243

KoivT]

Lexical notes :

:

" incorrect" uses 248

Modern Greek

Bezae, Codex 244, 249 Bilingualisni 243

Tvaaa 244 vivals 249

Dative, illiterate use of gen.

for,

245

Education, varieties of 244 " Exhausted " lBlos 246 Final cLauses

:

weakened

245

tls

:

replaced

,

literary use of

by

Icrre

?

:

:

Hebraism

:

'iare

yLvwcrKovres

of TTas with negative 245

Imperfect 248

245 — use

IVa

John

248— in MGr

:

:

—sur-

Prepositions, replacing partitive 24."^ imPresent stem punetiliar 24-7 perative compared with aorist 247

:

f.

Revised Version 245

for imperative 248 purpose (anarthrous) 249 relations with

Infinitive

246

with clkovhv and yewaOai 245 et's supplying ior partitive 245 possessive 246

Genitive

NT 243—

atro 245 245 use of l)erfect 248— Hebraism in ? 245 in relf. to Scripture, Paul Perfect 248 combined with aorist ^crxvi"^ 248

Paul

249

versions of

:

ttTro

Ostraka243ff., 283 Partitive gen.

iva

242

NT

Middle

:

ets airdvTTia-w

:

245 Literary element in Luke accurate use of ^ deos 60, 244

Subjunctive, futuristic 249

Symmachus

245.

249

use of IVa 206, 249

Ka^a/3ei;ou<ra 243, 245,

246

Textual Criticism pronunciation bearing on, 244 relations of B and D 244, 249 Time, cases expressing 245

:

<^


Publications of

&

T.

CLARK,

T.

38 GEORGE STREET, EDINBURGH. Abbott

— EphESIANS and ColOSSIANS. — Primer on Teaching, with B.Sc.)

(T. K., B.D., D.Lit.)

Adams

John.

(Prof.

Sunday School Work. 6d. The Christian (Kev. R. M., M.A.)

reference to

Adamson

{Inter-

Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

national Critical Commentary.)

special

Doctrine of Lord's

Im|)erial 16nio (8 x 6), 4s. 6d. net.

Supper.

Adamson

— The

Spirit of Power. 2nd 8vo, —The Voice from the Cross. 8vo, — Aitken(Eev. James, M.A.) The Book of Job. With Introduction Crown and Alcock (Deborah) — The Seven Churches of Asia. W. Lindsay) — BiblicalTheology. Two Alexander Svo, A. V. Allen D.D.) — Christian Institutions. {International Ahlfeld

(T., D.D.) (Dr.), etc. Notes.

Is. Ed., fcap. Cr. price 6s.

6d.

Is.

Svo,

Is.

vols.

(Prof.

21s.

G.,

(Prof.

Post Svo, 12s.

Theological Library.)

Ancient Faith in Modern Light, The. Svo, 10s. 6d. Andrews (S. J.) The Life of Our Lord. Large post Svo, 9s. Ante-Nicene Christian Library A Collection of all the Works OF THE Fathers of the Christian Church prior to the Council of

Nic^A. Twenty-four vols. Svo, Subscription of Four Volumes at Subscription price of containing

MSS.

Works

Augustine's

Selection price, £6, 6s. 21s. Additional Volume,

discovered since the completion of the Series, 12s. 6d. net. Edited by Fifteen vols. Dods, D.D.

Marcus

Svo, Subscription price, £3, 19s. net. scription pi'ice of 21s.

Selection of Four

Volumes

at Sub-

3s. 6d. Balfour (R. G., D.D.) Central Truths and Side Issues. St. Paul and the Eoman Law. Post Svo, 4s. 6d. Ball (W. E., LL.D.) The Miracles of Unbelief. Sixth Ballard (Frank, M.A., B.Sc.)

Post Svo,

Edition.

2s. 6d. net.

—The Church of Christ. Two — The Doctrine of the Church.Svo, Svo, — M.A.) The Apostolic Age Its Life, Church Crown Doctrine, Worship, and Polity. Three Svo, Baumgarten (Professor) — Apostolic History. — 6d. Bayne LL.D.) The Free Church of Scotland. Post Svo, Crown Svo, Beck (Dr.) — Outlines of Biblical Psychology. Pastoral Theology of the New Testament. Crown Svo, — Bengel Gnomon of the New Testament. With Original Notes, Bannerman Bannerman

21s.

vols.

(Prof.)

12s.

(D. D., D.D.) Bartlet (Prof. J. Vernon,

:

{Eras of

History.

)

Svo, 6s. vols.

ISs. net.

3s.

(P.,

4s.

6s.

Five vols. Svo, Subscription Explanatory and Illustrative. Cheaper Edition, the five volumes hound in three, 24s.

price,

31s. 6d.

Christ the Life of the World. Price 6s. Beveridge (Rev. John, B.D.) The Covenanters. {Neio Bihle Class

Besser's

Primer.)

Paper covers, 6d.

;

cloth covers, Sd.

M.A.)— A Short History of the Westminster Assembly. Crown Svo, 2s. 6d. net. Two vols. Beyschlag (W., D.D.) New Testament Theology.

Beveridge (Rev. W.,

demy

Svo, Second Edition, ISs. net.

Bible Class Handbooks. Edited by 3s. each.

Crown Prof.

Svo. Forty-seven Volumes, Is. 3d. to Marcus Dods, D.D., and Alex. Whyte, D.D.

Detailed List free on application.

**

Detailed Catalogue free on

ajjplicciJiov.


T.

and

T. Clark's Publications.

Bible Class Primers. Forty-four now issued in the Series. Edited by Princ. S. D. F. Salmond, D.D. Paper covers, 6d. each; free by post, 7d. In cloth, 8d. free by post, 9d. Detailed List free on application. Bible Dictionary. Edited by J as. Hastings, D.D. Special Prospectus on In Five Volumes, imperial 8vo, price per Volume, in cloth, 28s. application. in half-morocco, 34s. Sets can also be had in various styles of leather bindings. ;

;

C, D.D.) — St. Peter and St. Jude. Bigg Commentary.) — Blaikie (Prof. W. D.D.) The Preachers of Scotland from the (Prof.

{International

Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

Critical

G-.,

6th to the 19th Centuky.

Blake (Buchanan, B.D.)

— How toPostRead the Prophets. 8vo, 7s. 6d.

Part I.— The

Isaiah Pre-Exiliau Minor Prophets (with Joel). Second Edition, 4s. Part II. Third Edition, 2s. 6d. Part III. Jeremiah, 4s. Part IV. (ch. i.-xxxix.). Part V. Isaiah (ch. xl.-lxvi.), and the Post-Exilian Prophets. Ezekiel, 4s. The Series being now complete, Messrs. Clark offer the Set of Five Volumes for 15s.

Joseph and Moses

Founders of Israel.

:

Bleek's Introduction to the

Briggs (Prof. 0. A., D.D.)

Holy

OF

Crown

8vo, 4s.

New

Testament. 2 vols. 8vo, I2s. net. General Introduction to the Study

Scriptuiie

{Replacing the Author's re-written and greatly enlarged). 8vo, 12s. net.

'Biblical Study,' entirely

The Messiah of the Apostles. Post 8vo, 7s. 6d. The Messiah of the Gospels. Post 8vo, 6s. 6d. The Bible, the Church, and the Reason. Post 8vo,

T.

6s. 6d.

—Lexicon Syriacum. With a Preface by Professor NoLDEKE. Crown — The Essence of Christianity. Post (Prof. W. Adams)

Brockelmann

Brown

(C.)

4to, 30s. net.

8vo, 6s. net.

The Training of the Twelve ; exhibiting B., D.D.) 6th Ed., 10s. 6d. the Twelve Disciples under Discipline for the Apostleship. Humiliation of Christ. 5th Edition, 8vo, 10s. 6d.

Bruce (Prof. A.

The The Kingdom of God

Post 8vo,

Synoptical Gospels.

Apologetics

;

;

or, Christ's

Christianity

or,

{International Theological Library.)

St.

Teaching according to the

7s. 6d.

Defensively

Third Edition, post 8vo,

Paul's Conception of Christianity.

The Epistle to the Hebrews

:

The

Post Svo, First

Second Edition, post 8vo, 7s. 6d. Bruce (Rev. R., D.D., Hon. Canon of Durham Cathedral.) Order and Unity. Crown Svo, 2s. 6d. net. Christianity.

Stated.

10s. 6d.

7s. 6d.

Apology

for

—Apostolic

S., D.D.)— The Ethics of the Old Testament. Cr. 8vo, 4s. The Formation of Chrlstian Character. Crown 8vo, 5s. Buhl (Prof. F.) Canon and Text of the Old Testament. Svo, 7s. 6d. Bungener^Felix) — Rome and theCouncil in 19™Century. Cr.8vo,5s. Burton (Prof. E.) Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New

Bruce (W.

Testament Greek. Post 8vo, 5s. 6d. net. Caldecott and H. R. Mackintosh (Profs.) Selections from the Literature of Theism. 7s. 6d. net. Oalvin'slNSTiTUTESOFCHRiSTiAN Religion. (Translation.)2vols.8vo,l 4s. Price on uppJication. Commentaries. Forty-five Vols. Curavit A. Tholuck. Calvini Tnstitutio Christianae Religionis.

Two

vols. Svo,

Suhscription

]jrice, 14s.

Candlish (Prof. J. S., D.D.) The Kingdom of God, Biblically and HlSTORICATLY CONSIDEKED. 8v0, lOs. 6d. The Christian Salvation. Lectures on the Work of Christ. Svo, 7s. 6d.


and

T.

— —

T. Clark' s Publications.

Introduction to the Life of Christ. 8vo, Caspar! (C. E.) Gaspers (A.) —The Footsteps of Christ. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d. Cassel (Prof. Commentary on Esther. 8vo, 6s. net. )

7s. 6d.

Cave (Principal A., D.D.) The Scriptural Doctrine of Sacrifice AND Atonement. Second Edition, 8vo, 10s. 6d. An Introduction to Theology. Second Edition, 8vo, 12s. Chapman (Principal C, LL.D.) Pre-Organic Evolution and the

Biblical Idea of God. Christlieb (Prof. T., D.D.)

Crown

8vo, 6s.

— Modern

Doubt and Christian

Belief.

8vo, 6s. net.

Homiletic Clark (Professor tion.

:

W.

Lectures on Preaching. 7s. 6(i. The Anglican ReformaR., LL.D., D.C.L.)

{Eras of Church History. )

The Paraclete. Crown

6s.

The Person and Work

of the

Holy

Spirit.

8vo, 3s. 6d.

Pascal and the Port Royalists. Crown Svo, 3s. Witnesses to Christ. A Contribution to Christian ApoloCrown 8vo, 4s. getics. Clarke (Professor W. N., D.D.) Theology. Thirteenth Edition, post

— An Svo,

The Use of the Scriptures

What

shall

we think

Outline 7s.

in

of

Christian

6d.

Theology.

of Christianity

Post Svo, 4s. Cr. Svo, 2s. 6d.

?

Can I believe in God the Father ? Crown Svo, 3s. Concordance to the Greek Testament Moulton (W. F., D.D.) and Geden (A. S., M.A.). Second Edition, crown 4to, 26s. net. Cooper and Maclean. The Testament of our Lord. With Intro-

— —

duction and Notes by Prof. Cooper, D.D., and Bishop Maclean. Svo, 9s. Crawford (J. H., M. A.) The Brotherhood of Mankind. Post 8vo, os.

Biblico-Theological Lexicon of New Testament Greek. Third Edition, with Supplement, demy 4to, 38s. Crippen (Eev. T. G.) A Popular Introduction to the History

Cremer (Professor)

— Cunningham (Principal) — Historical Theology. Two — The Levitical Priests. Crown Svo, Curtiss Franz Delitzsch A Memorial Tribute. Dahle (Bishop) — Life after Death, Demy Svo, OF Christian Doctrine.

8vo, 9s.

vols. Svo, 21s.

(Dr. S. I.)

Portrait.

:

5s.

Cr. Svo, 3s.

lOs. 6d.

G.)— The Words of Jesus. Demy Svo, 7s. fid. net. Davidson (Prof. A.B., D.D., LL.D.)— An Introductory Hebrew

Dahnan

(Prof.

Grammar.

With Progressive Edition, 8vo, 7s. 6d.

Exercises in Reading and AVriting.

A

Syntax of the Hebrew Language. Old Testament Prophecy. Edited by

son, D.D.

Demy

3rd Ed., Svo, 7s. 6d. Prof. J. A. Pater-

8vo, 10s. 6d. net.

The Theology of the Old Testament. Theological Library.)

Taylor Innes, M.A.,

Edition, 6s.

Waiting upon God. Sermons.

Post 8vo,

{International

Edited by Principal S almond, D.D.

The Called of God. A.

17th

12s.

With Biographical Introduction by

Advocate,

A

and

Portraits.

Post Svo,

Second

Further and Final Selection of

6s.

The Epistle to the Hebrews. Crown Svo, 2s. fid. Davidson, Dr. Samuel. Autobiography and Diary. Edited by his DAuaHTEK. 8vo, 7s. 6d. Davies (Principal D. C.)— The Atonement and Intercession of Christ. Crown Svo, 4s.


and

T.

Deane (Wm., M.A.)

T. Clark's Publications.

— Pseudepigrapha The Books which influenced — Bible Studies. Second Edition, 8vo, A.) :

our Lord and the Apostles.

Deissmann

(Dr.

7s. 6d.

9s.

Gr.

Delitzsch (Prof. )—

Post 8vo,

System of Biblical Psychology,

New Commentary

8vo, 6s. net; Psalms, 3 vols., 18s.

on Genesis, 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. net and Ecclesiastes, net; Pkovekbs, 2 vols., 12s. net; Song of Solomon 6s. net; Isaiah, Fourth Edition, rewritten, 2 vols., 12s. net; Hebrews, 2 vols., 12s. net. of 21s. net. *^* Any Four Volumes may be had at original Subscription price

Deussen

(Prof.

;

P.)— The Philosophy of the Upanishads.

Religion and Philosophy of India.

Dictionary of the Bible, A.

Dods

(Prof.

{Seepage 2.) Its Origin

Marcus)— The Bible:

8vo, 4s.

tid.

net.

The

8vo.

and Nature. Crown

Dods (Marcus, M.A.) Forerunners of Dante. Crown 8vo, 4s. net. Doedes— Manual of New Testament Hermeneuticn. Cr. 8vo, 3s. Hippo lytus and Callistus. 8vo, 6s. net. Dollinger (Dr.) Declarations and Letters on the Vatican Decrees,

1869-1887.

Crown

Authorised Translation.

Dorner (Professor)

8vo, 3s. 6d.

— History of the Development of the Doctrine

of the Person of Christ.

Five vols.

Subscription price, 26s. 3d. net.

System of Christian Doctrine. Subscription price, 2 Is. net. System of Christian Ethics. 8vo, 14s. Driver (Prof. S. R., D.D.)— An Introduction to the Literature rHB

OF

Old Testament.

Edition, post 8vo, 12s.

Deuteronomy

A

:

[International

Critical

[International Critical Commentary.) (R. J., D.D.)—

(Prof.

W.

of Church History.

P., )

Commentary.

Exegetical

Pelation

Teaching to the Teaching of Christ.

Du Bose

7th

Library.)

Third Edition, post 8vo, 12s.

The

Drummond

and

Theological

of

the

Apostolic

Second Edition, 8vo,

10s. 6d.

D.D.)— The Ecumenical Councils.

{Eras

6s.

Duff (Prof. David, D.D.)— The Early Church. 8vo, 12s. Dyke (Paul Van) The Age of the Renascence. With an Introduction by Henry Van Dyke. [Eras of Church History.) 6s. Eadie (Professor)— Commentaries on St. Paul's Epistles to the

Ephesians, Philifpians, Colossians. New and Revised Editions, Edited each or set, 18s. net. by Rev. Wm. Young, M.A. Three vols. 8vo, 10s. 6d. Ebrard (Dr. J. H. A.) The Gospel FIistory. 8vo, 6s. net. Apologetics. Three vols. 8vo, 18s. net. Commentary on the Epistles of St. John. 8vo, 6s. net.

;

Edgar (R. M'C, D.D.)— The Gospel of a Risen Saviour. 7s. Elliott— On the Inspiration of the Holy Scripturfs. 8vo, Eras of the Christian Church Noio complete in Ten Vohimes Dd Bose (Prof. W. P., D.D.)— The Ecumenical Councils. 6s. Waterman (L., D.D.)— The Post-Apostolic Age. 6s.

Dyke (Paul Van)— The Age of the

Renascence.

6d. 6s.

6s.

Locke (Clinton, D.D.)— The Age of the Great Western Schism. 6s. Ludlow (J. M., D.D.)—The Age of the Crusades. 6s, Vincent (Prof. M. R., D.D.)— The Age of Hildebrand. 6s. Clark (Prof. W. R., LL.D., D.C.L.)— The Anglican Reformation. 6s. Wells (Prof. C. L. )— The Age of Charlemagne. 6s. Bartlet (Prof. .1. Vernon, M.A.)— Tlie Apostolic Age. 6s. Walker (Prof. W., Ph.D., D.D.)— The Protestant Reformation. 6s.

Emesti BiblicalInterpretation of New Testament. Two vols., 8s. Ewald (Heinrich) Hebrew Syntax. 8vo, 8s. 6d.


T.

Ewald

and

T. Clark's Publications.

— Revelation

Its

Nature and Record.

8vo, 6s. net. Svo, 6s. net. Expository Times. Edited by James Hastings, D.D. Monthly, 6d. Fairbairn (Prin.) The Revelation of Law in Scripture, 8vo, 10s. 6d.

(Heinrich)

:

Old and New Testament Theology.

Ezekiel and the Book of his Prophecy.

Fourth Edition

8vo, 10s. 6d.

Prophecy. Second Edition, Svo, 10s. 6ii. Pastoral Theology. Crown Svo, 6s. Fairweather (Rev. W., M.A.) Origen and Greek

Patristic

Theology. 3s. Falconer (J. W., B.D.) From Apostle to Priest. Study of Early Church Organisation. Oi'own Svo, 4s. 6d. Ferries (Rev. George, D.D.) The Growth of Christian Faith.

A

Svo,

7s.

6d. net.

Fisher (Prof. G.

P., D.D.,

LL.D.)— History of Christian Doctrine.

{International Theological Library.)

— M.A.) Socrates. Crown — Four Theological Library

Forbes

(J.

T.,

Epoch- Markers.)

Foreign

Second Edition, post Svo, 12s. {In the Series of the World's

Svo, 3s.

Volumes

for

One Guinea.

De-

tailed List on aijplication.

(D. W., D.D.)— The Christ perience. Fourth Edition, post Svo, 6s.

Forrest

of

History and of Ex-

Frank (Prof. F. H.)— Systkm of Christian Certainty. Svo, 6s. net. Funcke (Otto) The World of Faith and the Everyday World,

as displayed in the Footsteps of

Abraham.

Post Svo,

7s. 6d.

Garvie (Prof. A. E., D.D.)— The Ritschlian Theology. 2nd Ed., Svo, 9s. Gebhardt (H.) The Doctrine of the Apocalypse. Svo, 6s. net. A Record of Geere (H. Valentine)— By Nile and Euphrates.

Discovery and Adventure.

Svo, price Ss. 6d. net.

Deiuy — Commentary on the Pentateuch.

Svo, 6s. net. Gieseler (Dr. J. C. L.)— Ecclesiastical History. Four vols. Svo, 21s. Given (Rev. Prof. J. J.)— The Truth of Scripture in connection WITH Revelation, Inspiration, anh the Canon. Svo, 6s. The Christian Pastor and Gladden (Washington, D.D., LL.D.) the Working Church. {Liternational Theol. Library.) Post Svo, 10s. 6d.

Gerlach

Glasgow

(Prof.)

— Apocalypse

Translated

and

Expounded.

Svo, 10s. 6d.

Prophecies. Cr. Svo, 7s. J., D.D,)— The Messianic Introduction to the Catholic Epistles. Svo, 10.s. 6d. Introduction to the Synoptic Gospels. Svo, 7s. 6d. Exegetical Studies. Crowu Svo, .5s.

Gloag (Paton

6d.

The Primeval World. Crown Svo, 3s. F.)—An Introduction to the New Testament—

Godet

(Prof. I.

II.

1

The Epistles of St. Paul. Svo, 12s. 6d. net. The Gospel Collection, and St. Matthew's Gospel. Svo, 6s. net. Commentary on St. Luke's Gospel. 2 vols. Svo, i2s. net. Commentary on St. John's Gospel. 3 vols. Svo, iss net. Commentary on Epistle to the Romans. 2 vols. Svo, 12s. net. Commentary on 1st Epistle to Corinthians. 2 vols. Svo,

2s

*^* *

net.

Any Four Volumes

at the original Subscription price of 21s. net. Crown Svo, 4s.

Defence of The Christian Faith. Goebel (Siegfried)— The Parables of Jesus.

Svo, 6s. net.


T. and T. Clark's Publications. Gotthold's Emblems THAT ABE MaDE.

Gould

E.

(Prof.

Co7n7nentary.)

Gray

Invisible Things Understood by Things

or,

;

CpOWII 8vO,

5s.

St. P., D.D.) Post 8vo, 10s. 6d.

(Prof. G. Buchanan, D.D.) Commentary.) Post 8vo, 12s.

Mark.

— Numbers.

Grimm's Greek-English Lexicon of the lated, Revised,

Critical

{International

{International Critical

New

Testament. TransDemy 4to, 36s. The Biblical Cosmogony in the

and Enlarged by Joseph H. Thayer, D.D.

— Creation; —

Guyot (Arnold, LL.D.)

or,

Crown 8vo, 5s. 6d. Light of Modern Science. With Illustrations. Hagenbach (Dr. K. R.) History of Doctrines. 3 vols. 8vo, 18s. net. History of the Reformation. 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. net. •

Halcombe (Rev. J. J., M. A.)— What Think We of the Gospels 1 3s. 6d. Hall (Newman, D.D.) Divine Brotherhood. 3rd Ed., cr. 8vo, 4s. Hamilton (T., D.D.) Beyond the Stars; or, Heaven, its Inhabitants,

— — and Third crown — System of Christian Ethics. A.) W. R., Ph.D.) — Amos and Hosea. Life.

Occupations,

Harless (Dr. C.

Harper

(Pres. Critical Commentary.)

Harris

(S.,

D.D.)

— God Post the

vols, post 8vo, 16s.

8vo,

6s. net.

{International

8vo, 12s.

Creator and Lord of All.

Two

Theology of the Reformed Church in Fundamental Principles {Croall Lectures). Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. net. Outlines of Pastoral Theology. For Young Ministers

Hastie (The late Prof.) ITS

8vo, 3s. 6d.

Edition,

antl Students.

Is. 6d. net.

—The First Epistle of St. John. 8vo, A. Ch.) — Introduction to Old Testament. M. A.) — The Tripartite Nature of Man.

Haupt (Erich) Havemiek (H. Heard (Rev. J.

6s. net.

B.,

6s. net. Cr.-Svo, 6s. Cr. 8vo, 6s.

Old AND New Theology. A Constructive Critique. Alexandrian and Carthaginian Theology contrasted.

The Hulsean Hefele (Bishop)

Crown

Lectures, 1892-93.

—A

8vo, 6s.

History of the Councils of the Church.

Vol. L.toA.D. 325. Vol. II., a.d. 326 to 429. Vol. III., a.d. 431 to the close of the Council of Chalcedon, 451. Vol. IV., a.d. 451 to 680. Vol. V., a.d. 626 to 787. 8vo, 12s. each.

Henderson (Rev. H, F., M.A.)— The Religious Controversies of Scotland.

Post 8vo,

4s. 6d. net.

Hengstenberg (Professor)

— Commentary

on Psalms,

3 vols. 8vo,

net; Ecclesiastes, etc., 8vo, 6s. net; Ezekiel, 8vo, 6s. net; The Genuineness of Daniel, etc., 8vo, 6s. net History of the Kingdom OF God, 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. net Christologt of the Old Testament, 4 vols., 21s. net; St. John's Gospel, 2 vols. 8vo, 21s. * ^* Any Four Volumes at the original Subscription price of 21s. net. 18s.

;

;

Herkless (Prof.

Herzog

J.,

D.D.) — Encyclopedia

nominations in pcedia.)

— Francis and Dominic.

Crown

8vo, 3s.

of Living Divines, etc., of all DeEurope and America. {Supplement to Herzog' s Encyclo-

Imp. 8vo,

8s.

Hamlyn, D.D.) St. Ephraem the Syrian. 8vo, 7s. 6d. Hilprecht (Prof. H. V.) Explorations in Bible Lands. Large

Hill (Rev. J.

Svo, 12s. 6d. net.

J. M., M.A., D.Sc, D.D.) Theologia Outlines of Religious Faith and Doctrine. Crown Svo, 3s. 6d.

Hodgson (Principal

Holborn (Alfred, M.A.)

A

Pectoris

:

— The Pentateuch in the Light of To-day.

Simple Introduction to the Pentateuch on the Lines of the Higher Criticism. Second Edition, crown 8vo, 2s, net.


T.

Hudson

and

T. Clark's Publications.

7

W. H.)— Kousseau, and Naturalism

(Prof.

Crown

Thought.

in Life

and

8vo, 3s.

Inge (W. R., D.D.)— Faith and Knowledge. Post 8vo, 4s. 6d. net. Innes (A. D., M.A.)— Cranmer and the English Eeformation. Crown

Svo, 3s.

Taylor)— The Trial of Jesus Christ.

Innes (A.

In

its

Second Edition, post Svo, 2s. 6d. International Critical Commentary.

Legal

Aspect.

Gray

(Prof. G.

Buchanan, D.D.)

—Numbers.

Driver

(Prof. S. R., D.D. )— Deuteronomy. Moore (Prof. G. F., D.D.)— Judges. 12s. Smith (Prof. H. P., D.D.)— Samuel. 12s. Toy (Prof. C. H., D.D.)— Proverbs. 12s.

12s. 12s.

Harper (Pres. W. R.) Amos and Hosea. 12s. Gould (Prof. E. P., D.D.)— St. Mark. 10s. 6d.

Plummer (Alfred, D.D.) — St. Luke. 12s. Sanday (Prof. W., D.D.) and Headlam (Prin.

A. C, D.D.)— Romans. 12s. Abbott (Prof. T. K., B.D., D.Lit.) Ephesians and Colossians. 10s. 6d. Vincent (Prof. M. R., D.D.) Phil ippians and Philemon. 8s. 6d. Bigg (Prof. C, D.D.)— St. Peter and St. Jude. 10s. 6d.

For List offuhire Volumes

see p.

1 5.

International Theological Library, Davidson (Prof. A. B.)— Theology of the Old Testament.

12s.

An Introduction to the Literature of the Old (Prof. S. R., D.D.) Testament. 12s. Smith (Prof. H. P.)— Old Testament History. 12s.

Driver

Smyth (Newman, D.D.)— Christian Ethics. 10s. 6d. Bruce (Prof. A. B., D.D.)— Apologetics. 10s. 6d. Fisher (Prof. G. P., D.D., LL.D.)— History of Christian Doctrine. Allen (Prof. A. V. G., D.D.) — Christian Institutions. 12s. McGiFFERT (Prof. A. C, Ph.D.)— The Apostolic Age. 12s. Gladden (Washington, D.D. )— The Christian Pastor. 10s. 6d. Stevens (Prof. G. B., D.D.)— The Theology of the New Testament. The

Rainy

12s.

123.

12s. Christian Doctrine of Salvation. The Ancient Catholic Church. 12s. (Prin. R.) For List of future Volumes sec p. 14.

Iverach (Princ. James, D.D.) Descartes, Spinoza, and the New Philosophy. Crown Svo, 3s. Janet (Paul) Final Causes. Second Edition, demy Svo, 12s. The Theory of Morals. Demy Svo, 10s. 6d. Johns (C. H. W., M.A.) The Oldest Code of Laws in the World.

The Code of Laws promulgated by Hammurabi, King 2242. Crown Svo, Is. 6d. net.

of Babylon, B.C. 2285-

Babylonian and Assyrian Laws, Contracts, and Letters. Demy Svo, 12s. net. Johnstone (P. De Lacy, M.A.) Muhammad and his Power. 3s. Johnstone (Prof. R., D.D.)— Commentary on 1st Peter. Svo, 10s. 6d. Jones (E. E. C.) Elements of Logic. Svo, 7s. 6d. Jordan (Rev. Louis H., B.D.) Comparative Religion Its Genesis

and Growth.

:

Introduction by Principal Fairbairn, D.D.

Svo, 12s. net.

the Christian Religion.

(Prof. J., D.D.)— The Truth of Authorised Translation. 2 vols. Svo, 16s. net.

Kaftan

—The Metaphysic of Ethics.

Crown Svo, 6s. W. Hastie, D.D. Cr. Svo, 58. Principles of Politics, etc Crown Svo, 2s. 6d. Kennedy (James, D.D.)— The Note-Line in the Hebrew Scriptures. Kant

Philosophy of Law.

4s. 6d. net.

Trans, by


8

and

T.

T. Clark' s Publications.

Keil (Prof.) Pentateuch, 3 vols. 8vo, 18s. net; Joshua, Judges, AND EuTH, 8vo, 6s. net Samuel, 8vo, 6s. net Kings, 8vo, 6s. net Ezra, Nehemiah, Esther, 8vo, 6s. net Chronicles, Svo, 6s. net ;

;

;

;

;

Jeremiah, 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. net; Ezekiel, 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. net; Daniel, Minor Prophets, 2 vols. Svo, 12s. net Introduction to Svo, 6s. net ;

;

the Canonical Scriptures of the Old Testament, 2 vols. net Handbook of Biblical Archeology, 2 vols. Svo, 12s. net.

Svo, 12s.

;

Any Four Volumes

*^f*

at the original Subscription price of 21s. net.

Notes on Genesis. Crown Svo, Is. 6d. (Rev. N., M.A.) Kidd (James, D.D.) Morality and Religion. Svo, 10s. 6d. Killen (Prof.) The Framework of the Church. Svo, 9s.

Keymer

The Old Catholic Church. Svo, 9s. The Ignatian Epistles Entirely Spurious.

Cr. Svo, 2s. 6d.

2s. 6d. Kilpatrick (Prof. T. B., D.D.)— Christian Character. Konig (Dr. Ed.) The Exiles' Book of Consolation (Deutero-Isaiah). Crown Svo, 3s. 6d. Konig (Dr. F. E. )— The Religious History of Israel. Cr. Svo, 3s. 6d.

Krause

— The

Ideal of Humanity. Crown Svo, 3s. W.) The Suffering Saviour. Cr. Svo, 6s. David, the King of Israel. Second Edition, cr. Svo, 6s. Autobiography. Crown Svo, 6s. Kurtz (Prof. )— Handbook of Church History (from 1517). 8vo,7s. 6d. History of the Old Covenant, Three vols. Svo, 18s. net. Ladd (Prof. G. T.) The Doctrine of Sacred Scripture. Two (F. C. F.)

Krummacher

(Dr.

F.

vols. Svo,

Laidlaw

1600 pp., 24s.

—The Bible Doctrine of Man. C, B.D.) — The Sacraments in

(Prof. J., D.D.)

Lambert (Rev.

J.

Testament.

PostSvo,

the

7s. 6d.

New

Demy Svo, price 10s. 6d. Lane (Laura M.) Life of Alexander Vinet. Crown Svo, 7s. 6d. Lange (J. P., D.D.) The Life of our Lord Jesus Christ. Edited

— —

by Marcus Dods, D.D.

2ud Edition, in 4

Commentaries on the Old and

vols. Svo, price 2Ss. net.

New

Testaments.

Edited

by Philip Schaff, D.D. Old Testament, 14 vols. New Testament, 10 vols. Apocrypha, 1 vol. Subscription price, net, 15s. each. St. Matthew and St. Mark, 3 vols. Svo, ISs. net; St. Luke, 2 vols. Svo, 12s. net; St. John, 2 vols. Svo, 12s. net. '^* Any Four Volumes at the original Subscription price of 21s. net. Camus (E., Bishop of La Rochelle) The Children of Nazareth. ;

;

Le

Fcap. 4to.

4s.

Lechler (Prof. G. V., D.D.) Times.

Lehmann

— The

Apostolic and Post- Apostolic

Their Diversity and Unity in Life and Doctrine.

2 vols.

cr.

Svo, 16s.

Scenes from the Life of Jesus. Cr. Svo, 3s. 6d. (Pastor) Lewis (Tayler, LL.D.) The Six Days of Creation. Cr. 8vo, 7s. 6d. Lidgett (Rev. J. Scott) The Fatherhood of God in Christian Truth and

Life.

Lilley (J. P., D.D.) Use.

Crown

Svo, Ss. net.

—The

Lord's Supper:

The Pastoral

Epistles.

Nature, and

2s. 6d.

Principles of Protestantism. LilUe (Arthur)

Its Origin,

Svo, 5s.

— Buddha

Lindsay (Prin. T.

2s. 6d.

and Buddhism. Crown Svo, 3s. M., D.D.)— Luther and the German Eeforma-

TiON. Crown 8vo, 3s. Lisco (F. G.) Parables of Jesus Explained. Fcap. Svo, 5s. Locke (Clinton, D.D.) The Age of the Great Western Schism.

{Eras of Church History. )

6s.


and

T.

T. Clark's Publications.

Lotze (Hermann) — Microgosmus relation to the

Ludlow

World.

Essay concerning

Cheaper Edition, 2

Man and

8vo (1450 pp.),

vols.

Church History.) 6s. Luthardt, Kaluiis. and Bruckner The Luthardt(Prof.) St. John the Author

his

24s.

D.D.)—The Age of the Crusades.

M.,

(J.

An

:

9

of

{Eras

Church. Crown 8vo, 5s. of theFourth Gospel. 7s.6d.

Commentary on St. John's Gospel. 3 vols. 8vo, 18s. net. History of Christian Ethics. 8vo, 6s. net. Apologetic Lectures on the Fundamental (7 Ed.), Saving 3 vols. cr. 8vo, 6s. each. (5 Ed.), Moral Truths of Christianity (4 Ed.). Macdonald Introduction to Pentateuch. Two vols. 8vo, 12s. net. Creation and the Fall. 8vo, 6s. net. The Apology of the Christian Macgregor (Rev. Jas., D.D.)

Religion.

8vo, 10s. 6d.

The Revelation and the Record Previous Question in the Proof of Christianity.

Studies in the History of

New

:

Essays on Matters of 8vo, 7s. 6d.

Testament Apologetics.

Svo, 7s. 6d.

Macgregor (Rev. G. H. C, M.A.)— So Great Salvation. Cr. 32mo, Is. Macpherson (Rev. John, M.A.) Commentary on the Epistle to

THE Ephesians.

8vo, lOs. 6d.

Christian Dogmatics.

Post 8vo, 9s. Life of. 8vo, 9s. McGiffert (Prof. A. C, Ph.D.) History of Christianity in Apcstolic Age. {International Theological Lihrary.) Post Svo, 12s.

McCosh (James),

The Apostles' Creed. M'Hardy

(G-.,

Post Svo,

4s. net.

Crown

D.D.)— Savonarola.

the

Svo, 3s.

M'Intosh (Rev. Hugh, M.A.) Is Christ Infallible and the Third Edition, post Svo, 6s. net. Bible True Mackintosh (Prof. R., D.D.) Hegel and Hegelianism. Crown 8vo, 3s. ?

M'Realsham

— — Romans Dissected.

A

(E. D.) Epistle to the Eomans.

Mair

Critical Analysis of the

Crown Svo, 2s. Studies in the Christian

(A., D.D.) Edition, Revised and Enlarged, crown Svo,

Third

Evidences.

6s.

Martensen (Bishop) Christian Dogmatics. Svo, 6s. net. Indfvidual Christian Ethics. Social.) (General Three

Matheson

(Geo.,

D.D.)— Growth of the Spirit of Christianity, from

the First Century to the

Meyer

(Dr.)

New

vols. Svo, 6s. net each.

— Critical

Testament.

Dawn

of the Lutheran Era.

Two

vols. Svo, 21s.

and Exegetical Commentaries on the

Twenty

Svo.

vols.

Stibscription j)rice, £5,

selection of Four Volumes at Subscription price of 2\s. price, 10s. 6d. each volume. and Luke, 2 vols. ; St. Matthew, 2 vols. ;

;

Mark

net

5s.

;

_

Xon- Subscription St.

John, 2

vols.

;

Romans, 2 vols. Corinthians, 2 vols. Galatians, one vol. Ephesians and Philemon, one vol. Philippians and Colossians, one vol. Thessalonians {Dr. Lilnemann), one vol. The Pastoral Epistles {Dr. Hebrews {Dr. Lilnemann), one vol. St. James and St. Huther), one vol. John's Epistles {Huther), one vol. Peter and Jude {Dr. Huther), one vol. Michie (Charles, M.A.)— Bible Words and Phrases. ISmo, Is. Acts, 2 vols.

;

;

;

;

;

;

;

;

;

;

Milligan (George, D.D.)— The Theology of the Epistle to the Hebrews. Post Svo, 6s. of the Dead. Milligan (Prof W., D.D.)— The Resurrection Second Edition, crown Svo,

4s. 6d.

MiUigan (Prof. W., D.D.) and Moulton (W. mentary ON THE Gospel of

St. John.

Imp. Svo,

F., 9s.

D.D.)

— Com-


lO

and

T.

Clark s

T.

Publicatio7is.

Moffatt (James, D.D.) The Historical New Testament. Second Edition, demy 8vo, 16s. Moore (Prof. G. F., D.D.) Judges. {International Critical Com-

Second Edition, post 8vo,

12s.

— Scripture Testimony to the Holy Spirit. 6d. 6d. Exposition of the FirstEpistle of John. 8vo, Moulton (James H., D.Litt.) — A Grammar of New Testament The Prolegomena. Part Greek. — Moulton (W. M.A.) A Concordance D.D.) and Geden (A. and TO THE Greek Testament. Crown Muir (Sir W.) — Mohammedan Controversy, Etc. 8vo, 36s. Indian Mutiny. Two New Edition. Muirhead (Dr. Lewis A.) — The Times of Christ. With Map. MiQler (Dr. Julius) — The Christian Doctrine of Sin. Tnentary.)

Morgan

(J.,

7s.

D.D.)

7s.

Parti.

II.

F.,

{In the Press.)

S., 4to, 20s. net,

31s. 6d. net.

7s. 6d.

net.

vols.

2s.

Murphy

(Professor)

A

2 vols., I2s. net.

— Commentary on the Psalms.

8vo, 6s. net.

Critical and Exegetical Commentary on Exodus. 9s. The Problem of Evil. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. The Christ. Translated by Rev. T. J Despres. Cr. 8vo, 4s. 6d. Modern Physics. Crown 8vo, 5s. Neander (Dr.) Church History. Eight vols. 8vo, £2, 2s. net. Nicoll (W. Robertson, M.A., LL.D.)— The Incarnate Saviour.

Naville (Ernest)

.

price 3s. 6d.

Cheap Edition,

— Hymns and Thoughts on Religion. Crown 8vo, 12s. net. 2 Oeliler (Prof.) — Theology of the Old Testament. Olshausen (Dr. H.) — Biblical Commentary on the Gospels and Novalis

4s.

vols.,

Crown 8vo Edition, 4 vols., 24s. 8vo, 6s. net Corinthians, one vol. 8vo, Philippians, Titus, and First Timothy, one vol. 8vo, 6s. net.

Four

Acts.

vols., 21s. net.

Romans, one 6s.

net

;

Oosterzee (Dr. Van) :

Orelli (Dr. C. ;

—The Year of

Salvation.

Two

vols., 6s. each.

Biblical Study.

;

Jeremiah

price, 21s. net

;

;

The Twelve Minor Prophets. vols., 6s. net,

D.D.) — David

separate

4 vols.

Subscription

each.

Hume. Crown 8vo, 3s. Edited Best and only Complete Edition. by Rev. Dr. Goold. Twenty-four vols. 8vo, Subscription price, £4, 4s. The 'Hebrews' may be had separately, in seven vols., £l, 6s. net.

Orr (Prof. James, (Dr. John)

Owen

;

Crown 8vo, 6s. von)— Old Testament Prophecy Commentary on

Moses Isaiah

A

vol.

— Works.

Map

Palestine,

an Inch.

of.

Edited by

J.

In cloth, 10s. 6d.

;

Patrick (Rev. Principal W., D.D.) Lord.

G.

Bartholomew,

F.R.G.S., and

With complete Index. Scale— 4 Miles mounted on rollers, varnished, 15s.

Smith, M.D., D.D.

Prof. G. A.

— James

to

the Brother of our

Post 8vo.

Philippi (F. A.)

— Commentary on the Romans.

Two

vols. 8vo, I2s. net.

Piper Lives of Leaders of Church Universal. Two vols. 8vo, 21s. Popular Commentary on the New Testament. Edited by Philip ScHAFF, D.D. With Illustrations and Maps. Vol. I. The Synoptical Gospels. Vol. II. St. John's Gospel, and the Acts of the Apostles. Vol. III. Romans to Philemon. Vol. IV. Hebrews to Revelation.

In four vols, imperial 8vo, 12s. 6d. each.

Plummer

St. Luke. (International (Alfred, D.D.) Fourth Edition, post 8vo, 12s.

Critical

Com-

mentary.)

English Church History, 1509-1575. Crown 8vo, English Church History, 1575-1649. Crown Svo, Pressens6 (Edward de) The Redeemer Discourses. Crown

:

3s. net. 3s. net.

8vo, 6s.


and

T,

T. Clark's Publications.

1

M.A.)— The Creation of Matter;

Profeit (Rev. W.,

Elements, Evolution, and Creation.

1

Material

or,

Crown Punjer (Bemhard) — History of the Christian Philosophy of Religion from the Reformation to Kant. Purves Dr. D.) — The Life Everlasting, Crown 8vo, — ENCYCLOPiEDiA of Theology. Two Rabiger Rainy (Principal) — Delivery and Development of Christian 8vo, 2s. net.

8vo, 16s.

4s. net.

(E,ev.

vols. 8vo, I2s. net.

(Prof.)

UOUTRINE.

8vo, lOs. 6d.

The Ancient

Church.

Catholic

{International

Theo-

Post 8vo, 12s.

— Christus in Ecclesia. — Reuss (Professor) — History of the Sacred Scriptures of the New Testament. — Messianic Prophecy. New Edition. Riehm logical Library.)

Rashdall (Rev. H., D.C. L.)

Post Svo,

4s. 6d. net.

Nature and the Bible Lectures on the Mosaic (Prof.) History of Creation in relation to Natural Science. Two vols. 8vo, 21s.

Reusch

:

640 pp. Svo,

15s.

Post 8vo,

(Dr. E.)

Ritchie (Prof. D. G., M.A.)— Plato. Crown Svo, 3s. Ritsclil (Albrecht, D.D.) The Christian Doctrine cation AND Reconciliation. Second Edition, 8vo, 14s.

7s. 6d.

of Justifi-

Ritter Carl) Comparative Geography of Palestine. 4 vols. 8vo, 2is. Robinson (Rev. S., D.D.) Discourses on Redemption. Svo, 7s. 6d. Robinson (E., D.D.) Greek and Eng. Lexicon of the N.Test. 8vo,9s. Rooke (T. G., B.A.) Inspfration, and other Lectures. Svu, 7s. 6d. Ross (C.) Our Father's Kingdom. Crown Svo, 2s. 6d. Ross (D.M., D.D.) The Teaching OF Jesus. (Bible-Class Handhools.) 2s. Sermons for the Christian Year. Cr. Svo, 4s. 6d. Rothe (Prof. Saisset Manual of Modern Pantheism. Two vols. Svo, 10s. 6d. Salmond (Pi-inc. S. D. F., D.D.) The Christian Doctrine of (

— — —

)

Immortality.

Fifth Edition, post Svo,

9s.

Sanday(Prof. W..D.D.)andHeadlam (Principal A. C, D.D.)— Romans. (International Critical Commentary.)

(Prof. W. ) Sartorius (Dr. E.)

Sanday

Third Edition, post Svo,

— Outlines of the Life of Chrint. — Doctrine of Divine Love. 8vo,

12s.

Post 8vo,

5s. net.

6s. net.

Sayce (Prof. A. H., LL.D.)--The Religions of Ancient Egypt and Babylonia. Post Svo, 8s. net. Schaff (Professor)— History of

1.

the Christian Church.

(New

Six 'Divisions,' in 2 vols, Edition, thoroughly Revised and Enlarged.) each, extra Svo. 2. Ante-Nicene, Apostolic Christianity, a.d. 1-100, 2 vols. 21s. 3. Nicene and Po.st-Nicene, a.d. 325-600, A.D. 100-325, 2 vols., 21s. 4. MEDiJiVAL, A.D. 590-1073, 2 vols., 21s. {Completion of 2 vols., 21s. this

Period,

5. The Swiss Reformation, The German Reformation, 2 vols., extra

1073-1517, in preparation).

2 vols., extra deiny Svo, 21s demy Svo, 21s.

6.

Christmas Eve. Crown Svo, 2s. Schubert (Prof. H. Von., D.D.)— The Gospel of St. Peter. Synoptical With Translation and Critical Ai>paratus. Svo, Is. 6(1. net. Tables. Old Testament Theology. Two vols. 1 8s. net. Schultz (Hermann) History of the Jewish People. Five vols. SubSchiirer (Prof.) Sclileiermacher's

scription price, 26s. 3d. net. In separate *^* Index.

Volume.

2s. 6d. net.

5s. Schwartzkopff (Dr. P.)— The Prophecies of Jesus Christ. Cr. 8vo, Scott (Jas., M.A., D.D.)— Principles of New Testament Quotation Established and Applied to Biblical Criticism. Cr. 8vo, 2nd Edit., 4s. of History. Cr.Svo, 3s. 6d. Sell(K.,D.D.)— The Church in the Mirror


12

Shaw

T.

and

T. Clark's Publications.

— The

(R. D., D.D.) Expository Studies.

Introductory and

Pauline Epistles:

8vo, 8s. uet.

— Sermons to the Spiritual Man. 8vo, 6d. 6d. Dogmatic Theology. Three 8vo, Sime (James, M.A.) — William Herschel and his Work. Cr. 8vo, Simon (Prof.) — Reconciliation by Incarnation. Post 8vo, Skene-BickeU — The Lord's Supper & The Passover Ritual. Smeaton (Oliphant, M.A.) — The Medici and the Italian Renaissance. — and Samuel. {International Smith (Prof. H. D.D.) Shedd

7s.

vols. ex.

.37s.

3s.

7s. 6d.

Bvo, 5s.

3s.

Post 8vo,

)

Critical

II.

I.

P.,

Commentary.

1 2s.

Old Testament History, {international Theological Lihranj.) 12s. Smith(Professor Thos., D.D.) Mediaeval Missions. (Jr. 8vo, 4s. 6d. Euclid His Life and System. Crown 8vo, 3s. Smyth (John, M.A., D.Ph.)— Truth and Reality. Crown 8vo, 4s. Smyth (Newman, D.D.) Christian Ethics. {International Tlieo-

:

Third Edition, post 8vo, 10s. 6d. logical Library.) Snell (F. J., M.A.) Wesley and Methodism.

Crown

8vo, 3s.

Somerville (Rev. D., D.D.)— St. Paul's Conception of Christ. 9s. Stahlin (Leonh.) 8vo, 9s. I-Lant, Lotze, and Ritschl. Stalker (Prof. Jas., D.D.)— Life of Christ. Large Type Edition,

crown 8vo,

3s.

Life of

6d.

Paul.

St.

Stanton (V. H., D.D.)

a

Study

— The

Large Type Edition, crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. Jewish and The Christian Messiah. 8vo, 10s. 6d.

in the Earliest History of Christianity.

Is. 6d. Stead (F. H.) The Kingdom of God. 8vo, 7s. 6d. Steinmeyer (Dr. F. L.) The Miracles of Our Lord. The P.A.SSION and Resurrection of Ocjr Lord. 8vo, 6s. net. Stevens (Prof. G. B., D.D.)— The Theology of the New Testament.

[International Theological Library.)

Post 8vo, 12s.

The Christian Doctrine of Salvation.

{International

Post 8vo, 12s.

— —

Theological Library.)

Stevenson (Mrs.) The Symbolic Parables. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. Steward (Rev. G.) Mediatorial Sovereignty. Two vols. 8vo. 21s. The Argument of the Epistle to the Hebrews. 8vo, 10s. fid. On the Words of the Lord Jesus. Eight Stier (Dr. Rudolph)

vols. 8vo, Subscription price of £2, 2s.

Separate volumes, price

6s. net.

The Words of the Risen Saviour, and Commentary on

THE Epistle of

James.

St.

Svo, 6s. net.

The Words of the Apostles Expounded. 8vo, 63. net. Stirling (Dr. J. Hutchison)—Philosophy and Theology. Post Bvo, 9s. Darwinianism Workmen and Work. Post Svo, 10s. 6d. What is Thought? 8vo, 10s. 6d. Strachan (Rev. J., M.A.), Hebrew Ideals from the Story of the :

;

Patriarchs.

Tholuck

(Prof.)

Thomson

Crown —The Epistle to the Romans. Part

E. H.,

fJ.

Svo, 2s.

I.

Part

II.

{In the Press.) vols. fcap. 8vo, 8s.

Two

D.D.)— Books which Influenced Our Lord

AND His Apostles.

8vo, 10s. Cd.

Crown Svo, 5s. (Rev. E. A.) Memorials of a Ministry. Tophel CPastor G.)— The Work of the Holy Spirit. Cr. 8vo, 2s. 6d.

Thomson Toy

(Prof.

G. H., D.D.)— Proverbs. Post Svo, 12s.

mentary.)

{Internafional

Critical

Com-


and

T.

T. Clark's Publications.

G. Elmslie, M.A.) Words Being Addresses to Young Communicants.

Troup (Rev.

to On

13

Young Christians

:

antique laid paper, chaste

binding, fcap. 8vo, 4s. 6d.

— Christian Charity in the AncientChurch. Cr.8vo,68. —The Sinlessness of Jesus. Crown Svo, (Dr. Carl) — A Commeutar}' (W., M.A.) The Servant of Jehovah

Uhlhom(G.)

UUmann Urwick

5s.

:

upon Isaiah

13-liii.

lii.

12; with Dissertations upon Isaiah xl.-lxvi.

Vinet (Life and Writings of). Vincent (Prof. M. R., D.D.) Church History.)

By L. M. Lane. Crown Svo, The Age of Hildebrand

Second Edition, post Svo, 6s.

{International

Critical

Com-

8s. 6d.

Carnwath) — Essays,

Walker (James, of Post &V0,

{Eras oj

6s.

Philippians and Philemon. 7nentary.)

Svo, 3s. 7s. 6d.

Papers, and Sermons.

Walker (J., D.D.) Theology and Theologians of Scotland. New Edition, crown Svo, 3s. 6d. Walker (Prof. W., D.D.) The Protestant Reformation. {Eras

of Church History.

— )

6s.

Walker(Rev.W.L.) The Spirit and the Incarnation. 2ndEd.,8vo,9s. The Cross and the Kingdom. 8vo, 9s. Warfield (B. B., D.D.)— The Right of Systematic Theology. Crown

Svo, 2s.

Waterman Watt (W.

)

A.,

Light.

A

— The Post-Apostolic Age. {Eras of Church M.A., D.Ph.) — The Theory of Contract in its Social

(L., D.D.)

History.

6s.

Svo,

3s.

Study of Social Morality.

Watts (Professor) THE Faith.

— The

Newer

Post Svo, 6s. Criticism and the Analogy of

Third Edition, crown Svo,

The Reign of Causality Principle of Telic Causal Efficiency.

Weir

:

5s.

A

Vindication of the Scientific Crown Svo, 6s.

The New Apologetic. Crown 8vo, 6s. M.A.) The Way The Nature and Means of Revela-

(J. F.,

tion.

:

Ex. crown Svo,

6s. 6d.

Weiss (Prof. )— Biblical Theology of New Testament. 2 vols., 12s. net. Life of Christ. Three vols. Svo, 18s. net. Welch (Rev. A. C, B.D.) Anselm and his Work. 3s. {Eras of the Wells (Prof. C. L.)— The Age of Charlemagne.

Christian Church.)

6s.

D.D.)— The Teaching of Jesus. Two vols. Svo, 21s. The Gospel according to St. John. Svo, 7s. 6d. Cr. Svo, 4$. 6d. Wenley (R. M.)— Contemporary Theology and Theism. White (Rev. M. )— Symbolical Numbers of Scripture. Cr. Svo, 4s. Williams (E. F., D.D.)— Christian Life in Germany. Crown Svo. 5s. Winer (Dr. G. B.)— A Treatise' on the Grammar of New Testament Greek, regarded as the Basis of New Testament Exegesis. Third

Wendt

(H. H.,

Edition, edited by W. F. Witherow(Prof. T. ,D. D.

Moulton, D.D.

Ninth English Edition,

Svo, 15s.

lo/e. )— The Form of the Christian Temple.3s.Svo,6d.

Hope of

Israel.

Crown

(F. H., B.'d.)— The (Prof. G. C.)— The Text of Jeremiah; or, Post Svo, 9s. c^ation of the Greek and Hebrew, etc.

Woods

Workman

Svo,

A Critical Investi-

Crown Svo, 5s. Wright (C. H., D.D.)— Biblical Essays. from the Word of God. Salt and Bread Zahn (Prof. Theodor)— Sermons.

Post Svo,

4s. 6d. net.


and

T.

14

Clark's Publications.

T.

THE INTERNATIONAL THEOLOGICAL LIBRARY. This Library is designed to cover the whole field of Christian Theology. Each volume is to he complete in itself, while, at the same time, it will form part of a carefully planned The whole. It is intended to form a Series of Text-Books for Students of Theology. Authors loill he scholars of recognised reputation in the several hranches of study assigned to them. They will he associated with each other and zvith the Editors in the effort to provide a series of volumes which may adequately represent the present condition of investigation.

Twelve Volumes of the Series abe now ready, An

Introduction to the Llterature of the Old Testament.

~~"Driver, S.

R.

~~

Apologetics.

History of Christian Doctrine.

A History

of Christianity in the Apostolic Age.

:

—

[Seventh Edition.

Newman

Christian Ethics.

viz.

D.D., D.Litt, Regius Professor of Hebrew, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford. 12s.

Smyth, D.D., Pastor of the First Congregational Church, New Haven, Conn. [Third Edition. 10s. 6d. The late A. B. Bruce, D.D., Professor of New Testament Exegesis, Free Church College, Glasgow. [Third Edition. 10s. 6d. G. P. Fisher, D.D., LL.D., Professor of Ecclesiastical Second Edition. [12s. History, Yale University. Arthur Cushman McQiffert, Ph.D., D.D., Professor of Church History, Union Theological Seminary, New York. [12.S.

Christian Institutions.

The Christian Pastor. The Theology of the New Testament. The Ancient Catholic Church. Old Testament History. of the Old Testament. Doctrine of Salvation.

The Theology

A. V. G. Allen, D.D., Professor of Ecclesiastical Historv, Episcopal Theological School, Cambridge, Mass. [12s. Washington Gladdf.n, D.D., LL.D., Pastor of Congregational Church, Columbus, Ohio. [lOs. 6d. George B. Stevens, D. D., LL.D., Professor of Systematic Theology in Yale University, U.S.A. [12s. Robert Rainy, D.D., Principal of the New College, Edinburgh, [iss. H. P. Smith, D.D., Professor of Biblical History, Amherst College, U.S.A. [I2.a. The late A. B. Davidson, D.D., LL.D. Edited by the late Principal Salmond, D. D.

B. Stevens, D.D., LL.D., Professor of Systematic Theology, Yale University. [i2s.

Volumes in Preparation The Reformation.

[12s.

George

T.

:

—

M. Lindsay, D.D., Principal

of the United Free College,

Glasgow.

New

James Moffatt, D.D., United Free Church, Dundonald,

Contemporary History of the

Francis Brown, D.D., D.Llt., Professor of Hebrew, Union

The

Literature

of

the

Testament.

Scotland.

Old Testament. The Early Latin Church.

Canon and Text

of the

Theological Seminar>',

New

York.

Charles Bigo, D.D., Regius Professor

New

of Church History, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford. Caspar Reni5 Gregory, D.D., LL.D., Professor in the Uni-

Testament.

versity of Leipzig. C. Porter, Ph.D., Yale

Contemporary History of the

Frank

Testament. Philosophy of Religion.

Robert Flint, D.D., LL.D., Emeritus Professor of Divinity,

Later Latin Church.

E.

W. Watson, M.A., Professor

The Christian Preacher

W.

New

Conn.

University,

New

Haven,

University of Edinburgh.

College, London.

of

Church History, King's

W.

D.D., Professor of Systematic Theology, Richmond, Surrey. F. Adeney, D.D., Principal of Lancashire College, Man-

Biblical Archaeology

G.

Buchanan Gray,

The History

George

The

Greek Churches.

and

Oriental

College, Oxford. F. Moore, University.

D.D., Professor of Hebrew, Mansfield

D.D.,

LL.D., Professor in

Harvard

William N. Clarke, D.D., Profes.sor of Systematic Theology, Hamilton Theological Seminary, N.Y. H. R. Mackintosh, D.Phil., Professor of Systematic Theology, The New College, Edinburgh. William P. Patbrson, D.D., Professor of Divinity, Uni-

Doctrine of God. Doctrine of Christ. Doctrine of Man.

versity of Edinburgh.

of

Testament.

The

Davison,

Chester,

of Religions.

Canon and Text

T.

Life of Christ.

Christian Symbolics.

Rabbinical Literature.

the Old

F. C.

Burkitt, M.A., University Lecturer on Palaography,

Trinity College, Cambridge.

William Sanday, D.D., LL.D., Lady Margaret Professor Divinity, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford.

of

C. A. Briogs, D.D., D.Lit., Professor of Theological Encyclopfedia, Union Seminary, New York. S. Schrchter, M.A., President of the Jewish Theological

Seminary, N.Y.


and

T.

T.

C/ark's Publications.

15

THE INTERNATIONAL CRITICAL COMMENTARY. TWELVE VOLUMES NOW READY,

:—

viz.

Numbers

(Dr. Gray), Deuteronomy (Dr. Driver), Judges (Dr. Moore), I. and II. Samuel (Dr. H. P. Smith), Proverbs (Dr. Toy), Amos and Hosea (Dr. Ilarpir), 8. Mark (Dr. Gould), S. Luke (Dr. Plunimer), Romans (Dr. Saiiday), Ephesians and Colossians (Dr. Abbott),

Phillpplans and Philemon (Dr. Vincent),

The following

other

Volumes

S.

Peter and

S.

Jude

(Dr. Big^).

are in course of preparation

:

THE OLD TESTAMENT. Genesis.

John Skinner, D.D.,

Professor of

Hebrew and Old Testament

Exegesis,

Westminster College, Cambridge.

Exodus. Leviticus.

Joshua. Ruth.

A. R.

Kennedy, D.D., Professor

of

Hebrew, University of Edinburgh. J. F. Stennino, M.A., Fellow of Wadham College, Oxford and the late H. A. White, M.A., Fellow of New College, Oxford. George Adam Smith, D.D., LL.D., Professor of Hebrew, United Free Church College, Glasgow. C. P. Fagnani, D.D., Associate Professor of Hebrew, Union Tlieological S.

;

Seminary,

New

York.

Kings.

Francis Brown, D.D., Litt.D., LL.D., Professor of Hebrew and Cognate Languages, Union Tlieological Seminary, New York.

Chronicles.

Edward

Ezra and Nehemiah.

L.

Esther.

L. B.

Psalms.

Charles A. Briogs, D.D., Professor of Theological Encylopaedics and Symbolics, Union Theological Seminary, New York. G. A. Barton, Ph.D., Professor of Biblical Literature, Brvn Mauer

L. Curtis, D.D., Professor of

Hebrew,

Y^ale

University,

New

Haven, Conn.

Eccleslastes.

Song

Songs and Lamentations. of

Isaiah.

Jeremiah. Ezekiel.

Daniel.

Minor Prophets.

W. Batten, D.D.,

late Professor of

Hebrew,

P. E. Divinity School,

Philadelphia. Paton, Ph.D., Professor of Hebrew, Hartford Theological Seminary.

College, Pa., U.S.A. C. A. Briogs, D.D., Union Theological Seminary,

New

York.

Driver, D.D., and G. Buchanan Gray, D.D., Oxford. A. F. KiRKPATRicK, D.D., Lady Margaret Professor of Divinity, and Master of Selwyn College, Cambridge. G. a. Cooke, M.A., Fellow of Magdalen College, and C. F. Burnky, Litt.D., Fellow and Lecturer in Hebrew, St. John's College, Oxford. John P. Peters, D.D., late Professor of Hebrew, P. B. Divinity School, Philadelphia, now Rector of St. Michael's Church, New York. W. R. Harper, LL.D., President of the University of Chicago. [Amos and Hosea ready, 12s. S. R.

THE NEW TESTAMENT. Synopsis of the Four Gospels.

Matthew. Luke. Acts.

W. Sanpay, D.D., LL.D., Lady Margaret Professor of Divinity, and Canon of Christ Church, Oxford and W. C. Allen, M.A., Exeter ;

College, Oxford. C. Allen, M.A., Chaplain, Fellow, and Lecturer in Theology and Hebrew, Exeter College, Oxford. Alfred Plummbr, D.D., late Master of University College, Durham. [Eeadj/, 12s. and H. N. C. H. Turner, A., Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford Bate, M. A., late Fellow and Dean of Divinity in Magdalen College,

Willoughby

M

Oxford, now

;

Vicar of St. Stephen's, Hampstead, and Examining Chaplain to the Bishop of London. Arch. The Rev. Robertson, D.D.. Lord Bi.shop of Exeter; and Corinthians. Right R. J. Knowlino, D.D., Professor of Theology, Durham. Ernest D. Burton, A.B., Professor of New Testament Literature, Galatians. University of Chicago. James E. Frame, M.A., Professor of Biblical Theology Union, TheoThessalonians. logical Seminary, New York. The Pastoral Epistles, Walter Lock, D.D., Dean Ireland's Professor of Exegesis. Oxford. A. Nairne, M.A., Professor of Hebrew, King'.s College, London. Hebrews. James H. Ropes, D.D., Bussey Professor of New Testament Criticism in James. Harvard University. A. E. Brooke, Fellow of, and Divinity Lecturer in King's College, The Johannine Cambridge. Epistles. Robert H. Charles, D.D., Professor of Biblical Greek in the University Revelation. of Dublin.

Other engagements will be announced shortly.


i6

T.

and

T.

Clark s Publications.

^be Moiib'8 Epocb-HDakers. Edited by Oliphant Smeaton, M.A.

NEW '

SERIES.

In

Neat Crown 8vo Volumes.

Price

3s.

each.

Au

excellent series of biogi'aphical studies.' Athenazum. advise our readers to keep a watch on this most able series. It promises The volumes before us are the most satisfactory books to be a distinct success. Methodist Times. of the sort we have ever read.' '

We

The following Volumes have

Buddha and Buddhism.

By Arthuk

LiLLIE.

Luther and the German Reformation. By Principal T. M. Lindsay, D.D. Wesley and Methodism. By F. J. Snell, M.A. Cranmer and the English Reformation. By A. D. Innes, M.A. William Herschel and his Work. By James Sime, M.A. Francis and Dominic. By Professor J. Herkless, D.D. Savonarola. By G. M'Hakdy, D.D. Anselm and his Work. By Rev. A. C. Welch, B.D. Origen and Greek Patristic Theology. By Rev. W. Fairweathek, M.A. Muhammad and his Power. By P. De Lacy Johnstone, M.A. (Oxon.). The Medici and the Italian Renaissance. By Oliphant Smeaton, M.A., Edinburgh. Plato.

By

Professor D. G. Ritchie, of St. University

M.A., LL.D., Andrews.

now

been issued;

Pascal and the Port Royalists. By Professor W. Clark, LL.D., D.C.L., Trinity College, Toronto.

By Emeritus Professor Thomas Smith, D.D., LL.D.

Euclid.

Hegel

and Hegelianism. By ProMackintosh, D.D., LancaManIndependent College,

fessor R.

shire

chester.

Hume and

his Influence

sophy and Theology. J.

on Philo-

By

Professor

Orr, D.D., Glasgow.

Rousseau and Naturalism in Life and Thought. By Professor W. H. Hudson, M.A. Descartes, Spinoza, and the New Philosophy. By Principal J. Iverach, D.D., Aberdeen. Socrates.

By

Rev.

J.

T.

Forbes,

M.A., Glasgow.

The following have also been arranged for: Lessing and the New Humanism. Bussell, D.D., ViceBy Rev. A. P. Davidson, M.A.

Marcus Aurelius and the Later Stoics.

By

F.

W.

Principal of Brasenose College, Oxford. [hi the Press.

Augustine and Latin Patristic Theology. By Professor B. B. Warfield, D.D.

,

Kant and his Philosophical Revolution. By Professor R. M. Wenley, D.Sc, Ph.D., University of Michi-

Princeton.

Scotus Erigena and his Epoch. By Professor R. Latta, Ph.D., D.Sc, University of Aberdeen.

Wyclif and the Lollards. J. C. Carrick, B.D.

By Rev.

The Two Bacons and Experimental Science. ByRev.W. J. Coitper, M.A.

Schleiermacher and the Rejuvenescence of Theology. By Professor A. Martin, D.D., New College, Edinburgh.

Newman and C.

his

Influence.

By

Sarolea, Ph.D.,Litt. Doc, Uni-

versity of Edinburgh.




PA 813

Moulton, James Hope A grammar of New raent Greek. 2d ed.

M7

Teste,,

1906 V.

PLEASE

CARDS OR

DO NOT REMOVE

SLIPS

UNIVERSITY

FROM

THIS

OF TORONTO

POCKET

LIBRARY




Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.